Home

Xerox 701P21091 All in One Printer User Manual

1. Command Syntax Default LINE LINE BASELINE TOP LARGE ST CENTER BOTTOM LINE BLANKTYPE SPACE NOSPACE NOSPACE LINE DATA pdo length offline 1 134 online 0 150 LINE FCB IGNORE PROCESS PROCESS LINE FDATA offset termination 0 DEFAULT LINE FONTINDEX offset offset initvall bitopt NONE NONE LINE GDATA offset termination 0 DEFAULT LINE INKINDEX offset offset initvall bitopf NONE NONE LINE LPI linespacing LPI DOTS XDOTS ieespacing LPI DOTS XDOTS ineno LINE MARGIN value value valuetype 1 POS LINE OVERPRINT overopt disp PRINT NODISP LINE PCC offset transtype 0 NOTRAN LINE PCCTYPE PCCname PCCid USER offline ANSI online IBM4245 LINE UCSB IGNORE PROCESS PROCESS LINE VFU VFUid NONE NONE LMODIFY LMODIFY TEST MESSAGE MESSAGE ITEXT sc sc passnum NONE WAIT NONE MESSAGE OTEXT sc sc passnum L WAIT sc END NONE WAIT NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command quick reference Table B 2 PDL command quick reference table Continued Command Syntax Default OUTPUT OUTPUT BFORM formid formid init copies INK S NONE inkref inkrefz OUTPUT BINDING LONG SHORT LONG OUTPUT COLLATE YES NO YE
2. Command syntax conventions The command descriptions use the syntax conventions shown in the table below Table 1 4 Syntax conventions Symbol Term Function Parentheses Enclose options in a command right part that consist of two or more components separated by commas Braces Enclose a set of choices for a right part component or the entire right part of a command for which there are two or more alternative either or options only one of which must be selected Separator Separates alternative command right part options one of which must be selected Means or Square Enclose components that are optional and not required for the brackets command l Comma Separates multiple parameters or components of a parameter right part means and OUTPUT Uppercase Denote a keyword for a command parameter or option example letters value Italics Denote a variable you must define example 1 14 Using LCDS Print Description Language Sample PDL commands PDL principles and procedures The following table lists a set of commands in the order that they might appear in a JSL It shows the components of PDL commands and a variety of right part options The commands are displayed below in table form so you can more easily distinguish their components When coding a JSL you may want to use tabs to separate these parts You may al
3. Command Syntax Default OUTPUT OUTPUT NTO1 YES NO n NO wontnen OUTPUT NUMBER pnum num cnum findex inkref NO NO OUTPUT OFFSET ALL FIRST NONE ALL OUTPUT OSTK stockdef mod pos p RES NORES Installation default TABS size DOTS IN CM L P OUTPUT PAPERSIZE A3 A4 B4 B5 USLEGAL USLETTER or A4 USLETTER x y OUTPUT PURGE YES NO YES OUTPUT RESOLUTION 300 600 Installation default OUTPUT SF1FUNCTION YES NO NO OUTPUT SF2FUNCTION YES NO NO OUTPUT SHIFT v v2 YES NO NO OUTPUT SIZING SEMIAUTO BEST EXACT SEMIAUTO OUTPUT STAPLE NO YES NO OUTPUT STOCKS stocksetname OUTPUT SYSPPR USLEGAL A3 A4 B4 B5 Size of last sheet USLETTER x y before system page OUTPUT TMODE width width width unit NO OUTPUT TRANS YES NO OUTPUT UNITS size in dots DEFAULT OUTPUT XMP DEFAULT REPORT NO OUTPUT XSHIFT YES NO value NO ac PCC ac PCC ADVTAPE YES NO YES ac PCC ASSIGN byte ccin byte ccin ccln ac PCC DEFAULT ccin PCCtype DEFAULT ac PCC INITIAL BOF TOF TOF ac PCC MASK value X FF Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command quick reference Table B 2 PDL command quick reference table Continued C
4. 5 68 SIDE DUDE ser 3 nt Eat eb EU edad ated a C REA 5 68 SIDE DJDE points to note 5 69 STOCKS DJDE 53 vistas pio ERI SINE AUS adi dee eee ed 5 70 STOCKS DJDE point to note 5 70 TMODE DJDE dire tia vac duh phe ides EO Para eet ete 5 70 TOFDIDE 5 eed rat ped presso ow dot s ea eee 5 71 TOF DJDE points to note sslllss 5 71 TRANS VIDE 23 i254 ener Pe ated RPE ee DS 5 72 TRANS DJDE points to note 5 72 XMP DJDE s c qe au as RC teeta a ava aa E E RR UU 5 73 bis dams c b A dine aan aeh Rin hae Ati bare 0k Soe bee 5 73 Using PDL commands for graphics 202200000 es 6 1 Inpub TOF GRAD INCS so uu aea ton ais ee tuv Exe amined 6 2 Error handling Tor graphics dos a seks MERO aaa eave 6 3 Graphic processing modes n assanar aaee 6 3 Formats for graphic data es cer ro Rotae E prec Eh 32 6 4 Impact of graphics on system performance 6 6 Graphics features restrictions 00 0 eee eee 6 6 PDL command and DJDE summary A 1 Summary table of PDL commands and DJDEs A 2 PDL command quick reference Lllse B 1 PDL command Quick Reference table ulslsusun B 2 Character code assignments LLlle l s C 1 IBM BCD eode Sele o 243 RARSETRDEREREEKRES oh ESERSEERLBNLE C 2 Honeywell Bull 200 and 2000 BCD code set
5. Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Command syntax For the system to read and process any command you put in your JSL you must place all elements in the proper order and use the correct symbol or amount of space to separate them Syntax rules When you enter your PDL commands at the controller workstation or host keyboard you must follow these syntax rules in order for the system to recognize the commands Abbreviations Command and parameter keywords can be shortened to the first three letters for example POSITION may be entered as POS OUTPUT as OUT etc NOTE The only exception to this abbreviation rule is the parameter FOR which the system could interpret as FORMAT or FORM or FORMS Therefore be sure to use the full spelling to represent FORMAT or FORM S Blank spaces You may use blanks anywhere in the JSL except in keywords and constants Continuation lines The DP EPS accept continuation lines in DJDEs The following is an example of a DJDE using a continuation line NOTE Use of continuation lines is not recommended because the results are unpredictable Incorrect structure for DP EPS DJDE FONTS fnl fn2 fn3 fn13 DJDE fn14 fn15 fn109 Valid structure for DP EPS DJDE FONTS fnl fn2 fn3 ftn13 DJDE FONTS fn14 fn15 fn16 e Endofa command Place a semicolon at the end of every PDL command e End
6. 5 54 MODIFY DID Era te2 0 wee toe MOR Reet ete edendo 5 54 MODIFY DJDE points to note 5 55 NUMBER DJIDE evo on gant buna secte eats atta 5 55 NUMBER DJDE point to note 5 56 NUMBER DJDE example 5 58 OTEXI DI DE S os Lotte Sette e re hae ee ee eee Se sig vans 5 58 OTEXT DJDE point to note 5 59 OVERPRINT DJDE 1 14 obe Sede etek bd oth eee 5 59 OVERPRINT DJDE points to note 5 60 PALETTE DIDS oou te Bless 2 ko es REA 5 60 PALETTE DJDE example 1 23223 29 RBRRIRRIAE 5 61 FPMODEDBJBE 92 53 39e yet eaten tote tines eee 5 61 PMODE DUDE point to note 5 61 REORMIDJDE ueris theta eck ae Aue eee eee ak eats nes aaa ey 5 61 Using LCDS Print Description Language xiii Table of contents xiv RFORM DJDE points to note 05 5 62 RTEXTDJDE d s aie pita Cv 08 eR el wat pe EET E 5 62 RTEXT DJDE example Leesse 5 63 SAVE DIDS Mate pein arsine Mowe Was oa we dbaptel d eg ehe GU 5 64 SAVE DJDE point to note 5 64 SEEMAP DUDE 4252405535244 E koe e d o DE aS E 5 64 SEFMAP DJDE points to note 5 65 SEFMAP DJDE examples Pozo ceeds ey 5 65 SF1FUNCTION DJDE 5 ais tm p se Bast rt ote tb ge 5 66 SE2F NGTION DJDE 47 mcr e E ch eR 5 67 SHIRT DJDE nr ds pota pA patel eas ea urat Xs n Qe 5 67 SHIFT DJDE points to note
7. D STANI DARI D PAPER 4 41 Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT command The OUTPUT command controls the organization and format of Table 4 42 Summary of OUTPUT command parameters a report including the number of copies of a report the forms to be printed with the variable data report offsetting and the use of simplex or duplex mode For further information on graphics chapter OUTPUT command parameters parameters features refer to the Using PDL commands for graphics The following table summarizes the OUTPUT command Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE OUTPUT BFORM Prints a specified form only on the back sides Y Y Y of duplex pages OUTPUT BINDING Specifies page rotation for printing for short Y N N edge or long edge binding OUTPUT COLLATE Specifies whether report pages will be Y Y Y collated or uncollated OUTPUT COPIES Specifies the number of report copies that will Y Y Y be printed OUTPUT COVER Feeds cover pages for a report from the tray Y Y N that contains the AUX stock OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS Associates forms with report pages in a Y Y N repeating sequence OUTPUT DENSITY Enables or disables image generator local Y Y N density functionality Listed for compatibility purposes not supported on DP EPS OUTPUT DESTINATION Specifies the destination for printed output OUTPUT DUPLEX Prints th
8. C1 CRITERIA CONSTANT 4 4 EQ T1 BDELETE TEST C1 3 30 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing LMODIFY command Enables you to select one or more text strings to which highlight color will be added under specified conditions NOTE The DP EPS systems ignore this command because they are monochrome printers However JSLs that contain the LMODIFY command may be created and transferred to a highlight color laser printing system for use with highlight color Jobs LMODIFY command parameters The following table summarizes the LMODIFY parameters and their options Table 3 22 Summary of LMODIFY command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE LMODIFY INK Specifies the ink to use to print the selected Y Y N text data LMODIFY SELECT Defines the portion of the line that will be Y Y N printed in the specified ink LMODIFY TEST Defines the test expression for printing Y Y N specified text strings in color Syntax Option LMODIFY INK Specifies the ink to use to print the selected text specified in the SELECT parameter in color LMODIFY INK inkindex Table 3 23 LMODIFY INK parameter option and definition Option Definition inkindex Specifies the ink to be used to print the selected text data The inkindex is an index number that refers to the current ink list ILIST If the inkindex is no
9. 1 JDE OUTPUT DR IDR1 NUMBER 1 1 0 1 BLACK FORMAT PDE1 LOGO SIG1 1 5 IN 6 0 IN 2 JDE INCLUDE CATPOW VOLUME HOST UNIVAC CODE PEBCDIC OUTPUT DR IDR2 FORMAT PDE2 IDFAULT 2 FORMS STMT3 ABNORMAL ERROR CONTINUE IMISMATCH CONTINUE 3 JDE INCLUDE CATGRP OUTPUT COPIES 5 IDFAULT BLACK DFLT JDE END Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 63 PDL principles and procedures Compiling a JSL Rules for invoking the XJDC compiler 1 64 The second part of creating the JSL is compiling it Each JSL file must be compiled converted into an object file Job Descriptor Library or JDL before it can be read by the system to print a job The Xerox Job Description Compiler XJDC software on your controller performs this conversion The process is diagrammed below Figure 1 17 PDL compilation JSL XJDC PDL compiler CME file Copy Modification Entry JDL file Job Descriptor Library a compiled JSL PDE file Print Descriptor Entry or format STK file STOCKSET file O o0 A U N Compiling procedure After you have finished entering all the commands for your JSL including the last END command and saved the JSL file in the Icds folder you can begin the compilation process The command that invokes the XJDC compiler has some different syntax rules from the PDL commands that you used to create the JSL Keep in mind the following rules when you enter thi
10. NOTE You cannot specify both a MAP and a SEFMAP parameter in the same SEFFNT command 2 44 Using LCDS Print Description Language Table 2 48 Summary of SEFFNT command parameters Specifying input parameters SEFFNT command parameters The following table summarizes the use of the SEFFNT command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE label Specifies the name of the font mapping file or the Y Y N identifier of a font mapping table that will be created If the label does not exist the SEFFNT command either creates a table in the JDL or uses an existing mapping file if MAP is specified SEFFNT SEFMAP Specifies font mapping where the second specified Y Y Y font is the SEF mapping for the first font SEFFNT MAP Specifies a font mapping that was defined previously Y Y Y The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and give explanations of the parameter options SEFFNT SEFMAP Specifies font mapping which associates one font with another font A collection of font mappings may be stored in a mapping file Font files are files having the FNT extension and are stored on disk Syntax abel SEFFNT SEFMAP font fonts font font NONE Options Table 2 49 SEFFNT SEFMAP parameter options and definitions Option Definition font fonts Font pair where fonts is the SEF mapping for font font fonta Font pair wher
11. 5 37 FORMIS DJBE i ot tae hie ok e Mt aa ee Leste visi at 5 38 FORM S DJDE point to note 5 38 GDATA BJDE3s is EE ORE I UAE que TE WR NER 5 39 GRAPHIC DIDE 2 0icaciecsAec itt set ee bee ESI 5 39 GRAPHIC DJDE points to note 5 41 IGACTAL OG DIE ru estes 15 et t rS tvs anes AS s 5 42 ICATALOG DJDE example sssss 5 42 IDEADUET DIE ac n Lebe iud td ies Eee ere rs e tea 5 42 IDFAULT DJDE point to note 5 43 IDRODJDE asina a pee RU IS ESO E E POENIS 5 43 IbIS THBIDE 32 ote te eb o eere ate 5 43 ILIST DJDE example i55 er shel six 5 44 IMAGE DJDE 5 hr eet b RSEN RE Dd deas d a RE RE 5 44 INK INDEX DJDE 252 eset arse eL bore Poe Sie ee 5 45 INVERT DJDE 2r flesh tt leds ette rd Pub dece s 5 46 IRESHETIBIDE 25e da tons posco eer teams 5 47 IRESULT DJDE points to note 5 47 EX DJDE 222 0434 024 tah otter cues ae eee eked 5 48 ITEXT DJDE points to note 5 48 JDESDIDE 7 etse tk beach e dee ttudtellveqer dex dos 5 48 JDE DJDE points to note 0005 5 49 JDL DUDE CMS 5 49 JDL DIDE points to note oi idee EE EA 5 50 EGO THE ins aree Seta B PERPE AU ES ex wee seek owes 5 50 LOGO DJDE points to note su 5 52 PPD DEY se ices p 5 52 LPI DJDE point to note esses eS eke m eee 5 53 MAP DIDE vs hua a Pid tue See Nm eR nee HS 5 53 MARGIN DI DE a ire Cetera E SE 5 53 MARGIN DJDE points to note
12. 2 C 2 Honeywell Bull 6000 BCD code set 0 022 02 eeeeee C 3 Fieldata translation 5s uus ded eite eg Lede Ga piel pace 2050 vete C 3 UNIVAC ASCII character Set 00 000 c eee eee eee C 4 Standard ASCII character set 00 00 e eee C 5 Standard EBCDIC character set 00002 cece eee C 6 Using LCDS Print Description Language Table of contents Xerox EBCDIC to extended ASCII hexadecimal translation values C 7 D Offline specifications sese eem ee eee ERE T ERE E ed D 1 Input unpacking examples 0 000 eee eee eee D 1 Valid host computer and label specifications D 2 Host system JDLs on system software CD 00005 D 3 LPS tape label format s a iue rra rouer ve e Ede d areas aO E Pere eds D 4 GIOSSANY vss rins uuo oe Rr xx RUE eee Re Glossary 1 Index Sco ce cee ero eee sawed RUM eee dam eee Index 1 Using LCDS Print Description Language XV Table of contents Xvi Using LCDS Print Description Language Laser safety WARNING Adjustments use of controls or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous light exposure The Xerox DocuPrint printers are certified to comply with the performance standards of the U S Department of Health Education and Welfare for Class 1 laser products Class 1 laser products do not emit hazardous radiation The DocuPrint printers do not emit hazardous radiation b
13. CONTINUE Displays the normal system message defining the abnormal condition and continues processing the report without applying the offending DJDE parameter and without offering the operator the choice of resuming or canceling the job ABORT Displays the message for the abnormal condition and aborts only the report it is processing not the entire job without offering the operator the choice of resuming or canceling the job STOP Displays the message for stop condition the system stops processing the report and waits for the operator to respond by resuming or canceling the job from the Job Manager window Default ABNORMAL ERROR parameter points to note 4 4 STOP The CONTINUE and ABORT options put the printer in Nonstop mode The STOP option puts the system in Stop mode Any abnormal condition that is detected such as a syntax error in a DJDE specification a missing file referred to by a DJDE or an RTEXT or GRAPHIC error in either mode results in an appropriate error message being displayed In addition during the Stop mode the displayed error message is followed by a DJDE error message to resume or cancel the job If abnormal conditions are detected while processing DJDEs the DJDE parameter set containing the offending entry is set up to print on the OPRINFO page and an error message is displayed Errors detected while system is processing RTEXT data are not reported to you
14. NE VFUI VEU ASSIGN 1 4 ASSIGN 2 10 ASSIGN 3 16 ASSIGN 4 22 ASSIGN 5 28 ASSIGN 6 34 ASSIGN 7 40 ASSIGN 8 46 ASSIGN 9 66 ASSIGN 10 52 ASSIGN 11 58 ASSIGN 12 64 TOF 1 BOF 66 Tables and criteria TABLE MASK CONSTANT HE DE PAGE CRITERIA CONSTANT 1 11 EQ T1 LINENUM 1 10 TABLE CONSTANT TRAILER PAGE CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 12 EQ T2 LINENUM 1 10 2 6 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Table 2 2 Example of an online JSL Continued ENI T3 C3 T4 C4 TIS C Jobs Jobs Jobs Jobs TABLE CONSTANT EOJ CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 3 EQ T3 LINENUM 1 20 TABLE CONSTANT JOB CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 6 EQ T4 LINENUM 1 20 TABLE CONSTANT 10 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 10 EQ T5 LINENUM 50 10 VOLUME HOST IBMONL OPTIMIZE NCC LINE PCCTYPE IBM3211 VFU VFU1 FCB IGNORE ACCT USER BIN IDEN PREFIX DJDE SKIP 7 OFFSET 2 OPRINFO YES with no banner pages DETI JOB with header pages only HDRP JOB BANNER IEST C1 HCOUNT 2 TCOUNT 0 with trailer pages only TRIP JOB BANNER TEST C2 HCOUNT 0 TCOUNT
15. S One of the following file storage parameters D Delete after report printed e P Permanent The default file storage is P 5 28 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 23 FILE DJDE options and definitions Continued Option Definition n Rounded up to a multiple of 6 specifies the maximum number of card images to be processed for this file The default number is 120 NOTE This option is ignored by DP 2000 Series EPS systems which do not support card image files File replacement and deletion FILE DJDE points to note For LPS labeled files the FILE DJDE may be specified as follows FILE In this case the file name and file type are obtained from the label record that precedes the file data Ifthe filename or filetype specified in the FILE DJDE differs from those in the label record the file is renamed as specified in the DJDE fthe maximum number of records is encountered the processing of the file is completed Additionally for card image data the FILE DJDE must be specified as follows to indicate the end of card image data FILE C or FILE END C e The DELETE DJDE and the FILE DJDE with the DELETE option allow you to remove the following types of files only IMG FRM LGO FNT CME JDL PDE and TST FILE DJDE processing If a disk file with the specified file name alrea
16. FORMS e f no BEGIN parameter is specified the default PDE FMT1 one logical page per physical page is used e The DP EPS systems support the specification of horizontal position values with up to four decimal places the other Xerox LPS systems support a maximum of only three places The placement of the values of the BEGIN parameter on the DP EPS 4850 LPS 4890 LPS and DP92C LPS is relative to the top edge of the physical sheet for all paper sizes On the 4635 and DP180 LPS however an A4 paper size specification causes the image to shift approximately 1 8 inch 8 mm downward Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 95 Specifying print format parameters Syntax Options If you want to provide consistency between jobs that are printed on the DP EPS and on a 4635 or DP180 LPS you can adjust the alignment by 35 dots using the DP EPS queue management windows Refer to the Adjusting alignment section of your printer operator guide for this procedure PDE FONTS Specifies the fonts to be used in printing variable input data and CME data ac PDE FONTS f fo A s4 L unit I fo so unit PES Table 4 85 PDE FONTS parameter options and definitions Option Definition f font Specifies a one to six alphanumeric character identifier consisting of at least one letter corresponding to a font cataloged on the system disk you can use up to 128 fonts with the font indexing ca
17. PR S 2 VOLUME command The VOLUME command specifies input medium and data characteristics VOLUME command parameters The following table summarizes the parameters of the VOLUME command Table 2 56 Summary of VOLUME command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE VOLUME BMULT Specifies a multiplication factor that is used to determine the true block length N Y VOLUME CODE Specifies the character code set for input data translation Y Y VOLUME DBCODE Specifies which double byte character code translation table the system will use to interpret the input data VOLUME DBCS Specifies the double byte character printing mode Allows printing of data streams with intermixed single byte and double byte characters VOLUME EMTYPE Specifies the emulation type with which the system will print text VOLUME EOV Specifies the action that the system will take when it detects the end of a tape volume VOLUME EXPAGE Provides data error logging and reporting of unprintable characters that do not have font bitmap or outline data in the font file VOLUME HOST Specifies the source of input data that will be processed Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Table 2 56 Summary of VOLUME command parameters Continued Pa
18. Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs LPS systems DJDE NUMBER 1 line column END RSTACK blank DJDE NUMBER Page 1 Page 2 front back text text Page numbers here DP 2000 Series EPS DJDE NUMBER 1 line column END RSTACK blank DJDE NUMBER Page 1 Page front back text text Page numbers here Page 3 Page 4 front back Figure 5 2 Page numbering when NUMBER DJDE immediately follows RSTACK DELIMITER criteria Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 57 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs The options for the NUMBER DJDE are the same as for the NUMBER parameter of the OUTPUT JSL command NUMBER DJDE example NUMBER 1 1 40 1 END OTEXT DJDE Type Syntax Options Specifies a text message to be output to the operator during job printing It takes effect on the next page boundary Page oriented OTEXT sc passnum END WAIT NONE or OTEXT sc Table 5 47 OTEXT DJDE options and definitions Option Definition NONE Specifies that no text message is output to the operator during printing SC String Constant The text of the message that will be output to the operator The message may have up to 80 characters with a maximum of 400 characters per report passnum pass number Specifies the numbe
19. 1 38 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures 2 mN mN Figure 1 6 Fixed pitch and proportional font character spacing 1 Fixed pitch character cell 2 Proportionally spaced character cell Because the length of a line printed with a proportional font is relatively unpredictable fixed pitch fonts are used for variable data on a report to avoid overprinting of forms by variable data Proportional fonts are normally used for form data such as titles and headings A business letter is an example of the use of proportional fonts for variable data An example of the difference in line length is illustrated in the following figure 1 i To Whom it may Concern To Whom it may Concern Figure 1 7 Character spacing examples 1 Proportional spacing 2 Fixed pitch spacing Fonts are available in various families for example OCR and Titan sizes and faces for example italic and bold Refer to the Font Reference Manual delivered with your system for more information on fonts and for samples of the font families sizes and faces available for use with your printing system Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 39 PDL principles and procedures In addition to typeface style and size a font can be defined by its orientation Landscape Portrait Inverse landscape e Inverse portrait Custom fonts signatures and logos may be ordered from Xerox through your sales representative
20. 2 56 Using LCDS Print Description Language Default VOLUME CODE parameter points to note Syntax Options Specifying input parameters EBCDIC When you run a CODE NONE job with DUPLEX YES and SHIFT YES you must specify MARGIN in inches Input data is translated according to the CODE selected on the VOLUME command Any character that is translated into an ASCII X 20 is truncated after the last significant non ASCII X 20 character in the print record Onthe DP EPS trailing spaces are deleted for the current code set only In addition translated characters that are beyond the highest character code in the current font are converted to blanks and potentially removed VOLUME DBCODE Specifies which double byte character code translation table the system will use to interpret the input data VOLUME DBCODE keyword id Table 2 59 VOLUME DBCODE parameter options and definitions Option Definition keyword Specifies a specific standard system defined double byte code translation table The available options are IBM IBM Nihongo character set Kanji double byte character sets IBMCHN IBM 5550 code translation table JEF Fujitsu JEF Kanji double byte character set KEIS Hitachi KEIS Kanji double byte character set USER Refers to the single unlabeled DBCODE command defined within the JDL or JDE Specifies an identifier label that was used in a previously defined DBCOD
21. Here is an example of a CME in which the commands are shortened CME12 CME 47 P1 F5 5 L48 Pl Fl L49 P10 C ABCD In the above example L replaces LINE P replaces POSITION F replaces FONT and C replaces CONSTANT Catalogued CMEs CMEs need not be part of your JDL They can be created as separate disk files and still be used as if they were part of the JDL that references them You can do this by creating a JSL file containing only one or more CMEs then compiling it using the xjdc command Refer to Compiling a JSL in the PDL principles and procedures chapter for the procedure For each CME an object file is created in the Icds folder on the system disk which is where the system looks for resource files when they are needed for printing Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 11 Specifying print format parameters Refer to Importing LCDS resources in the PDL principles and procedures chapter for the procedure for copying resources to the opt XRXnps resources Icds folder from elsewhere within the Unix file system NOTE When you modify a CME source file you must recompile it with the xjdc command It is not necessary to recompile the associated JDLs When a CME is referenced in a JDL that does not contain that CME the system searches the Icds folder for the CME file which has the file type extension CME The CME file is then loaded into memory for use in processin
22. Host computer tape formats The printing system processes input tapes produced by those standard hosts that are discussed in appendix D Offline specifications in this manual The HOST parameter of the VOLUME command enables you to select a specific input tape The format of each tape is described in the Xerox LPS Tape Formats Manual which is delivered with your printing system 2 8 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Tape codes Tape codes that are recognized by the DP EPS are EBCDIC ASCII and several versions of BCD If these codes are not sufficient for a particular tape you may create a new code translation table or modify customize an existing code translation table Tables that show the correspondence between standard recording codes and printed characters are in appendix C Character code assignment tables in this manual Within a JDL tape codes are selected by the CODE parameter of the VOLUME command Packed data formats Six bit characters may be written onto a 9 track or 36 track tape in a 4 by 3 packed or compressed format That is four 6 bit data bytes are compressed into three 8 bit data bytes Two methods of packing these bits together exist Whenever an unpacking method is included in the JDL the system unpacks the characters before data processing Each 6 bit character is extracted and two high order zeros are appended Normally after data is unpacked it must be
23. The graphics processing errors are reported separately on the graphics exception page printed at the end of the report Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Table 4 6 Specifying print format parameters ABNORMAL IMISMATCH Specifies the action for a highlight color printer to take when a specified ink requires a primary ink color that is not currently loaded NOTE IMISMATCH is a highlight color parameter that is recognized by printers such as the Xerox 4850 and 4890 It may be included in JSLs that are created on the DP EPS for highlight color printing If the system encounters this parameter when printing it is ignored ABNORMAL IMISMATCH ABORT CONTINUE STOP ABNORMAL IMISMATCH parameter options and definitions Option Definition ABORT Specifies that the system displays a message for the abnormal condition and aborts only the report it is processing not the entire job without offering the operator the choice of resuming printing or canceling the job CONTINUE Specifies that the system displays a message defining the abnormal condition and resumes printing the current report with the ink that is currently loaded overriding the ISUBSTITUTE parameter and any forms creation commands that specify no ink substitution STOP Specifies that the system displays a message prompting the operator to load the requested primary ink or to abort the job The printer stops pri
24. ALL Specifies that the text applies to all copies line Specifies the line number on which the first line of a block of RTEXT message is printed To avoid overprinting only one RTEXT parameter may be specified per line for a passnum The default is line 1 for the first text string of the pass Otherwise the default is the next line of the page col column Specifies the column number at which the first character of a block of RTEXT messages is to be printed The default is column 1 fontindex Identifies the index starting with 1 of the PDE font with which the text is printed rtextid route text identifier Used to reference a catalogued file of RTEXT parameters previously compiled by XJDC A file of the type TST is referenced NONE Specifies that no text is to be printed on a separate page RTEXT DJDE example RTEXI TEST ALL 15 5 2 END Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 63 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs SAVE DJDE Specifies that image IMG files that were updated during the current report will not be purged when processing of the report is completed For specific files this DJDE overrides automatic file deletions that are specified by the OUTPUT PURGE YES parameter within the JDE Type Record oriented Syntax SAVE filename filename ALL Options Table 5 53 SAVE DJDE options and definitions Option Definition filename Name
25. JOB2 JOB OUTPUT FORMAT FMT1 SEFFNT MAP FNTMAP Example 4 There is no font mapping because SEF is disabled by the SEFMAP NONE parameter JOB3 JOB OUTPUT FORMAT FMT6 SEFFNT SEFMAP NONE 2 48 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Example 5 Job 4 overrides the system level SEFFNT mapping with a job level definition JOB4 JOB SEFFNT SEFMAP LO1BOB P0812A TCODE command The TCODE command defines a set of input character to type assignments that will be used for the masked string comparisons in a report You must use TCODE whenever you need to modify one of the standard sets of default type assignments General rules for The TCODE command should be coded as follows using the TCODE Use a command identifier of the type ac for the TCODE command command within a JSL The ac identifier consists of 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters A through Z and 0 through 9 One of these characters must be alphabetic Use the DEFAULT parameter to specify the initial type assignments for the entire set of input character codes Useone or more occurrences of the TASSIGN parameter to modify the specified initial set of type assignments by associating specific character types with specific characters in the input character set e f necessary use one or more occurrences of the TRESET parameter to further modify the initial set by disassociating specific character types from specific character
26. L0912A FMT10 132 132 12 5 17 6 6 8 5 by 11 22 51 P1012A FMT11 132 150 12 5 20 0 6 8 5 by 11 22 50 P1112A FMT12 66 172 8 1 13 6 9 14 by 8 5 18 66 LO112B FMT13 104 100 8 1 13 6 9 8 5 by 14 57 58 P0612A FMT1A 66 132 8 3 12 5 9 11 69 by 8 27 18 57 R112BL FMT2A 66 150 8 3 143 9 11 69 by 8 27 18 60 R212BL FMT3A 88 132 11 1 12 5 7 11 69 by 8 27 18 57 R312BL FMT4A 88 150 11 1 143 7 11 69 by 8 27 18 60 R412BL FMT5A 48 100 6 10 12 11 69 by 8 27 22 85 R512BL FMT6A 80 100 8 1 13 6 9 8 27 by 11 69 91 46 R612BP FMT7A 60 90 6 12 12 8 27 by 11 69 85 39 R7TIBP FMT8A 60 75 6 10 12 8 27 by 11 69 85 39 R812BP FMT9A 80 200 10 0 20 0 7 11 69 by 8 27 14 85 R912BL FMT10A 132 132 12 5 17 6 6 8 27 by 11 69 57 39 RA12BP FMT11A 132 150 12 5 20 0 6 8 27 by 11 69 57 39 RB12BP The first dimension given is the horizontal dimension Thus 11 by 8 5 is landscape orientation while 8 5 by 11 is portrait orientation Dimensions are given in inches A4 European international formats 4 92 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters PDE command parameters The following table summarizes the PDE command parameters Table 4 83 Summary of PDE command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE PDE BEGIN Specifies the location of the first pri
27. Long edged feed pages Short edged feed pages Long edge binding Short edge Landscape Landscape binding Long edge binding Portrait Portrait Short edge Short edge binding binding P2 P3 BINDING SHORT Long edged feed pages e Short edged feed pages Long edge binding Short edge Short edge Landscape binding binding P3 Landscape Long edge binding Portrait Portrait Long edge binding Figure 4 4 Diagrams of output resulting from different BINDING specifications Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 47 Specifying print format parameters Syntax Options Table 4 45 OUTPUT COLLATE Specifies whether pages will be printed collated in ordered sets or uncollated OUTPUT COLLATE YES NO OUTPUT COLLATE parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Specifies that the output pages are collated NO Specifies that the output is not collated Default OUTPUT COLLATE parameter points to note Syntax Options YES If NTO1 YES PDL overrides COLLATE NO with COLLATE YES and notes this action with a warning in the JSL e If you have specified multiple copies you cannot change the value of the COLLATE parameter again within the report OUTPUT COPIES Specifies the number of report copies to be printed OUTPUT COPIES number Table 4 46 OUTPUT COPIES parameter options and definitions Option
28. Overriding PDL commands The system default values are listed in the PDL command and DJDE summary appendix The printing system uses the defaults for parameters you do not specify in the JSL When you are creating a JSL you do not have to code the command parameters for which your jobs specify the defaults NOTE Some parameters have no defaults If you do not specify a value for these they are not included in the job description DJDEs do not have default values The coding may be further simplified by placing commands common to more than one job at the catalog command level The PDL processor evaluates user coded commands and applies the highest priority error free definition to the job for printing This process termed the hierarchy of replacement is discussed in the subsequent paragraphs and illustrated in the Command override sequence figure The following figure shows a diagram of the command override sequence 1 40 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Highest priority DJDE eer TAPE LABEL J Options JOB OR JDE COMMAND LEVEL introduced at i higher levels CATALOG COMMAND LEVEL override those at lower levels SYSTEM OR JDL foes LEVEL DEFAULT Lowest priority Figure 1 8 Command override sequence User interface Some PDL commands and DJDEs that are specified in the JSL window overrides can be overridden by queue properties that have been selected on user i
29. PRInt Generates a printed JSL NOPrint Generates a printed JSL only when it contains errors REPlace Specifies that an existing JDL file may be replaced by a new output file of the same name This is the default NOReplace Specifies that if the new JSL has the same name as an existing one the old file is retained as a backup file and is given a backup extension REPLACE is the default SINglebyte Specifies use of single byte character code and printer carriage control translation files DOUblebyte Specifies use of double byte character code and printer carriage control translation files TRUncate Restricts command lines in the JSL to the first 72 characters NOTruncate Accepts JSL command lines that are longer than 72 characters LABel Generates a 128 byte Xerox standard label NOLabel Suppresses the 128 byte Xerox standard label DISplay Displays all XJDC messages NODisplay Suppresses all XJDC messages Vx Software version number x 10 2 35 3615 37 38 39 40 50 3A or M10 For DP EPS the version number is M10 PAPersize s Specifies the size of paper the job should print on VM10 only S USLEGAL USLETTER or A4 DATe d Specifies the date format d US or EUROPEAN PAGinate n Specifies the number of lines per page n 0 or 5 through 999 0 specifies no pagination OUTpath p Specifies the base directory path for output files p foldernamet foldername2 The default is the current director
30. SKIP 9 OFFSET 3 OPRINFO YES Figure 5 1 Single record DJDE diagram and IDEN command The following is an example of a multiple record DUDE DJDE packet in data stream MTEST C MULTI RECORD DJDE EXAMPLE MTEST FORMS XEROX1 1 3 FORMAT XPDE12 FONTINDEX 1 NUMBER 3 15 55 MTEST COPIES 20 COLLATE YES ASSIGN 1 5 ASSIGN 5 32 MTEST FONTS P0612A P0812A MTEST ASSIGN 12 63 TOF 5 BOF 66 END Command in JSL IDEN PREFIX MTEST SKIP 7 OFFSET 1 OPRINFO YES 5 4 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs DJDE operator information pages The specification OPRINFO YES in the JDE specifies that the DJDE records will be printed and sent to the output bin at the next page transition after an END command The DJDE records are printed on a separate page from the report data However no page formatting occurs and DJDEs in long records are truncated at the end of the physical page boundary You can use comments in the DJDE for operator notification or output routing instructions in conjunction with the OPRINFO parameter These information pages are printed and delivered to the bin regardless of the OPRINFO parameter if the DJDE contains an error unless you disable the information pages on the user interface Queue Manager windows Messages on Error messages Error message
31. Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 3 Specifying input parameters Downloading resource files from 2 4 the host to the printer In the event of a power failure the system notifies you if you need to retransmit any data and which records to resend You can download resource files such as forms fonts JSLs and so forth by using the FILE DJDE The FILE dynamic job descriptor entry DJDE transfers files while normal printing activity is taking place However you may need to precondition the file that you want to transfer by adding a delimiter at the end of each record to prevent truncation of trailing blanks by the host spooler The FILE DJDE loads card image files from the data stream to the printing system disk while a printing job is in progress Refer to the Offline specifications appendix in this guide for information on the format of LPS labeled tapes The FILE DJDE is record oriented and is applied immediately It can be included with other record oriented or page oriented DJDEs in a DJDE packet Refer to FILE DJDE processing for further information on using the FILE DJDE Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Forms control buffer FCB and vertical format control processing The 3211 and 4245 forms control buffer FCB defines channel positions and forms length You may restrict the forms control buffer information by accepting or suppressing the normal proces
32. VFUL VFU2UP VFU3 PDE1 PDE2 CME1 CME2 JDL System level ID commands VEU ASSIGN 1 11 ASSIGN 12 66 TOF 11 BOF 66 VEU ASSIGN 1 11 77 ASSIGN 12 66 132 TOF 11 BOF 132 VEU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 132 PDE BEGIN 0 18IN 0 66IN FONT L0112B L01BOA PMODE LANDSCAPE PDE BEGIN 1 03 51 BEGIN 6 30 51 FONTS P1012A PMODE PORTRAIT CME LINE 9 POS 1 FONT 1 CME LINE 3 POS 59 CONSTANT FIRST QUARTER VOLUME HOST IBMONL CODE EBCDIC RECORD LENGTH 136 Using LCDS Print Description Language END PDL principles and procedures LINE DATA 1 132 PCCTYPE IBM3211 VFU VFU1 ACCT USER TRAY IDEN PREFIX C9700 SKIP 7 OFFSET 1 SSML STOCKSET ASSIGN WHITE CVR ASSIGN YELLOW BLL ASSIGN GREEN SUM NIFEED CVR SYSPAGE SUM MESSAGE OTEXT ALL FORMS DUPLEX ONLY WAIT Job level commands JOBl JDE OUTPUT DUPLEX YES SHIFT YES FORM SMPLE MODIFY CME1 FORMAT PDE1 COPIES 10 OFFSET FIRST PURGE NO JOB2 JDE LINE VFU VFU2UP OUTPUT FORMAT PDE2 FORMS SPL2 COPIES 7 1 Before creating a JSL considerations and decisions Before starting to develop the JSL for your application y
33. megabyte Unit of one million bytes Glossary 9 Glossary metacode MHz MICR module MTU nonimpact printer object file OCR offset OLI operating system orientation origin OS Glossary 10 Same as native mode Method of speaking to and controlling the image generator These controls are used by the character dispatcher to generate scan line information This information is sent in the form of character specifications to the image generator which uses it to compose the bit stream that modulates the laser megahertz 1 Unit of cycling speed one million cycles per second for an electromagnetic wave in particular a radio wave 2 Sending and receiving stations of a radio wave transmission must be tuned in to the same unit of megahertz Magnetic Ink Character Recognition MICR allows a computer to read characters printed in special metallic ink by scanning the shapes of their magnetic fields MICR fields are often imprinted on bank checks before processing Cohesive unit within a program It is consistent in its level and identifiable in terms of loading or with other units magnetic tape unit refers to the 9 track magnetic tape drive also referred to as magnetic tape drive Printer that forms characters without any strikes of a key or element against the paper Source file converted into machine language binary code optical character recognition To place pages currently being printed in s
34. Associates stocks with an identified stock reference or with other stocks to create a stock set that will be used together in an application Syntax ac STOCKSET ASSIGN stockdescriptor stockdescriptors Options Table 4 91 STOCKSET ASSIGN parameter options and definitions Option Definition stockdescriptor Stockname is the specific name of a stock It is Can have one of the following formats enclosed in single quotes stockname e Stockreference is an alternate term for referencing stockname stockreference the named stock It is common to assign the e stockname stockreference stockreference according to its function in the job or stockreference some other characteristic A stockreference may be assigned to only one stockname Default No default Example of use of ASSIGN F1302 COVER F1415 BODY STOCKSET ASSIGN 4 104 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters STOCKSET INIFEED Specifies which stock to use in the absence of any OUTPUT FEED parameter or FEED DUDE If no stock is specified the INIFEED parameter defaults to the first stock name specified in the ASSIGN parameter Syntax ac STOCKSET INIFEED stockname stockreference Options Table 4 92 STOCKSET INIFEED parameter options and definitions Option Definition stockname Specifies the name of the stock to
35. Definition number Specifies the number of copies to be printed This is an integer value from 1 to 32 767 Default 4 48 1 Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT COVER Specifies that cover sheets are to be fed from the AUX stock These cover sheets may be placed at the front or back of each copy of a report OUTPUT COVER FRONT SEP BACK BOTH SEP NONE Table 4 47 OUTPUT COVER parameter options and definitions Option Definition NONE Specifies that no cover sheets are to be fed FRONT Specifies that a cover sheet will be fed as the first page of each report copy SEP Specifies that no data will be printed on any front cover sheet BACK Specifies that a cover page will be fed at the end of each copy No report data is printed on back covers BOTH Specifies that both front and back cover pages will be fed for each report copy The front cover sheet will be the first page of each copy Default OUTPUT COVER parameter point to note Syntax NONE If RTEXT is specified along with FRONT SEP or BOTH SEP RTEXT pages are printed on the covers and front covers are picked only on copies for which there is RTEXT Refer to the ROUTE RTEXT parameter description later in this chapter for further details on RTEXT Refer to Restrictions on job parameter
36. Option Definition offset The starting point of the line data termination The terminating byte of the record The options are DEFAULT f online a single terminating byte exists f offline no terminating byte exists n The number of terminating bytes that exist Default offset 0 termination DEFAULT Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Specifying print format parameters LINE FONTINDEX Specifies that a field within the user portion of a record defines the index to a specific font to be used for that line If FONTINDEX is not specified no index is used LINE FONTINDEX offset offset initval bitopt NONE Table 4 30 LINE FONTINDEX parameter options and definitions Option Definition offset Specifies the byte offset in the data record where the character that is to be used as a font index number is located Refer to LINE OVERPRINT later in this chapter for discussion of FONTINDEX usage with overprint lines and maximum number of fonts initval initial value Index number associated with the first font in the font list i e the number the font list starts with This value can be one of the following ONE specifies that an index value of 1 is associated with the first font in the font list e ZERO specifies that an index value of 0 is associated with the first font in the font list an index value of 1 is associated with the second font in th
37. Options Table 2 33 PCC ASSIGN parameter options and definitions Option Definition byte The printer carriage control byte that is being defined Its value is in the range 0 to 255 X00 to XFF ccin carriage control line number Specifies the action that should be taken when the printer carriage control byte defined in the byte field is encountered A ccin consists of the following Space print parameters This has the following components fieldi Specifies the carriage action to take before printing An example is the ANSI carriage control SPm Space m lines before printing SKn Skip to channel n before printing field2 Specifies whether printing occurs for this record P Print the output data at the line number computed after field is processed N No printing occurs for this record default field3 Specifies the carriage action to take after printing An example is the IBM1403 carriage control SPm Space m lines after printing SKn Skipto channel n after printing NOTE Each of the three fields shown above is optional however you must specify at least one field The range for variables m and n is 0 to 15 Bottom Of Form actions optional TOF When spacing causes bottom of form BOF to occur instructs the system to go to the top of form TOF on the next page and to stop spacing IGN When spacing causes the bottom of form BOF to occur instructs the system to ignore it to
38. Refer to Importing LCDS resources in the PDL principles and procedures chapter for the procedure init Specifies the first copy number to which the specified form applies This defaults to the first or next copy If neither init nor copies is specified the form applies to all copies of all data pages of the report copies Specifies the number of copies to which the form applies If the copies option is not specified the last or only specified form applies to all copies beginning with the init copy number If the form is not the last one specified copies defaults to 1 NONE Means that no form is added to the associated report page of variable data inkref Ink reference Identifies the inks that override the corresponding inks that are specified in the ink list of the form If a form does not contain an ink list the form is printed in black Default No default Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 55 Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT FORMS parameter points to note OUTPUT FORMS 4 56 parameter example Syntax Options e CYCLEFORMS and FORMS parameters Both may be used within a report however only the last parameter specified is in effect at any given time If a multicopy report specifies CYCLEFORMS a FORMS DJDE that is encountered within the report overrides the CYCLEFORMS parameter from that point in every copy You can code forms at a wo
39. The MAIN and AUX stocks and their preferred trays have already been defined in the operating system software when the printing system is delivered However you can change their specifications at the user interface using the Stock Manager windows You cannot however delete them STOCKSET command example The STOCKSET command is similar to the PDE and CME commands because it produces a file you can compile separately from the JDL For each STOCKSET encountered before an initial JDL or SYSTEM command PDL creates a file of the type STK which contains information about the stockset You can then reference the STK file in multiple JSL source files BILLS STOCKSET ASSIGN F1302 COVER ASSIGN F1415 BODY SUMMARY ASSIGN F6204 LATE F9999 DISCON NIFEED COVER INIFEED 2 F1302 works as well SYSPAGE COVER END Ne In the example above a stockset called BILLS is created e BILLS consists of four stocks F1302 F1415 F6204 and F9999 e Stock references are created for these four stocks COVER for F1302 BODY and SUMMARY for F1415 LATE for F6204 and DISCON for F9999 Inthe absence of a specific parameter of the FEED command at the start of the report INIFEED directs output to feed from the stock referred to by COVER e Asystem page will print on the stock referenced as COVER You could use this stock set in a billing applicat
40. available back NUBACK The specified logical page is positioned as the first logical page on the back of a new sheet NEXT The specified logical page is positioned as the first logical page on the next available side the back of the current sheet or the front of the next sheet The logical page is moved unless it is already properly positioned as the first logical page on the specified side In simplex or in duplex with BFORM The sideopt parameter is forced to NUFRONT and the specified page is positioned as the first logical page If the logical page is already properly positioned a blank sheet is not created offsetopt The available offsetopt parameters are OFFSET The sheet on which the repositioned logical page occurs is offset in the output stacker NOFFSET No offset occurs Default NUFRONT NOFFSET 3 44 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing RPAGE TEST Defines the test expression for detection of an RPAGE record that will cause the logical page to be repositioned on a physical page Syntax RPAGE TEST testexp Options Table 3 34 RPAGE TEST parameter options and definitions Option Definition testexp test expression Specifies the criteria test that if met will reposition the logical page The logical page on which this record normally appears is called the current logical page Refer to Coding a test expression
41. 1 Tape mark 2 Pages 3 Tape mark 4 Reports 3 42 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing RPAGE command The RPAGE command allows you to reposition the current or next logical page on the physical page RPAGE command parameters The following table summarizes the RPAGE command parameters Table 3 32 Summary of RPAGE command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE RPAGE SIDE Specifies the side of the physical page on which to Y Y Y reposition the logical page RPAGE TEST Defines the test expression for detecting an Y Y N RPAGE record RPAGE WHEN Specifies the portion of the current logical page Y Y N that will be positioned The following sections describe the syntax of the RPAGE command parameters and explains their options RPAGE SIDE Defines the side of the physical sheet on which the repositioned logical page is to appear The default is NUFRONT NOFFSET Syntax RPAGE SIDE sideopt offsetopt sideopt offsetopt Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 43 Using logical processing Options Table 3 33 RPAGE SIDE parameter options and definitions Option Definition sideopt In duplex with no BFORM sideopt produces the following results NUFRONT The specified logical page is positioned as the first logical page on a new sheet BACK The specified logical page is positioned as the first logical page of the next
42. 3 32 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing Points to note LMODIFY command The LMODIFY command acts upon individual print lines The offset values in all of the test criteria are measured from the beginning of the print line to the beginning of the test field The print data offset pdo value in the LINE DATA parameter can affect the relationship between the beginning of the input data record and the beginning of the print line NOTE In the LMODIFY command the offset is measured differently from the way it is done for other PDL commands The offset value for LMODIFY is measured from the beginning of the print line In most cases the offset value is measured from the beginning of the user portion of the record e Copy modification entries CMEs or font indexing and optionally ink indexing in conjunction with OVERPRINT MERGE override LMODIFY specifications RAUX command You can control feeding of a single sheet of paper from the tray that contains the AUX stock from within the input data stream If the system encounters a data record that satisfies the RAUX test criteria the page on which the record is found prints on a sheet of paper picked from the tray assigned to the AUX stock For simplex printing the page is printed on a sheet of paper selected from the current tray unless the page contains a record satisfying the RAUX test criterion For duplex printing the system ascertains the need t
43. NONE NONE RSTACK PRINT BIN BOTH TRAY NONE NONE RSTACK TEST testexp m RSUSPEND RSUSPEND BEGIN CURRENT NEXT NEXT RSUSPEND TEST testexp SAVE DJDE SAVE filename ALL only ac SEFFNT abel SEFFNT SEFMAP font font font font m SEFFNT MAP filename E ac STOCKSET acSTOCKSET ASSIGN stockdescriptor stockdescriptor stockdescriptor ac STOCKSET INIFEED stockname stockreference first stockname ac STOCKSET SYSPAGE stockname stockreference MAIN AUX ac SYSTEM SYSTEM JDL JDLname ac TABLE ac TABLE CONSTANT sc S o ac TABLE MASK ignore chart charspeci charspeCi ac T CODE ac TCODE DEFAULT tcodetype ac TCODE TASSIGN typespec inputspec inputspec ac TCODE TRESET typespec inputspec inputspec ALL ac VFU VFU ASSIGN channo lineno channo lineno lineno VFU BOF value 66 VFU TOF value Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command quick reference Table B 2 PDL command quick reference table Continued Command Syntax Default VOLUME VOLUME BMULT value 1 VOLUME CODE keyword id NONE EBCDIC VOLUME DBCODE keyword id VOLUME DBCS YES NO NO VOLU
44. RECORD FORMAT parameter options and definitions Option Definition type The following types are available for the record format BIN binary DEC decimal PACK packed with no sign PKSG packed with sign Default BIN RECORD LENGTH Specifies the length of the longest record Syntax RECORD LENGTH value Options Table 2 41 RECORD LENGTH parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies in bytes the length of the longest logical record The value is an integer from 12 to 12288 for the DP EPS Default Online 150 Offline 133 RECORD LENGTH parameter points to note 2 38 When you change the LINE DATA parameter to a value greater than the default value you must also change the RECORD LENGTH parameter accordingly Otherwise the data is truncated to the length that was specified in the initial JDL You cannot use print position indexing for online processing if you specify a LENGTH greater than 150 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters The tape label contents can override a record length value If a defined record length is larger than the default block length 1330 you must specify a block length that is large enough to hold the record If a large enough record length is not specified data may be lost e The RECORD LENGTH parameter may be overridden by ANSI or IBM OS Standard labels that specify r
45. RFEED command 3 37 ROFFSET command 3 41 RPAGE command 3 45 RRESUME command 3 50 RSELECT command 3 35 RSTACK command 3 58 RSUSPEND command 3 50 TEST parameters 3 4 test exp parameters 3 2 Text Editor opening 1 50 1 55 throughput speed 4 83 4 86 TMODE DJDE 5 70 TOF 4 108 4 109 5 71 TOF DJDE 5 71 TOF parameter VFU command 4 109 Top of Form see TOF 4 108 trailer pages 3 25 TRANS DJDE 5 72 TRANS parameter OUTPUT command 4 87 translation tables 1 24 transparencies printing 4 87 5 72 tray sample specifying 4 51 TRESET parameter TCODE command 2 52 troubleshooting a job 1 73 1 76 troubleshooting a JSL 1 69 1 71 type attribute character 3 12 TYPE parameter BANNER command 3 26 U UNITS parameter OUTPUT command 4 87 UNPACK parameter VOLUME command 2 69 uppercase changing to 1 8 USER parameter ACCT command 4 10 V coding 3 2 value constants 1 7 syntax 3 3 value mode CRITERIA command 3 10 INDEX 10 Using LCDS Print Description Language INDEX VALUE parameter CRITERIA command 3 18 3 21 variables 1 7 1 14 VCODE parameter VOLUME command 2 70 2 72 vertical formatting See VFU command VFU interaction with FCB 2 5 VFU command 1 23 4 108 4 111 ASSIGN parameter 4 108 BOF parameter 4 109 TOF parameter 4 109 VFU parameter LINE command 4 35 VFUs specifying 1 23 4 108 4 111 VOLUME command 2 54 2 72 BMULT parameter 2 56 CODE parameter 2
46. Specifies that the content of a record will be compared to the values that were specified in a TABLE command with the identifier tabid The CRITERIA CONSTANT specification is referenced by the TEST parameter of the logical processing command that follows it in the JSL CONSTANT also specifies the location and length of the fixed field within a record that will be searched for the constant The field to be compared is located the number of bytes indicated by the offset variable from the start of the user portion of the record The field has a length the number of bytes indicated in the length variable When the field in the record matches a constant in the table and is equal EQ the CRITERIA command is TRUE and the processing that was specified by the parameter is performed If the field matches a constant in the table but is not equal NE the command is FALSE ac CRITERIA CONSTANT offset length EQ NE tabid Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Using logical processing Table 3 9 CRITERIA CONSTANT parameter options and definitions Option Definition offset The offset in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user portion of the record to the field in the record being compared length The length in bytes of the test field Its range is 1 to 255 EQ Indicates the operation EQUAL TO NE Indicates not equal to tabid table identifier The iden
47. The ABNORMAL command allows you to restrict certain operator functions and to define system responses to error conditions ABNORMAL command parameters The following table summarizes the ABNORMAL command parameters Table 4 2 Summary of ABNORMAL command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE ABNORMAL ACCTFEED Specifies the stock from which an error sheet N Y N will be fed when an error occurs during the accounting report processing ABNORMAL CODE Specifies how illegal function codes in the N Y N data stream will be handled ABNORMAL ERROR Specifies the system response to abnormal Y Y N conditions detected while processing DJDEs ABNORMAL IMISMATCH Specifies action to take when the job contains Y Y N a specification for an ink that is not loaded in the printer ABNORMAL ISUBSTITUTE Specifies whether or not an ink substitution Y Y N can be made by the operator ABNORMAL OTEXT Specifies that a message will be displayed to Y Y N the operator when printing stops because of a system rollover ABNORMAL REP Generates a page offset and or slip sheet Y Y N after recovery from a rollover ABNORMAL SECURITY Enables restriction on use of certain operator Y Y N commands The following sections describe the syntax of the ABNORMAL command parameters and explain the parameter options ABNORMAL ACCTFEED Specifies the stock from which an error sheet will feed when
48. This document may be used as a quick reference for information about PDL command syntax and parameters The following definitions describe the conventions used in this appendix The following symbols are used in the command syntax Table A 1 Symbols used in command syntax Symbol Meaning ac Alpha character identifier Signifies a command identifier Consists of 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters A through Z and 0 through 9 One of the characters must be alpha dd Signifies a command identifier Same as ac except there is no restriction of having an alpha character This identifier applies only to SYSTEM or JDL and JOB or JDE command sets Identifier Reference to a command identified by an ac command identifier SC String constant A hexadecimal octal ASCII EBCDIC or character text string constant value A decimal constant The s at the end of some PDL commands and DJDEs is optional Contents of command table columns The columns in the PDL Command Summary table contain the following information Command column Lists all PDL commands in alphabetical order Parameters column Beside each command lists the command parameters in alphabetical order Default column Gives the default parameter for each command Using LCDS Print Description Language A 1 PDL command and DJDE summary Printing system column Indicates the laser printing systems to which the com
49. Using LCDS Print Description Language provides information on how to use PDL to program LCDS job descriptions that can be used on the Xerox DocuPrint 75 90 and 100 115 135 155 180 Enterprise Printing Systems the DocuPrint 75 MX and other Xerox laser printing systems Before using this documentation become familiar with its contents and conventions The topics discussed in this guide include Explanation of a Job Source Library JSL including required and optional commands and components Rules and guidelines for coding LCDS PDL commands Procedures for creating and compiling a JSL e Syntax and explanation of each LCDS PDL command parameter and DJDE Explanation of Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs and the process for inserting them into the data stream Reference list of all PDL and DJDE commands including online and offline usage parameters and the Xerox printing systems that support them A glossary and index are also provided This documentation describes LCDS Print Description Language as it applies to the DocuPrint 100 115 135 155 180 and 75 90 EPS and DocuPrint 75 MX Except where otherwise noted the PDL information contained in this documentation also applies to the following families of Xerox Laser Printing Systems that print LCDS data Xerox 180 180MX 96 and 96MX Laser Printing Systems Using LCDS Print Description Language xxiii Introduction xxiv The following families of printing sy
50. all the characters are untyped If you specify 1 all the characters are type 1 If you specify 7 all the characters are type 7 and so forth Default No default TCODE DEFAULT parameter points to note Syntax If you specify a tcode Type this sets the following conditions All numeric characters 0 through 9 are type 1 characters All alphabetic characters A through Z a through z are type 2 characters All other characters are untyped TCODE TASSIGN Associates one or more specified characters with one or more specified type codes May also be used to disassociate one or more characters from all type code assignments Can be specified more than once in a TCODE command ac TCODE TASSIGN typespec inputspec typespec inputspec inputspecs Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 51 Specifying input parameters Options Table 2 54 TCODE TASSIGN parameter options and definitions Option Definition typespec A typespec may be coded as a single integer n When coded as a single integer the value must be in the range of 0 to 7 When coded as a series of integers the values must be within the range of 1 through 7 NUMERIC may be used instead of 1 ALPHA may be used instead of 2 inputspec An inputspec may be coded as a single character char as a series of characters char or as a range of characters char char2 The syntax chari
51. earlier in this chapter for the format and syntax of a test expression Default No default RPAGE WHEN Defines the portion of the current logical page that will be positioned to the first logical page of a new location Syntax RPAGE WHEN TOP BOTTOM NOW Options Table 3 35 RPAGE WHEN parameter options and definitions Option Definition BOTTOM The logical page following the current logical page is repositioned NOW The current record is repositioned This record prints at TOF Any spacing or skipping defined to occur before printing the current record is ignored TOP The current logical page is repositioned Default TOP Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 45 Using logical processing 3 46 RPAGE command points to note Note the following when using the RPAGE command If a record intended to satisfy the criteria for RPAGE is suspended by RSUSPEND that record is not checked for the RPAGE criteria Note that the RPAGE criteria takes effect when printing is resumed Record selection or deletion is performed prior to RPAGE processing If a record satisfying the RPAGE test criteria was previously not selected for or was deleted from printing the RPAGE does not function Since DJDE processing occurs before RPAGE processing DJDE records are not checked for satisfying the RPAGE criteria RPAGE command examples The following figures show the effects of RPAGE command
52. for which the CRITERIA command is evaluated count An integer specifying the consecutive number of lines starting with the initial line for which the CRITERIA command is evaluated Default All lines CRITERIA VALUE Defines test specifications for a logical processing function with the Value mode criterion Use the CRITERIA VALUE parameter to compare two numeric values The system returns a true value if the variable text data satisfies the test criteria Syntax ac CRITERIA VALUE offset length EQ NE LT LE GT GE tabid Options Table 3 11 CRITERIA VALUE parameter options and definitions Option Definition offset The offset in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user portion of the data record to the field with the character string that is specified in the associated TABLE NOTE Offset may be a negative value length The length in bytes of the test field Its range is 1 to 255 NOTE This length may differ from the length of the associated TABLE CONSTANT string EQ Indicates the operation equal NE Indicates the operation not equal LT Indicates the operation less than LE Indicates the operation less than or equal GT Indicates the operation greater than Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing Table 3 11 CRITERIA VALUE parameter options and definitions Option Definitio
53. label record the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page with an error message indicating that no label record was found The system then proceeds to process the data as variable text data e Ifthe file cannot be created due to insufficient space on the disk the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page with an error message indicating that there is not enough space on the disk to download the file The system then proceeds to read and discard the file If the destination file type is acceptable the system obtains the file size field from the label record and calculates the extent of the file The file name and file type that appear in the label block are converted to uppercase characters The system creates the file If a file with the same name was created as a result of earlier processing of this report the earlier copy of the file is replaced Otherwise a new copy is created The system reads the file data records and stores them in the file until the total extent of the file is spanned The system ignores record delimiters and processes only the data portion of the file Ifthe FILE signaled the start of LPS labeled data the system assumes that more than one LPS labeled file may be batched together and checks for another label record when it completes processing a file f OPRINFOZYES and the file transfers are successfully concluded the file name and file type of each transf
54. points to note The sc name should already have been created in the accounting file prior to processing the job This parameter is ignored by the DP 2000 Series EPS It is included here for compatibility purposes Refer to PDL commands and DJDE summary in appendix A for information on which Xerox printers support each command and DJDE DESTINATION DJDE Determines the delivery destination of the printed output Type Page oriented Syntax DESTINATION BIN TRAY EXPORT 5 24 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Options Table 5 19 DESTINATION DJDE options and definitions Option Definition BIN Specifies delivery to the currently active output bin TRAY Specifies delivery to the sample tray NOTE Use caution when selecting the sample tray because of its limited capacity EXPORT Specifies that sheets will be sent to the bypass transport DESTINATION DJDE points to note Transparencies should be sent only to the sample tray e EXPORT is honored only if the bypass transport is specified on the LCDS Setup window as the output destination DUPLEX DJDE Specifies whether printing is to occur on both sides of a page duplex mode or a single side simplex mode The choice takes effect on the next page boundary Type Page oriented Syntax DUPLEX YES NO Options Table 5 20 DUPLEX DJDE options and definitions Option D
55. the tab stocks start purging before every tab is imaged because mod and pos are always initialized for every tab page Purging tab stock The printer can purge tab sheets whenever the tab cycle is not in sync with the formatted data This may be caused by paper jams with multiple jobs running in succession Example Here is an example of a typical application scenario Tray two contains the tab stock which has MOD 5 Two tab stock jobs to run in succession Both jobs require tray 1 Job 1 starts with Tab 1 located in the upper right corner of a portrait page and Job 2 must start with Tab 5 located in the lowest right corner of the portrait page The number of tabs Job1 will use is 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters What to do In order to run the job in succession you must code the JSL with MOD 5 and POS 1 for Job 1 and MOD 5 and POS 5 for Job 2 The system keeps track of the last tab position in tray 2 at the end of Job 1 Upon starting Job 2 printer purges Tab 3 and Tab 4 because Job 2 starts with POS 5 and Job 1 used Tab 1 and Tab 2 You can improve performance by ordering application dependent tab stock Using ordered tab stock that supports only the number of tabs required for a specific job eliminates the need for purging unused tabs OUTPUT PAPERSIZE Specifies the size of paper that will be used for printing the job Synta
56. thus proportionally spaced or different size fonts may be used and the system performs the character placement Blank characters in the previous printable line are replaced only when they are translated using the CODE table into an ASCII X 20 or into a character value greater than that of the highest character in the specified font PALETTE DJDE Specifies the ink palette that will be used for subsequent pages Type Page oriented Syntax PALETTE palette name Options Table 5 49 PALETTE DJDE options and definitions Option Definition palette name Specifies the palette to be used on the page Note that the palette name is specified within single quotes 5 60 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs PALETTE DJDE example PALETTE SIMPLE PMODE DJDE Specifies the text orientation for each page Type Page oriented Syntax PMODE LANDSCAPE PORTRAIT Options Table 5 50 PMODE DJDE options and definitions Option Definition LANDSCAPE Indicates that print lines will be parallel to the long edge of the paper for paper loaded with its short edge facing the feed direction Print lines on 11 by 17 inch paper are parallel to the short edge PORTRAIT Indicates that print lines will be parallel to the short edge of the paper for paper loaded with its long edge facing the feed direction Print lines on 11 by 17 inch paper a
57. to note the specifications in the JSL to be overridden In other cases you must follow special procedures when specifying the interacting parameters in your JSL in order to produce the results you want N to 1 printing takes longer to process than 1 to n printing because the system must process the entire report before beginning to print the job NTO1 and COLLATE When NTO1 YES PDL overrides COLLATE NO with COLLATE YES and notes this action with a warning in the JSL listing NTO1 and FACEUP NTO1 YES causes FACEUP YES to be specified NTO1 and 1TON The system assumes each report is NTO1 until the first data page even if 1TON is specified in the JDE or JDL This arrangement allows you to use JDEs and JDLs that are selected by DJDEs and invoke NTO1 after a series of banner pages The following examples illustrate these conditions Example 1 OUTPUT NTO1 NO is specified The job prints 1TON unless a JDE or JDL DJDE specifying NTO 1 is invoked in the first data record after banner pages Example 2 OUTPUT NTO1 YES is specified and a JDE or JDL DJDE specifying NTO1 NO is invoked The DJDE is processed and the job prints 1TON if the system encounters it in the first data record after banner pages NTO1 and OSTK When printing ordered stock in NTO1 sequence using the OSTK parameter note the following The ordered stock must be reverse collated in the feeder so that the first sheet of the set is on the bottom the second she
58. translated The character code set is defined in the CODE parameter of the VOLUME command For a 4 by 3 unpacking method the data is generally encoded in BCD and one of the three standard BCD CODE parameters H2BCD H6BCD and IBMBCD can be used The Offline specifications appendix shows an example of how 6 bit characters that are packed in the T4X3 or T4X3H2 method are unpacked and then translated to ASCII by the system Record formats All tape records input to the printing system are either blocked or unblocked with a fixed length a variable length or an undefined format The BLOCK and RECORD commands define the format of the input data Tape label contents may also describe blocking and record structure and in some cases they override BLOCK and RECORD commands that are specified in the JDL source file These labels are described in this chapter and in the Xerox LPS Tape Formats Manual Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 9 Specifying input parameters Record structure A record is arbitrarily divided into two portions operating system and user The operating system portion of the record contains information that is supplied by the host operating or spooling system The user portion of the record contains information that is provided by the application or the program that is running on the host system The boundary between the two portions of the record is traditionally between the record length and the print
59. using Constant mode criteria Apage heading record that has a report number on it such as Report 00001 using Change mode Criteria RSTACK HRPTNA Specifies that a subfield of the first record will be displayed on the Job Manager window on the user interface If DELIMITER YES is also coded the subfield is from the first delimiter record of the report For DELIMITER NO the subfield is from the first record even if that record does not satisfy the RSTACK test RSTACK HRPTNA offset length NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing Options Table 3 42 RSTACK HRPTNA parameter options and definitions Option Definition offset The amount of space specified in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user portion of the record to the subfield within the record length The number of bytes in the subfield 1 to 16 NONE Specifies no report name is selected Default NONE RSTACK PRINT If DELIMITER YES is coded specifies if the report delimiters will be printed and if so the output destination of the printed delimiters Syntax RSTACK PRINT BIN BOTH TRAY NONE Options Table 3 43 RSTACK PRINT parameter options and definitions Options Definitions BIN Specifies that report delimiters will be printed and the output will be delivered to the stacker tray BOTH Specifies that report delimiters will be printed and the o
60. 1 4 ASSIGN 2 10 ASSIGN 3 16 ASSIGN 4 22 ASSIGN 5 28 ASSIGN 6 34 ASSIGN 40 ASSIGN 8 46 ASSIGN 9 66 ASSIGN 10 52 ASSIGN 11 58 ASSIGN 12 64 TOF 1 BOF 65 VOLUME HOST IBMONL OPTIMIZE NCC NDC NPR LINE PCCTYPE IBM3211 VFU VFUT UCSB PROCESS FCB PROCESS ACCT USER BIN TRAY PREFIX DIDE SKIP 5 OF FSET 0 OPRINFO YES TABLES AND CRITERTAS TABLE MASK CONSTANT HEPDE PAGE CRITERIA CONSTANT 1 11 EQ T1 LINENUM C1 10 TABLE CONSTANT TRAILER PAGE CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 12 EQ T2 LINENUM C1 10 TABLE CONSTANT EOT CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 3 EQ T3 LINENUM 1 20 TABLE CONSTANT JOB CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 5 EQ T4 Figure 1 15 Text Editor window with JSL showing system level commands with identifiers 5 Code the IDEN command at the system level if you plan to use dynamic job descriptor entries 6 Identify any dynamic print requirements for DJDEs 7 If you are using catalog level commands code them next with their identifiers Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 57 PDL principles and procedures 1 58 Recommended Do the following when you are coding catalog commands e Place a comment on the line above the first CATALOG command line indicating that the following commands are catalog level Place the catalog identifier followed by a colon and the CATALOG keyword at the left margin aligned with the system level id
61. 24 DATA parameter 4 25 FCB parameter 4 25 FDATA parameter 4 26 FONTINDEX parameter 4 27 GDATA parameter 4 28 INKINDEX parameter 4 29 LPI parameter 4 30 MARGIN parameter 4 31 OVERPRINT parameter 4 31 PCC parameter 4 33 PCCTYPE parameter 4 34 VFU parameter 4 35 LINE parameter CME command 4 15 LINENUM parameter CRITERIA command 3 11 3 17 LMODIFY command 3 31 3 33 INK parameter 3 31 SELECT parameter 3 32 TEST parameter 3 32 LMULT parameter BLOCK command 2 15 RECORD command 2 39 loading files to disk 5 28 5 33 6 2 logical page 1 35 beginning 4 93 DJDE 5 17 multiple 5 9 positioning on physical page 3 43 logical processing command descriptions 3 22 3 60 specifying 1 23 LOGO DJDE 5 50 LOGO parameter OUTPUT command 4 62 logos specifying 4 62 5 50 lowercase changing to 1 8 LPACK parameter VOLUME command 2 64 LPI DJDE 5 52 LPI parameter LINE command 4 30 LST file 1 69 1 71 definition 1 68 LTHFLD parameter BLOCK command 2 15 RECORD command 2 39 MAP DJDE 5 53 MAP parameter SEFFNT command 2 46 MARGIN DJDE 5 53 MARGIN parameter LINE command 4 31 margins setting 4 31 4 33 5 53 mask character 3 6 3 7 comparison 3 12 MASK parameter TABLE command 3 6 INDEX 6 Using LCDS Print Description Language INDEX example 3 7 3 8 MASK parameter PCC command 2 35 MAXLAB parameter VOLUME command 2 65 measure unit of defining 4 87 MESSAGE command 4
62. 35 physical 1 34 system 1 34 PALETTE DJDE 5 60 PALETTE parameter IDR command 4 22 PAPERSIZE parameter OUTPUT command 4 73 parameter definition 1 6 parameter options 1 6 parentheses 1 14 use in commands 1 6 PASSES parameter ROFFSET command 3 40 PCC see printer carriage control PCC command 2 30 2 36 ADVTAPE parameter 2 31 ASSIGN parameter 2 31 DEFAULT parameter 2 33 INITIAL parameter 2 34 MASK parameter 2 35 PCC parameter LINE command 4 33 PCCTYPE parameter LINE command 4 34 PDE command 1 24 4 91 4 99 BEGIN parameter 4 93 FONTS parameter 4 96 PMODE parameter 4 97 PDEs specifying 4 54 standard 4 91 PDEs specifying 1 24 physical page 1 34 pitch mode 4 84 4 86 5 70 PMODE DJDE 5 61 PMODE parameter PDE command 4 97 portrait orientation 1 37 POSITION parameter CME command 4 16 POSTAMBLE parameter BLOCK command 2 16 RECORD command 2 40 PPI see print position indexing PREAMBLE parameter BLOCK command 2 17 RECORD command 2 40 PREFIX parameter IDEN command 2 27 print format command descriptions 4 1 4 1 11 PRINT parameter RSTACK command 3 57 print position indexing 2 5 2 6 printer carriage control 2 30 2 36 4 33 4 34 DJDEs 2 25 interaction with DJDEs 5 10 printing highlight color jobs 1 78 1 80 proportional fonts 1 39 publications related xxv PURGE parameter OUTPUT command 4 74 R Random mode graphics 6 3 Random Mode Only format 6
63. 38 4 41 ITEXT parameter 4 39 OTEXT parameter 4 40 messages error 5 5 operator 4 6 4 38 4 41 DJDEs 5 5 5 48 5 58 MINLAB parameter VOLUME command 2 65 modes CRITERIA command 3 9 3 10 change mode 3 10 constant mode 3 10 value mode 3 10 MODIFY DJDE 5 54 MODIFY parameter OUTPUT command 4 63 Move mode see Random mode graphics multiple begins 5 9 multivolume processing 2 10 N N to 1 printing 4 64 name JDL 1 21 NTO1 parameter OUTPUT command 4 64 NUMBER DJDE 5 55 NUMBER parameter OUTPUT command 4 66 number page specifying 4 66 0 Octal in string constants 1 10 octal expressing values 1 7 offline input processing 2 8 2 11 offline dump 1 75 1 76 OFFSET parameter BLOCK command 2 16 IDEN command 2 26 OUTPUT command 4 67 RECORD command 2 40 offsetting pages in stacker 3 39 4 67 online input processing 2 2 RSTACK considerations 3 58 online dump 1 73 1 74 operation safety Europe xix xxi US xviii OPRINFO parameter IDEN command 5 5 OPRINFO parameter IDEN command 2 26 OPTIMIZE parameter VOLUME command 2 66 options parameter 1 6 order of command types 3 1 ordered stocks specifying 4 68 orientation font 1 40 page 1 35 1 38 specifying 4 97 5 61 OSCHN parameter VOLUME command 2 67 OSHDP parameter VOLUME command 2 67 OSTK parameter OUTPUT command 4 68 OSTLP parameter VOLUME command 2 67 OTEXT command 1 28 OTEXT DJDE 5 58 OTEXT par
64. 4 U 96 M E D 5 V E N E 6 E Ww gt O F 7 X P G Honeywell Bull 200 and 2000 BCD code set Table C 2 Honeywell Bull 200 and 2000 BCD code set Most significant bits Octal columns 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 H Q Y 9 A J R Z f B K S C L T j D M d U E 96 N V lt F O Ww amp G P X C 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language Character code assignments Honeywell Bull 6000 BCD code set Table C 3 Honeywell Bull 6000 BCD code set Most significant bits Octal columns 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 space H a JQ Y 9 A J R B amp K S C L T D M E U E N V z gt F lt O W 7 G P X Fieldata translation Table C 4 Fieldata translation Most significant bits Octal columns 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K S d 0 8 L T 1 9 M U 96 S N V 3 O W 4 P X gt 5 Q Y amp 6 E R Z 7 s Using LCDS Print Description Language C 3 Character code assignments UNIVAC ASCII character set Table C 5 UNIVAC ASCII character set Octal Character Octal Character Octal Character 040 blank 100 140 041 10
65. A numeric constant that defines the input double byte code output A numeric constant that defines the output double byte code that corresponds to the input code Default Syntax Options No default KCODE DEFAULT Specifies a base code from which you can make double byte character code assignment exceptions The base code is specified by a codetype the exceptions are specified in the ASSIGN parameter ac KCODE DEFAULT codetype Table 2 30 KCODE DEFAULT parameter options and definitions Option Definition codetype Keyword for one the following double byte codes IBM Specifies the IBM Nihongo character set Kanji double byte sets JEF Specifies the Fujitsu JEF Kanji double byte character set JIS KEIS Specifies the Hitachi KEIS Kanji double byte character set Default No default Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 29 Specifying input parameters KCODE command point to note The DBCODE command can be used in the same manner as KCODE PCC command Enables you to create a table or modify an existing standard table of one byte printer carriage control codes and define their action NOTE This command is ignored by the DP EPS for both channel and TCP IP processing Carriage control specifications such as Skip to Channel Print or Space 2 Lines is accomplished by processing IBM channel commands which have specific well defined carriage control interpret
66. B9 B1 60 69 72 7A B9 49 52 5A 39 20 FO EO DO 60 21 5E 3A A9 90 91 AB A7 AS 9E 1B FF EF DF CF 2E 24 2C 23 1A 1C 7D 17 A6 A2 9D 99 FE EE DE CE 3C 2A 25 40 10 12 7E 7F 13 8F 15 98 FD ED DD CD 28 29 5F 27 BA 8D 5B 5D A5 8E 9C 97 FC EC DC CC 2B 3B 3E 30 BB 7C 11 95 14 A1 9B 96 FB EB DB CB 1B 1D GF 22 94 93 92 16 A4 AO 9A 20 NOTE Values on the perimeter are EBCDIC Values within the blocked rectangles are ASCII Example An EBCDIC value of AB is equivalent to an ASCII value of 7D Using LCDS Print Description Language C 7 Character code assignments C 8 Using LCDS Print Description Language D Offline specifications This appendix provides specifications for tapes for offline printing Input unpacking examples The following figure shows several input unpacking examples BCD Character A 1 5 Binary Representation 010001 000001 000101 101100 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Represented on 9T Tape by 01000100 00010001 01101100 a MM i 1 5 T4x3 After Unpacking by OSS 00010001 0000000 0000010 001011004 U Pacne A 1 5 Aner Translation to ASCII 01000001 00110001 00110101 00101010 by OSs A 1 5 BCD Character A 1 5 Binary Representation H2BCD 010001 000001 000101 101100 Byte 1 Byte
67. CME LINE 1 60 POSITION 5 FONT 2 In the next example the command keyword OUTPUT can be followed by any number of parameters such as OUTPUT GRAPHICS YES DUPLEX NO FORMAT PDFLT FORM BAR Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 5 PDL principles and procedures Parameters Parameter options and right part components Refer to the Summary table of PDL commands and DJDEs in appendix A for a list of all available command keywords Each command keyword is followed by parameters Parameters give precise specifications for the print job or application n commands that comprise a JSL each parameter consists of a left part and a right part separated by an equal sign Spaces before and after the equal sign are optional The left part is the parameter name the right part indicates the parameter options or values e In DJDEs the left part is the DJDE command name The DJDE options are right part components following the equal sign The right part of a parameter contains the options which may consist of keywords variable references and value or string constants Each parameter has one or more options For example the OFFSET parameter of the OUTPUT command which can be shortened to OUTPUT OFFSET parameter has three options ALL FIRST and NONE Some parameter options have multiple components Some of these components must have values specified others are optional Parent
68. CME is to be applied If no initial copy is specified the CME applies to all copies copies Specifies the number of plies passes on which apply the CME will be applied If copies is not specified the CME applies to all copies beginning with the copy number specified by init NONE Specifies that data are processed without modification Default NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 63 Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT MODIFY gt ACME may be coded within a JSL or coded and catalogued parameter points separately for use by several JSLs Any CME invoked by a 4 64 to note DJDE must be catalogued separately refer to CME command earlier in this chapter for further information e Ifthe CME is within the JSL it must precede a reference to its identifier by the MODIFY parameter Different CMEs may be associated with different copies of a report by the use of multiple MODIFY parameters on the same OUTPUT command CME copy ranges may not overlap e If different CMEs are associated with different copies of a report or if a CME is applied to some but not all copies of a report then the CMEs are termed copy sensitive Copy sensitive CMEs may not be used if COLLATE NO or online processing is specified Refer to the MODIFY DJDE description in the Using dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs chapter for a discussion of how CMEs may be changed on a page by page basis within a
69. CME2 CME LINE 3 POS 59 CONSTANT FIRST QUARTER CODE commands define character translation tables used to convert input job data into printed characters For example Cl CODE DEFAULT EBCDIC ASSIGN N Coding other system level commands System level commands without identifiers should be indented under the commands with identifiers One exception is the JDL name command which precedes the identifier commands and is not indented The following sections discuss several other commands that are usually coded at system level and that do not require identifiers Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Setting up input You may want to start by specifying the input data characteristics parameters for the application The basic input processing commands are BLOCK CODE PCC RECORD TCODE and VOLUME Input processing characteristics vary depending on the data source For example if your JSL is for an online application the BLOCK command is not applicable Also parameters within a command may apply to offline only online only or both For example with the VOLUME command the parameters CODE and HOST can apply to both online and offline EOV applies only to offline applications and OPTIMIZE applies only to online applications Following are examples of typical input processing commands Online VOLUME HOST IBMONL CODE EBCDIC RECORD LENG
70. IBMONL CODE EBCDIC RECORD LENGTH 135 STRUCTURE VB PREAMBLE 2 ADJUST 3 CATALOG VOLUME HOST IBMONL CODE EBCDIC RECORD LENGTH 135 STRUCTURE VB PREAMBLE 1 LTHFLD 1 FORMAT BIN OFFSET 0 ADJUST 2 JDE level commands JDE OUTPUT DR IDR1 NUMBER 1 1 0 1 BLACK FORMAT PDE1 LOGO SIG1 1 5 IN 6 0 IN JDE INCLUDE CATPOW VOLUME HOST IBMONL CODE PEBCDIC OUTPUT DR IDR2 FORMAT PDE2 IDFAULT 2 FORMS STMT3 ABNORMAL ERROR CONTINUE IMISMATCH CONTINUE JDE INCLUDE CATGRP OUTPUT COPIES 5 IDFAULT BLACK XMP REPORT JDE Hints and tips The following tips may help you as you create your JSL e The only required elements in a JSL are AJDL name which is the name of the file created by compiling the JSL One or more job names JDEs END command at the end of the JSL Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 47 PDL principles and procedures System defaults can be used for all other specifications although typically each application has its own specific characteristics Use tab spacing to create columns for the command identifiers commands and parameters in your JSLs While not required by the system this organization makes it much easier to identify command sets their commands and the parameters of each command quickly reducing the chance of error The JSL in the following figure is set up in column forma
71. IDEN PREFIX E DJDE SKIP 7 OFFSET 2 OPRINFO YES For information on coding the IDEN command and explanations of its parameters and options refer to the IDEN command description in the Specifying input parameters chapter Specifying DJDE records 5 2 Ending a DJDE Multiple DJDEs DJDE coding guidelines DJDE records are part of the data stream The system looks for them only if there is an IDEN PREFIX command within the JDE used to process the job DJDE information is contained in one or more records each of which may be up to the maximum record length specified for the job input data For each DJDE record the prefix the identification field must begin in the same location in the record A group of DJDE records called a packet is terminated by an END parameter in the last DJDE record in the packet All specified DJDE information is applied at the next record or page boundary after the END parameter is encountered The end of a DJDE record parameter that is split and continued on the next DJDE record must be followed by a comma then a semicolon NOTE After a DJDE packet is terminated by an END parameter there must be one or more data records before the next DJDE packet DJDE records directly following a previously terminated DJDE parameter set are ignored There may be multiple DJDE packets in a job Only the specific parameters mentioned within the packet are modified When preparing DJDE record
72. LCDS Print Description Language A 9 PDL command and DJDE summary Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs Continued DJDE Off On orien Command Parameters Default Printing system line line tation RECORD ADJUST 0 All Y N CONSTANT All Y N FORMAT BIN All Y N LENGTH offline 133 All Y N E online 150 All N Y LMULT 1 All Y N LTHFLD 0 All Y N OFFSET 0 All Y N POSTAMBLE 0 All Y N PREAMBLE 0 All Y N mE STRUCTURE FB All Y N RFEED TEST no default for All except 9790 and Y Y stockdef 8790 LPS ROFFSET PASSES ALL All Y Y TEST All Y Y ac ROUTE RFORM NONE All Y Y Page RTEXT NONE All Y Y Page RPAGE SIDE NUFRONT All Y Y Page NOFFSET TEST All Y Y WHEN TOP All Y Y RRESUME BEGIN NEXT All Y Y TEST All Y Y RSELECT TEST All Y Y RSPLIT TEST 9790 and 8790 LPS Y Y A 10 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command and DJDE summary Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs Continued DJDE Off On orien Command Parameters Default Printing system line line tation RSTACK ACCTINFO All Y Y DELIMITER NO All Y Y HRPTNA NONE All Y Y PRINT NONE All Y Y TEST All Y Y RSUSPEND BEGIN NEXT All Y Y TEST All Y Y SAVE DJDE filename m All Y
73. Move mode Random or Move mode requires a separate disk access for processing of every graphic on a page The more graphics on a page and the larger the graphics the more likely it is that paper path holes are created NOTE On the DP 2000 Series EPS this condition occurs rarely and only under extreme conditions Online It should be noted that sending interleaved graphics across the online interface affects system performance The time to process graphic information across the channel block it and write it to disk is significant As the average density of graphic information decreases throughput should increase Graphics features restrictions 6 6 Following is a summary of restrictions imposed on and by graphics features supported on DP 2000 Series EPS Tape formats supported by interleaved graphic processing are restricted to LPS compatible fixed or variable record structures that is BLOCK or RECORD STRUCTURE F FB V or VB only Undefined length record structures such as types U and UB are not supported Packed data formats are not supported Graphic images may be overlapped on a page with each other and with text e lf agraphic begins off the system page no part of the graphic is printed Using LCDS Print Description Language Using PDL commands for graphics No online banner page neither header nor trailer may include graphic references A JDE that is selected with the JDE DJDE or JDL DJDE m
74. OFFSET ALL All OSTK RES 96 4635 180 LPS Y Y DP EPS mod amp pos 1 size 5 IN PAPERSIZE Installed default All Y Y Page PURGE NO All Y Y RESOLUTION Installed default All Y Y SF1FUNCTION NO 4850 4890 4135 Y Y Page 96 4635 180 LPS DP EPS Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command and DJDE summary Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs Continued DJDE Off On orien Command Parameters Default Printing system line line tation OUTPUT SF2FUNCTION NO 4850 4890 4135 Y Y Page continued 96 4635 180 LPS DP EPS SHIFT All Page SIZING All STAPLE Depends on 4050 4090 4850 paper size 4890 DP92C LPS DP75 EPS STOCKS width unit lN All except 9790 and Y Y Page 8790 LPS SYSPPR 4135 96 4635 180 Y Y LPS DP EPS TMODE 4135 96 4635 180 Y Y Page LPS DP EPS TRANS NO 4135 96 4635 180 Y Y Page LPS DP EPS UNITS All XMP DEFAULT 4850 4890 DP92C Record LPS XSHIFT NO 96 4635 180 LPS Y Y Page DP EPS ac PCC ADVTAPE YES All Y N ASSIGN All Y N DEFAULT DEFAULT All Y N INITIAL TOF All Y N MASK X FF All Y N ac PDE BEGIN 18 IN 66 IN All Y Y Page FONTS L0112B All Y Y Page PMODE LANDSCAPE All Y Y Page RAUX TEST All Y Y RDELETE TEST All Y Y Using
75. PDE command Refer to the fontindex option in this table passnum pass number An integer specifying the single copy pass to which the text applies If there is more than one RTEXT parameter in a DJDE packet passnum must be in increasing numeric order ALL Specifies that the text applies to all copies line Specifies the line number on which the first line of a block of RTEXT message is printed To avoid overprinting only one RTEXT parameter may be specified per line for a passnum The default is line 1 for the first text string of the pass Otherwise the default is the next line of the page col column Specifies the column number at which the first character of a block of RTEXT messages is to be printed The default is column 1 fontindex Identifies the font index starting with 1 of the PDE font with which the text is printed rtextid routing text identifier References a catalogued file of RTEXT parameters previously compiled by XJDC NONE Specifies that no routing text will be printed on a separate page Default NONE ROUTE RTEXT parameter points to note The font index is associated only with a particular string To print an entire RTEXT page in the same font you must specify the font index with each string For strings without a fontindex specified the system uses the first font specified in the PDE FONTS parameter The positioning of the first line of data on the page following an RTEXT page is determin
76. SIDE and WHEN parameters respectively Using LCDS Print Description Language SIDE NUFRONT original sheet new sheet front side back side front side back side Case 1 Original physical side is front original sheet new sheet front side back side front side back side Case 2 Original physical side is back SIDEZNUBACK original sheet new sheet front side back side front side back side Case 1 Original physical side is front original sheet new sheet front side back side front side back side Case 2 Original physical side is back Indicates action caused by execution of WHEN option Using logical processing SIDE BACK original sheet new sheet front side back side front side back side Case 1 Original physical side is front original sheet new sheet front side back side front side back side Case 2 Original physical side is back SIDE NEXT original sheet new sheet Case 1 Original physical side is front original sheet new sheet front side back side front side back side Case 2 Original physical side is back Figure 3 6 Effects of RPAGE SIDE parameter Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 47 Using logical processing no RPAGE option WHEN TOP Original physical side Original physical side New physical side First BEGIN position z g 7 Logical page A Logical page A Logical page B RPAGE RECORD Second BEGIN position i E api Logic
77. STOCKSET command is the default if no OUTPUT FEED parameter is present Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 27 PDL principles and procedures Specifying output requirements Here is asample STOCKSET command SSML STOCKSET ASSIGN WHITE CVR ASSIGN YELLOW BLL ASSIGN GREEN SUM NIFEED CVR SYSPAGE SUM There are many specifications you can select to define the manner and look of your printed application You can also have messages displayed to operators to advise them of special circumstances This is done with the MESSAGE command MESSAGE Job level command examples 1 28 OTEXT ALL FORMS DUPLEX ONLY 1 WAIT NOTE The MESSAGE OTEXT command shown above is one example and is not necessarily the recommended method for switching media Refer to the OUTPUT STOCKS and OUTPUT FEED command descriptions in the Specifying print format parameters chapter for further information Similarly the ROUTE command sends printed information preceding the report to operators Most output specifications are selected from parameters of the OUTPUT command As with other commands these can be specified at any command level but are most often specified at the job level because of the many variations possible Here are some examples of commands that are coded at the job or JDE level Job level commands JOB1 JDE OUTPUT DUPLEX YES SHIFT YES FORM SMPLE MO
78. Type of recording mode of the block length field The following types are available BIN binary DEC decimal PACK packed with no sign PKSG packed with sign BLOCK LENGTH Specifies the longest physical block that is being processed Syntax BLOCK LENGTH value Options Table 2 8 BLOCK LENGTH parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the length in bytes of the longest physical block an integer in the range 12 to 24 576 bytes Default 1330 BLOCK LENGTH The maximum block size that may be processed up to parameter points 24 576 bytes depends on the available task memory and the to note processing features that are invoked The Tape Client is able to allocate at least one input buffer for offline tape jobs when the tapes are written in maximum size blocks The LENGTH parameter may be overridden by ANSI or IBM OS Standard labels that specify block length 2 14 Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Specifying input parameters e Ifa block length is specified that is less than the minimum block length that is found on the tape the system allocates input buffers which are sized to the minimum tape block length It is wise to specify the maximum block length in the JSL so that input buffers are large enough to handle the largest block However specifying the maximum block length in the JSL may slow performance If the actual tape blo
79. UCSB PROCESS All except DP EPS N Y VFU NONE All Y Y LMODIFY TEST 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y LPS DP EPS MESSAGE ITEXT NONE All Y Y Page OTEXT NONE All Y Page OUTPUT BFORM NONE init All Y Page defaults to first or next copy BINDING LONG DP EPS N Y COLLATE YES All Y Y Page COPIES 1 All Y Y Page COVER NONE All Y Y CYCLEFORMS NONE All Y Y DENSITY DEFAULT All Y Y DESTINATION NO All Y Y DUPLEX NO All Y Y Page FACEUP NO All except 9790 and Y Y 8790 FEED OPR All Y Y Page FORMAT FMT1 All Y Page FORM S NONE init All Page defaults to first or next copy FOR defaults to FORMAT if FORMS is not fully entered GRAPHICS NO All Y Y Record Using LCDS Print Description Language A 7 PDL command and DJDE summary Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs Continued DJDE Off On orien Command Parameters Default Printing system line line tation OUTPUT IDFAULT First ink in ILIST 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page continued parameter LPS DP EPS prints black IDR DFIDR IDR 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page LPS DP EPS prints black IMAGE INCHES top left All Y Y Page corner scaled 1 to 1 INVERT NONE 96 4635 180 LPS Y Y Page DP EPS IRESULT Installed default 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page LPS DP EPS prints black LOGO 96 4635 180 LPS Y Y Record DP EPS MODIFY NONE 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page LPS DP EPS prints black NTO1 NO All NUMBER NO All except 9790 and 8790
80. When you resume printing the output immediately starts going to your selected stacker bin Hierarchy withina The following sample JSL for online printing contains three JDEs job descriptor or jobs The VOLUME CODE parameter which specifies the library JDL encoding of the input data appears in four places 1 According to the system command level or JDL command set the default encoding of the input data is ASCII VOLUME CODE ASCIl 2 According to the catalog command level the encoding of the input data is EBCDIC VOLUME CODE EBCDIC 3 According to the commands for job 2 the encoding of the input data is Printable EBCDIC PEBCDIC The PDL command VOLUME CODE PEBCDIC overrides both catalog and system command level definitions 4 In Job 3 the encoding of the input data is EBCDIC because the INCLUDE parameter of the JOB command specifies the CATGRP catalog which in turn specifies EBCDIC in its VOLUME command CODE parameter Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 45 PDL principles and procedures NOTE This JSL contains some highlight color commands and parameters IDR ILIST ICATALOG and IDEFAULT These commands are processed but most have no effect on the output if the JSL is used to print on the DP EPS However if the JSL is used on a highlight color printing system such as the Xerox 4890 LPS the commands are followed Refer to Printing applications containing highlight color commands in this chapter for
81. a logical processing function they may be linked by either AND or OR The formats of these TEST parameters may be as follows TEST criidl AND criid2 Or TEST criidl OR criid2 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing The criid and criid gt are the identifiers for two CRITERIA commands The parentheses in this format are required For example the following three commands specify that a record should be selected RSELECT parameter if a particular field is equal to a given string constant sc I1 TABLE CONSTANT sc Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT offset length EQ T1 RSELECT TEST C1 NOTE A compiler error occurs if you attempt an AND test on two different criteria that appear on two line ranges that do not overlap For example a logic problem occurs with the ROFFSET command if Criterion 1 is limited to line 3 and Criterion 2 is limited to line 2 In this scenario both criteria could never be satisfied on the same line Specifying the The LINENUM parameter of a CRITERIA command specifies CRITERIA that only a subset of the data record in a report will be tested for LINENUM the user defined criteria This subset is specified as a set of parameter contiguous line numbers for a logical page If the carriage control specification for a given record places the record within the set of lines specified by LINENUM the record is examined according to the CRITERIA command O
82. a long edge feed page is viewed in portrait orientation to accommodate predrilled stocks binding finishing edgemarking and short edge binding OUTPUT XSHIFT YES NO value Table 4 81 OUTPUT XSHIFT parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Specifies that the page image will be shifted up or down NO Specifies that no X image shift will occur value An integer that specifies a shift amount on the front and back sides of a page The shift is upward on a portrait oriented page when a positive value is specified and downward when a negative value is specified Each dot is 1 300 of an inch The allowable range is 80 to 80 Default 4 88 No default Using LCDS Print Description Language OUTPUT XSHIFT parameter example Specifying print format parameters Following is an example of the OUTPUT XSHIFT parameter INVP DE P DE PMODE PORTRAIT BEGIN 1 3 37 FONTS P0612A INVJ Example 1 Example 2 DE DE UTPUT INVERT BACK SHIFT YES XSHIFT 40 FORMAT INVPDE PAPERSIZE 8 5 11 OUTPUT command point to note Certain parameters of the OUTPUT command interact with each other or with other commands Some parameters require certain options to be specified in conjunction with other options other parameters preclude the use of certain options The following sections describe instances
83. a message to the operator at the point of software restart when printing is interrupted by a software failure The parameter options enable you to specify whether or not printing will stop when this message is displayed ABNORMAL OTEXT WAIT NOWAIT Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Specifying print format parameters Table 4 8 ABNORMAL OTEXT parameter options and definitions Option Definition WAIT Displays a message and stops printing until the operator resumes it by pressing the printer Continue button or selecting Resume from the controller screen Stopping printing allows the operator to verify the output report in the near vicinity of the marker page NOWAIT Displays a message but printing does not stop Default NOWAIT ABNORMAL _ Following is an example of the ABNORMAL OTEXT parameter OTEXT parameter ABNORMAL OTEXT WAIT ERROR ABORT example ABNORMAL REP Specifies whether or not the first data page delivered to the output bin following a printer jam recovery or a system rollover is offset from the rest of the report Syntax ABNORMAL REP NO YES Options Table 4 9 ABNORMAL REP parameter options and definitions Default Option Definition NO Specifies that the page will not be offset YES Specifies that the page will be offset NO Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 7 Specifying print format parameters ABNORMAL SECURITY R
84. also contain commands indicating what the system should do if a JDL specifies a different color ink from what is loaded in the printer The DP EPS can print jobs that were designed for the 4850 4890 or DP92C LPS and contain color commands When you run a highlight color job on the DP EPS the job prints in black ink Some solid colored or shaded areas may print in various shades of gray The following table lists the highlight color related PDL commands parameters and DJDEs Table 1 15 Highlight color commands DJDE Command Color parameter available ABNORMAL IMISMATCH No ISUBSTITUTE No CME INKS No IDR ICATALOG Yes ILIST Yes PALETTES Yes LINE INKINDEX Yes LMODIFY INK No SELECT No TEST No OUTPUT FORMS Yes GRAPHICS Yes IDFAULT Yes IDR Yes IRESULT Yes 1 78 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Table 1 15 Highlight color commands Continued DJDE Command Color parameter available LOGO Yes NUMBER Yes XMP Yes For detailed information on the syntax and use of these PDL commands and DJDEs refer to the Print Description Language Reference for your 4850 4890 or DP92 HighLight Color LPS Downloading You can download color JDLs to your DP EPS When compiled highlight color ona Xerox 4850 4890 or DP92 these JDLs can then be used JDLs to your DP on the DP EPS the 4850 4890 LPS or the
85. an error occurs during accounting report processing Syntax ABNORMAL ACCTFEED AUX OPR 4 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 3 ABNORMAL ACCTFEED parameter options and definitions Option Definition AUX Specifies that the error sheet will feed from the stock that was identified as AUX OPR Not currently supported Specifies the medium that is defined in the Virtual Printer Default AUX ABNORMAL CODE Syntax Options Specifies the handling of illegal function codes in the data stream The system sets the report completion code and inserts an account error page into the job ABNORMAL CODE IGNORE SPACE SUBSTITUTE Table 4 4 ABNORMAL CODE parameter options and definitions Option Definition IGNORE Bypasses illegal functions in the data stream SPACE Replaces each illegal function code with a character space SUBSTITUTE Not currently supported Replaces each illegal function code with a substitute character that is defined in the Virtual Printer Default IGNORE ABNORMAL ERROR Specifies the required system response to abnormal conditions detected in input while processing DJDEs Syntax ABNORMAL ERROR ABORT CONTINUE STOP Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 3 Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 5 ABNORMAL ERROR parameter options and definitions Option Definition
86. are performed on the following files Graphic samples Graphic summary pages Accounting pages Short edge feed SEF duplex printing differs from long edge feed LEF applications in that SEF uses a head to toe orientation for printing portrait pages while LEF uses head to head orientation Refer to the OUTPUT INVERT parameter description for alternate methods of rotating the page orientation For landscape printing however SEF uses a head to head orientation whereas LEF landscape uses head to toe orientation Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 47 Specifying input parameters e Ifyou want to use 11 by 17 inch paper or any size that requires SEF be aware that form source libraries FSL files form FRM files logo LGO files and image IMG files are not automatically scaled or rotated You may need to alter the FSL text file to specify that the form should be rotated SEFFNT command examples Following are a few examples of how to use the SEFFNT command Example 1 AFNTMAPLIB file is created on the system disk FNTMAP SEFFNT SEFMAP L0112B P0612A SYS1 SYSTEM VOLUME CODE ASCII Example 2 Job 1 uses the SEFFNT command because there is no override specified SEFFNT SEFMAP LO114B P0614 PDE1 PDE FONT L0114B PMODE LANDSCAPE BEGIN 50 50 JOB1 JOB OUTPUT FORMAT PDE1 Example3 Job 2 uses the FNTMAPLIB file created in example 1
87. be given in ascending left to right order Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters There also may be multiple text specifications following a column specification These are combined to form a single text string String position Where a CME string constant is printed on a line depends upon where the POSITION and CONSTANT parameters are specified in the CME If POSITION is specified before CONSTANT the string constant is printed at the specified position If POSITION is specified after CONSTANT the string constant is printed at the current position position 1 if no other POSITION or CONSTANT parameter has been specified and a subsequent CONSTANT or FONT parameter takes effect at the specified POSITION Double byte font support Double byte text strings are supported for the CME CONSTANT value if KCODE or DBCODE is specified for the VOLUME command The maximum number of double byte characters is 127 Copy sensitive CMEs OnLPS systems Copy sensitive CMEs are supported only for offline printing because multiple passes are required to implement them OnEPS systems Copy sensitive CMES are supported for online as well as offline printing Online jobs may be transmitted via channel or the Socket gateway Only spooling queues may be used NOTE The entire job must be spooled to disk before the RIP process can start This could cause the spool to become full if the job is ext
88. be fed for the job if no stock is specified in the OUTPUT FEED command or the FEED DJDE It is enclosed in single quotes stockreference Specifies the stock for the job by the term associated with it in the STOCKSET ASSIGN command Default The first stock name STOCKSET SYSPAGE Specifies which stock to use for system generated pages such as exception and accounting pages and the pages generated by the OPRINFO DJDE and the PLABEL parameter Syntax ac STOCKSET SYSPAGE stockname stockreference MAIN AUX Options Table 4 93 STOCKSET SYSPAGE parameter options and definitions Option Definition stockname Specifies the name of the stock to be used to print system pages It is enclosed in single quotes stockreference Specifies the stock for printing system pages by its reference term which was defined using the current STOCKSET ASSIGN parameter Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 105 Specifying print format parameters Table 4 93 STOCKSET SYSPAGE parameter options and definitions Option Definition MAIN Specifies that system pages feed from the tray containing the stock identified as MAIN AUX Specifies that system pages will feed from the tray containing the stock identified as AUX Default MAIN STOCKSET Paper size mismatch on system pages Pages generated SYSPAGE by the system via such commands as IDEN OPRINFO are parameter points 4 106 to note formatted for 8 5 by 1
89. can use the SAVE DJDE to override the purging of specific parameter point to note Syntax Options Table 4 70 files OUTPUT SF1FUNCTION Specifies to the third party finisher whether or not it should perform the user defined SF1 operation on the current report This parameter provides control over third party finishing devices that conform to the DFA standard You use it to invoke Finishing Function SF1 through the DFA channel C6 The user must specify what function SF1 will have Refer to your finishing equipment vendor documentation for information on what function should be specified for your finisher OUTPUT SF1FUNCTION NO YES OUTPUT SF1FUNCTION parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Instructs the finisher to initiate the user defined SF1 finishing function on the current sheet NO Specifies that Finishing Function SF1 will not be implemented on the current sheet Default NO Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 75 Specifying print format parameters Syntax Options OUTPUT SF2FUNCTION Specifies to the third party finisher whether or not it should perform the user defined SF2 operation on the current report This parameter provides control over third party finishing devices that conform to the DFA standard You use it to invoke Finishing Function SF2 through the DFA channel C7 The user must specify what function SF2 will have Refer to your finishi
90. carriage control codes N N N that will be used for a job LINE VFU Specifies a vertical format unit table that will be Y Y N used for a job The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explain their options LINE BASELINE Defines how to calculate the baseline position of the character that is being printed Syntax LINE BASELINE TOP CENTER BOTTOM LARGE ST Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 23 Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 25 LINE BASELINE parameter options and definitions Option Definition TOP Determines the baseline position from the top of each line by using the BASELINE parameter of the first font in the PDE font list CENTER Positions all of the characters so that their center lines match BOTTOM Determines the baseline from the bottom of each line by using the BASELINE parameter of the first font in the PDE font list LARGE ST Determines the baseline position and the line spacing by using the largest font in the PDE font list Default LINE BASELINE parameter point to note Syntax Options LARGE ST If KANJI is specified as one of the fonts KANJI YES a BASELINE LARGE command is treated as BASELINE TOP LINE BLANKTYPE Specifies whether or not the shift in and shift out function codes are printed as spaces LINE BLANKTYPE F V SPACE NOSPAC
91. char means the set of input codes corresponding to characters bounded by and including char and char refer to appendix D for relative order of characters TCODE TASSIGN parameter point to note Default Syntax 2 52 When a typespec is coded as a 0 all characters specified by an inputspec are disassociated from all type code assignments Thus the TASSIGN parameter may untype a specified set of characters When a typespec is coded with a single value ranging from 1 through 7 all specified characters are associated with that type code When a typespec is coded as a series of values all ranging from 1 through 7 the specified characters are each associated with all of the specified types No default TCODE TRESET Disassociates one or more characters or all characters in a set from one or more types ac TCODE TRESET typespec inputspec typespec Cinputspec inputspecs ALL Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Specifying input parameters Table 2 55 TCODE TRESET parameter options and definitions Option Definition typespec A typespec may be coded as a single integer n within the range of 1 through 7 NUMERIC may be used instead of 1 ALPHA may be used instead of 2 inputspec An parameter or it can be ALL which specifies that all characters in the code table are disassociated from the specified types The TRESET parameter may be specified more
92. commands c oo eee teow et ouriet 2 ENS 1 15 PDL command categories 2 22 cee eee eee 1 16 The Job Source Library JSL 0200 0c eee eee 1 17 What does a JSL specify 000 2c 1 18 JSL command levels 0 0 eee eee eee 1 18 DEANS il sree nh bh tre deb fe me Ad hh ooh A EA 1 21 JDL or system level commands 1 21 Coding system level commands with identifiers 1 21 Coding other system level commands 1 24 Catalog level commands 000000055 1 26 Using LCDS Print Description Language iii Table of contents Job or JDE level commands 1 26 Coding job or JDE level commands 1 27 COMMMIGIIS did ear cre Cote RGN Ae e eerie Gi as A e 1 29 Ending a JOL quor arn edat i ha alaus s ee eee erik 1 29 Sample completed JSL 00220 eee 1 30 Before creating a JSL considerations and decisions 1 31 NUE Cale REP Ec 1 32 Output specifications 32 cer des wees aos 1 32 Special features 5 nio nannan aaen gx do vede els f 1 33 Interactions between JSLs catalogs and jobs 1 34 Paper sizes and page frames 1 34 Oentalloli 4 15 es e 9m 3 be iE d bee deii E E Ha 1 35 EODIS 93 4e ars edad Ac Qe CIL AS Ett d ENN 1 38 Overriding PDL commands 0000e0e reese 1 40 inte AN TOS ss e olea bh REDEEM d dotes EDAEN ESA 1 47 Codingia lob niue Lega tete Pee ue endo a RUE
93. containing TEST parameters 3 4 defining stocks 1 27 descriptions input processing 2 11 2 72 format diagram 1 4 highlight color 1 78 on monochrome systems 1 18 identifiers 1 5 input processing 1 25 job or JDE level 1 26 1 28 keywords 1 5 levels hierarchy 1 45 levels in JSL 1 18 1 28 logical processing 1 23 3 22 3 60 definition 3 1 output 1 28 overriding 1 40 1 47 parameter options 1 6 parameters 1 6 print format 1 28 4 1 4 111 syntax 1 12 1 14 INDEX 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language INDEX abbreviations 1 12 blank spaces 1 12 system level identifiers 1 21 variables 1 7 comments 1 29 in DJDEs 5 20 compatibility between systems 1 76 1 80 compiling a JSL 1 64 1 71 constant mode CRITERIA command 3 10 CONSTANT parameter BLOCK command 2 13 CME command 4 13 CRITERIA command 3 16 3 17 RECORD command 2 37 TABLE command 3 5 constants string 1 7 value 1 7 conventions document xxiv COPIES DJDE 5 22 COPIES parameter OUTPUT command 4 48 copy modification entries see CMEs correcting errors in a JSL 1 69 1 71 COVER parameter OUTPUT command 4 49 CRITERIA command 3 1 3 9 3 21 CHANGE parameter 3 14 3 16 CONSTANT parameter 3 16 3 17 LINENUM parameter 3 11 3 17 modes 3 9 3 10 VALUE parameter 3 18 3 21 criteria identifier 3 2 criteria test 1 23 3 10 CYCLEFORMS parameter OUTPUT command 4 49 D DATA DJDE 5 23 DATA parameter LIN
94. continue spacing through the end of the physical page The page then transitions to top of form and spacing continues OVR default When spacing causes bottom of form BOF to occur instructs the system to go to the top of form TOF on the next page and to continue spacing Default No default 2 32 Using LCDS Print Description Language PCC ASSIGN parameter points to note Syntax Options Specifying input parameters e You need not specify consecutive byte values For example you can code the following command as a single command ASSIGN X 60 SP1 ASSIGN X 61 SP2 ASSIGN X 62 SP3 The single command is ASSIGN X 60 SP1 SP2 SP3 e f byte translation is specified under the PCC LINE parameter that is the LINE PCC parameter TRAN option is specified the PCC control byte is translated into standard EBCDIC before being applied refer to the Character Code Assignment Tables in appendix C of this guide In this case you must specify the byte option of the ASSIGN parameter as an EBCDIC translation of the PCC byte for example X F1 or 1 e PCC codes should not be reassigned when the system is printing online because the carriage control codes are converted to 3211 codes whose functions are specifically defined before they are sent Any special PCC byte assignments are ignored for online printing and the defaults that were defined for PCCTYPE IBM321 1are used PCC
95. default CME CONSTANT The CONSTANT parameter of the CME has no default and must parameter point be specified unless all that is required is a font change in the to note variable data CME FONT Specifies a value to be used as an index into the font list as specified by the PDE command or a DJDE The selected font is used when imaging the input data or CME data A PDE command is selected by the FORMAT parameter of the OUTPUT command Syntax ac CME FONT value Option Table 4 16 CME FONT parameter option and definition Option Definition value May range from 1 to n where nis the number of different fonts specified by the FONTS parameter of the PDE command A value of 1 specifies the first font in the PDE FONTS parameter 2 the second and so forth The default for a value is the current font specified with the last FONT parameter initially the value is 1 Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 13 Specifying print format parameters Default CME FONT parameter points to note XYZ No default A font specification applies to input variable data as well as to static CME data If a line number LINE and character position POSITION but no insertion text CONSTANT are specified the font change that is called out applies to input variable data at the specified position Fonts may be specified at any point The last font that is specified remains in effect until another font is s
96. dump The online dump provides a printout of all the command and data transmission taking place between the host computer and the printing system Starting and ending online dump sessions To print a dump of an online job you wish to troubleshoot follow these steps 1 Specify the DFLT JDE and the OLDUMP JDL on the Online Job Manager window at the controller The OLDUMP JDL which was loaded on your system at installation contains the VOLUME HOST OLDUMP and CODE EBCDIC commands as well as the DFLT JDE 2 Run the job you intend to troubleshoot 3 Terminate the dump session by clicking the End button on the Online Job Manager window Online dump format and content Each host command directs the printer to perform an operation or provides control information used during printing The control information could be printed with carriage control only or printer control such as load FCB All print commands and some control commands transmit data to and from the printing system The dump format for each of these commands contains a HEADER and DATA segment The HEADER segment consists of the fields shown in the following table Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 73 PDL principles and procedures Table 1 13 Print format command usage for online dump Field Definition HOST COMMAND The English translation of the host command in hexadecimal END STATUS One byte of status in hexadecimal transmitted to
97. error message that indicates that the file name is wrong The system then proceeds to process the data as variable text data If the system reads more card image records than the maximum number of card images specified by the DJDE it discards the extra records The preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page with an error message indicating that the excess card file images were lost If the file cannot be created due to insufficient space on the disk the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page with an error message indicating there is not enough space on the disk for the file being downloaded The system then proceeds to read and discard the file 2 The system makes an appropriate amount of disk space available for the file If the file contains errors that preclude printing or storage the system discards the file 3 The system reads the card image file records When the system reads a card image file record it uses record delimiters if any to determine record length Only the data portion of a record is used for file processing Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Records with a length greater than 80 bytes are truncated to 80 bytes records with a length less than 80 bytes are padded with ASCII blanks to 80 bytes Character translation may be performed depending on the JDE in effect 4 The system terminates record processing for the card image being do
98. graphic data from the beginning of the user portion of the record GRAPHIC Specifies that the DJDE is a graphic sentinel SAVE Specifies that image IMG files that were updated during the current report will not be purged when processing of the report is complete DJDE descriptions The following sections give the definition syntax and options for each available DJDE ALTER DJDE Type Syntax 5 14 Specifies new imaging parameters for graphics previously referenced using the HOLD automatic reimaging parameter Record oriented graphic ALTER name vpos units hpos units n d INK S inkref inkrefs Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 7 ALTER DJDE options and definitions Option Definition name Identifies a previously specified graphic that is currently subject to the HOLD parameter of the command that specifies it Refer to the IMAGE DJDE description later in this chapter vpos vertical position Specifies the vertical position of the top edge of the graphic relative to 0 0 on the current physical page hpos horizontal position Specifies the horizontal position of the left edge of the graphic relative to 0 0 on the current physical page The form of the specification UN CM IN DOTS or XDOTS is the same as for vpos nid numerator denominator Specifies the reference s
99. graphic is imaged on each page for example forms may not be invoked in Batch mode This feature may be invoked by the GRAPHICS parameter of the OUTPUT command Formats for graphic data Random Mode Only format Document Interleaved format 6 4 There are four possible formats for jobs that incorporate graphics If you are loading the graphics from magnetic tape the graphics tape must be formatted appropriately for the format being used The formats are e Random Mode Only format e Document Interleaved format Page Interleaved format Batch Mode format To transfer IMG files from a tape to the system disk independent of printing Random Mode Only format use the controller user interface LCDS Media Resource Manager window Refer to the online help on your controller for the procedure In this format a report data stream begins with a set of one or more graphics before the first record of text These graphics are copied one at a time to named IMG disk files When the report has finished printing the img files created are automatically deleted unless you have explicitly specified otherwise A document interleaved graphic report tape must be formatted as follows e The tape format may be any legal fixed or variable length block or in a record format that is supported by the DP 2000 Series EPS that is BLOCK or RECORD STRUCTURE F FB V or VB It may not be an undefined block or record format that is RECORD STR
100. ground adapter plug to connect equipment to an electrical outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal Always place equipment on a solid support surface with adequate strength for its weight Always use materials and supplies specifically designed for your Xerox equipment Use of unsuitable materials may result in poor performance and may create a hazardous situation Never move either the printer or the printer controller without first contacting Xerox for approval e Never attempt any maintenance that is not specifically described in this documentation Never remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws There are no operator serviceable areas within these covers Never override electrical or mechanical interlocks Never use supplies or cleaning materials for other than their intended purposes Keep all materials out of the reach of children e Never operate the equipment if you notice unusual noises or odors Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and call service to correct the problem If you need any additional safety information concerning the equipment or materials Xerox supplies call Xerox Product Safety at the following toll free number in the United States 1 800 828 6571 Using LCDS Print Description Language Laser safety For customers outside the United States contact your local Xerox representative or operating company Operation safety Europe This Xerox prod
101. in computers and related devices since information can be represented with electric pulses O off 1 on Most computer calculations are binary In the binary numbering system either of the characters 0 or 1 The bit is the base unit of information used by computers It can take the form of a magnetized spot an electric pulse or a positive or negative charge A sequentially stored set of bits represents a character on a computer Multipliers are 1 or 0 byte 8 192 bits kilobyte KB or 1 024 bytes 8 388 608 bits Computer space equivalents are 1 5 KB about 1 single spaced typed page 30 KB about 20 typed pages 150 KB about 100 typed pages Abbreviation for binary digit the smallest unit of information recognized by a computer See also binary digit Visual representation of graphic images in which a bit defines a picture element pixel for example if a bit is 1 the corresponding pixel is printed Process of combining two or more records into a single block of data which can then be moved operated upon or stored as a single unit by the computer Number of characters or bytes contained in a block of data the block is treated as a unit within the computer Block length is usually invariable within a system and may be specified in units such as records words computer words or characters bottom of form beginning of tape bits per inch Using LCDS Print Description Language Glossary bps bits per
102. in which the OUTPUT command parameters affect each other as well as other commands and what requirements exist under those circumstances Some specifications that are selectable from the user interface may override the JSL specifications OUTPUT command examples This section shows some examples of the use of some OUTPUT command parameters OUTPUT GRAPHICS YES UNITS 150 CYCLEFORMS NONE FORMAT PDE1 RESOLUTION 300 OUTPUT COPIES 3 DUPLEX YES SHIFT YES OFFSET FIRST NUMBER 1 66 132 COVER FRONT SEP FORMS GBAR Pages printed with the OUTPUT command shown above are duplex with a margin shift of 75 dots Three copies of the report are made the first of which is offset the second and third copies are stacked on top of the first Each page is numbered at the end of line 66 The form GBAR appears on each data page of the report Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 89 Specifying print format parameters Example 3 The commands in the following figure illustrate use of the offsetting features of the OUTPUT command The parameter ALL offsets all copies of all reports FIRST offsets just the first copy of each report and NONE inhibits offsetting OUTPUT COPIES 2 OUTPUT COPIES 2 OUTPUT COPIES 2 OFFSET ALL OFFSET FIRST OFFSET NONE Copy 2 Report 2 Copy 1 Report 2 Copy 2 Report 2 Copy 1 Report 2 Copy 2 Report 1 Copy 1 Report 1 Copy 2 Report 2 Copy 1 Report
103. information on how color commands are treated by the DP EPS Table 1 8 Sample JSL JDLHLC JDL System level commands VFUL VEU ASSIGN 1 5 ASSIGN 2 10 ASSIGN 3 15 TOF 5 BOF 66 PDEI1 PDE BEGIN 175 DOTS 00 XDOTS FONTS UN110E PRI1OE PR124B PDE2 PDE FONTS L0512C LO5SCA LOSITA PMODE LANDSCAPE BEGIN 0 725IN 1 000 IN IDR1 IDR LIST RED BLACK PINK IDFAULT RED IDR2 IDR ICATALOG XEROX PALETTE PICTORIAL LIST BLACK RED PALE PINK IDFAULT BLACK T1 TABLE CONSTANT A REPORT GI CRI CONSTANT 2 6 EQ T1 VOLUME HOST IBMONL CODE ASCII RECORD LENGTH 136 STRUCTURE VB LTHFLD 2 ADJUST 0 FORMAT BIN PREAMBLE 3 LINE DATA 1 132 OVERPRINT PRINT NODISP VFU VFUI IDEN PREFIX A DJDE SKIP 6 OFFSET 2 OPRINFO YES RSTACK TEST C1 DELIMITER YES ACCT USER BIN Catalog level commands 1 46 Using LCDS Print Description Language CATPOW CATGRP Job or DEET END PDL principles and procedures Table 1 8 Sample JSL Continued CATALOG VOLUME HOST
104. is larger than the specified size selecting SEMIAUTO or BEST causes the printer to stop and wait for operator confirmation to continue printing using the larger paper Further mismatches of this type are ignored until The STOCKS parameter changes End Of Report and no STOCKS parameter is in effect End Of Job The printer stops printing The operator must either select Continue to confirm the larger paper or change the paper or the effective stock in order for the printer to resume printing The operator can also abort the report EXACT or STOP causes the report to be aborted if the printer does not halt printing OUTPUT STAPLE Specifies that copy sets will be bound by a wire stitch on printers that are configured with a stitcher stacker option Jobs can be offset and stapled simultaneously This command is ignored by the DP 100 115 135 155 180 EPS because these systems do not have an internal stitcher However the command may be coded in a JSL that is compiled on the DP 100 115 135 155 180 EPS for use on another printing system that has a stitcher stacker OUTPUT STAPLE NO YES Table 4 74 OUTPUT STAPLE parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Species that a single wire stitch will be placed in sets of printed output LPS systems Specifying STAPLE YES forces the following parameter options NTO1 YES FACEUP YES and COLLATE YES DP 75 90 systems If a job requires N
105. kit a hardware option to be installed There are performance considerations when you are switching paper sizes across pitch modes The PAPERSIZE parameter is not supported as a DJDE Therefore a JDE page oriented DJDE that calls out the desired paper size is needed If the JSL specifies the paper size using the keyword method such as USLEGAL A4 or B4 the form coding must use the same terminology If the JSL specifies 8 5 14 and your form specifies USLEGAL an error message is displayed indicating that the form paper size is too small or too large USLETTER and B4 are the only sizes for which the keyword and the x y expression do not create any incompatibilities OUTPUT PAPERSIZE USLETTER FEED MAIN DUPLEX NO NUMBER 1 1 80 FORMAT SMPPOE OUTPUT PURGE Specifies whether or not the system should delete graphic disk files at the end of report This is applicable only to documents with interleaved graphics OUTPUT PURGE NO YES Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Specifying print format parameters Table 4 69 OUTPUT PURGE parameter options and definitions Option Definition NO Specifies that graphic disk files should not be deleted YES Specifies that all MG graphics files that were created or replaced by document interleaved graphic processing for this report should be deleted at the end of the report printing Default YES OUTPUT PURGE You
106. list of the form If a form does not contain an ink list the form is printed in black Default NONE OUTPUT BINDING Specifies printing for long edge or short edge binding Causes the page to be rotated to orient it correctly for binding by a finishing device on the long or short edge Syntax OUTPUT BINDING LONG SHORT Options Table 4 44 OUTPUT BINDING parameter options and definitions Option Definition LONG Rotates the sheet so that binding space will occur along the long edge of the printed page SHORT Rotates the sheet so that binding space will occur along the short edge of the printed page Default LONG OUTPUT BINDING _ The following figure shows the output using two hole drilled long parameter point edge feed paper with short edge binding to note Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 45 Specifying print format parameters Print results BINDING SHORT Page 1 Front Short edge binding of 2 hole drilled paper T AWHEAW Back f ES Page 3 Front z 2 Print results BINDING SHORT Page 1 Front Short edge binding of 2 hole drilled paper AWHEAW Back Page 3 Front rz pir Figure 4 3 Two hole drilled output from a long edge feed job with short edge binding The following figure shows the results of different specifications 4 46 Using LCDS Print Description Language A Specifying print format parameters BINDING LONG E Binding edge
107. located in the bottom half of the feeder stacker modules Using LCDS Print Description Language HCS hexadecimal HFDL hierarchy HIP host host interface hpos image area initialize input output interface interpolation Interpress Interpress font utility IFU program Using LCDS Print Description Language Glossary high capacity stacker Stacker bin capable of holding 2500 sheets of 20 pound 75 gsm paper In the LPS the high capacity stacker bins are located in the top half of the feeder stacker modules Numbering system with a base of 16 In this system 10 through 15 are represented by A through F respectively host forms description language Relative priority assigned to arithmetic or logical operations that must be performed Host Interface Processor Computer accessed by users which serves as a source of high speed data processing for workstations with less computer power Connection between network and host computer horizontal positioning identifier Character used to identify or name data and possibly to indicate certain properties of that data Interpress font utility image generator image generator module Area on a physical page that may contain text or graphics 1 To prepare the magnetic surface of a blank diskette so that it can accept data 2 To set all information in a computer system to its starting values usually the first step is accomplished when a program is bo
108. mode too small to accommodate a larger paper size Problem You want to estimate how many applications you could run on a particular shift However given the size and complexity of your applications you are uncertain as to how to plan Solution By looking at the paper sizes and thereby the pitch modes required by each application and the number of pages in each application and by associating these with the ppms provided in the preceding table you can roughly estimate the length of time each application requires for printing There are no absolute rules and no set methods for accomplishing your printing goals The variables that are involved include individual finishing device requirements the paper sizes required by your applications the complexity of each page the number of pages in each application and so forth However a general understanding of the relationship between paper size and pitch mode and the advantages of specifying pitch modes will help you optimize your printing activities Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Default OUTPUT TRANS parameter points to note Syntax Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT TRANS Specifies whether or not transparencies are used in the print job OUTPUT TRANS YES NO Table 4 79 OUTPUT TRANS parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Indicates that transparencies will be used in the job NO Indicates t
109. of 0 0 This parameter is specified as a decimal number with up to three digits to the right of the decimal point and may be followed by a space and the units indicator hpos horizontal position Specifies the horizontal position of the left edge of the graphic as a rightward offset relative to 0 0 on the current physical page The form of the specification is the same as for vpos units Specifies the unit of measure for the vertical and horizontal positions of the image on the page e DOTS e CM centimeters N inches UN user defined unit The default unit is IN n d numerator denominator Specifies the reference scale factor Each parameter n and d must be an integer in the range of 1 to 8 thereby allowing a reference scale factor in the range of 1 8 to 8 The reference scale factor is multiplied by the scale factor specified at the time the graphic was digitized and the product is rounded to the nearest integer in the range 1 to 8 That integer becomes the effective scale factor with which each pixel of the graphic is imaged If n is specified but not d d is assumed to be 1 INKS Specifies that the ink references that follow will override the inks that were defined in the image file inkref ink reference Specifies the inks that override the corresponding inks specified in the ink list of the image file Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 59 Specifying print format parameters Default OUTPUT IMAGE parame
110. of a JSL Use the END command to signal the end of a JSL or other file such as a PDE CME or STOCKSET e End of all JSLs To signal the end of all JSLs PDEs CMEs TSTs or STOCKSETS that are being processed enter END followed by a semicolon twice as shown below END END Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Multiple part options Use parentheses to enclose multiple parts of a parameter option Example CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 120 EQ T1 Order of right part components If you want to specify more than one component of a parameter right part enter the components in the order they are shown in the command description and separated by commas Example The MESSAGE OTEXT parameter has two alternative options one of which has four components enclosed in parentheses The square brackets indicate that a component is optional The braces indicate that the command contains alternative options only one of which may be used Alternatives are separated by the separator character OTEXT sc passnum END WAIT NONE e Placeholders To specify a particular component but not the optional components preceding it do not enter more than one comma as a place holders for the component you do not specify The component must be optional as indicated by square brackets in the syntax definition for the parameter When the comma preceding the optional component ap
111. on a report See also landscape page orientation portrait page orientation Part of acommand other than the keyword On systems with XPAF a job that is sent directly from a host to a Xerox printer using XPAF without undergoing XPAF processing See also XPAF In programming to modify a portion of the program at the machine language level as opposed to modifying at the source program level printer carriage control print description language Language used to describe printing jobs to an LPS PDL describes the input type format characteristics performs the processing functions logical processing and describes the output type format font selection accounting options 1 Horizontal character spacing 10 pitch 10 characters per inch spacing is called pica and 12 pitch 12 characters per inch spacing is called elite 2 The number of page images placed on the xerographic belt during one revolution The DocuPrint 180 DocuPrint 180MX LPS supports two pitch modes 7 pitch when paper 9 inches 229 mm long or less is used to print a job and 3 pitch when paper 9 to 17 inches 229 to 432 mm long is used to print a job Acronym for picture element Smallest addressable point of a bit mapped screen that can be independently assigned color and intensity Pixels are definable locations on a display used to form images For graphic displays more pixels generally provide higher resolution Spots dots and pixels are used interc
112. options are ignored by the DP EPS They are included here for compatibility MOVE Specifies that all referenced graphic disk files will be copied into the print file On the DP EPS YES is used instead NOSUB If a graphic is missing specifies that no substitution for the missing graphic image is desired This option is ignored by the DP EPS Default NO OUTPUT Ifyou are using the IMAGE parameter in conjunction with GRAPHICS GRAPHICS make sure to list the GRAPHICS parameter first parameter points as these two parameters are order dependent tonote in Batch mode only one graphic is imaged per page e After a graphic has been processed as part of the job if a switch to a JDE with GRAPHICS NO occurs the GRAPHICS NO specification is ignored OUTPUT GRAPHICS OUTPUT GRAPHICS BATCH RESOLUTION 300 parameter examples OUTPUT GRAPHICS MOVE RESOLUTION 300 PURGE NO OUTPUT IDFAULT Specifies the default ink that will be used for objects whose ink is not specified This parameter remains in effect until another IDFAULT parameter is specified Syntax OUTPUT IDFAULT inkref Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 57 Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 57 OUTPUT IDFAULT parameter options and definitions Option Definition inkref ink reference The default ink that will be used for all subsequent parameters that do not specify a colo
113. parameter 3 24 3 27 HRPTNA parameter 3 24 3 27 TCOUNT parameter 3 25 3 27 TEST parameter 3 25 TYPE parameter 3 26 banner pages 3 22 3 28 BASELINE parameter LINE command 4 23 BATCH DJDE 5 16 Batch mode graphics 6 4 Batch Mode format 6 5 BDELETE command 3 28 3 31 TEST parameter 3 28 BEGIN DJDE 5 17 BEGIN parameter PDE command 4 93 RRESUME command 3 49 RSUSPEND command 3 49 begins multiple 5 9 BFORM DJDE 5 18 BFORM parameter OUTPUT command 4 44 BINDING parameter OUTPUT command 4 45 bins output specifying 4 51 5 24 blanks in command syntax 1 12 BLANKTYPE parameter LINE command 4 24 block length 2 14 2 15 selecting or deleting from a report 3 28 BLOCK command 2 12 2 19 Using LCDS Print Description Language INDEX 1 INDEX ADJUST parameter 2 13 CONSTANT parameter 2 13 FORMAT parameter 2 14 LENGTH parameter 2 14 LMULT parameter 2 15 LTHFLD parameter 2 15 OFFSET parameter 2 16 POSTAMBLE parameter 2 16 PREAMBLE parameter 2 17 ZERO parameter 2 17 Block mode graphics 6 3 BMULT parameter VOLUME command 2 56 BOF 4 108 4 109 BOF DJDE 5 20 BOF parameter VFU command 4 109 Bottom of Form see BOF 4 108 braces 1 14 brackets square 1 14 BSELECT command 3 28 3 31 TEST parameter 3 28 C C DJDE 5 20 CANCEL DJDE 5 21 carriage control see printer carriage control case changing 1 8 CATALOG command 1 26 1 58 catalog commands codi
114. previous data including character spacing which may vary between the two lines of data e IGNORE All overprint lines are ignored e MERGE Same as PRINT except when used with FONTINDEX or CME processing refer to the LINE OVERPRINT parameter points to note section below and to example 2 of the Examples section for this parameter e PRINT2 Specifies that up to two consecutive lines are printed per line that is one line and one overprint Other overprints for the line are ignored disp display This option has the following components e DISP NODISP NOTE This option is not functional on the DP EPS It is preserved here for compatibility with other Xerox laser printing systems The number of overprint lines is always printed on the accounting page Default PRINT NODISP LINE OVERPRINT parameter points 4 32 to note FONTINDEX and OVERPRINT When used in conjunction with OVERPRINT FONTINDEX is handled as follows For OVERPRINT PRINT the printing system overprints records analogously to an impact printer if the fonts are the same size If the fonts differ records are overprinted without regard to character spacing For OVERPRINT MERGE the system replaces blank characters in the previously printable line if this print record overprints the line Character spacing values are adjusted thus proportionally spaced or different size fonts may be used and the system performs the character placement
115. previously separate logical pages on the same physical page of a document Modify documents on a page to page basis by using copy modification entries CMEs to replace selected portions of text with other data change fonts or label copies as confidential Merge variable print data with forms stored on the system disk This feature eliminates the need for forms overlays and most preprinted forms as well as assuring perfect registration Print two different forms back to back duplex on one sheet of paper thereby reducing paper costs Additionally this option offers potential savings in inventory filing storage and mailing costs for computer generated material Feed paper either short edge first or long edge first to accommodate a variety of paper sizes Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 1 PDL principles and procedures Enabling PDL features and functions Job Source Libraries JSLs Dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs To enable these functions you enter PDL commands that do the following for your print job Describe the input type format characteristics and source Define any logical or special processing functions to be performed on selected text pages or copies Describe the output type format font selection accounting options and destination Each command has a set of parameters and parameter options that are used to define the above characteristics of a print job PD
116. print format parameters 4 16 Syntax Options CME POSITION Specifies the initial character position at which to begin to apply the CME in the print line ac CME POSITION n Table 4 19 CME POSITION parameter option and definition Option Definition n An integer value in the range of 1 the first position of the print line and the value specified by the ength option of the LINE DATA parameter Default 1 CME command points to note The CME LINE and POSITION parameters are order dependent that is LINE must always precede POSITION Data lines The position of the line is altered to accommodate the line with a larger font Multiple copies If a multicopy report is aborted before all the pages are processed one copy is printed if the CMEs are copy sensitive Otherwise all copies of the setup pages are printed e CMEs are not applied if OVERPRINT MERGE and FONTINDEX are both specified e Ifan indefinite range is specified for example 10 CMEs are applied only up until the last print line for the page If a definite range is specified such as 10 15 CMEs are applied regardless of whether or not variable data appears on those lines Multiple lines and columns You may specify multiple lines and multiple columns for each line Multiple line specifications must be given in ascending top to bottom of page order Multiple column specifications for a line range must
117. processing Logical processing command descriptions 3 22 Logical processing commands cause the system to test input data records in the job against specified criteria If the criteria are satisfied the system performs specific actions The commands described in the following sections provide logical processing functions The following table summarizes the logical processing commands and the functions that are associated with them Table 3 12 Summary of commands associated with logical processing functions Command Specifies BANNER Specifies the number of consecutive banner pages the system must detect before it recognizes the end of the report RAUX Specifies test for feeding a page from the tray configured with the AUX stock RDELETE and RSELECT RDELETE Specifies a test for deleting a record RSELECT Specifies a test for selecting a record RFEED Changes stock names on a page basis without using DJDEs ROFFSET Specifies a test for offsetting a page in the stacker RPAGE Specifies a test for repositioning a logical page RRESUME and RSUSPEND RRESUME Specifies a test for resuming printing RSUSPEND Specifies a test for stopping printing RSTACK Specifies a test for detecting the end of a report BANNER command Specifies the number of consecutive banner pages the system must detect before it will recognize the end of the report The BANNER command includes a test e
118. range of lines tested via the LINENUM parameter This avoids time spent with unnecessary testing of lines that are not supposed to meet the criteria in any case For example in a forms application with an address field at the top and mailing information at the bottom you might use the LINENUM command to prevent tests on the data associated with the address label and mailing info Restrict the columns tested in the CRITERIA VALUE parameter to the shortest possible length to avoid testing blank space However you should be sure that you are providing for all possible values For example you should not limit the column size to space enough for only 999 999 if there is a chance that 1 000 000 might occur on a rare occasion For applications in which either CRITERIA VALUE or CRITERIA CONSTANT can be used choose CRITERIA CONSTANT because it has less performance impact When coding numeric values into TABLE CONSTANTS for maximum performance specify the shortest possible numeric string Omit superfluous leading zeros trailing zeros white space and thousands separators For example use 50000 instead of 050 000 00 Because the former expresses the same value as the latter but with only half as many characters it takes much less time to process CRITERIA VALUE criid CRITERIA VALUE offset length GT tabid parameter syntax LINENUM init count example Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 21 Using logical
119. report ply OUTPUT NTO1 Specifies on a report basis whether all copies of a particular report are printed last page to first n to 1 Syntax OUTPUT NTO1 NO YES n Options Table 4 64 OUTPUT NTO1 parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Specifies last to first page printing To print n to 1 output processing must print the report starting with the last page Therefore output processing cannot begin until input processing has finished with the entire report It is possible that input processing does not recognize the end of a report until it detects the start of the next report header banner page When YES is specified the system assumes a 50 sheet threshold for the maximum report size to be printed N to 1 NO Specifies first page to last 1 to n printing n number The NTO1 threshold which specifies the maximum number of pages a report may have in order for it to be printed n to 1 If the threshold count is exceeded before the end of the report the system prints the entire report 1 to n The default value of n is 50 physical sheets but n may range from 1 to 32767 When a value is greater than 100 the system generates a warning message Using LCDS Print Description Language Default NO Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT NTO1 The NTO1 parameter interacts with some of the other OUTPUT parameter points command parameters These interactions can cause some of
120. represents the ink index in the current ILIST Page oriented Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 45 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Syntax INKINDEX offset ZERO ONE bitopt NONE Options Table 5 35 INKINDEX DJDE options and definitions Option Definition offset Indicates the byte offset in the data record where the ink index number is located ZERO Specifies that the first ink in the list is referenced with an index value of 0 ONE Specifies that the first ink in the list is referenced with an index value of 1 bitopt bit option Specifies the number of bits that should be used in calculating the ink index The range is 1 through 7 The default bitopt value is 4 NONE Specifies that there is no ink index INKINDEX DJDE lf inks are used point to note if one inkrefin the list is omitted commas must be used as place holders to maintain the relative positioning of the remaining ink references f more than two ink references are specified the additional ink references are ignored INVERT DJDE Specifies that the subsequent page content will be inverted 180 degrees when printed on the physical page Portrait oriented text is printed as inverse portrait landscape text is printed as inverse landscape and vice versa Type Page oriented Syntax INVERT FRONT BACK BOTH NONE 5 46 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job
121. shows in compact table format the syntax for each parameter of each PDL command The table columns contain the following information Command column Lists the PDL commands in alphabetical order Using LCDS Print Description Language B 1 PDL command quick reference e Syntax column Beside each command in the Command column lists the command parameters in alphabetical order and gives the syntax for each parameter Default column Gives the default option for each parameter PDL command Quick Reference table Table B 2 PDL command quick reference table Command Syntax Default ABNORMAL ABNORMAL ACCTFEED AUX OPR OPR ABNORMAL CODE IGNORE SPACE SUBSTITUTE IGNORE ABNORMAL ERROR ABORT CONTINUE STOP STOP ABNORMAL IMISMATCH ABORT CONTINUE STOP STOP ABNORMAL ISUBSTITUTE ANY NONE ANY ABNORMAL OTEXT WAIT NOWAIT NOWAIT ABNORMAL REP NO YES NO ABNORMAL SECURITY YES NO NO ACCT ACCT DEPT sc JDLNAME JDL ACCT USER BIN TRAY BOTH NONE BIN ALTER DJDE ALTER name vpos units hpos units n a INK S only inkref inkrefg BANNER BANNER HCOUNT value testexp BANNER HJOBNO offset length NONE NONE BANNER HRPTNA offset length NONE NONE BANNER TCOUNT value 0 BANNER TEST testexp BANNER TYPE DATE BANNER BANNER BARCODE BARCODE BSKIP
122. size shift occurs if YES is specified V4 75 and voz 75 NO Specifies that no shift occurs v420 and vo 0 Default NO OUTPUT SHIFT parameter points to note Syntax e Ifthe origin of a print line is off the page the printer prints as much of the line as possible and provides a message once per report indicating that printing is off the page Graphics and logos are not allowed to start off the page If they are positioned at a point that is outside the page boundary an error message is displayed OUTPUT SIZING Specifies how the system matches the paper sizes in the output bins and how it responds to paper and bin size mismatches When a stock has more than one tray assignment and these trays contain different size paper the system tries to match the paper sizes in the trays You can specify one of the following options based on whether or not the printer will be attended by an operator during printing OUTPUT SIZING SEMIAUTO STOP BEST EXACT Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 77 Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 73 OUTPUT SIZING parameter options and definitions Option Definition SEMIAUTO Standard mode of operation Causes the printer to stop printing when there is a paper size mismatch For the printer to resume printing the operator must do one of the following Resume printing to print the job on the next larger size paper e Change the paper or
123. stored in a computer under an identifying name Page of data that when preceded by proper commands is stored on the system disk as a permanent file It may be merged with variable data by a form start command See also FDL FSL 1 Layout of a document including margins page length line spacing typeface and so on 2 In data storage the way the surface of a disk is organized to store data 3 To prepare the surface of a disk for acceptance of data Keyboard or printer control character that causes the printer to skip the top of the next page formatting print service forms source library Uncompiled collection of user created files containing FDL commands See also FDL form font specification table group code recording mode Refers to the specific density of data such as 6250 bpi as it is recorded on tape which is measured in bits per inch bpi Smallest rectangle enclosed by horizontal and vertical lines on a grid The size of a grid unit is expressed as the length of one side of a rectangle grams per square meter A tool used in offset printing typesetting and laser printing to convert a continuous tone such as photographic image to dots which allows the image to be rendered accurately in these printing processes high capacity feeder Feeder tray capable of holding 2500 sheets of 20 pound 75 gsm paper The high capacity feeder trays are the primary paper supply for the DP180 DocuPrint 180MX LPS They are
124. subsequent pages Refer to the IDR command description in the Specifying print format parameters chapter for an explanation of what is defined in an IDR Page oriented IDR idrname Table 5 32 IDR DJDE options and definitions Option Definition idrname ink descriptor reference name The name of the IDR previously defined by an IDR command in the JSL that will be used for subsequent pages ILIST DJDE Type Syntax Specifies a list of all the inks that may be referenced by the ink index on the page Page oriented ILIST inkname inkname inknames Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 43 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Options Table 5 33 ILIST DJDE options and definitions Option Definition inkname Specifies an ink name that will be part of the ILIST that is defined for the page Note that the ink name is specified within single quotes ILIST DJDE example ILIST BLACK XEROX RED IMAGE DJDE In Batch mode this DJDE defines new imaging parameters for subsequent graphics In all other modes it defines imaging parameters for the named graphic Type Record oriented Syntax IMAGE imgname vpos units hpos units T H L n dll INKS inkref inkrefs Options Table 5 34 IMAGE DJDE options and definitions Option Definition imgname image name The name of an IMG file or the name
125. than once in the TCODE command inputspec for this parameter is the same as defined for TASSIGN ALL Resets all types for all characters Default Example 1 Example 2 No default TCODE command examples Following are a few examples of how to use the TCODE command The basic character set used for default types is ASCII The keyboard display has uppercase and lowercase character capability Tli TCODE DEFAULT ASCII TASSIGN 3 A A A Z TASSIGN 4 A a A z The basic character set used for default types is EBCDIC The keyboard display has uppercase and lowercase character capability T2 TCODE DEFAULT EBCD TASSIGN 3 TASSI Example 3 C Up qe M RV QST uw tA ges i Sp aAa y ay py e ge eS y a AS GN 4 a The basic character set used for default types is ASCII The keyboard display is limited to uppercase only T3 TCODE DEFAULT ASCII TASSIGN 3 A A A Z TASSIGN 4 A A A Z The symbol functions as a case switching operator Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 53 Specifying input parameters Example 4 The basic character set is EBCDIC The editor that was used to edit the JSL file is limited to uppercase only T4 2 54 TCODE DEFAULT TASSIGN TASSIGN EBCDIC 3 CA pep RC gum Ry St G 4 A I J
126. the image on the page Available units are e DOTS e CM centimeters N inches UN user defined unit e XDOTS DOTS at 600 spi If UN is specified the user defined positioning unit must be previously defined by the OUTPUT UNITS command in the current JDE or JDL The default positioning unit is IN H HOLD Specifies that the same graphic is to be held and imaged without further callouts at the same position and with the same scale factor on all subsequent pages until changed by a DJDE CANCEL or ALTER T PAGE INTERLEAVED Type of graphic Specifies that the referenced graphic is page interleaved and follows the current page data in the input stream n d numerator denominator Specifies the reference scale factor Each parameter n and d must be an integer in the range of 1 to 8 thereby allowing a reference scale factor in the range of 1 8 to 8 The reference scale factor is multiplied by the scale factor specified at the time the graphic was digitized and the product is rounded to the nearest integer in the range 1 to 8 That integer becomes the effective scale factor with which the graphic is imaged INKS Specifies that the ink references that follow will override the inks that were defined in the image file inkref ink reference Specifies the inks that override the corresponding inks specified in the ink list of the image file INKINDEX DJDE Type Specifies a field within a data record that contains a number that
127. the CME will be applied If init is not specified the CME is applied to all copies 5 54 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 45 MODIFY DJDE options and definitions Continued Option Definition copies Specifies the number of plies passes on which to apply the CME If copies is not specified then the CME applies to all copies beginning with the copy number specified by init NONE Specifies that no CMEs will be applied data is processed without modification MODIFY DJDE points to note e Any CME invoked by a DJDE must be catalogued separately refer to Catalogued CMEs in the Specifying print format parameters chapter for further information The MODIFY DJDE takes effect at the next logical page boundary e The MODIFY DJDE parameters are the same as those for the OUTPUT MODIFY command e For the DP 2000 Series EPS copy variant CMEs also called copy sensitive CMEs are not supported Multiple copy output yields duplicate copies of copy 1 Only the CME that applies to copy 1 appears and it appears on all copies NUMBER DJDE Specifies page number properties and occurrence This DJDE takes effect at the next logical page boundary Type Page oriented Syntax NUMBER pnum Inum cnum findex inkref NO Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 55 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJ
128. the END command as shown below This also applies to CMEs PDEs TSTs and STOCKSETS you are coding END What may follow After you end a JSL you may still code certain items following the END the END command command Subsequent JSLs Following the END command for one JSL you may code additional JSLs If one JSL is to follow another the next command after the END command should be another JDL command Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 29 PDL principles and procedures Ending all JSLs CMEs PDEs TSTs and STOCKSETs Following an END command for a JSL you may code one or more CMEs CME command PDEs FORMAT command TSTs ROUTE command or stocksets STOCKSET command If the CME PDE TST or stockset that you are coding will be used by more than one JSL file or is referenced by a DJDE compile and catalog it as a separate file not part of any JSL Refer to Compiling a JSL later in this chapter for the procedure The end of all JSLs CMEs PDEs and so forth to be processed is indicated by two consecutive END commands as shown below END END Sample completed JSL The following figure shows the entire JSL constructed from the command level examples in this section This is an example of an online JSL Note that HOST IBMONL indicates the source and structure of input data The VOLUME HOST command indicates whether the JSL is for an offline tape or online job XRXSPL
129. the byte is to be translated into standard EBCDIC before being applied using the translation defined in the CODE parameter of the VOLUME command e NOTRAN Prohibits translation The transtype default is NOTRAN Default 0 NOTRAN Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 33 Specifying print format parameters LINE PCCTYPE Specifies a set of printer carriage control codes that will be used in printing a job Syntax LINE PCCTYPE PCCname PCCid USER Options Table 4 37 LINE PCCTYPE parameter options and definitions Option Definition PCCname printer carriage control name Choices are ANSI B2500 B2700 B3500 B3700 B4700 B6700 F650D H6000 H2000 H8276 IBM1401 IBM1403 IBM321 1 IBM4245 NCR Univac US70 Xerox PCCid printer carriage control identifier Refers to a PCC table that was defined in the JSL with the specified identifier USER Refers to a PCC table that was defined in the JSL without a label identifier Default Online IBM4245 Offline ANSI 4 34 Using LCDS Print Description Language LINE PCCTYPE parameter points to note Syntax Options Specifying print format parameters e For the DP EPS this parameter is treated as if the system were an IBM 3211 Note that there is no functional difference between IBM321 1 and IBM4245 for PCC types Creation of a user defined PCC table which may be referenced by either an identifier id or the keywor
130. the effective stock e Cancel the job If Continue is selected the system ignores further mismatches of this type until one of the following occurs The STOCKS parameter changes e The end of the report is detected and no STOCKS parameter is in effect The end of the print job is reached The printer stops printing STOP Causes the printer to cycle down if the exact paper size is not available To resume operation the operator must do one of the following Load the proper size paper and resume printing e Cancel the report BEST On the DP EPS this parameter functions the same as SEMIAUTO EXACT On the DP EPS this parameter functions the same as STOP Default OUTPUT SIZING parameter points to note 4 78 SEMIAUTO Apaper size is considered equal in size to another paper size if neither dimension differs by more than 15 600 of an inch e Use this command to print on paper larger than the specified paper size Data may be lost if the paper size is smaller than the image size Note that A4 paper is treated as smaller than 8 5 by 11 inch paper because it is narrower Regardless of the parameter selected if an exact match in paper size is found the matching tray is used The parameters differ only when no match is found Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Specifying print format parameters e Ifthe stock is not an exact paper size match but
131. the system disk from magnetic tape CD ROM or diskette They can also be downloaded from the host by using the FTP process or by FILE DJDE processing Graphics may be input either separately from or interleaved with textual data If the graphics are input separately they are recorded as permanent disk files If they are interleaved they may or may not be recorded as permanent disk files Refer to Graphic processing modes later in this chapter A graphic is typically incorporated into a document by a DJDE record occurring with the data targeted for the same simplex sheet or duplex side in which the graphic appears Additionally a graphic may be referenced in a form so that use of the form automatically includes the graphic NOTE The DP 2000 Series EPS can handle highlight colored graphics one color plus black from a Xerox 4850 4890 or DP92C HighLight Color Laser Printing System it prints them in shades of black However the systems cannot process multicolor graphics Using LCDS Print Description Language Using PDL commands for graphics Error handling for graphics Use the ABNORMAL ERROR parameter to specify how the system will handle error conditions involving graphics If you specified ABNORMAL ERROR STOP in the JSL the DP 2000 Series EPS systems do the following when they encounter an image that is off the page Display an error message e Partially print the image Give the operator the option to abo
132. the test fields and what they will be compared to There are two special cases in which the TEST parameter does not function as described above and the CRITERIA command fails For offline printing the record is too short to include the whole field that is being tested For online printing the record is padded with blanks to make it large enough Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing e A specific print line range is specified by the LINENUM parameter and the line or lines that are being tested contain no record that is the lines have been skipped or spaced over If the test specifies a change mode function the CRITERIA command fails because no change has occurred However the value for the LAST option of the CHANGE parameter remains unchanged for comparison with the next record Test expression The following diagram shows the syntax for a definition of the syntax test expression for a logical processing command The test definition is referenced in the syntax of each of the logical processing commands that follow it TEST criid TEST criid1 AND criid2 TEST criid1 OR criid2 tabid TABLE CONSTANT sc criid CRITERIA CONSTANT offset length EQ NE table command keyword TEST criid Test expression f only one criteria identifier is present C1 in this case the test example _ is satisfied if the criterion is met If the test is satisfied the logical processing function is pe
133. this chapter for this procedure Sample online JSL The following figure shows another example of an online JSL Note how comments are used to explain and identify parts of the JSL Table 1 10 Sample online JSL ONLINE JDL System level commands VFUL VEU ASSIGN 1 4 ASSIGN 2 10 ASSIGN 3 16 ASSIGN 4 22 ASSIGN 5 28 ASSIGN 6 34 ASSIGN 7 40 ASSIGN 8 46 ASSIGN 9 66 ASSIGN 10 52 ASSIGN 11 58 ASSIGN 12 64 TOF 4 BOF 66 Tables and criteria Tl TABLE MASK 2 CONSTANT HE DE PAGE Cl CONSTANT 1 10 EQ T1 LINENUM 1 10 T2 TABLE CONSTANT TRAILER PAGE Co CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 12 EQ T2 LINENUM 1 10 T3 TABLE CONSTANT EOJ C3 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 3 EQ T3 LINENUM 1 20 1 60 Using LCDS Print Description Language T4 C4 Ts C33 EN PDL principles and procedures Table 1 10 Sample online JSL Continued TABLE CONSTANT JOB CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 6 EQ T4 LINENUM 1 20 TABLE CONSTANT 10 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 10 EQ T5 LINENUM 50 10 VOLUME HOST IBMONI LINE PCCTYPE IBM3211 VFU VFU1 FCB IGNORE ACCT USER TRAY IDEN PREFIX DJDE SKIP 7 OFFSET 2 OPRINFO YES Job level commands J
134. through any other data Binary data usually consisting of dots arranged in scan lines according to the print order Creation of a page s bit map image for printing Collection of data or words treated as a unit Act of overcoming a problem or error during processing Typically a specialized software recovery routine gains control and attempts to resolve the error without crashing the system Access to a central computer by terminals or devices geographically separated from that computer In setting a separation boundary through the Bin Full Criteria task report refers to a subset of a job a job may consist of one or more reports Number of dots per unit The LPS imaging system converts a character from digitized data into a printed image composed of these tiny dots The greater the number of dots per inch that is the resolution the clearer the image that is produced Using LCDS Print Description Language ROM ROS SAFES scale SCSI SDLC SEF sequential set simplex printing SNA sort source source language spi spooling spot static data Using LCDS Print Description Language Glossary read only memory Solid state memory for programs It cannot be rewritten raster output scanner stand alone field engineering software To adjust font or image size according to given proportions small computer system interface Accepted standard for connecting peripheral devices to computers synchron
135. to 1 or face up printing and STAPLEZYES has been specified the system prints the job 1 to N and face down NO Specifies that no stitching will occur Default NO Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 79 Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT STAPLE parameter points to note The STAPLE command must be specified in the initial JDL JDE or the JDL JDE DJDE record must be the first record processed If there is a banner page in front of the JDL JDE DJDE record the STAPLE command is ignored If the NTO1 YES and STAPLE YES parameters are specified the system overrides NTO1 YES with NTO1 NO and places an error message in the listing file when the JSL is compiled Individual sheets cannot be offset when they are coded in the JSL To maintain consistent face up orientation while stitched and unstitched jobs are delivered to the stacker you may print unstitched sets N to 1 provided that the system does not encounter the override conditions that have been defined DP 75 90 systems Jobs greater than 50 pages are not stapled The default behavior is to fault the job with no error message displayed If you want the job to print without any finishing do the following in the Overprint Finishing section of the Finishing window 1 Select Print Job Unfinished 2 Select Check Set Size before Printing OUTPUT STOCKS Identifies the stockset and its associated stocks that will be used for a report Th
136. to the ink that was specified in the IDFAULT parameter of the OUTPUT command An inkindex value greater than the ILIST size causes an out of range message to be displayed The operator has the option to continue printing the job using black ink or to abort the job CME LINE Specifies the line range within which the CME is located on the page ac CME LINE n n m n Table 4 18 CME LINE parameter options and definitions Option Definition n The initial line number of the copy modification rectangle m The number of lines to repeat the information If not specified the information applies only to the starting line A dash character indicates that information is to apply to all lines on a page beginning with the line indicated by n Default CME LINE parameter point to note No default The line numbers specified in the LINE parameter must always be in ascending order In other words you cannot specify one line number then list another one of lower value in the same command For example the following command is incorrect and will not be compiled CME1 CME LINE 2 3 POS 15 CONSTANT 6 HELLO FONTINDEX 3 LINE 1 POS 15 As you can see the first line parameter specifies starting at line 2 while the second LINE parameter specifies line 1 which contradicts the ascending order Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 15 Specifying
137. whether you will use catalogs Short JSL coding procedure The fastest and easiest way to create a JSL is to build it from an existing one such as the default JSL named DFAULT JSL provided with your system software The following steps describe how to create a JSL the short way 1 Open a Text Editor window by following these steps a On the controller screen right click in the background to display the Workspace menu b From the Workspace menu select Programs The Programs pull down menu opens beside the Workspace menu Workspace Menu Programs File Manager Style Manager A Text Editor Mailer Calendar _JOW Clock il Audio Control ip Audio lImage Viewer Snapshot Figure 1 9 Workspace and Programs menus Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures c From the Programs menu select Text Editor A Text Editor window opens Texteditor UNTITLED TAH I Figure 1 10 Text Editor window 2 Bring the default JSL stored in the Icds folder on the system disk into the Text Editor using the following procedure a From the File menu on the Text Editor menu bar select Include The Text Editor Include a File window opens Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 51 PDL principles and procedures Figure 1 11 Text Editor Include a File window b Inthe Enter path or folder name text field at the top of t
138. with its short edge as the leading edge This is called short edge feed SEF The SEFFNT command enables or disables the short edge feed font mapping feature SEFFNT creates customized mapping files of the type LIB and triggers the system to invoke short edge feed font mapping It is used in conjunction with the PDE currently in effect In order to maintain the current definition of landscape and portrait in these jobs you must define a mapping in which every landscape font used in a SEF job has a portrait equivalent and vice versa When the system recognizes a SEF job it scans the PDE font list and substitutes these fonts with font mappings defined in the JSL If you specify that font mappings are contained in a file the input task checks to see if this file exists If the mapping file or a font file that has been mapped to does not exist job processing continues using the font specified in the PDE command If SEF font mapping is in effect and if no mapping exists for a font referenced in a PDE you receive a Continue or Abort Input message on the screen which gives you the option to continue processing using the font specified in the PDE or to abort the job The SEFFNT command has different effects depending on the context e Bypassing font mapping SEFFNT MAP NONE e Mapping contained in the JDL SEFFNT MAP l abel Standalone mapping files SEFFNT MAP fileid e Creation of a mapping file label SEFFNT SEFMAP
139. you need to know the following e What a JSL specifies Before creating a JSL considerations and decisions e How to code a JSL e How to compile a JSL into a JDL e Compatibility of the DP with other LPS that use PDL commands Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 17 PDL principles and procedures What does a JSL specify A JSL is a set library of commands that specify various aspects of a print job including e What portion of the variable and fixed data to use Placement font and point size for the variable and fixed data e Which fonts forms images signatures and logos to use e What paper stocks to use for the job Page layout Banner page recognition and processing How many copies to print Messages to the operator e Use of black or colored ink for text and images see the second note below NOTE You cannot create forms at the DP EPS controller because it does not have a forms compiler Forms specified in a JSL must be created as separate files at your host a workstation or the controller of another laser printing system You can then import these forms onto the system disk from diskette or tape or download them from your host system using the FILE DJDE or the File Transfer Protocol FTP process NOTE You can create highlight color JSLs on a monochrome system using many of the color related PDL commands and parameters The JSLs you create on the monochrome system can be used on the Xerox hi
140. 1 A 141 a 042 102 B 142 b 043 103 C 143 C 044 104 D 144 ld 045 96 105 E 145 e 046 amp 106 F 146 f 047 107 G 147 g 050 110 H 150 h 051 111 151 052 112 J 152 j 053 113 K 153 k 054 3 114 L 154 l 055 115 M 155 m 056 116 N 156 n 057 117 O 157 o 060 0 120 P 160 p 061 1 121 Q 161 q 062 2 122 R 162 r 063 3 123 S 163 S 064 4 124 T 164 t 065 5 125 U 165 u 066 6 126 V 166 V 067 7 127 W 167 w 070 8 130 X 170 X 071 9 131 Y 171 y 072 132 Z 172 Z 073 133 173 C 4 Using LCDS Print Description Language Table C 5 UNIVAC ASCII character set Octal Character Octal Character Octal Character 074 lt 134 174 075 135 175 076 gt 136 176 077 137 177 null Standard ASCII character set Character code assignments Table C 6 Standard ASCII character set Most significant bits Hexa 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D JE F decimal 0 P c p 1 A JQ a Jq E 2 B IR b r 3 C IS c S 4 D T d t 96 5 E U je u amp 6 F V f v i 7 G W g w 8 H X h x 9 Y i y J Z j z K IL k j lt L IA 5 B M m VA gt N i n Ve O lo Using LCDS Print Description Language Character code assignments Standard EBCDIC character set Table C 7 Standard EBCDIC character set Most signifi
141. 1 inch paper unless the queue has been configured for A4 paper These system generated pages are printed with the STOCKSET SYSPAGE parameter that is in currently effect If no STOCKSET parameters are in effect the MAIN stock is used unless it overridden by a specification entered on the user interface windows Example of mismatch handling Assume that you try to print this page on 8 5 by 11 inch paper subject to the stock that was identified by the SYSPAGE parameter or the specification that was entered at the controller screen Ifthe paper size is not available the system attempts to print the page on a different paper size chosen from the set of trays that normally would be used No warning caution or cycling down occurs Ifa larger paper size is available it is used If a larger paper size is not available a smaller paper size is used This is the only time a page may be printed on a paper size smaller than what was specified to format the page When a system generated page is not printed on the size paper that was used to format it the positioning of the data on the physical page is not guaranteed For example when printing on a larger paper size the data does not fall off the physical page but it may not appear in the correct location When printing on a smaller size paper the data may fall off the physical page and appear incomplete Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters
142. 2 Copy 2 Report 1 Copy 1 Report 1 Copy 2 Report 1 Copy 1 Report 1 Figure 4 5 Illustration of ways to use OUTPUT OFFSET parameter Example 4 OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS FORM1 NONE FORM3 or OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS FORM1 FORM3 If there are ten pages in the report either of the above commands would cause FORM 1 to be applied to pages 1 4 7 and 10 no forms to be applied to pages 2 5 and 8 and FORM3 to be applied to pages 3 6 and 9 Example 5 The commands in the following figure illustrate the use of CYCLEFORMS with multiple copies Note that every copy of a particular page has the same form whether COLLATE YES or NO The pages in the following example are not logical pages but are one side of a physical sheet of paper Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT COPIES 2 OUTPUT COPIES 2 COLLATE NO DUPLEX NO COLLATE YES CYCLEFORMS FORM1 NONE DUPLEX YES CYCLEFORMS FORM1 NONE Copy 2 Page 4 Form1 Copy 2 Page 3 Copy 2 Page 2 Form1 Copy 2 Page 1 Copy 1 Page 4 Form1 Copy 1 Page 3 Copy 1 Page 2 Form1 Copy 1 Page 1 Figure 4 6 Illustration of use of OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS parameter in a multicopy report PDE command The PDE command specifies a page descriptor entry PDE which defines the formatting for each page of a report This formatting information includes page orientation landscape or portrait location of the begin
143. 2 16 CODE ASSIGN parameter options and definitions Option Definition input Defines the input code output Defines the output code such as hexadecimal or decimal that corresponds to the input code CODE ASSIGN parameter point to note Default Syntax 2 20 The output option is inherently ASCII because LCDS character sets in most fonts are generally ASCII ordered Therefore hexadecimal characters in an EBCDIC string constant Such as E I3F are converted to ASCII before being put into the code assignment table Hexadecimal output option strings such as X 20 as well as text string constants for example a are not translated before being put into the code assignment table Therefore you should keep ASCII or more precisely the encoding of the fonts that will be used in mind when you use hexadecimal strings No default CODE DEFAULT Specifies a base code from which you can make character code assignment exceptions The base code is specified by a codetype the exceptions are specified in the ASSIGN parameter ac CODE DEFAULT codetype value Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Options Table 2 17 CODE DEFAULT parameter options and definitions Option Definition codetype Can be one the following e ASCII BCD EBCDIC PEBCDIC H2BCD H6BCD IBMBCD value A one byte hexadecimal octal or alpha constant I
144. 2 Byte 3 Represented on 9 Track Tape by 010 001 0101 0000 101100 00 AAV A A ee 5 1 T4X3H2 After Unpacking by OSS 00010001 00000001 00000101 00101100 f Unpacking A 1 5 After Translation to ASII 01000001 00110001 00110101 00101010 by OSS A 4 5 Figure D 1 Input unpacking examples Using LCDS Print Description Language D 1 Offline specifications Valid host computer and label specifications Table D 1 Valid host computer and label specifications Label specifications Host type Unlabeled ANSI Standard System print COBOL Undef ACOS4 x ANSI X Burroughs medium systems B2500 B2700 B3700 B4700 x KI KY Xx X XJ X Xx X lt XxX XxX Burroughs large system B6700 X X X DUMP Label specification is ignored FUJITSU X FXEWTR GRASP POWER Label specification is ignored POWERVS HITACHI Honeywell Bull 200 2000 series H2000 X X X Honeywell Bull 600 6000 series H6000 H6ASC H6BCD IBM3200 IBMOS IBMDOS IBMUTY IBMDBS ICL2900 NEG XXX D 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language Offline specifications Table D 1 Valid host computer and label specifications Label specifications Host type Unlabeled ANSI Standard System print COBOL Undef NCR X X OLD
145. 3 with header and trailer pages BOTH JOB BANNER TEST Cl OR C2 HCOUNT 2 TCOUNT 3 OTHER JOBS EOJ JOB BANNER TEST C3 TCOUNT 1 JOB JOB BANNER TEST C4 HCOUNT 1 Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 7 Specifying input parameters Input processing offline For offline operations the input medium to the printing system is magnetic tape which may be recorded in one of a variety of standard vendor formats Offline printing is handled by the Tape Client software which is an optional part of the DocuSP system software To submit a tape job you set up the job on the Tape Client window on the controller and click START The job is submitted to the printer through the Socket or LPR gateway Refer to the Tape Client Job Submission Guide delivered with your system for job setup and submission procedures As a programmer you define the tape input deblocking and record format parameters that reduce physical tape blocks first to logical records then to print lines You can also select special processing commands that facilitate report processing by performing logical functions on the input data Before selecting the PDL commands that will describe a specific job tape you need to understand certain tape structure concepts These concepts enable you to define job tape characteristics such as host format block and record structure tape translation code packed data formats and so forth
146. 3 7 Compiled 2 4 6 1 2 1 4 4 4 9 in V3 8 Compiled 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 9 in V3 9 Compiled 2 4 7 8 6 7 8 4 7 8 2 1 4 8 4 4 9 in V4 0 5 0 Compiled 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 9 in V3A Compiled 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 9 in XJDC 4 0 1 Performs as expected 2 Commands unique to this software release are not supported Unpredictable results occur in printing C5 displayed unique commands are ignored and the job prints 0 004 Job prints in black only Paper size not supported by the printer Causes job to abort RFEED command is not supported LOGO command in JSL is not supported Extended CRITERIA and VCODE are not supported Certain commands and or parameters are not supported The commands are processed by the Commands unique to this software release are not supported However an error message is Compiler but are ignored by the printer Refer to the PDL command and DJDE summary in appendix A to find out which commands are and are not supported on the different printers Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 77 PDL principles and procedures Printing highlight color applications on DP EPS If you have a Xerox 4850 4890 or DP92C HighLight Color Laser Printing System your applications probably include the use of highlight color one color plus black The JDLs used to print these applications contain commands and parameters that specify the location and the color ink to be used These color JDLs may
147. 4 RAUX command 3 33 3 35 RDELETE command 3 35 3 37 TEST parameter 3 35 record formats 2 9 length 2 3 2 38 selecting or deleting from a report 3 35 structure 2 10 2 36 2 43 RECORD command 2 36 2 43 ADJUST parameter 2 36 CONSTANT parameter 2 37 FORMAT parameter 2 37 LENGTH parameter 2 38 LMULT parameter 2 39 LTHFLD parameter 2 39 OFFSET parameter 2 40 POSTAMBLE parameter 2 40 PREAMBLE parameter 2 40 INDEX 8 Using LCDS Print Description Language INDEX STRUCTURE parameter 2 41 record oriented DJDEs 5 13 5 14 records 1 3 recovery job multivolume reports 2 10 online 2 3 REP parameter ABNORMAL command 4 7 repeat count indicating 1 8 report separation 2 3 required elements of JSLs 1 47 resources downloading 2 4 restricting functions 4 8 restrictions parameter changes by DJDE 5 6 RFEED command 3 37 3 39 TEST parameter 3 37 RFORM DJDE 5 61 RFORM parameter ROUTE command 4 100 RMULT parameter VOLUME command 2 68 ROFFSET command 3 39 3 42 PASSES parameter 3 40 TEST parameter 3 41 rollover system multivolume reports 2 10 rotating the page image 5 46 ROUTE command 4 99 4 103 RFORM parameter 4 100 RTEXT parameter 4 100 RPAGE command 3 43 3 48 SIDE parameter 3 43 TEST parameter 3 45 WHEN parameter 3 45 RRESUME command 3 49 3 52 BEGIN parameter 3 49 TEST parameter 3 50 3 51 RSC file definition 1 68 RSELECT command 3 35 3 37 TEST
148. 4 21 IDR ICATALOG parameter options and definitions Option Definition ink catalog name Name of the ink catalog that will be used when no other catalog is referenced Default IDR ICATALOG parameter point to note 4 20 System default ink catalog The ink catalog selection remains in effect until it is changed by another IDR ICATALOG parameter This also applies to ink references that are specified by DJDEs Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Specifying print format parameters IDR ILIST This parameter provides a list of all the inks which may be referenced by indexing in printing variable input data or CME data ac IDR ILIST inkname inkname inkname Table 4 22 IDR ILIST parameter options and definitions Option Definition inkname Name of an ink that may be referenced by ink indexing during printing Can be a solid primary color only Default IDR ILIST parameter points to note No default The first ink in the ILIST parameter is the default unless it is overridden by an IDFAULT parameter The maximum number of ink names that may be specified in the ILIST parameter is 64 If an IDR parameter is not specified in the OUTPUT command or if the IDR that is specified does not exist the system supplies DFIDR IDR as the system default IDR DFIDR IDR is a standard file that is provided with the system softw
149. 5 FONTS DJDE options and definitions Continued Option Definition K or Indicate a double byte font DB A Indicates a 1 2 or 1 4 sized double byte font hn Specifies the factor an integer value from 1 through 16 by which the font will be magnified horizontally Default 1 vn Specifies the factor an integer value from 1 through 16 by which the font will be magnified vertically Default 1 S spacing Specifies an optional override line spacing value defined by either the print lines per inch LPI or the dots per print line DOTS or XDOTS associated with the font Maximum value for s is 30 LPI minimum value is 10 dots C Specifies an optional override character spacing value either characters per inch or dots per character to be associated with a double byte font unit A unit of measure for the override line or character spacing to be associated with a font The unit can be one of the following e CPI characters per inch Used only with the c option LPI lines per inch DOTS dots per print line at 300 dpi e XDOTS dots per print line at 600 dpi The default unit is LPI FONTS DJDE points to note The FONTS DJDE takes effect at the next page boundary You can use up to 128 fonts with the font indexing capability If the number of fonts to be invoked exceeds the size of one DJDE record you must use multiple FONTS parameters e f different fonts are used on the sa
150. 56 DBCODE parameter 2 57 DBCS parameter 2 57 EMTYPE parameter 2 58 EOV parameter 2 58 EXPAGE parameter 2 59 HOST parameter 2 3 2 60 KANJI parameter 2 62 KCODE parameter 2 63 LABEL parameter 2 63 LCODE parameter 2 64 LPACK parameter 2 64 MAXLAB parameter 2 65 MINLAB parameter 2 65 OPTIMIZE parameter 2 66 OSCHN parameter 2 67 OSHDP parameter 2 67 OSTLP parameter 2 67 RMULT parameter 2 68 TCODE parameter 2 68 3 12 3 13 UNPACK parameter 2 69 VCODE parameter 2 70 2 72 Ww WHEN parameter RPAGE command 3 45 X xjdc command entering 1 66 options 1 67 XJDC compiler 1 64 rules 1 64 XMP DJDE 5 73 XSHIFT DJDE 5 73 XSHIFT parameter OUTPUT command 4 88 Z ZERO parameter BLOCK command 2 17 Using LCDS Print Description Language INDEX 11 INDEX INDEX 12 Using LCDS Print Description Language
151. 7 JDE DJDE 5 48 JDE level commands see job level commands JDL definition 1 2 downloading for highlight color 1 79 hierarchy within 1 45 name 1 21 offline using online JDEs in 2 18 2 42 JDL DJDE 5 49 Using LCDS Print Description Language INDEX 5 INDEX JDL level commands See system level commands job level commands 1 26 1 28 job recovery online 2 3 JSL coding 1 49 1 60 full procedure 1 55 1 60 short procedure 1 50 1 54 command levels 1 18 1 28 compiling 1 64 1 71 correcting errors 1 69 1 71 creating hints and tips 1 47 1 49 default 1 52 definition 1 2 ending 1 12 1 29 1 30 from other monochrome printers 1 80 information specified in 1 18 required elements 1 47 sample 1 30 1 31 1 46 1 48 offline 1 62 online 1 60 2 6 saving a new 1 53 1 58 what to know before creating 1 31 1 40 K KANJI parameter VOLUME command 2 62 KCODE command 2 28 2 30 ASSIGN parameter 2 29 DEFAULT parameter 2 29 KCODE parameter VOLUME command 2 63 keywords command 1 5 1 6 L LABEL parameter VOLUME command 2 63 label tape 2 63 landscape orientation 1 38 laser safety xvii late binding attributes 1 41 1 44 setting 1 41 Icds folder 1 2 1 54 1 59 LCODE parameter VOLUME command 2 64 LENGTH parameter BLOCK command 2 14 RECORD command 2 38 levels of commands 1 18 1 28 LINE command 1 25 4 22 4 38 BASELINE parameter 4 23 BLANKTYPE parameter 4
152. 79 initial specification 1 44 on RTEXT pages 4 100 5 61 on tabs 4 71 specifying 4 55 5 38 Forms Control Buffer see FCB FORMS parameter OUTPUT command 4 55 G GDATA DJDE 5 39 GDATA parameter LINE command 4 28 GRAPHIC DJDE 5 39 graphics Batch Mode format 6 5 DJDEs 5 14 6 1 Document Interleaved format 6 4 error handling 6 3 impact on system performance 6 6 importing 6 2 interleaved 5 41 Page Interleaved format 6 5 Random Mode Only format 6 4 restrictions 6 6 setting new parameters 5 44 specifying 4 56 5 39 specifying initial 4 59 GRAPHICS parameter OUTPUT command 4 56 graphics processing modes 6 3 H H2 and H6 strings 1 11 HCOUNT parameter BANNER command 3 23 3 27 header pages 3 23 with DJDEs 5 9 hexadecimal expressing values 1 7 1 9 INDEX 4 Using LCDS Print Description Language INDEX strings in code assignment tables 2 20 hierarchy of replacement 1 40 1 41 highlight color commands 1 78 IDR 4 19 4 22 commands on monochrome systems 1 18 DJDEs 5 42 5 43 5 45 5 47 5 60 5 73 downloading JDLs 1 79 forms 1 79 parameters 4 5 4 6 4 14 4 20 4 22 4 29 4 57 4 58 4 61 highlight color jobs 1 78 1 80 HJOBNO parameter BANNER command 3 24 3 27 HOST parameter VOLUME command 2 3 2 60 HRPTNA parameter BANNER command 3 24 3 27 RSTACK command 3 56 IBM 3211 emulation 2 2 4245 emulation 2 2 ICATALOG DJDE 5 42 ICATALOG parame
153. 9 01 x 10 19 22 9t0 25 9 229 to 259 2705 to 3059 5410 to 6118 154 7 7 40 x 9 01 18 8 to 22 9 188 to 229 2221 to 2704 4442 to 5409 180 8 7 00 x 7 40 17 8 to 18 8 178 to 188 2100 to 2220 4205 to 4441 206 Pages per minute 4 84 In 7 pitch mode the normal pitch mode for printing the printer can process paper from 8 inches by 10 inches to 9 01 inches by 14 33 inches or 203 by 254 to 229 by 364 mm in long edge feed mode This means the sheet is fed into the paper path with its long edge first In this pitch mode the printer prints with full productivity at 180 pages per minute with seven page images per photoreceptor revolution For papers whose width ranges from 9 01 inches to 15 31 inches the printer prints with slightly reduced productivity The reason for this is that for papers in this width range the normal image area extends into the interimage zone that is normally used for xerographic process controls In order to maintain the best productivity possible xerographic process controls are temporarily suspended Periodically the system induces about 14 skipped images in order to perform a xerographic process control check and to ensure that the highest print quality is maintained The printer then resumes printing at full productivity Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters For any paper size wider than 15 32 inches 389 mm the system automatically switches to 3 pitc
154. A PMODE LANDSCAPE LIST RED BLACK PINK TDFAULT RED ICATALOG XEROX PALETTE PICTORIAL LIST BLACK RED PALE PINK IDFAULT BLACK CONSTANT A REPORT CONSTANT 2 6 EQ T1 HOST IBMOS CODE ASCII LENGTH 2048 LENGTH 135 STRUCTURE VB LTHFLD 2 A DJUST 0 FORMAT BIN DATA 1 132 PCCTYPE PREAMBLE 3 BM1403 PCC 0 NOTRAN OVERPRI VFU VFUI PREFIX A DJ OPR SKI P DE INFO YES 6 NT PRI INT NODISP OFFSET 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Table 1 11 Sample offline JSL Continued RSTACK TEST C1 DELIMITER YES ACCT USER TRAY Catalog level commands CATPOW CATALOG VOLUME HOST IBMOS CODE EBCDIC BLOCK LENGTH 2048 PREAMBLE 6 LTHFLD 2 FORMAT BIN OFFSET 4 RECORD LENGTH 135 STRUCTURE VB PREAMBLE 2 LTHFLD 2 FORMAT BIN OFFSET 0 ADJUST 3 CATGRP CATALOG VOLUME HOST GRASP CODE EBCDIC BLOCK LENGTH 4096 PREAMBLE 0 ZERO YES RECORD LENGTH 135 STRUCTURE VB PREAMBLE 1 LTHFLD 1 FORMAT BIN OFFSET 0 ADJUST 2 Ro TOO IOL JDE level commands Aen ska x
155. AT DJDE points to note Parameters of the selected PDE such as BEGIN FONTS and PMODE may also be modified on an individual basis The DJDEs that are specified separately override the parameters that are part of the PDE Format file names must be in all UPPERCASE letters when they are referenced in DJDEs or the system will not detect them However format file names may have lowercase letters in the JSL commands and parameters Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 37 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs FORM S DJDE Type Syntax Options Specifies the form to be merged onto the printed pages It takes effect on the next page boundary The form specified is invoked beginning with the specified starting copy number Multiple FORMS DJDEs may be used to associate different forms with different copy plies Page oriented FORN S NONE formid formid init copies INKS inkref inkrefs NOTE When using this command you must enter an entire parameter FORM or FORMS Do not abbreviate to the first three letters because system interprets FOR as FORMAT Table 5 27 FORM S DJDE options and definitions Option Definition formid Specifies a 1 to 6 character form file name may be numeric alpha or alphanumeric which exists on the system disk init If two or more forms are called out in succession init specifies the first copy number to which the next
156. BEGIN 0 18 IN 0 66 IN FONT LO0112B LO1BO0A PMODE P Invalid Option Str PORTRAI COL 63 4 PDE BEGIN 1 03 51 BEGIN 6 3 51 FONTS P10124 PMODE Invalid Parameter Keyword Left Part Str PDE2 COL lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt CME LINE 9 POS 1 FONT 1 CME LINE 3 POS 59 CONSTANT FIRST QUARTER Replacing opt XRXnps resources lcds VMT10 CME2 CME LP 44 4 Figure 1 22 A LST file for a JSL containing errors 2 Open another Text Editor window and display your JSL in this new window The procedure for displaying the JSL is described under Opening a file in the Text Editor above 3 Enter the indicated corrections to your JSL referring to the LST file in the other Text Editor window as needed 4 On the Terminal window recompile the corrected JSL using the compiling procedure that is described earlier in this section Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 71 PDL principles and procedures Dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs Dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs are parameters embedded within the input data stream DJDEs modify the printing environment established by a job descriptor entry JDE as the job is printing Dynamic job descriptor entry processing allows certain JDE parameters to be changed for individual pages or records The IDEN command coded in a JDE notifies the system that DJDE records are included in
157. BNO and HRPTNA is translated using the CODE table in effect when the record containing them is processed The following table shows the effect of the TCOUNT and HCOUNT parameters of the BANNER command under the conditions listed and the results of each Table 3 20 Summary of BANNER command parameter conditions and results Condition Parameter Result System positions to Top of If TCOUNT 0 The page after the first header is positioned at TOF Form after processing the ET E end of the report If TCOUNT not O The page after the last trailer is positioned at TOF A job is running with header TCOUNT 0 Job parameters such as DJDEs and page pages only as the offset numbering for a given report are applied to the first criteria header page of the following report The system encounters a TCOUNT 0 The next banner page is treated as the first header page other than a banner of a new report even if HCOUNT is not satisfied page The system encounters a HCOUNT not 0 The system assumes that the report has fewer non banner page before and header pages than were specified and begins HCOUNT is satisfied TCOUNT not 0 looking for trailer pages BANNER command examples Following are examples of the BANNER command Example 1 The following commands define the BANNER criteria for a job with two trailer pages and one header page A string of 120 asterisks beginning in position 1 of line 66 occurs on header and t
158. Blank characters in the previous printable line are replaced only when they are translated using the CODE table into an ASCII X 20 or into a character value greater than that of the highest character in the specified font Using LCDS Print Description Language LINE OVERPRINT parameter example Syntax Options Specifying print format parameters Following is an example of the LINE OVERPRINT parameter LINE OVERPRINT MERGE NODISP VFU V1 DATA 1 132 PCCTYPE ANSI PCC 0 NOTRAN LINE PCC Specifies the position and possible translation of the printer carriage control field NOTE The PCC parameter is ignored in online printing by the DP EPS because online carriage control is derived from commands that are sent using the online channel protocol However you may create a JSL containing this parameter and transfer it to another laser printing system for use with offline printing LINE PCC offset transtype Table 4 36 LINE PCC parameter options and definitions Option Definition offset A number specifying the byte offset of the user portion of the record within the user portion of each record to the printer carriage control PCC field The default offset value is 0 transtype translation type Specifies whether or not the printer carriage control byte is to undergo code translation This option has the following alternatives e TRAN Indicates that
159. C Y Y EE VCODEO LPS A 12 Using LCDS Print Description Language Conventions B PDL command quick reference This section provides a quick reference for PDL commands in the form of structure diagrams The commands shown here are supported on some or all of the following laser printing systems DP180 LPS DP96 LPS 4050 LPS 4090 LPS 4135 LPS 4635 LPS 4850 LPS 4890 LPS DP92C LPS 8790 LPS 9790 LPS and DP 2000 Series EPS Refer to appendix A PDL command and DJDE summary for information on which printing systems support each command and parameter Symbols used in the command syntax are listed in the table below Table B 1 Symbols used in command syntax Symbol Meaning ac Alpha character identifier Signifies a command identifier Consists of 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters A through Z and 0 through 9 One of the characters must be alpha dd Signifies a command identifier Same as ac except there is no restriction of having an alpha character This identifier applies only to SYSTEM or JDL and JOB or JDE command sets Identifier Reference to a command identified by an ac command identifier SC String constant A hexadecimal octal ASCII EBCDIC or character text string constant value A decimal constant The s at the end of some PDL commands and DJDEs is optional Contents of Quick Reference table columns The Quick Reference table for PDL commands
160. CC parameters in conjunction with DJDEs affects what those parameters do The following table shows what to expect from those PCC parameters when DJDEs are present Table 5 3 Interaction of DJDEs with printer carriage control parameters Carriage control parameter Processing with DJDE Print and Skip online Treated as a Skip Immediate carriage control parameter If the printer is not at the channel specified a skip occurs If the printer is at the specified channel no skip occurs unless the last carriage control parameter received was a Print Without Spacing parameter Print and Space Ignored Print Without Spacing Ignored Print and Skip offline Ignored Types of DJDEs There are two types of DJDEs page oriented and record oriented Page oriented Page oriented DJDEs change the look of subsequent pages DJDEs within a report and can change these pages differently on different copies If DJDE parameters are placed within the report itself they take effect at the next page boundary They can take effect on the current page if no data has yet been printed on it 5 10 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs If DJDEs are located at the start of a report they invoke changes beginning with the first page of the report or report copy Table 5 4 Page oriented DJDEs DJDE Function B
161. CCT command The ACCT command enables a printout of an accounting summary to be included with each report printed This summary consists of a single page of information containing job setup information and counts of processing events The system automatically saves on disk certain processing information on each report that is printed The status file accumulates this information on an individual report basis in the order that it is processed Refer to the online help information on the Accounting window accessed from the Administration window on your system controller for the customer accounting procedures The accounting file is accessible to the user and can be saved on media using the LCDS Accounting and Media Resource Manager windows ACCT command parameters The parameters for the ACCT command are summarized in the following table Table 4 11 Summary of ACCT command parameter Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE ACCT DEPT Specifies a category under which user accounting Y Y Y statistics will accumulate for a job ACCT USER Specifies the output destination of the accounting Y Y N page if one is printed with a report ACCT DEPT Defines the name under which accounting statistics will be accumulated for this report or job Syntax ACCT DEPT sc Options Table 4 12 ACCT DEPT parameter options and definitions Option Definition sc string constant Represents a depa
162. D 4 25 EINE DAU ea p cue teo seta ce P yt tna 4 26 LINE EONTINDEX dreri raion owed RR es 4 27 LINES DAMA 4 Gains Rok a Ote n d e obe Nodes 4 28 LINE INKINDEX 5 s he Oc Sor RU ERO 4 29 EINE EPI aae seca a ubt a qvi sable AM Re p eere ars 4 30 LINE MARGIN boots deus aca PED DER ARV 4 31 LINE OVERPRINT i554 path roges 4 31 WINES POC ue eG Mae dc ode Io 2 hay Wn Ae eM 4 33 EINE POOTYPE icona p taa rate ren oir es 4 34 HNE VEN PI rc 4 35 LINE command points to note 4 36 LINE command examples suss 4 37 MESSAGE command fant ex LE EERIA dX BRGESURMENS 4 38 MESSAGE command parameters 4 39 MESSAGE ITEXT 21 prod bains Go Fe RA PE n 4 39 MESSAGE OTE 52559314 gcc lx rt ER Ra ET 4 40 MESSAGE command points to note 4 41 MESSAGE command example 4 41 OUTPUT COMMANG 125 x 2 2 anes ee eos tuti e eet 4 42 OUTPUT command parameters 4 42 OUTPUT BFORM istosepem hm REESE 4 44 OUTPUT BINDING dee vro hn E ROS Deoa onn 4 45 OUTPUT COLLATE s au dis I t o eC PRETEREA 4 48 OUTPUT COPIES d i qopicaen etd doy e aor Ones Coase 4 48 OUTPUT COVER 4v ee ie iod P b tede Mie ee e 4 49 OUTPUT GYCLEFORMS 3559 eir det ert ideo qe 4 49 OUTPUT DENSITY 22 5 39 dox ad bos OR dade tua eaten NS 4 51 OUTPUT DESTINATION 43 0 4 2 S REIHE 4 51 OUTPUT DUPLEX saure etc acc ia pros eR ERROR 4 52 OUTPUT FAGEUP cube eren uci tx drove RE ELE 4 52 OU
163. D DJDE Type Syntax Options Controls the stock on which the page is printed FEED stockreference must refer to a stock assigned to a stockname by the STOCKSET command in effect at the time the page is printed Page oriented FEED MAIN AUX OPR stockname stockreference Table 5 21 FEED DJDE options and definitions Option Definition AUX Specifies that the page will feed from the tray s assigned to the AUX stock MAIN Specifies that the page will feed from the tray s assigned to the MAIN stock OPR Equivalent to MAIN stockname Specifies the name of the stock from whose assigned tray or trays the next sheet will feed for printing Must be placed in single quotation marks This option bypasses the reference feature but still requires that the stockname be specified as it appears in the current STOCKSET FEED stockreference is the recommended usage stockreference Specifies the term usually descriptive that has been associated with the stock from whose assigned tray or trays the next sheet will feed for printing This option allows you to change stocks associated with a job without altering the stock references in the data application itself FDATA DJDE Type Syntax Specifies the starting point of the file data from the beginning of the user portion of a data record Record oriented FDATA offset termination Using LCDS Print Descripti
164. DE options and definitions Option Definition name Identifies the graphic being held ALL Specifies that all graphics being held are to be cancelled Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 21 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs COLLATE DJDE Specifies Collated or Uncollated mode for printing Type Page oriented Syntax COLLATE YES NO Options Table 5 15 COLLATE DJDE options and definitions Option Definition YES Specifies that report copies are to be printed in Collated Mode Copies are printed in complete ordered sets NO Specifies that report copies are to be printed in Uncollated Mode All copies of each page are printed and stacked together that is all copies of page 1 are printed first then all copies of page 2 etc COLLATE DJDE point to note The COLLATE DJDE takes effect at the next page boundary but must occur before the first data record of the report COPIES DJDE Specifies the number of copies of a report to produce Type Page oriented Syntax COPIES number Options Table 5 16 COPIES DJDE options and definitions Option Definition number Number of copies of a report to produce 5 22 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs COPIES DJDE points to note n duplex processing if COPIES appears before the back side of a duplex page a blank back sheet is
165. DEFAULT Allows you to select a set of printer carriage control codes You can select a table and then modify specific control codes by using the ASSIGN parameter ac PCC DEFAULT ccin pcctype Table 2 34 PCC DEFAULT parameter options and definitions Option Definition ccin Specifies the required action when a character code has not been specifically assigned The assignment codes for various actions are described in the ccin option description of the ASSIGN parameter The system default PCC tables are defined using standard EBCDIC characters Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 33 Specifying input parameters Table 2 34 PCC DEFAULT parameter options and definitions Continued Option Definition PCCtype Parameters and the tables that can be modified are ANSI e B2500 e B2700 B3700 B4700 B6700 H2000 H6000 IBM1401 IBM1403 IGN OVR TOF US70 XEROX NONE Default PCC DEFAULT parameter point to note Syntax Options A table of PSP1 Print and Space 1 codes The DEFAULT parameter must precede any ASSIGN parameter Any preceding ASSIGN parameter is not incorporated into the PCC table PCC INITIAL Specifies the initial reference point TOF or BOF from which a job performs its first carriage control function ac PCC INITIAL TOF BOF Table 2 35 PCC INITIAL parameter options and definitions Option Definition
166. DEs Options Table 5 46 NUMBER DJDE options and definitions Option Definition pnum page number An integer that specifies the starting page number The maximum page number that can be printed is 2 147 483 647 inum line number An integer that specifies the number of the line on which the page number is placed cnum column number An integer that specifies the final column character space number for the page numbering sequence findex font index This is an index into the list of fonts specified in the currently active FONTS parameter of the PDE command or of a recent DJDE The index is an integer starting with 1 for the first font If an index is not specified the first font in the list is used inkref ink reference Specifies the reference number for the ink with which the page number will be printed NO Specifies that there will be no page numbering 5 56 NUMBER DJDE point to note The beginning page number may be nonpositive in which case it is incriminated at page transitions but is not printed until it is positive Ifthe system encounters a NUMBER DJDE immediately after the criteria that were specified for the RSTACK command were met in the input data stream page numbering starts on the next page after the delimiter sheet and with the page number 1 printed on it Refer to the examples in the following figure Using LCDS Print Description Language
167. DIC in string constants 1 10 Using LCDS Print Description Language INDEX 3 INDEX edgemarking 1 35 EMTYPE parameter VOLUME command 2 58 END command 1 12 1 29 1 30 END DJDE 5 26 ending a DJDE 5 2 5 26 ending a JSL 1 29 1 30 EOF DJDE 5 26 EOV parameter VOLUME command 2 58 ERROR parameter ABNORMAL command 4 3 6 3 errors in JSL correcting 1 69 1 71 EXPAGE parameter VOLUME command 2 59 F FACEUP parameter OUTPUT command 4 52 FCB interaction with VFU 2 5 FCB parameter LINE command 4 25 FDATA DJDE 5 27 FDATA parameter LINE command 4 26 FEED DJDE 5 27 FEED parameter OUTPUT command 4 53 feeding stock 3 37 AUX tray 3 33 FILE DJDE 2 4 5 28 5 33 finishing defining SF1 operation 4 75 5 66 defining SF2 operation 4 76 5 67 fixed pitch fonts 1 39 font index 4 27 5 33 mapping 5 53 short edge feed 5 64 specifying 5 35 FONT parameter CME command 4 13 FONTINDEX DJDE 5 33 FONTINDEX parameter LINE command 4 27 fonts 1 38 1 40 fixed pitch 1 39 orientation 1 40 proportional 1 39 spacing 1 39 FONTS DJDE 5 35 FONTS parameter PDE command 4 96 FORM DJDE 5 38 format specifying 5 37 FORMAT DJDE 5 37 FORMAT parameter BLOCK command 2 14 OUTPUT command 4 54 RECORD command 2 37 formats for jobs with graphics 6 4 record 2 9 specifying 1 24 4 54 4 91 standard 4 91 tape 2 8 forms back 4 44 DJDE 5 18 creation 1 18 cycling 4 49 highlight color 1
168. DIFY CME1 FORMAT PDE1 COPIES 10 BFORM SMLBK OFFSET FIRST PURGE NO JOB2 JDE LINE VFU VFU2UP OUTPUT FORMAT PDE4 FORMS SPL2 COPIES 7 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Comments Comments are optional statements you may include in the source file to identify sections of the JSL describe selected PDL commands and their functions or provide messages for anyone who modifies the JSL later The system does not perceive these comments as commands and ignores them Comments may appear anywhere within the JSL and may consist of multiple records Comments must be preceded by the character sequence slash asterisk and terminated by the character sequence asterisk slash For example System commands are coded here Nested comments A comment may also be nested within another comment There is no practical limit to the level of nesting possible as long as each nested comment is preceded by a slash and an asterisk and succeeded by an asterisk and a slash An acceptable nested comment format is as follows comment nested comment ue wy Note that the illustration above ends with two markers the first for the nested comment and the second for the main comment Ending a JSL A JSL terminates with the END command When you are finished constructing your JSL you must let the system know you are finished by entering
169. DJDE Type Syntax Specifies the left printing margin within each logical page It takes effect at the logical page following an END DJDE Page oriented MARGIN value value valuetype Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 53 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Options Table 5 44 MARGIN DJDE options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the distance from the left edge of the logical page as indicated by the BEGIN value currently in effect to the left margin Has the format nnn mm a positive decimal number with up to 2 digits to the right of the decimal point valuetype Unit of measure for the margin value Available unit options are N inches e CM centimeters e POS character positions The default value type is POS MARGIN DJDE points to note Avalue must be specified as an integer nnn if its valuetype is character positions POS The options for the MARGINS DJDE are the same as for the LINE MARGIN command MODIFY DJDE Specifies a copy modification entry CME to be used in report processing Type Page oriented Syntax MODIFY cmeid init copies NONE or MODIFY cmeid Options Table 5 45 MODIFY DJDE options and definitions Option Definition cmeid copy modification entry identifier References a previously created CME file filename cme The default is NONE init initial copy Specifies the first copy of the report to which
170. DJDE other record or page oriented DJDEs included in the packet override parameters specified in the indicated JDE Refer to Restrictions on job parameter modification in the PDL principles and procedures chapter for further information e If only a JDE DJDE no JDL DJDE is specified in the DJDE packet the system uses the JDL most recently specified in a DJDE in this report If no JDL was specified in any DJDE the system uses the JDL that is specified on the LCDS Setup window JDL DJDE Specifies the JDL to be invoked at the next page boundary Type Page oriented Syntax JDL JDLid Options Table 5 40 JDL DJDE options and definitions Option Definition JDLid Job Descriptor Library identifier Name of the JDL to be invoked at the next page boundary Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 49 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs 5 50 JDL DJDE points to note LOGO DJDE The JDLid JDL file must exist on the controller disk If there is no delimiter between the JDL DJDE and the JDL identifier JDLid a syntax error is displayed If only a JDL DJDE no JDE DJDE is specified in the DJDE packet the system uses the JDE most recently specified in a DJDE in this report If no JDE was specified in any DJDE the system uses the JDE that is specified on the LCDS Setup window In a DJDE packet containing a JDL DJDE other record or page oriented DJDEs override parameters specified in
171. DP92C LPS Any EPS inksthat you specified in the JSL are replaced by black ink when printed on the DP EPS however they print in the specified inks on your 4850 4890 or DP92C HighLight Color LPS HighLight color Because the DP EPS do not have a forms compiler you cannot LPS forms compile forms or form source libraries FSLs at your controller Forms for DP EPS jobs may be created on your DP EPS but they must be compiled at another Xerox LPS After they are compiled forms can be copied to the DP EPS system disk from tape CD or diskette or they can be downloaded from the host using File Transfer Protocol FTP or the FILE DJDE The DP EPS can print forms that were created in color It is important to note that forms need not contain color unique forms source library FSL commands in order to be classified as colored forms You can generate them by the following methods e Compiling the FSL using the 4850 4890 or DP92C HighLight Color LPS Forms Description Language FDL compiler Converting the monochrome form to color with the File Conversion Utility FCU resident on the 4850 4890 or DP92C HighLight Color LPS Downloading to the DP EPS colored forms that were created with host or third party vendor software packages Refer to the Forms Creation Guide for the 4850 4890 or DP92C HighLight Color LPS for detailed information on creating and using highlight color forms Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 79 PDL princip
172. Defines a character code translation table When you require a user defined character code translation table you define the character translation using this command then reference the CODE command using the VOLUME CODE parameter As an alternative you can use the USER option of the VOLUME CODE parameter to reference the CODE command for which no identifier was provided A command identifier of the type ac is optional for the first CODE command within a JDE Thereafter each additional CODE command must include the identifier The ac identifier consists of 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters A through Z and 0 through 9 One of the characters must be alphabetic CODE command parameters The following table summarizes the CODE command parameters Table 2 15 Summary of CODE command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE CODE ASSIGN Defines user code assignments Y Y N CODE DEFAULT Specifies a base code from which character Y Y N code assignment exceptions can be made CODE SPACECODE Specifies the blank code for single byte Y Y N characters Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 19 Specifying input parameters Syntax Options The following sections describe the syntax of the CODE command parameters and explain the parameter options CODE ASSIGN Defines user character code assignments ac CODE ASSIGN input output input output outputs Table
173. Description Language ac identifier Specifying input parameters A command identifier of the type ac is optional for the first DBCODE command within a JDE Thereafter each additional DBCODE command must include the identifier The ac identifier consists of 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters A through Z and 0 through 9 One of the characters must be alphabetic DBCODE command parameters The following table summarizes the DBCODE command parameters Table 2 19 Summary of DBCODE command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE DBCODE ASSIGN Defines user double byte code assignments Y N N DBCODE DEFAULT Specifies a base code from which double byte Y N N character code assignment exceptions can be made Syntax Options The following sections describe the syntax of the DBCODE command parameters and explain the parameter options DBCODE ASSIGN Defines double byte character code assignment exceptions or an entire user character translation table ac DBCODE ASSIGN input output input output outputs Table 2 20 DBCODE ASSIGN parameter options and definitions Option Definition input A numeric constant that defines the input double byte code output A numeric constant that defines the output double byte code that corresponds to the input code Default No default Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 23 Specifying i
174. Descriptor Entries DJDEs Options Table 5 36 INVERT DJDE options and definitions Option Definition FRONT Specifies page inversion on front sides BACK Specifies page inversion on back sides BOTH Specifies page inversion on both front and back sides NONE Specifies no page inversion IRESULT DJDE Specifies what the result will be when objects that are imaged with different inks overlap Type Page oriented Syntax IRESULT DEFAULT BLACK COLOR Options Table 5 37 IRESULT DJDE options and definitions Option Definition DEFAULT Specifies that the ink that was set as the system default IRESULT ink will override when two different colored pixels overlap The default IRESULT ink may be black or colored BLACK Specifies that when two objects that are imaged with different inks overlap and black and colored pixels coincide the resulting pixel is black COLOR Specifies that when two objects that are imaged with different inks overlap and black and colored pixels coincide the resulting pixel is colored IRESULT DJDE points to note For monochrome printers the COLOR and BLACK parameters produce identical results black e The color that results from overlapping objects may be only black or only colored for an entire page For example a page cannot have red text printed over a black background and also black text printed over a red background Using LCDS
175. Descriptor Entries DJDEs The parameters that can be changed through a JDE that you specify in a JDE DJDE are listed in the following table Using LCDS Print Description Language Table 5 2 Parameters that are changeable by a JDE DJDE Command Parameters ABNORMAL ACCT All parameters IDEN OPRINFO only LINE DATA FONTINDEX MARGIN OVERPRINT PCCTYPE VFU MESSAGE All parameters OUTPUT All parameters except OFFSET PDE All parameters RAUX All parameters RDELETE RECORD LENGTH RFEED ROFFSET All parameters ROUTE All parameters RPAGE All parameters RRESUME RSELECT RSTACK TEST RSUSPEND STOCKSET VOLUME TCODE CODE NOTE If a front cover is invoked in a selected JDE that takes effect after the first page of the report the cover appears at the point where the DJDE is applied 5 7 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Considerations and cautions for using DJDEs Page transition issue Duplex DJDE page 5 8 printing issues Remember the following points and cautions when coding and applying DJDEs If you use the JDE DJDE to reassign the channel that caused the page transition generally channel 1 when the DJDE printer carriage control PCC byte is processed the first page may be incorrectly positioned after the page transition occurs Page oriented DJDEs like the JDE DJDE are implemented when the system de
176. E Table 4 26 LINE BLANKTYPE parameter options and definitions Option Definition F Specifies the width of the back space character that is associated with the width of the full sized single byte character or of the half sized double byte character V Specifies the width of the back space character that is associated with the full sized single byte or double byte character SPACE Replaces X OE and X OF shift in and shift out function codes with single byte blank character spaces NOSPACE Specifies that no space code is substituted Default 4 24 NOSPACE Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters LINE DATA Specifies the location and length of the print line data within an input data record Syntax LINE DATA pao length Options Table 4 27 LINE DATA parameter options and definitions Option Definition pdo print data offset Number of bytes between the start of the user portion of the record and the first character of the record to be printed length Maximum length of printable data within each logical record Default Online 0 150 Offline 1 132 LINE FCB Specifies whether to suppress or to process host transmitted forms control buffers FCB Syntax LINE FCB IGNORE PROCESS Options Table 4 28 LINE FCB parameter options and definitions Option Definition IGNORE Suppresses the p
177. E command to refer to a specific user defined code translation table The id label is required when multiple DBCODE commands are contained within the JDL Default No default VOLUME DBCS Specifies the double byte character printing mode Allows printing of data streams of intermixed single byte and double byte characters Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 57 Specifying input parameters Syntax Options VOLUME DBCS YES NO Table 2 60 VOLUME DBCS parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Allows printing of a data stream of intermixed single byte and double byte characters NO Allows printing only of single byte characters Default Syntax Options NO VOLUME EMTYPE Specifies the emulation type with which the system will print text VOLUME EMTYPE T1 T2 Table 2 61 VOLUME EMTYPE parameter options and definitions Option Definition T1 Interprets the function codes and the specified print positions using the existing compatible formats T2 Interprets function codes and the specified print positions using the format for the host computer Default VOLUME EMTYPE parameter point to note 2 58 YES This parameter is ignored for online printing unless one of the following VOLUME HOST parameter options for online printing is specified e HOST FUJITSU FUJONL KANJI YES e HOST HITACHI HITONL KANJI YE
178. E DJDE point to note 5 22 COPIES DUDE 26 ted See seis at oe ER Gace doe ek PEE A 5 22 COPIES DJDE points to note 5 23 DATAADUDE 3522 21 24 1 Md teat Rb p De toten ole fee 5 23 DATA DJDE point to note 5 23 DEPT DJDE 3 1 ucla saath ex DOES n abd URGE CR SERES 5 24 DEPT DJDE points to note ce eke ee Seger i 5 24 DESTINATION DJDE coeno chet whee Besa eee Lae nerven 5 24 DESTINATION DJDE points to note 5 25 DUPLEX DIDE os tinina oh DR Caneensd Amer d a a PP ee 5 25 ENDIDIDE 4595 252 biet accel SV be Bleek prat ex 5 26 END DUDE points to note 22v ce we 5 26 BOP DIDE 2 end md dor o ter Rud X Rotes 1 ila oS RS 5 26 EOF DUDE point to note 5 eri 83h eee Oe eh ET ISS 5 26 FEED DJDE uite pA cotra ud ct c INE o EE RO er SUC 5 27 EDATA DIDE xo ea dts cance qn qe ae Sb d OE RE Mates 5 27 PDE seed tia du f nct hts teh Pb Abt wi aede do Da A RU SU 5 28 FILE DJDE points to note 5 29 EIBE BJDE processing xo md get cole eh eee tg fos 4 5 29 FONTINDEX DJDE 4524 4 0 x Ec i tenre Rub qo e ed 5 33 FONTINDEX DJDE points to note 5 34 FONTS DJD Err aea m deabus qb d a ebat no s AO c et 5 35 FONTS DJDE points to note 5 36 Using LCDS Print Description Language Table of contents FORMATIDIDE eirecutstce dt gern esau wos won iene ese XEM 5 37 FORMAT DJDE points to note
179. E command 4 25 data streams 2 1 DBCODE command 2 22 2 24 DBCODE parameter VOLUME command 2 57 DBCS parameter VOLUME command 2 57 dd identifier 1 5 default JSL 1 52 DEFAULT PARAMETER CODE command 2 20 2 22 DEFAULT parameter KCODE command 2 29 PCC command 2 33 TCODE command 2 51 defaults parameter 1 40 1 43 delimiter on accounting page 3 54 with RSTACK command 3 53 DELIMITER parameter RSTACK command 3 56 DENSITY parameter OUTPUT command 4 51 DEPT DJDE 5 24 DEPT parameter ACCT command 4 9 DESTINATION DJDE 5 24 DESTINATION parameter OUTPUT command 4 51 DJDE diagram 5 4 DJDEs 1 72 applying 5 3 coding 5 2 5 3 definition 1 2 ending 5 2 5 26 for graphics 6 1 graphics 5 14 invoking processing 2 24 2 28 5 1 page oriented 5 10 5 12 page transition issues 5 8 record oriented 5 13 5 14 specifying processing online 2 2 using IDEN command for 5 1 5 2 DJPCC parameter IDEN command 2 25 Document Interleaved format 6 4 documentation DP 75 90 xxvi DP EPS xxv double byte characters printing 2 62 translation tables 2 22 double byte fonts CME command 4 17 downloading resources 2 4 dumps 1 73 1 76 offline 1 75 1 76 online 1 73 1 74 duplex printing issues with DJDEs 5 8 DUPLEX DJDE 5 25 DUPLEX parameter OUTPUT command 4 52 duplex printing offsetting 3 41 specifying 4 52 5 25 Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries see DJDEs E EBC
180. E summary Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs Continued DJDE Off On orien Command Parameters Default Printing system line line tation ac IDR ICATALOG System default 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page LPS DP EPS prints black ILIST 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page LPS DP EPS prints black PALETTE DFAULT 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page LPS DP EPS prints black JDE DJDE jdename All Y Y Page JDL DJDE jdlname All Y Y Page ac JOB INCLUDE All Y Y KCODE ASSIGN DP EPS N Y DEFAULT DP EPS N N LINE BASELINE LARGE ST DP EPS N Y BLANKTYPE NOSPACE DP EPS N Y DATA offline 1 132 All Y Y Record online 0 150 All N Y Record FCB PROCESS All N Y FDATA 0 DEFAULT DP EPS N Y Record FONTINDEX NONE All Y Y Page GDATA 0 DEFAULT DP EPS N Y Record INKINDEX NONE 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page LPS DP EPS prints black LPI All N Y Record MARGIN 1 POS All Y Y Record OVERPRINT PRINT NODISP All Y Y Record PCC 0 NOTRAN All Y N A 6 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command and DJDE summary Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs Continued DJDE Off On orien Command Parameters Default Printing system line line tation LINE PCCTYPE offline ANSI All Y N continued onlinezIBM4245 All N Y
181. EGIN Specifies the location of the starting print line of each logical page BFORM Specifies that a form will be printed on the back side of each printed page COLLATE Specifies whether the pages of a job are to be collated placed into sets ordered the way the pages are printed or uncollated all copies of a page are placed together COPIES Specifies the number of copies of the pages also called sets to produce DEPT Specifies the name under which accounting statistics for reports are accumulated NOTE The DP 2000 Series EPS place this information in the accounting log You can print out the values DESTINATION Specifies the output destination of printed pages DUPLEX Specifies whether both sides of a piece of paper are printed duplex or only the top side simplex Simplex and duplex are also called 1 sided and 2 sided FEED Controls the stock on which pages are printed FONTINDEX Specifies the location in the input record where an index to the specified font is stored FONTS Specifies the fonts used for printing FORMAT Specifies a new page descriptor entry PDE to use for formatting control FORN S Specifies the form to be merged onto the printed pages ICATALOG Specifies an ink catalog that contains palettes and inks for subsequent pages IDFAULT Specifies a default ink for objects for which no ink was specified IDR Specifies the ink descriptor reference IDR that will be used for subsequent pages ILI
182. ERE E 1 49 Before you start wee Sek bee bake hee Seu 1 49 Short JSL coding procedure 1 50 Full JSL coding procedure 1 55 Sample onlineISl i cecte205 ae eta pense DIS 1 60 Sample offline JSL 2 rou teow ee tien eee ee 1 62 Compiling a JSL cv iA iia eid ETERNA RENE 1 64 Compiling procedure lllsssslsess 1 64 Files produced by the compilation procedure 1 68 Correcting errors In a JSL 21 eese Es 1 69 Dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs 005 1 72 Benefits of using DJDES ise emper n 1 72 DUMPS DHT D 1 73 Online QUIN rcs Sous cha area aU b E RR Sagan cae NES 1 73 Starting and ending online dump sessions 1 73 Online dump format and content 1 73 Offlined mp ease ened amp e aos ONE Ren a arent SER td 1 75 Starting and ending tape dump sessions 1 75 Offline dump format and content 1 75 Compatibility with other Xerox laser printing systems that use PDL 1 76 Printing highlight color applications on DP EPS 1 78 Other Xerox monochrome LPS jobs 1 80 2 Specifying input parameters l l 2 1 Input data stTGalflS oia t re etre ot t redo OR Men ener cre o a du 2 1 Input processing TULGtlolis a2 e o necem Ete d uere Tr PPS 2 2 Input processintj onllle s 25 35 teat EE E REMELESER 2 2 Forms control buffer FCB a
183. FORM form name Corresponding JDE and JDL DJDEs must be coded to switch back to printing regular paper stock Note that the ordered stock statement specified in the original JDE and JDL DJDEs and the regular stock JDE and JDL DJDEs must be exactly alike Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 71 Specifying print format parameters 4 72 Specify TABS in the ordered stock statement so that dynamic width checking is disabled You may define the ordered stock statement at the job or the system level of a JSL If you define it at the job level you must ensure that the ordered stock command defined from the initial JDE and JDL to a selected JDE and JDL are exactly alike The reason is that the system contains an internal mod and pos table that keeps track of the current mod and pos values for the job and is used for jam recovery This table is initialized at report setup time through values that were entered in the Properties window for each tray accessed from the Printer Manager window When a JDE or JDL DJDE with an ordered stock command is specified the system reinitializes its internal mod and pos table with values in the DJDE JDE or JDL if it finds that the ordered stock information in LCDS Setup window is different from the values defined in the DJDE JDE or JDL However if both commands are alike the system does not reinitialize the internal mod and pos table If you check for initialization of the internal mod and pos table
184. GE All Y Y CONSTANT All Y Y LINENUM ALL LINES All Y Y VALUE 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y 96 4635 180 LPS DP EPS DBCODE ASSIGN DP EPS N Y DEFAULT DP EPS N N END DJDE All Y Y EOF DJDE DP EPS Y Y Record A 4 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command and DJDE summary Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs Continued DJDE Off On orien Command Parameters Default Printing system line line tation EXPORT SEPARATORS NONE 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y 4135 96 4635 180 9790 8790 LPS SNUMBER 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page 4135 96 4635 180 9790 8790 LPS SPLIT 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page 4135 96 4635 180 9790 8790 LPS SRECOVER PAGE 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page 4135 96 4635 180 9790 8790 LPS STIMING 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y Page 4135 96 4635 180 9790 8790 LPS FILE DJDE filename All N Y Record filetype All N Y Record f input format All N Y Record s file storage All N Y Record GRAPHIC DJDE name All Y Y Record vpos All Y Y Record hpos All Y Y Record H All Y Y Record n d All Y Y Record INKS All Y Y Record inkref All Y Y Record IDEN OFFSET 0 All Y Y OPRINFO NO All Y Y PREFIX All Y Y SKIP 1 All Y Y Using LCDS Print Description Language A 5 PDL command and DJD
185. GE command examples 0 005 RRESUME and RSUSPEND commands RSUSPEND and RRESUME command parameters RSUSPEND and RRESUME BEGIN RSUSPEND and RRESUME TEST RRESUME and RSUSPEND commands points to ji PT RSUSPEND and RRESUME example RSTACK command sch RSTACK delimiter modes ssusse Delimiter on accounting page ssse Using LCDS Print Description Language Table of contents Status display cass ee a ree tain ee SERE EL S dus 3 54 RSTACK command parameters 3 55 RSTACK ACCTINGO oso OR ee Se um qi ete ein 3 55 RSTACK DELIMITER 47 3r ar nana e Ra gos CR 3 56 RSTACK HRPTNA 1 34 5 Yen Xn ce 9 qe edu So ER 3 56 RSTACK PRINT 3 dkL LCS ERE On E REC Rer 3 57 AST ACK TEST xxiii sq ap GE Cnt obruere t 3 58 RSTACK command points to note 3 58 RSTACK command example 005 3 59 4 Specifying print format parameters 4 1 Print format command descriptions 0000 e eee eee 4 1 ABNORMAL command tsi Eb edit erp E ree Rea 4 2 ABNORMAL command parameters 4 2 ABNORMAL ACCTFEED 20 55 4 2 ABNORMAL CODDB s ossa raros etie Oe C oa 4 3 ABNORMAL ERROR 5 354 245 39 aeo eie Pe n 4 3 ABNORMAL IMISMATCH 2 20055 4 5 ABNORMAL ISUBSTITUTE 4 6 ABNORMAL OTEXFE noes 34 Series
186. GO 2 57 VOLUME EMTYPE 13 9 0 400 6 00 Eti b Plor 2 58 VOLUME BOW 4 reae Ne EE Banh dire tr Red 2 58 VOLUME EXP AGE sis osx OT ate ore OR PE ces 2 59 VOLUME HOSE sacs beaten see aca ES ater eon ees 2 60 VOLUME KANJI 55 4 55 95 8 pack eO DE PP eats 2 62 VOLUME KODDE tree aa v Er Jes he gs 2 63 VOLUME LABEL san tea tated RR SERRA SENCN 2 63 Using LCDS Print Description Language Table of contents VOLUME LOCODE des testis aia ty das ees eae 2 64 VOLUME LPAGK vds uode dnd eile rei ee CR ea E RE 2 64 VOLUME MAXLAB 15 5 eo prre n ek omn S 2 65 VOLUME MINLADB our oet ha e Saa ap feci o 2 65 VOLUME OPTIMIZE 2 3 e RC ORE RTI Ee edes 2 66 VOLUME OSCHN 52 5 x etae RR EE 2 67 VOLUME OSHDP 25 cse rt Po crane va est 2 67 VOLUME OSTUR Ls nns Qi Ves d ete rd ces TRY ERR 2 67 VOLUME RMULT 85 3 dee dote Rn mb es 2 68 VOLUME TGODE 453 seti eg gn Rhone e e 2 68 VOLUME UNEPAQGJ a ra irr te po epar trad dee Qs 2 69 VOLUME VCODE siae ree dey cna da d epa moans 2 70 VOLUME command examples 2 71 3 Using logical processing ssseeesse 3 1 Types of commands for logical processing 0 20005 3 1 TGSFOXDIeSSIOTIS n d sons ws s do dn oa 6 PG mee we eae aa 3 2 Coding a test expression 335 54 xi coe EXER RR EEREDSPES 3 2 Logical processing commands that have TEST parameters 3 4 Commands that define criteria and constants 3 4 TAB E c mmand sieka a vm dvd eet e Ee be
187. IN HOLD Specifies that the same graphic is to be held and imaged without further callouts at the same position and with the same scale factor at all subsequent pages until changed by a DJDE CANCEL or ALTER DJDE n d numerator denominator Specifies the reference scale factor Each option n and d must be an integer in the range of 1 to 8 thereby allowing a reference scale factor in the range of 1 8 to 8 The reference scale factor is multiplied by the internal scale factor of the image INKS Specifies that the ink references that follow will override the inks that were defined in the image file inkref ink reference Specifies the inks that override the corresponding inks specified in the ink list of the image file 5 40 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs GRAPHIC DJDE points to note Other than name none of the parameters may be used if the specified graphic is document interleaved nor should name normally be used if the graphic is referenced by an IMAGE DJDE If the graphic is page interleaved the remaining parameters may be used exactly as on the IMAGE DJDE except for the T parameter If these parameters are specified in the GRAPHIC DJDE and also on one or more IMAGE DJDEs that reference the same graphic the graphic is imaged on the page once for each reference Document and page interleaved graphics If no textual data has been p
188. If DELIMITER YES is also coded the subfield is from the first delimiter record of the report For DELIMITER NO the subfield is from the first record of the report Syntax RSTACK ACCTINFO offset length Options Table 3 40 RSTACK ACCTINFO parameter options and definitions Option Definition offset The amount of space specified in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user portion of the record to the subfield within the record length The number of bytes in the subfield 1 to 64 Default No default Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 55 Using logical processing Syntax Options RSTACK DELIMITER Specifies whether or not RSTACK records are treated as data records RSTACK DELIMITER YES NO Table 3 41 RSTACK DELIMITER parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Specifies that all consecutive records that satisfy the TEST criteria are treated as a delimiter packet and not as data records NO Specifies that this single record separates one report from another and is treated as a data record Default Point to note RSTACK DELIMITER parameter Syntax 3 56 NO You can use DELIMITER NO to detect a record that is uniquely recognizable as the first record of each report and have the record treated as a report boundary Two common examples of this usage are e A page heading print record that has page numbers on it such as Page 00001
189. If one inkref in the list is omitted commas must be used as place holders to maintain the relative positioning of the remaining ink references f more than two ink references are specified the additional ink references are ignored ICATALOG DJDE Specifies an ink catalog that contains palettes and inks for subsequent pages Type Page oriented Syntax ICATALOG ink catalog name Options Table 5 30 ICATALOG DJDE options and definitions Option Definition ink catalog name Name of the ink catalog that will be used on the page Note that the ink catalog name is specified within single quotes ICATALOG DJDE example ICATALOG DFAULT IDFAULT DJDE Specifies the default ink that will be used for objects whose ink is not specified An example of this usage is page numbers whose color is not specified in an OUTPUT NUMBER parameter or the NUMBER DJDE Type Page oriented Syntax IDFAULT inkref 5 42 Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 31 IDFAULT DJDE options and definitions Option Definition inkref ink reference The default ink that will be used for all objects that do not specify an ink IDR DJDE Type Syntax Options IDFAULT DJDE point to note Only saturated primary colors can be specified by this DJDE Specifies the ink descriptor entry that will be used for
190. It may also be referred to as a picture element pixel or spot dots per inch Using LCDS Print Description Language dry ink DSU DSR DTE dump session duplex printing EBCDIC edgemarking ENET EOT EP ESS Ethernet extended metrics FCB FCP FDL field FIS fixed font Using LCDS Print Description Language Glossary Minute dry particles of resin and carbon black used to create images Dry ink can accept an electrical charge digital signal unit disk save and restore data terminal equipment The online dump feature is a troubleshooting tool for print jobs allowing you to generate hardcopy of the command and data transmission taking place between the host computer and the printing system while a job is being transmitted and printed Printing on both sides front and back of a page See also simplex printing Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code Coded character set consisting of 8 bit coded characters It can accommodate 256 characters Use of graphic objects usually lines or boxes that bleed off the edge of the physical page See also physical page Ethernet network end of tape electronic publishing electronic subsystem also referred to as the system controller Network system that allows data to be transmitted by cable from one device to another enabling it to share the network Measurements used in Interpress to alter the size of fonts allowing more precision with char
191. JDL but not in the selected JDE or JDL RSTACK processing is suspended until end of report is triggered by BANNER page detection If ACCTINFO is specified in the Initial JDE or JDL on the Online Job Manager window the ACCTINFO parameter cannot be changed or deleted in a selected JDE or JDL even if RSTACK is suspended If ACCTINFO is not specified in the Initial JDE or JDL it can be invoked in a selected JDE or JDL The first record after the selected JDE takes effect is then printed as the ACCTINFO field RSTACK command example Following is an example of the RSTACK command T1 TABLE CONSTANT XEROX C1 CRITERIA CONSTANT 1 5 EQ T1 RSTACK TEST C1 DELIMITER YES ACCTINFO 14 19 HRPTNA 20 10 In the previous example reports are separated by a record with the characters XEROX in bytes 1 to 5 relative to O Two reports are created as illustrated in the following figure The delimiter record is not printed with the report The following figure illustrates a sample RSTACK command usage Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 59 Using logical processing Character position 2 15 33 18t record JoXEROX ACCOUNTING REPORT 1 1St report ACCOUNTING REPORT 2 2st report Figure 3 8 Sample RSTACK command usage illustration 3 60 Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 Specifying print format parameters To specify the physical characteristics of a print
192. L 8 5 by 14 inches 216 by 279 mm A3 16 54 by 11 69 inches 420 by 297 mm A4 8 27 by 11 69 inches 210 by 297 mm B4 10 12 by 14 33 inches 257 by 364 mm USLETTER 8 5 by 11 inches 216 by 279 mm X y User specified width and length x defines the width in inches cm dots or Xdots y defines the length in inches cm dots or Xdots Default No default Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 81 Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT SYSPPR parameter points to note 4 82 PAPERSIZE B4 and PAPERSIZE 10 12 14 33 produce identical results in that they indicate long edge feed as opposed to short edge feed format Refer to SEFFNT command in the Specifying input parameters chapter for detailed information on short and long edge feed The SYSPPR parameter takes effect for the following system pages DJDE error page OPRINFO parameter of the IDEN command Report delimiter page PRINT parameter of the RSTACK command Accounting page ACCT command Graphic error summary page Short Edge Feed error page SYSPPR and the STOCKSET SYSPAGE parameter System pages are checked for stocks through the SYSPAGE parameter If there is no stock name active for the current page the system checks to see if a stock name was specified at the user interface on the Stock tab of the queue Properties window If so the system page is printed on the stock that is specified o
193. L commands may be specified in the following ways e na Job Source Library JSL As Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs One way to issue PDL job definition commands to your printing system is to create a text file of these commands for your job The source text uncompiled file of PDL commands is called a job source library JSL file The JSL file is then compiled by the system to create an object file called a job descriptor library JDL Each compiled JDL file is stored in a resource folder named cds that is located on the controller disk The system accesses the required JDL from the Icds folder when the operator specifies it to start a job When a job is sent from the host the printing system reads the specified JDL from which it obtains instructions on what fonts and forms to use when printing the job where to direct the printed output and so forth Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs are parameters embedded within the input data stream They modify the printing environment established by a job descriptor entry JDE within a JDL as the job is printing DJDEs allow page by page or record by record modifications to your applications Most PDL commands are also available as DJDEs Refer to PDL command and DJDE summary in appendix A for information on which PDL commands have DJDE counterparts In order to use DJDEs you must specify an IDEN command in the JSL to advise the system that DJDE records are include
194. L to be used when printing a job The command can be stated in the following ways SAMPL SYSTEM SAMPL JDL JDL or system level commands PDL commands coded at the JDL or system level establish default print job characteristics Commands that are common to all the jobs in the JSL are listed at this level so that they need not be coded in every job in the JSL System level commands however may be overridden by commands at the job or JDE level NOTE The JDL level is the highest level in a JSL When you enter the following command levels you may wish to indent them under the system level commands Coding system level commands with identifiers System level commands that require identifiers are typically coded first These commands must be placed in the JSL either before or in the same job as any other commands within the library that reference their identifiers The identifier that begins the command is typically placed at the left margin at the beginning of the line Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 21 PDL principles and procedures The VFU vertical format unit commands in the JSL illustration shown in table 1 7 are examples of commands with identifiers In this JSL the VFU command identifiers are called VFU1 and VFUO The types of commands described in the following sections are usually coded first at the system level following the JDL command because They require identifiers They ty
195. ME EMTYPE T1 T2 T1 VOLUME EOV PAUSE EOF NOPAUSE NOEOF NOPAUSE NOEOF VOLUME EXPAGE YES NO NO VOLUME HOST hosttype IBMOS VOLUME KANJI YES NO NO VOLUME KCODE keyword id VOLUME LABEL abeltype STANDARD VOLUME LCODE keyword id EBCDIC VOLUME LPACK YES NO NO VOLUME MAXLAB value 81 VOLUME MINLAB 80 80 VOLUME OPTIMIZE keyword keyword keyword NONE NONE VOLUME OSCHN value 9 VOLUME OSHDP value 0 VOLUME OSTLP value 0 VOLUME PLABEL YES NO NO VOLUME RMULT value 1 VOLUME RSAT SPLIT REMOUNT REMOUNT VOLUME TCODE tcodetype tcodename EBCDIC VOLUME UNPACK T4X3 TAX3H2 UNIVAC NONE NONE VOLUME VCODE translation type keyword B 10 Using LCDS Print Description Language C Character code assignments The charts in this section illustrate the following character code assignments IBM BCD code set Honeywell Bull 200 and 2000 BCD code set Honeywell Bull 6000 BCD code set Fieldata translation UNIVAC ASCII character set Standard ASCII character set Standard EBCDIC character set Xerox EBCDIC to extended ASCII hexadecimal translation values Using LCDS Print Description Language C 1 Character code assignments IBM BCD code set Table C 1 IBM BCD code set Octal columns 0 1 2 3 Most significant bits 4 5 6 7 8 amp H 1 9 J R A 2 0 K B amp 3 T L C
196. Print Description Language 5 47 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs e f more than one IRESULT is specified on a page the last instance takes precedence ITEXT DJDE Specifies a text message to be displayed to the operator during input processing Type Page oriented Syntax ITEXT NONE sc Options Table 5 38 ITEXT DJDE options and definitions Option Definition NONE Specifies that no text message is displayed to the operator during input processing SC string constant Specifies a text message of up to 80 characters ITEXT DJDE points to note e The ITEXT DJDE takes effect at the next page boundary The options for the ITEXT DJDE are the same as for the MESSAGE ITEXT parameter described under output format parameters JDE DJDE Specifies the JDE to be used within the current or selected JDL at the next page boundary Type Page oriented Syntax JDE JDEid 5 48 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Options Table 5 39 JDE DJDE options and definitions Option Definition JDEid Job Descriptor Entry identifier Name of the JDE that will be used within the current or selected JDL at the next page boundary This is called the selected JDE JDE DJDE points to note The new JDE that is specified in the JDE DJDE JDEid parameter is the selected JDE e In a DJDE packet containing a JDE
197. RANS YES is specified the following parameters are forced DUPLEX NO ACCT TRAY BFORNM is ignored For the RPAGE command the NUBACK parameter is forced to NUFRONT Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs When simplex mode is put into effect as is done by use of the TRANS DJDE the system ensures that the first simplex page printed after the DJDE is on an odd numbered page To accomplish this the system forces a blank back side for the last duplex page However if you specify TRANS NO and DUPLEX YES the System ensures that the first duplex page is printed on an odd numbered page XMP DJDE Xerographic Mode Persistence Controls the xerographic mode switching between black and color printing for a report Type Record oriented Syntax XMP DEFAULT REPORT Options Table 5 63 XMP DJDE options and definitions Option Definition DEFAULT Specifies that the xerographic mode switching that was specified at installation will be used for the report REPORT Specifies that when the system determines that a report requires highlight color for a page all subsequent pages of the report will print in highlight color XSHIFT DJDE Type Syntax Using LCDS Print De Specifies whether the image of the form and data on a page is to be shifted and if so by what values This DJDE shifts the data downward in the x direction for short edg
198. READ SKIP BSKIP BARCODE BSIDE ODD EVEN BOTH ODD BARCODE BSEQ RESET NORESET NOSEQ RESET BATCH DJDE BATCH START END only BDELETE BDELETE TEST testexp B 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command quick reference Table B 2 PDL command quick reference table Continued Command Syntax Default BLOCK BLOCK ADJUST value 0 BLOCK CONSTANT sc T BLOCK FORMAT type BIN BLOCK LENGTH value 1330 BLOCK LMULT value 1 BLOCK LTHFLD value 0 BLOCK OFFSET value 0 BLOCK POSTAMBLE value 0 BLOCK PREAMBLE value 0 BLOCK ZERO YES NO BSELECT BSELECT TEST testexp C text DJDE C text E only CANCEL CANCEL ALL name7 name2 DJDE only ac CATALOG catname CATALOG ac CME ac CME CONSTANT sc ac CME FONTS value ac CME LINE n n m n 1 ac CME POSITION n ac CME INK inkindex 0 ac CODE ac CODE ASSIGN input output input output output ac CODE DEFAULT codetype EBCDIC ac CODE SPACECODE spacecode X 20 ASCII X 40 non ASCIl ac CRITERIA ac CRITERIA CHANGE offset length NE LAST ac CRITERIA CONSTANT offset length EQ NE tabid ac C RITERIA LINENUM init count ALL LINES ac CRITERIA VALUE offset length EQ NE LT LE GT GE tabia Using LCDS Print De
199. S VOLUME EOV Specifies the action the system takes when it encounters an end of volume EOV on the input data tape Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Syntax VOLUME EOV PAUSE NOPAUSE EOF NOECF Options Table 2 62 VOLUME EOV parameter options and definitions Option Definition PAUSE Displays a message when EOV is encountered A CONTINUE response by the operator causes the tape to rewind and the normal volume change sequence to proceed NOPAUSE Issues a rewind instruction as soon as the EOV label is processed EOF End of file Specifies that the end of volume label is treated as an end of file label When this occurs the first part of the page spanning the volumes is output as the last page of the job The second part of the spanned page is printed as the first page when the next volume is started with possible page format irregularities To use the EOF parameter effectively special user formatting of the multireel tapes is required to avoid these page format problems NOEOF No end of file Specifies normal end of volume processing Defaults NOPAUSE NOEOF VOLUME EXPAGE Enables data error logging and reporting of unprintable characters that do not have font bitmap or outline data in the font file Errors are flagged on a separate page Syntax VOLUME EXPAGE YES NO Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 59 Specifying input parameters Optio
200. S OUTPUT COPIES number 1 OUTPUT COVER coveropt NONE OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS formid formid formid NONE INK S inkref inkref L formia INK S inkref inkref NONE OUTPUT DENSITY FIX NOFIX DEFAULT DEFAULT OUTPUT DESTINATION BIN TRAY EXPORT OUTPUT DUPLEX YES NO NO OUTPUT FACEUP YES NO NO OUTPUT FEED stockreference stockname MAIN AUX OPR OPR OUTPUT FORMAT PDEid FMT1 OUTPUT FORMS formid formid init copies INK S NONE init inkref inkref NONE defaults to first or next copy FOR defaults to FORMAT if FORM S is not fully entered OUTPUT GRAPHICS NO YES MOVE BATCH YES NO NOSUB MOVE NOSUB OUTPUT IDFAULT inkref First ink in ILIST parameter OUTPUT IDR DHname DFIDR IDR OUTPUT IMAGE vpos UN CM IN DOTS XDOTS Inches top left hpos UN CM IN DOTS XDOTS inkref corner scaled at 1 to 1 OUTPUT INVERT FRONT BACK BOTH NONE Installation default OUTPUT IRESULT BLACK COLOR Installation default OUTPUT LOGO name vpos units hpos units INKS inkindex inkindex OUTPUT MODIFY CMEid CMEid init copies NONE NONE B 6 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command quick reference Table B 2 PDL command quick reference table Continued
201. ST Specifies a list of all the inks that may be referenced by the ink index on the page INKINDEX Specifies a field within a data record that contains a number representing the ink index in the current ILIST INVERT Specifies that the subsequent page content will be inverted 180 degrees on the physical page Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 4 Page oriented DJDEs Continued DJDE Function ITEXT Specifies a text message that will be displayed to operators during processing JDE Specifies the JDE to be used within the selected JDL at the next page boundary JDL Specifies the name of the JDL to be invoked at the next page boundary MAP References a previously created font mapping file MARGIN Specifies the left printing margin within each logical page MODIFY Specifies the CME to be used on each subsequent logical page NUMBER Specifies page numbering control OTEXT Provides a text message to be displayed to the operator during job printing PALETTE Specifies the palette of inks that will be used for subsequent pages PMODE Specifies the printing mode for each page either landscape or portrait RFORM Specifies whether a form is printed on all RTEXT pages RTEXT Specifies text to be printed on a separate page preceding each report copy SEFMAP Specifies a font mapping table SHIFT Specifie
202. Set Buffer user interface Editing window on a Sun workstation controller used to code PDL commands in a JSL General purpose program that performs activities such as initializing a disk or sorting which are not specific to any application Process of testing a system s ability to meet performance objectives by measuring and monitoring its performance in a live environment Arithmetic values such as decimal hexadecimal octal or character values Text of changing nature such as various names and addresses combined with a form letter to make a complete document virtual memory Page area selected by a forms designer for printing vertical positioning virtual storage wide area network Characteristic of type determined by how light or dark it appears Horizontal axis on a forms grid Unit of measurement representing a fraction of an inch It may also be referred to as a picture element pixel or spot for example 1 600 spots per inch spi Height of lowercase letters without their ascenders or descenders height of letter x See also ascender descender Xerox Customer Support Center Xerox DCF and GDDM Interface Glossary 15 Glossary XDSS XICS XJCF XJDC XMP XMS XPAF XPF XPMF VMS XPPI XPS y axis Glossary 16 Xerox Documentation and Software Services Xerox Integrated Composition System Xerox Job Control Facility Xerox Job Descriptor Compiler Used by the DP 2000 Series EPS workstat
203. Specifying DJDE records ce RT IEEE ERES 5 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language xi Table of contents xii Application oft DJDES xus exer xr epu E et a ee eee ee eke 5 3 DJDE operator information pages 000 0s eee ee eee 5 5 Restrictions on job parameter modification 2 245 5 6 Considerations and cautions for using DJDEs 5 8 Types OV DIDES 1x det ood eet ext Dc d awe ae eta 5 10 DIDE descriptions s debi DECORE UP LEN PR Ln 5 14 ALTER DIDE oss psa Sacr eeu o ehh C eG LX otra 5 14 ALTER DJDE point tO note 5 245 Nees ee x ES 5 15 Examples of ALTER DJDE 5 15 ASSIGN DIDE 5 un hae sin Esci hit o e ee hee Rs P Ae Mina 5 16 ASSIGN DJDE points to note 5 16 BATCH DUDE e oput Opa ord Gee rA ET Gere een iad 5 16 BATCH DJDE points to note 5 17 BEGIN DUDE 3 s a RARI e A RA t Pire BERI S 5 17 BEGIN DJDE points to note 05 5 18 BFORM DJDE 1 53 4 86 uii ndot act deeem ri ire to ah orta 5 18 BFORM DJDE points to note 5 19 BOF DJDE stsrosasiei dud ires qa dae datei ee ee dos Aaa 5 20 BOF DJDE points to note 20000 cee 5 20 C ext DJD E uu vette Ee REED tees Sate ete se SE 5 20 C text DUDE points to note 5 21 CANCEL DUD Baye doct Done UI E e Shee ne ah ame UE 5 21 COLLATE DID E 4 a ia ints ha a ob aene fe irte b Dad ares 5 22 COLLAT
204. T PASSES Initiates an offset of specified copies of a report Y Y N ROFFSET TEST Defines a test expression for offsetting pages in the Y Y N stacker The following section describes the syntax of the ROFFSET command parameters and explains their options ROFFSET PASSES Specifies which copy of a report in a collated print run will be offset Syntax ROFFSET PASSES FIRST ALL Options Table 3 30 ROFFSET PASSES parameter options and definitions Option Definition FIRST Specifies that the satisfied criteria causes an offset only on the first pass of a collated print run ALL Specifies that the satisfied criteria causes an offset on all passes of a collated print run Default ALL 3 40 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing ROFFSET TEST Specifies the test expression for offsetting pages in the stacker bin Syntax ROFFSET TEST testexp Options Table 3 31 ROFFSET TEST parameter options and definitions Option Definition testexp test expression Specifies the criteria test that if satisfied causes the output to be offset in the stacker tray Refer to Coding a test expression earlier in this chapter for the format and syntax of a testexp Default No default ROFFSET command points to note The ROFFSET feature prints the record that satisfies the test expression according to the normal job parameters If ROFFSET is specified for an uncollated job an offs
205. TEST parameter options and definitions Options Definitions testexp test expression Refer to Coding a test expression earlier in this chapter for the format and syntax of a testexp If a test expression is satisfied the page containing the record tested is considered a banner page Default No default BANNER TYPE Specifies the use of selected data pages as banner pages when reports do not contain this information Syntax BANNER TYPE DATA BANNER Options Table 3 19 BANNER TYPE parameter options and definitions Option Definition DATA Allows you to specify selected data pages to function as banner pages for report separation This type of banner page is printed with a form if specified In duplex mode it is printed as a duplex page with data on the back If multiple PDE BEGINs and TYPE DATA parameters are specified only the first header page of the report is repositioned to the first logical page of a new physical sheet BANNER Specifies that the banner pages will print without forms In duplex mode the banner pages are printed with blank backs Default BANNER BANNER TYPE Use DATA when reports do not contain user specified banner parameter point pages Use BANNER when reports contain user specified tonote banner pages 3 26 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing BANNER command points to note Field content captured via HJO
206. TH 136 e Offline VOLUME HOST IBMOS LABEL STANDARD CODE EBCDIC BLOCK LENGTH 2660 PREAMBLE 4 LTHFLD 2 FORMAT BIN RECORD LENGTH 135 PREAMBLE 4 LTHFLD 2 STRUCTURE VB OFFSET 2 FORMAT BIN Specifying LINE The LINE command references VFUs from the system level and command allows you to instruct the system on which parts of the data in parameters each record will be printed For this reason it typically follows the RECORD command For example LINE DATA 1 132 PCCTYPE IBM3211 PCC 0 NOTRAN VFU VFUI Specifying ACCT The ACCT command often follows the LINE command and can command be coded into any command level parameters ACCT USER TRAY Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 25 PDL principles and procedures 1 26 Catalog level commands The catalog level allows the coding of commands common to several JDEs A catalog can then be referenced in an INCLUDE parameter in any following JDE commands A catalog section of a JSL begins with the CATALOG command and ends with the appearance of another CATALOG command or a JOB command CATALOG commands may contain the same commands that appear in the JOB command The CATALOG command has the form catname CATALOG The CATNAME is a 1 to 6 character alphanumeric identifier of which at least one character must be alphabetic The catalog name is referenced by JDEs after the CATALOG command set has been defi
207. TINDEX or CMEs are specified the line spacing of the first line of subsequent pages is determined by the line spacing of the font called out by the last font index of the previous page applied to the current font list If a FORMAT DJDE has occurred before the page transition the font used for the line spacing comes from this list FONTS DJDE Specifies the fonts to be used in printing variable input data or CME data Type Page oriented Syntax FONTS AL fo fp Sil unit L fo sa L unit L or FONTS sbf s unifl dbf vn hn s unit Ai DBi Kj c4 unit Options Table 5 25 FONTS DJDE options and definitions Option Definition f font Specifies a one to six alphanumeric character identifier consisting of at least one letter corresponding to a font catalogued on the system disk sbf single byte font Specifies a one to six alphanumeric character identifier consisting of at least one letter corresponding to a single byte font catalogued on the system disk dbf double byte font Specifies a one to six alphanumeric character identifier consisting of at least one letter corresponding to a double byte font catalogued on the system disk i index Specifies the font index for a double byte character set Can be 1 through 8 Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 35 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs 5 36 Table 5 2
208. TOF Specifies that the control program will perform the first spacing skipping or printing action from the Top Of Form top of page image BOF Specifies that the control program will perform the first spacing skipping or printing action from the Bottom Of Form bottom of page image Default 2 34 TOF Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Specifying input parameters PCC MASK Makes inaccessible any unnecessary bits from the printer Carriage control byte ac PCC MASK value Table 2 36 PCC MASK parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies an 8 bit value that will be used in a bit wise AND operation with the printer carriage control byte being processed AND occurs after translation if any The result of this process is to mask off bits from the carriage control byte that are not relevant to the operation being specified Default X FF PCC command points to note When using the PCC command keep in mind the following Multiple user defined PCC tables are allowed but only one may be used without a command identifier The LINE PCCTYPE parameter is used to invoke a PCC command by reference to its identifier The keyword USER can be used to reference any user defined PCC table for which no command identifier is coded You may end a PCC command with a semicolon and start another PCC command to continue specific
209. TPUT FEED La us Uhlan dat dons rhs edt ict 4 53 OUTPUT FORMAT 5 53 vo P tre b epa SIRE 4 54 OUTPUT FORMS setts x opt e Monta are ad es 4 55 OUTPUT GRAPHICS aiiud Qaa ne a eA Ee E Re 4 56 OUTPUTIDEAULT 33 81 te a aoa he ek DE 4 57 OUTPUT IDR x sy ciry tiesto ata d a 6k e YR t 4 58 OUTPUT IMAGE x Bee desees ie des So RE ts 4 59 OUTPUT INVERT qi em usted tacto diae oh diag agree 4 60 OUTPUT IRESULT 4 au iO E Re RA RENS 4 61 OUTPUT LOGO oy arr ye ex PE ERES S d 4 62 OUTPUT MODIFY tists eorr ma reor ta DR pedte 4 63 OUTPUT NTOT ec 3p ta agen ciao er PE EXON 4 64 OUTPUT NUMBER 5 anced Va rod I eret ox do ex 4 66 OUTPUT ORs BPs tin soie E Ei a Roe eats 4 67 Using LCDS Print Description Language Table of contents OUTPUT OSTR 4 a3 ace Vets atur ER TREE E els es 4 68 OUTPUT PAPERSIZE 2 ates Copain ER os be eine 4 73 OUTPUT PURGE 34er dente lt Sa hee het hue Asp Ren 4 74 OUTPBUT SF TFUNGCTION Co tv ty gne tei dx 4 75 OUTPUT SF2F NGTION 4 eee xr mae ee 4 76 OUTPUT SHIET 223 avia nde yeaa Ree ERR 4 76 OUTPUT SIZING s xcepiegne d b ACER el sen 4 77 OUTPUT SIAPEE esas oi tob cR CERE 4 79 OUTPUT STOCKS 11294 822 Abe Pre an blot 4 80 OUTPUT SYSPPE 45 edat s obi hd eMe 4 81 OUTPUT TMODE sn ox celeste ao ea De Xs ee pex 4 83 OUTPUT TRANS u diia wie 6 466 ay aA eer Parere 4 87 OUTPUT UNITS s gas abo Ae e a oe 4 87 OUTPUT XSPIE D eis Sadie sccm aa ere een Cu ce osten 4 88 OUTPUT command point to note 4 89 OUTPUT command exa
210. UCTURE U or UB Packed data formats are not supported Each graphic must be preceded immediately by a GRAPHIC DJDE Using LCDS Print Description Language Page Interleaved format Batch Mode format Using PDL commands for graphics Use of block and record constants in an appropriately structured file type F FB V or VB containing interleaved graphics is supported However the actual delimiter searching is suspended while an IMG file is being read For record delimiters this means that delimiter searching is suspended from the first record of graphic data until the entire graphic has been read Extraneous bytes at the end of the last record are ignored Record delimiter processing resumes with the next record For block delimiters this means that the first byte of a graphic must be the first data byte of a block and that the first byte of data following the graphic must also be the first byte of a block Extraneous data in the last block following the last byte specified by the IMG byte count is ignored e Improved tape to disk processing time is obtained if the graphic data portion of each record is an integer multiple of 512 bytes and begins at an even byte offset from the beginning of the block Processing of each graphic begins in this mode If a record is not a multiple of 512 bytes or does not begin at an even byte offset from the beginning of the block the mode is terminated In this format one or mo
211. UME command parameters The following table summarizes the parameters for the RSUSPEND and the RRESUME commands Table 3 36 Summary of RSUSPEND and RRESUME command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE BEGIN Indicates with which record the print suspension Y Y N RSUSPEND or resumption RRESUME begins TEST Defines a test expression for the records at which to Y Y N suspend and resume printing Syntax The following sections describe the syntax of the RSUSPEND and RRESUME command parameters and explain their options RSUSPEND and RRESUME BEGIN Specifies whether printing will be suspended starting with the current record or with the following one RSUSPEND BEGIN CURRENT NEXT RRESUME BEGIN CURRENT NEXT Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 49 Using logical processing Options Table 3 37 RSUSPEND and RRESUME BEGIN parameter options and definitions Option Definition CURRENT Specifies that printing will stop or resume on the current record If CURRENT is coded for RSUSPEND the record satisfying testexp does not print If CURRENT is coded for RRESUME the record is printed NEXT Specifies that printing will stop or resume with the next record If NEXT is coded for RSUSPEND the record satisfying testexp is printed and printing is suppressed beginning with the next record If NEXT is coded for RRESUME the record satisfying th
212. UMP Label specification is ignored OSWTR X X OCTDUMP Label specification is ignored RSX11 X STDOUT Undef X UNIVAC US70 XEROX Each shaded area of this table shows the label that is substituted by PDL when an invalid host label pair is specified Each X indicates a valid label specification parameter for each type of host Host system JDLs on system software CD Job description library JDL source files that are supplied on the DocuSP software CD are summarized in the following table Table D 2 JDL source files on software CD JDL JDEs provided for DUMPA4 JDE 2 or EBCDIC 3 or ASCII 5 or IBMBCD 6 or UNIVAC DUMP or Tape dumps of various tape formats where Characteristics EBCDIC ASCII IBM BCD UNIVAC Fieldata Using LCDS Print Description Language D 3 Offline specifications Table D 2 JDL source files on software CD Continued JDL JDEs provided for IBMRCA IBM OS and DOS standard labeled tapes IBM ANSI labeled and OS Writer tapes US70 RCA labeled tapes OLDUMP Online dumps of host transmissions ONLINE Online with or without banner or trailer pages UNIVAC Univac DF formated tapes XEROX ANSI labeled tapes Unlabeled tapes Xerox ANSI labeled tapes JDEs to print unknown tapes Printing tapes without attempting to deblock the tape properly After an LPS software system is created by the user the source for these JDLs is r
213. USPEND command is coded an RRESUME command is also present for the job A warning is issued by the XJDC compiler if one but not both commands is invoked for a job However the JDE is compiled as programmed e Ifa data record satisfying the test expression in the RSUSPEND is encountered printing is suspended If no record that satisfies the test expression in the RRESUME command is encountered or no RRESUME command is present for the job there is no output generated for records that occur after the point of suspension Record selection or deletion is performed before RSUSPEND or RRESUME processing If a record satisfying either the suspend or resume test criteria was not selected for or was deleted from printing it does not cause either the suspend or resume function The records just before print suspension and after resumption should have compatible printer carriage control PCC characters No additional carriage control characters are inserted by the system during the print suppression Useofthe LINENUM parameter in the CRITERIA command is not recommended when using RRESUME Because carriage control characters are not processed during print suppression the line number used by the system is that which existed before the suppression started This could result in the test criteria being either unexpectedly satisfied or never satisfied as a function of the line number where the print suppression started e DJDE records are
214. Xerox DocuPrint EPS Using LCDS Print Description Language 701P21091 Version 3 7 May 2003 Xerox Corporation Global Knowledge and Language Services West Coast Operations 701 South Aviation Boulevard ESM1 058 El Segundo CA 90245 2003 by Xerox Corporation All rights reserved Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrighted material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted including without limitation material generated from the software programs that are displayed on the screen such as styles templates icons screen displays looks etc Printed in the U S A U K and France XEROX XEROX Europe and XEROX Canada Limited The Document Company the stylized X and all names and identifying numbers used in connection with Xerox products mentioned in this publication are trademarks of XEROX CORPORATION All non Xerox brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Other company trademarks are also acknowledged While the information in this guide is correct at the time of this publication Xerox reserves the right at any time to change the information without notice Changes are made periodically to this document Changes and technical updates will be added in subsequent editions Table of contents Laser safety ieee eee teas ER Ax E Ra eee PEOR Ca es xvii Ozone information U S only ou estos dex ee tends ee e
215. Y Record ALL All Y Y Record SEFFNT MAP 96 4635 180 LPS Y Y Page DP EPS SEFMAP 96 4635 180 LPS Y Y Page DP EPS ac STOCKSET ASSIGN All Y Y INIFEED first stockname All Y Y SYSPAGE All Y Y ac SYSTEM All Y Y ac TABLE CONSTANT All Y Y MASK All Y Y ac TCODE DEFAULT All Y Y TASSIGN All Y Y TRESET All Y Y ac VFU ASSIGN All Y Y Record BOF 66 All Y Y Record TOF 1 All Y Y Record Using LCDS Print Description Language A 11 PDL command and DJDE summary Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs Continued DJDE Off On orien Command Parameters Default Printing system line line tation VOLUME BMULT 1 All Y N CODE EBCDIC All Y Y DBCODE DP EPS N Y DBCS NO DP EPS N Y E EMTYPE T1 DP EPS N Y EOV NOPAUSE All Y N NOEOF EXPAGE YES DP EPS N Y HOST IBMOS All Y Y KANJI NO DP EPS N Y KCODE DP EPS N Y LABEL STANDARD All Y N LCODE EBCDIC All Y N LPACK NO All Y N MAXLAB 81 All Y N MINLAB 80 All Y N OPTIMIZE NONE All except DP EPS Y N OSCHN 9 All Y N OSHDP 0 All Y N OSTLP 0 All Y N PLABEL NO All except DP EPS Y N RMULT 1 All Y N RSAT REMOUNT All Y N TCODE EBCDIC All Y Y UNPACK NONE All Y N VCODE EBCDIC 4850 4890 DP92
216. a criterion is met the stock name remains in effect until the next RFEED criterion are met or a new report is processed e RFEED is not available as a DJDE Instead the FEED DJDE is available for similar functions Refer to the FEED DJDE description e Inamultiple RFEED criteria command the order in which the test expressions are specified makes a difference in the job application After a test is satisfied the system ignores RFEED checking for the rest of the page RFEED checking resumes when a page transition occurs Consider the following example Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing PAPERSTK STOCKSET ASSIGN RED REDPPR ASSIGN BLUE BLUPPR ASSIGN GREEN GRNPPR Tu TABLE CONSTANT ABC T2 TABLE CONSTANT DEF T TABLE CONSTANT GHI Gis CRITERIA CONSTANT 4 3 EQ T1 C2 CRITERIA CONSTANT 4 3 EQ T2 ICE CRITERIA CONSTANT 15 3 EQ T3 RFEED TEST C1 RED 02 BBUE t 03 GREEN In this example the system checks C1 C2 and then C3 If C2 and C3 satisfy the specified criteria the C2 stock has priority over the C3 stock due to its position in the JSL ROFFSET command The logical processing ROFFSET command enables you to initiate a page offset in the stacker tray under control of the input data and DJDE records These special user controlled offsets can simplify job distribution by creat
217. acter code types Type Characters 0 All characters except those defined below 1 Open parentheses Thousands separator character Close parentheses Minus sign Decimal point 0 NIOJ oO AJ OJN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Default EBCDIC VCODEO VOLUME VCODE VOLUME CODE ASCII VCODE ASCII VCODEO examples In the example above the command utilizes the character type code table applicable to the United Kingdom or the United States to process and compare numeric values through an ASCII code translation VOLUME CODE EBCDIC VCODE EBCDIC VCODE1 In the above example the command utilizes the character Type code table applicable to France to process and compare numeric values through an EBCDIC code translation VOLUME command examples The following are sample VOLUME commands for different host types Online VOLUME HOST IBMONL CODE EBCDIC Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 71 Specifying input parameters Offline VOLUME HOST UNIVAC LABEL STANDARD UNPACK T4X3 CODE ASCII LCODE ASCIT VOLUME HOST IBMOS VOLUME HOST B6700 LABEL ANSI BMULT 6 RMULT 6 VOLUME HOST OCTDUMP CODE H6BCD UNPACK T 4X3 2 72 Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 Using logical processing Logical or special processing enables you to specif
218. acter escapement Used for rendered characters forms control buffer Buffer for controlling the vertical format of printed output file control parameter forms description language LPS resident source language used for designing electronic forms See also FSL form 1 Part of a record that serves a similar function in all records of that group such as name and address field 2 Area or setting of practical activity or application Font Interchange Standard Standard that defines the digital representation of fonts and character metrics for the generation of an entire series of Interpress fonts Font containing characters with fixed spacing See also proportional font Glossary 5 Glossary fixed pitch fixed spacing floating accent form format form feed FPS FSL FST GCR grid unit gsm halftone screen Glossary 6 HCF Font set in which every character cell has the same width In reference to character sets this term describes typefaces in which all character cells are of equal width monospaced as opposed to proportional spaced Arrangement of characters on a line so that all characters occupy the same amount of horizontal space Nonspacing accent characters that can be combined with characters and printed as a composite 1 Compiled forms source library FSL file 2 Printed or typed document with blank spaces for inserting information Specific arrangement of lines text and graphics
219. al constraints that effectively reduce the maximum number of fonts that may be used to print a page The number of fonts specified in the FONTS parameter determines the size of a dynamically allocated table where information about the fonts is cached An xdotis 1 600 unit of measurement You can create edit and compile a form specifying XDOTS on any Xerox laser printing system other than the DP EPS with version 3 or higher software The 600 spi form does not print on the DP EPS which accept only 300 spi data PDE PMODE Specifies the printing mode orientation for each physical sheet Syntax ac PDE PMODE LANDSCAPE PORTRAIT Options Table 4 86 PDE PMODE parameter options and definitions Option Definition LANDSCAPE Indicates that printing will be parallel to the long edge of paper for paper loaded with its long edge facing the feed direction Print lines on 11 by 17 inch or A3 paper are parallel to the short edge PORTRAIT Indicates that printing will be parallel to the short edge of paper for paper loaded with its long edge facing the feed direction Print lines on 11 by 17 inch or A3 paper are parallel to the long edge Default LANDSCAPE Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 97 Specifying print format parameters Example 1 PDE1 PDE2 Teles P1 4 98 PDE command points to note You may code PDEs as part of the JSL or create them as separate files so that they ma
220. al page B Logical page C RPAGE RECORD Third BEGIN position gt f j Logical page C WHEN BOTTOM WHEN NOW Original physical side New physical side Original physical side New physical side Logical page A Logical page C Logical page A RPAGE RECORD second part Logical page B RPAGE RECORD RENE QE Figure 3 7 Effects of RPAGE WHEN parameter 3 48 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing RRESUME and RSUSPEND commands The print suppression logical processing function permits you to delete from printing groups of records that are distinguishable at the start and end but whose intermediate records may not be unique or distinguishable Print suppression and resumption are invoked by the use of two separate commands RSUSPEND and RRESUME The tests for each command are independent and must be described separately Each of the commands can specify the full range of tests as described previously for the other logical processing commands When specifying either the RSUSPEND or RRESUME command you can also specify whether suspension or resumption of printing occurs on the current or next record This is controlled by the BEGIN parameter This additional control provides the necessary flexibility to cope with the variability of requirements for print suppression The BEGIN parameter can be specified independently in both the RSUSPEND and the RRESUME commands RSUSPEND and RRES
221. ame as for the OUTPUT command Type Page oriented Syntax BFORM NONE formid init copies INKS inkref inkrefz 5 18 Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 11 BFORM DJDE options and definitions Option Definition NONE Specifies that no form will be added to the associated report page of variable data When NONE is specified in combination with other BFORM options it takes precedence over the other BFORM options so that no forms are printed formid form identifier Specifies a filename for a form that exists on disk This form file is created with forms creation software on a workstation or with Forms Description Language FDL on another type of LPS init initial copy Specifies the first copy number to which a specified form applies NOTE For the DP 2000 Series EPS any init specification greater than 1 is ignored The form that appears on the first copy appears on all subsequent copies copies Specifies the number of plies passes to which a specified form applies Default is all copies of the report INKS Indicate that ink references follow inkref ink reference Identifies an ink that overrides the corresponding ink specified in the ink list of a colored form If the form does not contain an ink list the form is printed in black NOTE If one ink reference from the ink list is
222. ameter ABNORMAL command 4 6 MESSAGE command 4 40 OUTPUT command 4 42 4 91 BFORM parameter 4 44 BINDING parameter 4 45 COLLATE parameter 4 48 COPIES parameter 4 48 COVER parameter 4 49 CYCLEFORMS parameter 4 49 DENSITY parameter 4 51 DESTINATION parameter 4 51 DUPLEX parameter 4 52 FACEUP parameter 4 52 FEED parameter 4 53 FORMAT parameter 4 54 FORMS parameter 4 55 GRAPHICS parameter 4 56 graphics parameters 6 1 IDFAULT parameter 4 57 IDR parameter 4 58 IMAGE parameter 4 59 INVERT parameter 4 60 IRESULT parameter 4 61 LOGO parameter 4 62 MODIFY parameter 4 63 NTO 1 parameter 4 64 NUMBER parameter 4 66 OFFSET parameter 4 67 OSTK parameter 4 68 PAPERSIZE parameter 4 73 PURGE parameter 4 74 SF1FUNCTION parameter 4 75 SF2FUNCTION parameter 4 76 SHIFT parameter 4 76 SIZING parameter 4 77 Using LCDS Print Description Language INDEX 7 INDEX STAPLE parameter 4 79 STOCKS parameter 4 80 SYSPPR parameter 4 81 TRANS parameter 4 87 UNITS parameter 4 87 XSHIFT parameter 4 88 output command descriptions see print format command descriptions output parameters specifying 1 28 OVERPRINT DJDE 5 59 OVERPRINT parameter LINE command 4 31 overrides specifying during printing 1 45 overriding commands 1 40 1 47 ozone xvii P packed data formats 2 9 Page Interleaved format 6 5 page numbers specifying 4 66 5 55 page oriented DJDEs 5 10 5 12 pages logical 1
223. amic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 58 SIDE DJDE options and definitions Option Definition sideopt side option In duplex with no BFORM The four sideopt options produce the following results NUFRONT The specified logical page is positioned as the first logical page on a new sheet BACK The specified logical page is positioned as the first logical page of the next available back NUBACK The specified logical page is positioned as the first logical page on the back of a new sheet NEXT The specified logical page is positioned as the first logical page on the next available side the back of the current sheet or the front of the next sheet The logical page is moved unless it is already properly positioned as the first logical page on the specified side offsetopt In simplex or in duplex with BFORM The sideopt parameter is forced to NUFRONT and the specified page is positioned as the first logical page If the logical page is already properly positioned a blank sheet is not created Specifies whether sheets containing repositioned logical pages will be offset in the stacker The available offsetopt parameters are e OFFSET Causes the sheet on which the repositioned logical page occurs to be offset NOFFSET No offset occurs The default offset option is NOFFSET SIDE DJDE points to note The SIDE DJDE takes effect at a logical page boundary Th
224. an integer number The thousands separator is allowed within a numeric character string only if it is placed between groups of three digits going away from the decimal point A decimal point or a thousands separator may appear repeatedly outside the numeric character string In VCODEO the following are examples of valid numeric character strings 50 000 0 000 50 42 1 000 00 and 53 5 The referenced TABLE command may not use the MASK parameter When more than one character string constant is specified in the TABLE command the following occurs If the operator is EQ the system tests the variable data against all the values in the TABLE CONSTANT statement If any of the values are equal the system returns a TRUE value Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing Ifthe operator is NE LT GT LE or GE the system tests the variable data against only the first value in the TABLE CONSTANT statement Performance CRITERIA VALUE affects system performance in relation to the considerations number of characters per page involved This is a function of the with the CRITERIA number of tests performed the number of character columns in VALUE parameter each test and the number of lines in which the criteria is evaluated The following actions can help you reduce the impact of CRITERIA VALUE processing on your printer throughput speed when printing your applications Restrict the
225. any given time If a multicopy report specifies CYCLEFORMS a FORMS DJDE that is encountered in the report overrides the CYCLEFORMS parameter from that point in every copy For colored forms If an inkref that is on the ink list is omitted from the command commas must be used to maintain the relative positioning of the remaining ink references If more than two inkrefs are specified the system ignores the additional inkrefs OUTPUT OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS formi form2 CYCLEFORMS parameter example 4 50 Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT DENSITY Specifies how the system will respond to a scan line density error This parameter is obsolete and is listed for compatibility purposes only It is however recognized by the XJDC PDL compiler You would use it if your JSL will be used for printing on a system that is running an early version of operating system software OUTPUT DENSITY FIX NOFIX DEFAULT Table 4 49 OUTPUT DENSITY parameter options and definitions Option Definition FIX Enables local density function NOFIX Disables local density function DEFAULT Directs the output to respond to local density events according to the default for the printer type Default DEFAULT OUTPUT DESTINATION Specifies the destination for printed output Syntax OUTPUT DESTINATION BIN TRAY EXPORT Using LCDS Print Description Lan
226. aracter file names are supported Unused file name characters must be filled with 0 33 35 ASCII file type 42 176 Contain 0 177 ASCII 052 200 777 Contain 0 NOTE Characters in the ASCII file name and type fields must be in the RAD 50 Radix 50 character set The following table defines the RAD 50 character set Table D 4 RAD 50 character set RAD 50 ASCII RAD 50 RAD 50 character Octal value Octal value decimal value space 040 000 000 A Z 101 132 001 032 1 26 044 033 27 056 034 28 undefined 035 29 0 9 060 071 036 047 30 39 Using LCDS Print Description Language A3 A4 ACT AFP AIM algorithm alphanumeric ANSI ascender ASCII asynchronous audit log auxiliary menu B4 Using LCDS Print Description Language Glossary Paper size measuring 297 by 420 mm Paper size measuring 210 by 297 mm Advanced Customer Training Advanced Function Printing Ancillary IOT message processor System task that initializes the client layer between the printer and the system controller It also displays the Fault Hint and information messages Computational procedure that can be repeated any number of times Set of characters including the letters A through Z numerals 0 through 9 and all printable special symbols American National Standards Institute Portion of alphabetic character that rises above the body of the character its x height p
227. are It contains the definition of the system default BLACK ink specified by the following command DFIDR DR ILIST BLACK When the VOLUME command CODE NONE parameter is specified an ILIST parameter referencing a highlight color primary causes the entire report to print in highlight mode If ILIST references only black ink the report prints in black mode Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 21 Specifying print format parameters IDR PALETTE Establishes a default inks palette that will be used in ink references when there is no specific palette reference Syntax ac IDR PALETTE palette Options Table 4 23 IDR PALETTE parameter options and definitions Option Definition palette Name of the default palette that will be used in ink references in the absence of a specific palette reference Default No default IDR PALETTE The palette that is identified by this parameter remains in effect parameter point until itis changed by another IDR PALETTE parameter This also tonote applies to ink references that are specified by DJDEs LINE command The LINE command provides parameters that define the characteristics of the user portion of the input data record and specify how it will be printed LINE command parameters The following table summarizes the LINE command parameters Table 4 24 Summary of LINE command parameters Parameter Specifies Onl
228. arty finishing device The user must specify what function SF1 will have Refer to your finishing equipment vendor documentation for more detailed information Type Page oriented Syntax SF1FUNCTION YES NO Options Table 5 55 SF1FUNCTION DJDE options and definitions Option Definition YES Instructs the third party finisher to begin the user defined SF1 operation on the current sheet NO Instructs the third party finisher not to perform on the current sheet the operation defined as SF1 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs SF2FUNCTION DJDE Specifies to the third party finisher whether or not it should perform the user defined SF2 operation on the current sheet SF2FUNCTION invokes the C7 signal of the electronic interface between printing system and a third party finishing device Refer to your finishing equipment vendor device documentation for more detailed information Type Page oriented Syntax SF2FUNCTION YES NO Options Table 5 56 SF2FUNCTION DJDE options and definitions Option Definition YES Instructs the finisher to begin the operation defined as SF2 on the current sheet NO Instructs the third party finisher not to perform on the current sheet the operation defined as SF2 SHIFT DJDE Shifts the printed image from the edge of the physical page This DJDE is commonly used to accommodate hole drilli
229. ating and compiling PDE files using the XJDC processor Default OUTPUT FORMAT parameter point 4 54 to note FMT1 Standard pdeids such as FMT1 and FMT2 are defined in the PDE command section later in this chapter These standard PDEs are delivered with the printing system software and may be used unless a specialized PDE is required The choice of active PDE may subsequently be replaced entirely or modified in part through DJDEs Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT FORMS Specifies forms to be associated with the report copies Different forms may be associated with different copies of a report by the use of multiple FORMS left parts in the same OUTPUT command OUTPUT FORMS NONE formid formid init copies INKS inkref inkrefs NOTE To ensure readability enter the entire FORMS parameter Do not abbreviate to FOR because the system interprets FOR as FORMAT Table 4 55 OUTPUT FORMS parameter options and definitions Option Definition formid Specifies a 1 to 6 character form file name may be numeric alpha or alphanumeric that already exists on the system disk Forms can be coded at a workstation with forms creation software such as Elixir or on another LPS using Xerox Forms Description Language FDL and transferred to the controller disk by importing it via diskette tape or CD
230. ation part of each DJDE record in the input data stream When the system recognizes this character string it examines the rest of the record for DJDE commands Syntax IDEN PREFIX sc Options Table 2 26 IDEN PREFIX parameter options and definitions Option Definition SC string constant Specifies the search criterion for recognizing DJDE records It is a byte string of up to 255 characters represented as a hexadecimal octal BCD ASCII or EBCDIC character constant Any records within the data stream that contain an identification field equal to the specified prefix string sc are recognized and processed as DJDE records Default No default IDEN SKIP Defines the starting position of the DJDE commands Syntax IDEN SKIP value Options Table 2 27 IDEN SKIP parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the number of bytes beginning at 0 from the beginning of the user portion of the record to the beginning of the DJDE parameters It may be a negative number Default 1 Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 27 Specifying input parameters IDEN command example IDEN PREFIX RTEST SKIP 9 OFFSET 3 OPRINFO YES DJPCC IGNORE KCODE command ac identifier Defines a double byte character code translation table When you require a user defined translation table of double byte character codes you define the double b
231. ation of the carriage control codes Multiple PCC commands may be used within a single PCC table definition as long as there are no intervening non PCC commands PCC command example PCC1 PCC DEFAULT IBM1403 INITIAL TOF ADVTAPE NO ASSIGN X 40 SP1P ASSIGN X F1 SK1P ASSIGN X F8 PSK8 Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 35 Specifying input parameters In the previous example these codes were added to the standard IBM1403 carriage control code table X 40 Space 1 Line And Print X F1 Skip to Channel 1 And Print and X F8 Print And Skip to Channel 8 RECORD command Specifies the structure of the print record For online printing only the LENGTH parameter of this command is used For offline printing the RECORD command has several additional parameters that define the record structure Record command parameters The following table summarizes the RECORD command parameters Table 2 37 Summary of RECORD command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE ADJUST Record length adjust value N N CONSTANT Record termination code Y N N RECORD FORMAT Length field recording mode Y N N LENGTH Maximum logical record length Y Y N LMULT Multiplication factor to determine record length Y N N LTHFLD Length of field containing record length Y N N OFFSET Location of record length field Y N N POSTAMBLE Length of
232. ations However if you specify the PCC command in a JSL created on your system you can transfer the JSL file to another laser printing system for use with offline printing All line spacing skipping to channel and printing actions are defined through this command You can optionally specify an identifier of the ac type having at least one alphabetic character when defining the PCC table and reference this identifier in the LINE PCCTYPE parameter PCC command parameters The following table summarizes the PCC command parameters Table 2 31 Summary of PCC command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE ADJUST Defines the printer action for two successive N Y N channel skips CONSTANT Specifies user assigned carriage control code N Y N exceptions to the default table RECORD FORMAT Selects a table of printer carriage control codes N Y N LENGTH Specifies the initial reference point for the first N Y N carriage control command LMULT Makes inaccessible any unnecessary bits from N Y N the printer carriage control byte LTHFLD Length of field containing record length Y N N 2 30 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Table 2 31 Summary of PCC command parameters Continued Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE OFFSET Location of record length field Y N N POSTAMBLE Length of extraneous data at en
233. ative to the top edge of the physical sheet It must be a decimal number with up to four digits to the right of the decimal point for example 0 5634 or 2 35 The default vertical position is 18 hpos horizontal position Specifies the horizontal position of the first character of the first print line of the logical page relative to the left edge of the physical sheet All specifications are rounded to the nearest dot 1 300 of an inch for positioning of the logical page The default horizontal position is 66 unit Specifies the unit of measure for the distance from the edge of the physical sheet to the first character of the first print line The choices are IN inches e CM centimeters The default unit of measure is IN Default 18 IN 66 IN PDE BEGIN When specifying the location of the beginning of a print line parameter points 4 94 to note on a logical page view the page in the orientation landscape or portrait in which it will be printed Structure your variable data in the same order that the logical pages are defined using either spacing or skipping printer carriage controls to move from one logical page to the next Generally a Skip to Channel 1 parameter is the easiest way to position to the next logical page e Each online banner page is positioned as the first logical page on a new physical sheet if the BANNER TYPE parameter specifies BANNER e ROFFSET causes the logical page containing the
234. ay not specify GRAPHICS NO if the current report has already processed at least one graphic The GRAPHICS NO specification is ignored In online Batch mode PCC commands are ignored beginning with the BATCH START DJDE until the BATCH END DJDE is processed If RPAGE is used to move a logical page from one physical page to another graphic references are handled as follows Graphic references encountered after the record that satisfied the RPAGE statement are imaged on the physical page to which the logical page is moved Any other image references are applied to the physical page being formed at the time the RPAGE statement was satisfied For example if RPAGE WHEN TOP is specified it is possible for a graphic to appear on physical page n even though text that may have preceded its reference in the input data stream appears on physical page n 1 NOTE Use caution when using RPAGE with page interleaved graphics A document interleaved graphic replaces an existing graphic with the same name This is true even if the existing graphic is used in a report that is being printed Forms are not supported for Batch mode processing Using LCDS Print Description Language 6 7 Using PDL commands for graphics 6 8 Using LCDS Print Description Language Conventions A PDL command and DJDE summary This section contains all the PDL commands parameters and DJDEs available for all the Xerox laser printing systems including the DP EPS
235. be sent The Properties window for the selected queue opens 3 On the Properties window click the tab that contains the attributes for which you want to specify an override You are able to set late binding attributes for LCDS jobs on the following tab windows Stock Includes stock name type including transparency size weight and color with access to the Stock List Alternatively you can select the name of a tray from which to feed regardless of the stock that is loaded in it 1 42 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Output Includes sides imaged 1 sided or 2 sided finishing slip sheets rotation of page image delivery face up or down order 1 to N or N to 1 output bin selection location collation and optimization of throughput speed for jobs containing mixed sizes of stock Alignment Includes unit of measure for the adjustment the amount of page image displacement and printing a test pattern NOTE The features on the Properties PostScript PCL ASCII and LCDS tab windows are not late binding attributes The items on the Properties tab including queue and printer name input mode streaming spooling etc destination print or save and job notes must be set prior to job submission The items on the PostScript PCL ASCII and LCDS tab windows must be set before the job is decomposed If they are not specified at that time the system uses the queue de
236. ble of constants which can be referenced by logical processing commands TABLE is the first command discussed in this section because it is usually coded before the other types of commands that are related to logical processing Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing Each constant that is included in a referenced TABLE command is examined by the system to see if it is equal in value to the input data field specified in the CONSTANT parameter of the CRITERIA command NOTE The TABLE command must precede any CRITERIA command that references it This command requires an identifier of the type ac at least one alpha character required TABLE command parameters The following table summarizes the TABLE command parameters Table 3 2 Summary of TABLE command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE TABLE CONSTANT Defines string constants against which input Y Y N data fields are checked for logical processing TABLE MASK Permits character positions of a string to be Y Y N ignored or tested for type attributes The following section describes the syntax of the TABLE command parameters and explains their options TABLE CONSTANT Specifies the content of one or more string constants Syntax ac TABLE CONSTANT sc sc Co Options Table 3 3 TABLE CONSTANT parameter options and definitions Option Definition SC string constan
237. cale factor Each DJDE nand d must be an integer in the range of 1 to 8 thereby allowing a reference scale factor in the range of 1 8 to 8 The reference scale factor is multiplied unit Unit of measure for the vertical and horizontal positions Options are CM centimeters N inches e DOTS e XDOTS UN user defined units If UN is specified the user defined positioning unit must previously be defined by the UNITS parameter of the OUTPUT command in the current JDE or JDL NOTE IN and CM are each specified as a decimal number with up to three digits to the right of the decimal point The default unit is IN ALTER DJDE point to note ALTER maintains the GRAPHICS HOLD parameter in effect but also specifies a new set of imaging parameters for the current and subsequent pages Examples of ALTER DJDE ALTER BUS 5 5 1 ALTER IMG 1 3 5 END Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 15 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs ASSIGN DJDE Specifies an assignment of a VFU channel number to a page line number or set of line numbers Type Record oriented Syntax ASSIGN channo lineno or ASSIGN channo lineno linenos Options Table 5 8 ASSIGN DJDE options and definitions Option Definition channo channel number The number of the channel being assigned It is an integer in the range 0 to 12 lineno line number The number of the out
238. can override an ink specified in an IDR that has been referenced in a job The default ink is defined according to the following override sequence 1 The IDFAULT DJDE has highest priority 2 The OUTPUT IDFAULT parameter has the next priority at the job level 3 A catalog level default overrides a system level default if it is specified at the job level 4 Asystem level default has next priority if it is not overridden at the catalog or job levels Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 19 Specifying print format parameters If no IDFAULT is specified the first element of the ILIST is used as the default If no ILIST is specified the system default is used IDR command parameters The following table summarizes the IDR command parameters Table 4 20 Summary of IDR command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE IDR ICATALOG Specifies a default ink catalog that will be used Y Y Y when there is no specific catalog reference IDR ILIST Provides a list of all the inks that may be Y Y Y referenced by indexing when variable data is printed through DJDEs IDR PALETTE Specifies a default palette that will be used when Y Y Y there is no specific palette reference Syntax Options IDR ICATALOG Establishes a default ink catalog that will be used in ink references when there is no specific catalog reference in the JDL ac IDR ICATALOG inkcatalogname Table
239. cant bits Hexa decimal amp l VA Ve J 50 a j A J 1 b Ik Js B IK S 2 c ft C L T 3 d m ju D IM U J4 e n v E IN V5 f o Iw F IO W 6 g p x G P X 7 hg y H IQ Y 8 i jr Jz R Z 9 Cc lt 10 f C 6 Using LCDS Print Description Language Character code assignments Xerox EBCDIC to extended ASCII hexadecimal translation values Table C 8 Xerox EBCDIC to extended ASCII hexadecimal translation values EBCDIC most significant digit Hexa decimal 20 FA EA DA 20 26 2D BO 1E TF BC BO 1A 1C 5C 30 20 F9 E9 D9 CA C1 2F AF 61 6A 7B B1 41 4A 9F 81 20 F8 E8 D8 C9 CO B8 AE 62 6B 73 B2 42 4B 53 32 20 F7 E7 D7 Ca BF B7 AD 63 6C 74 B3 43 4C 54 33 20 F Ee D6 C7 BE B6 AC 64 6D 75 B4 44 4D 55 34 20 F5 E5 D5 C6 BD B5 AB 65 GE 76 B5 45 4E 56 35 20 F4 E4 D4 C5 BC B4 19 66 GF 77 B6 46 4F 57 36 20 F3 E3 D3 C4 BB B3 18 67 70 78 B7 47 50 58 37 20 F2 E2 D2 C3 BA B2 AA 68 71 79 B8 48 51 59 38 20 F1 E1 D1 C2
240. ce Manager Figure 1 18 Selecting Tools from the Workspace menu c Select Terminal from the Tools menu A Terminal window opens Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 65 PDL principles and procedures Serine Window Edit Options GKLS quantum custdock H Figure 1 19 Terminal window with prompt displayed 2 Move the pointer onto the Terminal window A blinking cursor should be visible next to the prompt a 96 sign sometimes preceded by the name of your system 3 At the prompt enter the following command to compile the JSL be sure to leave spaces where they are indicated opt XRXnps bin xjdc options opt XRXnps resources lcds JSLNAME JSL The options variable may be either omitted or replaced with one or more of the options that are shown on the following table Options may be specified in any order You may shorten the option name to its first three characters shown in uppercase in the following table The first option must be preceded by a hyphen When you specify multiple options you must separate them by commas refer to the following example Example opt XRXnps bin xjdc NOT LAB REP opt XRXnps resources lcds MYJOB JSL 1 66 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Table 1 12 xjdc command options Option Definition COMpile Compiles the JSL with printed sheets SCAn Scans the JSL only
241. ceded by an optional repeat count A repeat count is enclosed in parentheses and must be in the range of 1 to 255 For example T1 TABLE CONSTANT 23 is equivalent to T1 TABLE CONSTANT 2 Following are additional examples of the use of a repeat count I1 TABLE CONSTANT 3 0 27 T2 TABLE CONSTANT 4 X C1 Types of string constants The following table gives explanations and examples of the different types of string constants Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Table 1 2 Types of string constants Constant Definition Example Hexadecimal Normally used as string constants but they may also be used as value constants Each pair of hexadecimal characters results in one byte A hexadecimal constant must immediately be preceded by the characters X apostrophe X then followed by another apostrophe to indicate to the PDL compiler that the expression that follows is in hexadecimal DEN PREF X X C1C2C3C4 ASCII Used as string constants Each character results in one byte The constants must be preceded by the characters A apostrophe A and followed by an apostrophe character The ASCII string type allows hexadecimal representation of characters to be embedded in a string This is done by preceding the hexadecimal representation of the character with an character The three character sequence requi
242. ch report with multiple successive records each of which satisfies the test expression of the RSTACK command In this case all consecutive delimiters are treated as a delimiter packet Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 53 Using logical processing In this mode you can use the PRINT parameter to print the delimiter or the delimiter packet and to select the output destination of this delimiter page BIN TRAY or BOTH The option BOTH delivers the page to the sample tray and to the output tray The delimiter page when printed is output as part of the subsequent report All of the printing parameters selected in the JDL remain in effect during report delimiter printing except CARRIAGE CONTROL which is ignored the carriage control is replaced by a Print and Space 1 line control If DJDE records exist within the delimiter packet or immediately following they are included on the delimiter page Nondelimiter If DELIMITER NO is coded Nondelimiter mode a single record mode separates one report from the next After satisfying the TEST criteria this record is considered part of the subsequent report In this mode the PRINT parameter is not available Therefore the delimiter is not printed on a special page Delimiter on accounting page You may include part of the first record of a report on the accounting page This command is selected by coding the ACCTINFO parameter which is normally used to print part of the first or o
243. cifically assigns a mapping to be used with this JOB or JDE e Inthe parameter font fonts fonts fonts the fact that font is mapped to fonts and fonts is mapped to fonts does not imply that font is mapped to fonts SEFFNT MAP References a previously defined font mapping file filename or a labeled SEFFNT command defined in the current JSL file Syntax SEFFNT MAP filename label 2 46 Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Specifying input parameters Table 2 50 SEFFNT MAP parameter options and definitions Option Definition filename References a font mapping file The file is accessed when the JDL is used for printing label References the label of a labeled SEFFNT command that is defined in the current JSL Default No default SEFFNT command points to note Note the following when using the SEFFNT command The system does not assume any mappings for fonts You must always provide the mapping Once the font mapping is found range checking is based on the new orientation The range checking determines only if the BEGIN values are within the bounds of the page The system does not check to determine whether the line will run off the edge of the page e The following system pages use predefined forms and therefore are not reformatted in order to print the forms in the same orientation as their associated jobs In other words no font mappings or rotations of forms
244. ck length is smaller than the JSL block length no error message is reported otherwise an error is displayed e The length on a 4 by 3 packed format tape is the number of 6 bit bytes or characters in the tape block BLOCK LMULT Specifies a multiplication factor that is applied to the contents of the block length field to determine the true block length BLOCK LMULT value Table 2 9 BLOCK LMULT parameter options and definitions Option Definition value An integer in the range of 1 to 15 that is multiplied by the value in the length field refer to LENGTH parameter to compute the number of bytes in the block Default Syntax Options 1 BLOCK LTHFLD Specifies the length of the field that contains the block length BLOCK LTHFLD size Table 2 10 BLOCK LTHFLD parameter options and definitions Option Definition size An integer from 0 to 5 that specifies in bytes the length of the field that contains the block length Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 15 Specifying input parameters Default 1 BLOCK LTHFLD Ifthe size is set to 0 the block length field is not considered to point to note be part of the block and the length of a block on the tape is the actual physical block length The LTHFLD parameter may be overridden if RECORD STRUCTURE is changed through tape label processing BLOCK OFFSET Specifies the location of the block len
245. cord satisfies the RSTACK test criteria but is not a delimiter it can be deleted from or not selected for printing However it still causes report separation e f an RSTACK command contains a TEST expression that specifies a constant mode CRITERIA command and DELIMITER YES the RSTACK command can be used to detect a heading of a report as a report boundary Points to note for online printing Detection of RSTACK criteria within a not yet recognized banner page RSTACK record occurs before BANNER criteria line results in subsequent incorrect report separation Detection of RSTACK criteria in a recognized but incomplete banner page RSTACK record occurs after BANNER criteria line is ignored Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing Detection of RSTACK immediately following report separation is ignored This prevents null reports If RSTACK is specified in a selected JDE or JDL that is a JDE or JDL invoked in a DJDE the following restrictions apply to online systems If RSTACK is not specified in the JDE or JDL that is identified in the Initial JDE or JDL field on the user interface window the DELIMITER NO parameter should be specified in the selected JDE or JDL Specification of DELIMITER YES is overridden in this case If RSTACK is specified in the Initial JDE or JDL the DELIMITER parameter cannot be changed in a selected JDE or JDL If RSTACK is specified in the starting JDE or
246. ct until another JOB or JDE command or an END command is encountered The identifier in a JOB or JDE command as in JOB2 JOB3 or JOB4 in the previous example is used with the identifier on the JDL or SYSTEM command to initiate a print job Coding job or JDE level commands The commands discussed in this section are usually coded at the JOB or JDE level of the JSL because they normally vary by individual job However you may want to code them at the catalog level if you have grouped jobs together that have the same characteristics as defined in the commands Defining stock There are several ways to specify paper stocks with PDL One requirements method is the STOCKSET command which can be referenced in lower level commands Each formatted page is then associated with the active STOCKSET command and the active OUTPUT FEED parameter If no FEED parameter is specified the INIFEED parameter of the STOCKSET command takes effect Usethe OUTPUT command and the PAPERSIZE and SYSPPR parameters to specify physical and system paper size The OSTK and TRANS parameters allow you to specify tab or transparency stocks and the NTO1 parameter enables you to instruct the printer to print the last page of a report first The FEED parameter of the OUTPUT command can either specify a stock reference assigned in the STOCKSET command or bypass this referencing and specify a stock name called out in the current STOCKSET The INIFEED parameter of the
247. d None Defines characters that are neither numeric nor alphabetic The TCODE command requires a variable of the type ac at least one character must be alphabetic TCODE command parameters The following table summarizes the use of the TCODE command parameters Table 2 52 Summary of TCODE command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE TCODE DEFAULT Specifies the initial set of character type Y Y N assignments that will be used with masked comparisons TCODE TASSIGN Associates one or more specified characters Y Y N with one or more specified type codes TCODE TRESET Disassociates one or more characters or all Y Y N characters in a set from one or more type codes The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and give explanations of the parameter options 2 50 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters TCODE DEFAULT Specifies an initial set of character type assignments for use with masked comparisons You may specify default assignments for any standard character set by coding the appropriate keyword Syntax ac TCODE DEFAULT tcode Type value Options Table 2 53 TCODE DEFAULT parameter options and definitions Option Definition tcode Type Available tcode type keyword parameters are SCII BCD EBCDIC PEBCDIC IBMBCD value An integer from O to 7 If you specify 0
248. d e MERGE Same as PRINT except when used with FONTINDEX or CME processing refer to OVERPRINT DJDE points to note below e PRINT2 Specifies that up to two consecutive lines are printed per line one line and one overprint Other overprints for the line are ignored disp Obsolete This option has the following components e DISP e NODISP NOTE This option is not functional on DP 2000 Series EPS It is preserved here for compatibility with other Xerox laser printing systems The number of overprint lines is always printed on the accounting page Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 59 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs OVERPRINT DJDE points to note The OVERPRINT DJDE normally takes effect on the next record following an END DJDE If FONTINDEX has been invoked in a JDE or DJDE OVERPRINT takes effect at the next logical page boundary e OVERPRINT options are the same as for the LINE OVERPRINT parameter e FONTINDEX and OVERPRINT When used in conjunction with OVERPRINT FONTINDEX is handled as follows For OVERPRINT PRINT the printing system overprints records analogously to an impact printer if the fonts are the same size If the fonts differ records are overprinted without regard to character spacing For OVERPRINT MERGE the system replaces blank characters in the previously printable line if this print record overprints the line Character spacing values are adjusted
249. d to which the next record is compared When the content of one record differs from the content of the control field of the previous record the criteria test is TRUE ac CRITERIA CHANGE offset length NE LAST Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Using logical processing Table 3 8 CRITERIA CHANGE parameter options and definitions Option Definition offset The offset in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user portion of the record to the control field within the record length The length in bytes of the control field Its range is 1 to 255 NE Indicates not equal to LAST Indicates that the control field of the current record is being compared to the control field of the previous last encountered record If a control field of the current record is less than the specified length the comparison is not done and the test fails Default No default CRITERIA In online jobs the host truncates trailing blanks You may add CHANGE blank character spaces to any control fields that are shorter parameter points than the specified length so the system can make a to note comparison The data field contents are not interpreted as a number but as individual bytes of data Therefore comparison of the numeric values of two data fields is not relevant For example 2 00 does not equal 2 000 Use the VALUE parameter to perform this kind of comparison W
250. d USER is specified using the PCC command Refer to PCC command later in this chapter e The INITIAL parameter for any of the PCCTYPEs listed in the previous table except ANSI or HOST RSX11 is TOF For ANSI or HOST RSX11 the INITIAL parameter is BOF For USER or PCCid the INITIAL parameter is set by the user in the PCC command The PCCTYPE IBM3211 or IBM4245 specifies that the printer online interface will perform checks such as for bad or NO OP parameters LINE VFU Specifies a vertical format unit VFU table LINE VFU vfuid NONE Table 4 38 LINE VFU parameter options and definitions Option Definition vfuid vertical format unit identifier The command identifier of the VFU table which must precede this reference to it The VFU table defines print line positions corresponding to skip to channel parameters for the job to be processed NONE Indicates that any skip to channel parameter is to be replaced by a carriage control of Print and Space 1 Default NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 35 Specifying print format parameters 4 36 LINE command points to note Line spacing with multiple fonts The vertical spacing of a line is the line spacing of the largest font in use in the previous line The current line can also be adjusted downward by the difference in height between the first and the largest font in the current line The line spacing of t
251. d in the input data stream and where to look for them Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Refer to Specifying DJDE records later in this chapter for information on how to include DJDEs in the data stream PDL command structure and components In order for the system to recognize and respond correctly to your PDL commands you must construct and enter them correctly Some components of PDL commands must be specified every time while others are optional There are some rules for constructing commands You must follow these rules in order for your system to print your job the way you want it Refer to Command syntax later in this chapter for details on the JSL syntax rules Command lines The JSL consists of command lines also called records on which you enter PDL commands The length of these records can be up to 133 characters for JSLs on tape NOTE If you select the TRUNCATE option of the xjdc compiling command only characters 1 through 72 may be used for parameter information Refer to Compiling a JSL later in this chapter You can continue commands on successive lines if the parameters are separated by commas Multiple commands may appear on one record line if separated by semicolons Components of a command Each PDL command consists of a command keyword and one or more parameters Parameters are separated by commas or spaces A PDL command has the following pa
252. d levels and some typical specifications that are included in these various levels Table 1 6 Command levels and their general purpose Command level General purpose JDL or system level Establishes installation defaults Commands at this level apply by default to all jobs JDEs within the JSL Command specifications found in a job level override specifications made at the system level NOTE Some of these commands require an identifier by which other commands in the JSL can reference them Commands with identifiers are usually coded first for example the CODE and PCC commands Commands within this level with identifiers apply to all jobs and catalogs within the JSL Groups PDL commands for easy reference at the job level Catalog command sets are defined before the JOB or JDE command that references them The catalog command sets are usually all defined before the first JDE or JOB command therefore they are considered to be coded at a separate level called the Catalog level Job or JDE level Defines how individual print jobs are processed JDE level commands apply only to the job under which they are listed Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 19 PDL principles and procedures The following table illustrates a sample JSL file format and provides examples Note that comments are used to designate the beginning of each level Table 1 7 Sample JSL file format This sample JSL sho
253. d of record Y N N STRUCTURE Input record structure Y N N The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explain their options PCC ADVTAPE Specifies whether or not the carriage control advances to a new page when two successive channel skip parameters are issued with no intervening print For example on most printers the actions PSK1 Print and Skip to Channel 1 followed by SK1N Skip to Channel 1 Do Not Print cause a blank page to be output However on a 1403 printer these actions do not produce a blank page Syntax ac PCC ADVTAPE YES NO Options Table 2 32 PCC ADVTAPE parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Specifies that multiple skips are honored NO Specifies that multiple skips result in only one skip action being taken Default No default PCC ADVTAPE SK1P skip to channel 1 and print followed by a second SK1P parameter point results in a page transition because printing occurred on the first to note page even if only blanks were output PCC ASSIGN Specifies printer carriage control exceptions to a default table refer to the PCC DEFAULT parameter description Syntax ac PCC ASSIGN byte ccin byte ccln cclno Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 31 Specifying input parameters Syntax for ccln definition fieldy fields fields field fields fieldg TOF OVR IGNI
254. d paragraphs light emitting diode Solid substance that glows when a current is passed through it Often used for indicator lights on disk drives or modems as well as for displays on other electronic equipment long edge feed The movement of paper through the printer in the direction of the paper length the longer side of a sheet of paper Sheet the standard size of legal briefs 8 5 by 14 inches long edge feed Paper sized 8 5 by 11 inches 216 by 279 mm In data storage a collection of related files or programs Internal data structures providing a record in memory of lines to be drawn on a page Alphanumeric beginning with a letter optionally including an asterisk period colon or slash and not enclosed in single quotes Collection of messages or message segments placed on an auxiliary storage device for accounting or data collection purposes In the Xerox printing systems environment a formatted page that is smaller than the physical page A logical page is defined by an origin thus allowing more than one logical page to be placed on a physical page lines per inch Laser Printing System 1 Selection of bits from a storage unit by using an instruction that eliminates the other bits in the unit 2 In accessing files a file name mask is used to reference one or more files with similar file id identifier syntax 3 In Interpress a mask serves as a template indicating the shape and position of an object ona page
255. dded to or subtracted from the contents of the block length field to determine the true block length Refer to the BLOCK LENGTH parameter description for further information Syntax BLOCK ADJUST value Options Table 2 5 BLOCK ADJUST parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the block adjustment length This length is a constant integer that is added to or subtracted from the value in the block length field of every tape block The resulting value is the true block length The range for a value is 127 to 127 and must be less than the block LENGTH parameter A plus or minus character may be used to specify a positive or negative adjustment value Default 0 BLOCK CONSTANT Specifies that the block delimiter constant sc and all data following it are ignored until the end of the block is reached Syntax BLOCK CONSTANT sc Options Table 2 6 BLOCK CONSTANT parameter options and definitions Option Definition SC String constant A string hexadecimal octal or character constant as described under Coding a JSL The length of the constant must be from one to four bytes Default No default Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 13 Specifying input parameters BLOCK FORMAT Specifies the recording mode of the block length field Syntax BLOCK FORMAT type Options Table 2 7 BLOCK FORMAT parameter options and definitions Option Definition type
256. dy exists in the Icds resources folder accessible via either the var spool XRXnps resources Icds or the opt XRXnps resources Icds directory path the disk file is superseded by the new one However the existing file is not replaced immediately If the new file will be retained beyond the scope of the current report processing as indicated by the s storage parameter of the FILE DJDE the new file is stored in the Icds folder and replaces existing files there at the end of the report Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 29 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Card image file 5 30 processing Files that are transferred with a D delete option are deleted as soon as the report is processed and therefore must not be referenced in a subsequent report NOTE The FILE DJDE does not allow a file to be replaced if the file is a system permanent file System permanent files have a in their names When card image files are transferred the following occurs 1 The system checks the FILE DJDE for valid parameters and responds to errors as follows If the destination filetype is not acceptable for a card image file the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page with an error message that indicates the file type is wrong The system then proceeds to read and discard the extent of the file If the file name is improperly specified the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page with an
257. e BOF Specifies the Bottom of Form BOF line number C text Allows comment text in the DJDE record DATA Specifies the location and length of printable data within an input record END Specifies the end of DJDE information EOF Stops downloading of a sixel encoded file to the system disk FILE Enables files to load onto the system disk while a print job is in progress LOGO Specifies the name and location of logos that will be printed on pages of a report LPI Specifies the line spacing values for each subsequent line OVERPRINT Provides instructions to the system for handling overprint lines print lines whose carriage control specifies printing with no line spacing after the last printed line TOF Specifies the Top of Form TOF line number Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 13 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs The following table lists record oriented DJDEs that are used with graphics Table 5 6 Record oriented DJDEs for graphics DJDE Function ALTER Specifies the new imaging parameters for graphics BATCH Delimits Batch mode graphic data to permit normal processing of online banner pages for Batch mode jobs CANCEL Cancels the hold specified by the H parameter in a GRAPHIC or IMAGE DJDE FDATA Specifies the offset of the starting point of file data from the beginning of the user portion of the record GDATA Specifies the offset of the starting point of
258. e a mod value of 5 The range of values is from 1 to 255 The default modulus definition is 1 pos position The initial position relative to the mod value The range of values is between 1 and mod The default position is 1 RES RESET or NO RESET NORES Indicates whether the pos value should be reset at the start of the next report The default is RES TABS Indicates a tab stock is being used The default is no tabs no option entered size Width of the tab The value can be specified in DOTS IN or CM This parameter applies only when tabs are specified The default is 0 5 in Using LCDS Print Description Language Table 4 67 Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT OSTK parameter options and definitions Continued Option Definition LorP Landscape or Portrait Indicates at which edge of the paper the tab is located If L it is located at the right edge of the landscape oriented page If it is P it is located at the right edge of the portrait oriented page The default is P Defaults OUTPUT OSTK parameter points to note mod and pos 1 RES no tabs size 0 5 IN P When using tabs and ordered stock All applications that are printed on a tab have pages formatted for tab printing If there is a PDE switch in the job stream that causes the BEGIN value to be shifted off the page such as BEGIN 18 8 6 the stock criteria must already be met before the new BEGIN is p
259. e font list and so forth The default for the initial font index value is ONE bitopt bit option A number specifying the number of low order bits within the font index byte which in turn specifies an index value into the font list of the current PDE The bitopt value may be 1 through 7 The default bitopt value is 4 NONE Specifies that there is no font index Default NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 27 Specifying print format parameters LINE FONTINDEX When the bitopt option is specified the initval must also be parameter points specified to note If the initval is ONE or is not specified the value of the font index byte in the data record is a number in the range 1 to n where nis the number of fonts specified in the PDE parameter 1 to 128 If ZERO is specified the font index is a number in the range 0 to n where nis the number of fonts specified in the PDE parameter minus one 0 to 127 The font index value must be present in every record If the FONTINDEX in the data record is greater than the number of fonts specified the first font in the list is used fthe FONTINDEX feature is specified the font index byte is processed for every printed record and for DJDEs where the IDEN DJPCC parameter causes such processing A valid FONTINDEX byte should be present in all such records because it controls line spacing at page transitions If the offset to the font index val
260. e SIDE DJDE options are the same as for the RPAGE command SIDE parameter The SIDE DJDE should be used instead of not in conjunction with the RPAGE command It overrides both the RPAGE SIDE and ROFFSET parameters if they apply to the next logical page Thus it triggers repositioning of only a single logical page and does not otherwise override the RPAGE SIDE or ROFFSET parameters on subsequent pages Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 69 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs STOCKS DJDE Identifies the stock set and its associated stock s to be used in a report This stockset file STOCKSETNAME STK must already have been created by a compiled JSL and must currently reside in the Icds resource folder on the system disk Type Page oriented Syntax STOCKS stocksetname Options Table 5 59 STOCKS DJDE options and definitions Option Definition stocksetname Name of the STOCKSET used in a report STOCKS DJDE point to note Whenever a new stockset is chosen that is at start of report or through a JDE or JDL switch via DJDE the system verifies each stock to determine that the stock exists and can be made active This verification provides an automatic method of changing stocks in the printer as required by the data stream TMODE DJDE Specifies a maximum paper width in order to improve throughput efficiency when using mixed paper sizes Refer to the OUTPUT TMODE parameter de
261. e When defining TABLE CONSTANT or CHANGE parameters specify offsets to subfields of a block in bytes relative to zero from the start of the block to the beginning of the subfield Examples This section shows examples of use of the BSELECT and BDELETE commands Example 1 The following commands illustrate the use of BSELECT to process interspersed reports refer to the following figure on a block basis I1 TABLE CONSTANT P Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 1 EQ T1 BSELECT TEST C1 Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 29 Using logical processing The contents of the first byte of each tape block offset 0 length 1 is examined for the character constant P When a P is detected the entire block is selected BSELECT for printing When the first byte of any block does not contain a P that block is bypassed and not printed In this example only block 1 is printed The following figure shows a sample of how BSELECT and BDELETE commands are used Record 3 Byte 0 contains a P Record 4 Record 1 Record 2 Block 1 Block 1 Byte 0 contains a D Record 3 Record 4 Record 1 aoe Block 2 Block 2 Record 2 IBG Interblock Gap Figure 3 2 Sample BSELECT and BDELETE command usage Example 2 The following example shows a BDELETE command that will delete from the tape any blocks that contain 1 1 T1 TABLE CONSTANT 2 S 11
262. e binding because a long edge feed page is viewed in portrait mode It is typically used to accommodate top drilled paper binding finishing and edgemarking Page oriented XSHIFT YES NO v4 v3 scription Language 5 73 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Options Table 5 64 XSHIFT DJDE options and definitions Option Definition v value 1 An integer value in dots for the amount of shift on the simplex page or the odd front side of the duplex page Each dot is 1 300 of an inch The range for v4 is 75 to 75 Vo value 2 A value in dots for the amount of shift on the even back side of a duplex page The range for vo is 75 to 75 YES Specifies that a shift occurs A standard size shift occurs if YES is specified v4275 and Vo 75 NO Specifies that no shift occurs v420 and vo 0 5 74 Using LCDS Print Description Language 6 Using PDL commands for graphics Several PDL parameters are available for graphics handling These include four OUTPUT command parameters specified in the JDE and six DJDEs The following tables summarize those parameters Table 6 1 OUTPUT command parameters and functions for graphics Option Definition OUTPUT GRAPHICS Specifies if and how graphics will be processed in current job OUTPUT IMAGE mode Specifies initial scaling and positioning parameters for graphics in Batch OUTPUT PURGE of a repo
263. e data stream to make changes during printing to what was specified in the JSL DJDEs are coded slightly differently from JSL statements Using the IDEN command to enable DJDEs Example To invoke DJDE processing in a job you must code an IDEN command in the JDL The DJDE record s are interspersed among the data records in the input data stream Each DJDE record contains an identification field which matches the search criteria specified in the active JDE and a series of parameters that describe the actual JDE changes to be applied to the report The IDEN command notifies the system that DJDE records may be part of the input data stream IDEN also describes the characteristics of the DJDE records and the search criteria for locating and identifying them Following is an example of a coded IDEN command IDEN PREFIX RTEST SKIP 9 OFFSET 3 OPRINFO YES The PREFIX parameter defines the character string that must appear in the identification part of each DJDE record in the input data stream When the system recognizes this character string in this example it is the EBCDIC string RTEST it examines the rest of the record for DJDE parameters The OFFSET and SKIP parameters define the starting positions of the prefix string and DJDE parameters within the record Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 1 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Example Here is another example
264. e font is the SEF mapping for font NONE Disables font mapping and short edge feeding SEF stops previous SEFFNT UPD UPDATE Indicates that the specified font pairs change existing font mappings or appending new mappings to the current font mapping table Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 45 Specifying input parameters Table 2 49 SEFFNT SEFMAP parameter options and definitions Continued Option Definition REP REPLACE Indicates that the specified font pairs create a new mapping table to replace the current one Default No default SEFFNT SEFMAP When specified without a label preceding the SEFFNT parameter points command SEFMAP puts all font mapping definitions within to note the JDL rather than creating a separate mapping file When SEFMAP is coded outside of a standard JSL either prior to a JDL command or after an END command the system creates a file named abel LIB on the disk This file contains the font mappings for reference within the JSL by other JSLs or through a DJDE NOTE The LIB file that is created by a labeled SEFFNT command cannot be imported to or exported from the DP EPS You must compile the JSL that contains the labeled SEFFNT command which causes the system to recreate the LIB file When coded at the catalog level of a JSL SEF mapping applies to all JOBS or JDEs that include the catalog When coded at the job level SEF mapping spe
265. e job on both sides of the paper OUTPUT FACEUP Delivers and stacks the printed sheets face up in the stacker OUTPUT FEED Specifies the tray from which paper will feed Y Y Y for the job OUTPUT FORMAT Specifies a page descriptor entry PDE for Y Y Y the job OUTPUT FORMS Associates forms with report copies Y Y Y 4 42 Using LCDS Print Description Language Table 4 42 Summary of OUTPUT command parameters Continued Specifying print format parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE OUTPUT GRAPHICS Specifies if and how graphics are used in the Y Y N job OUTPUT IDFAULT Specifies the default ink that will be used for Y Y Y parameters in which no ink is specified OUTPUT IDR Specifies the name of an ink descriptor IDR Y Y Y that will be used for the job OUTPUT IMAGE Specifies initial scaling and positioning for Y Y Y Batch mode graphics OUTPUT INVERT Rotates an image 180 degrees on the printed Y Y Y page OUTPUT IRESULT Specifies whether the result of overlapping Y Y Y pixels will be a colored or a black pixel OUTPUT LOGO Enables selection and positioning of a logo OUTPUT MODIFY Associates copy modification entries with report copies OUTPUT NTO1 Specifies on a report basis whether the pages Y Y Y of all copies of a report are printed in ascending 1 to N or descending N to 1 order OUTPUT NUMBER Specifies whether page n
266. e testexp is not printed and printing begins with the next record Default NEXT RSUSPEND and RRESUME TEST Defines the test expressions for the record at which printing will be suppressed RSUSPEND or resumed RRESUME Syntax RSUSPEND TEST testexp RRESUME TEST testexp Options Table 3 38 RSUSPEND and RRESUME TEST parameter options and definitions Options Definitions testexp test expression Defines a test expression for the record with which printing will be suspended RSUSPEND or resumed RRESUME following print suppression Refer to Coding a test expression earlier in this chapter for the format and syntax of a testexp Default No default RRESUME and RSUSPEND commands points to note Onthe DP EPS RSUSPEND and RRESUME are supported only for offline printing 3 50 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing Interaction with RSTACK Arecord that satisfies the RSTACK criteria is detected and it terminates the report and record suspension regardless of whether or not the printing of records was suspended at the time DJDE records are not processed if record printing has been suspended Refer to Using dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs for further information Ifthe criteria for RSTACK and RSUSPEND are satisfied on the same record that record delimits the report and the record is suspended Make sure that if an RS
267. e text is displayed after the last copy of the report is printed Default 4 40 NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language MESSAGE OTEXT points to note Specifying print format parameters Multiple line messages may be specified for a single copy by one of the following methods Specifying the copy number more than once in different OTEXT parameters Specifying a list of string constants contained in a second level of parentheses A maximum of 395 messages is permitted per report MESSAGE command points to note You can use the sign as a case toggle to switch between upper and lowercase when entering the messages Messages may be entered in hexadecimal octal ASCII H2 H6 or EBCDIC You must enter an apostrophe followed by the appropriate letter for the language If there are no introductory symbols the message defaults to EBCDIC Refer to the Types of string constants table in the PDL principles and procedures chapter for further information MESSAGE command example The following MESSAGE command informs the operator that blue paper is required for copy 2 of a 4 copy report Printing is suspended at the appropriate points so that the operator can load the paper D BLUE PAPER 2 WAIT OUTPUT COPIES 4 MESSAGE OTEXT LOAI OTEXT LOAI OTEXT LAST COPY END WAIT Using LCDS Print Description Language D WHITE PAPER 3 WAIT DONE RELOAI
268. ecause the laser beam is completely enclosed during all modes of customer operation The laser danger labels on the system are for Xerox service representatives and are on or near panels or shields that must be removed with a tool DO NOT REMOVE LABELED PANELS OR PANELS NEAR LABELS ONLY XEROX SERVICE REPRESENTATIVES HAVE ACCESS TO THESE PANELS DANGER LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM Ozone information U S only This product produces ozone during normal operation The amount of ozone produced depends on print volume Ozone is heavier than air The environmental parameters specified in the Xerox installation instructions ensure that concentration levels are within safe limits If you need additional information concerning ozone call 1 800 828 6571 to request the Xerox publication 600P83222 OZONE Using LCDS Print Description Language xvii Laser safety Operation safety U S xviii Your Xerox equipment and supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements They have been approved by safety agencies and they comply with environmental standards Please observe the following precautions to ensure your continued safety WARNING Improper connection of the equipment grounding conductor may result in risk of electrical shock Always connect equipment to a properly grounded electrical outlet If in doubt have the outlet checked by a qualified electrician Never use a
269. ecified to accomplish code modification CODE2 CODE DEFAULT EBCDIC ASSIGN X 5A X 20 X 20 X 20 CODE SPACECODE Defines the blank space character code for the single byte character set ac CODE SPACECODE spacecode Table 2 18 CODE SPACECODE parameter options and definitions Default CODE SPACECODE parameter point 2 22 to note Option Definition spacecode Defines the code for a blank space X 20 CODE ASCII X40 CODE not ASCII SPACECODE must be specified after the DEFAULT parameter If SPACECODE is specified before DEFAULT the spacecode value is overwritten by X 20 or X 40 Hexadecimal output option strings such as X 20 as well as text string constants for example a are not translated before being put into the code assignment table Therefore you should keep ASCII or more precisely the encoding of the fonts that will be used in mind when you use hexadecimal strings DBCODE command Defines a double byte character code translation table When you require a user defined translation table of double byte character codes you define the double byte character translation using the DBCODE command then reference this command using the VOLUME DBCODE parameter As an alternative you can use the USER option of the VOLUME DBCODE parameter to reference the DBCODE command for which no identifier was provided Using LCDS Print
270. ecord length The length on a 4 by 3 packed format tape is the number of 6 bit characters in the record RECORD LMULT Specifies a multiplication factor that is applied to the contents of the record length field to determine the true record length Syntax RECORD LMULT value Options Table 2 42 RECORD LMULT parameter options and definitions Option Definition value An integer in the range of 1 to 15 that is multiplied by the value in the length field refer to the RECORD LENGTH parameter description to compute the number of bytes in the record Default 1 RECORD LTHFLD Specifies the length of the field that contains the record length Syntax RECORD LTHFLD size Options Table 2 43 RECORD LTHFLD parameter options and definitions Option Definition size An integer from 0 to 5 that specifies in bytes the length of the field that contains the record length Default 0 Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 39 Specifying input parameters 2 40 RECORD OFFSET Specifies the location of the record length field Syntax RECORD OFFSET value Options Table 2 44 RECORD OFFSET parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the number of bytes that the block length field is offset from the first byte of the record The value is an integer in the range 0 to LENGTH LTHFLD 1 Default 0 RECORD POSTAMBLE Specifies t
271. ed by Council Directive 93 68 EEC approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council Directive 89 336 EEC approximation of the laws of the member states related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 99 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration of conformity defining the relevant directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Xerox representative In order to allow this equipment to operate in proximity to Industrial Scientific and Medical ISM equipment the external radiation for the ISM equipment may have to be limited or special mitigation measures taken Using LCDS Print Description Language xxi Laser safety This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio frequency interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Shielded interface cables must be used with this product to maintain compliance with Council Directive 89 36 EEC For further information xxii For more information on Environment Health and Safety in relation to this Xerox product and supplies please contact the following customer help lines Europe 44 1707 353434 USA 1 800 828 6571 Canada 1 800 828 6571 Using LCDS Print Description Language Contents Focus of this guide Introduction
272. ed by font 0 of the current font list e f more than one font is used to print any number of RTEXT strings on a page the line and the character spacing values of the different fonts are used to place RTEXT on the page Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 101 Specifying print format parameters 4 102 If a proportional pitch font is used the starting column number for printing the RTEXT is determined by using the character spacing value for the space character in the character font If RTEXT is specified along with COVER FRONT SEP or BOTH SEP the RTEXT pages are printed on the covers Front covers are picked only on copies for which there is RTEXT If RTEXT is specified in noncollate mode only the routing page for copy one is printed EBCDIC or hexadecimal strings or hex defined bytes in a character string used in an RTEXT command are interpreted as standard EBCDIC and are translated to extended ASCII Double byte font support Double byte text strings are supported for the CME CONSTANT value if KCODE or DBCODE is specified for the VOLUME command The maximum number of double byte characters is 127 Catalogued RTEXT files When there are a large number of RTEXT parameters you should precompile them and store them in the Icds resources folder instead of including them in a JDL After they are compiled you can access them from either a JDL or a DJDE by using their object file names RTEXT parameters must be p
273. efinition YES Specifies that printing will occur on both sides of a sheet This is also called two sided printing NO Specifies that printing will occur on only the front side of the sheet This is also called one sided printing Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 25 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs END DJDE Specifies the end of a DJDE packet When an END DJDE is encountered the system applies all DJDE information specified to the current printing environment at the next page or record boundary Type Record oriented Syntax END END DJDE points to note e After the system detects an END parameter record oriented DJDEs take effect immediately Page oriented DJDEs take effect at the current page if no data has been printed If data has been printed page oriented DJDEs take effect at the next page transition e Ifa delimiter other than a comma was used before the END DJDE a syntax error is displayed A comma is required for the system to properly process the END DJDE EOF DJDE Stops downloading of a sixel encoded file to the system disk used in conjunction with the FILE DJDE Note that EOF is followed by a comma then a semicolon Type Record oriented Syntax EOF EOF DJDE point to note When the EOF DJDE is combined with the FILE DJDE the END DJDE is not required 5 26 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs FEE
274. entifier by other commands within the JSL Some identifiers also determine the names of the files that the XJDC compiler creates Different syntax rules apply to identifiers depending on the command being coded Each command description in this document tells you if an identifier is required or optional for the command and if so how it must be coded In most cases in a JSL if a command will be referenced by another command within the JSL an identifier must precede the keyword of the referenced command A command identifier is defined using a label of up to six alphanumeric characters followed by a colon There are two types of identifiers that can be used 1 actype Must have at least one alpha character that is a letter 2 dd type May have all numerals all alpha characters or a combination of both The following PDL command has the command identifier VFU1 Its keyword is VFU VFUl VFU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 55 END The identifier in this command may have any number of blanks following the VFU1 characters however no blanks are permitted within the identifier name NOTE A command that requires an identifier must always be defined before any other command that references it Command Every command must have a keyword which is the name of keyword the command for which various parameters may be selected In the following example CME is the command keyword CME4 is the identifier CME4
275. entifiers Onthe command lines following the catalog identifier line tab or space over about 10 character spaces to enter the rest of the catalog level command keywords Code the first JDE identifier followed by a colon and the JDE keyword The JDE name must be one to six characters long NOTE If the JDE uses a catalog enter the INCLUDE catalogname command following the JDE identifier on the same line with the semicolon following the catalog name For example JDE INCLUDE CATPOW Recommended e Place a comment on the line above the first JDE command line indicating that the following commands are JOB or JDE level Tab or space over approximately 10 character spaces to enter the job identifier followed by a colon and the JDE keyword Code the JDE level commands for the first job in the JSL Recommended On the command lines following the JDE identifier line tab or space over about 15 character spaces to enter the rest of the JDE level command keywords for that job 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 above for each additional JDE that you want to specify 11 Enter the END command to complete the JSL 12 When you have completed entering all the necessary commands and parameters select Save As from the File menu on the Text Editor window menu bar The Text Editor Save As window appears Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures fopt XRXnps res
276. er carriage control PCC fields If there is no record length field there is no operating system portion of the record The PDL commands that define the components of a record are described in the RECORD command section of this chapter Multivolume processing All multivolume reports that force the system to make multiple passes over the data are handled in the following manner 2 10 For each copy that is requested a complete pass is made over the group of volumes that make up the current report The system is forced to make multiple passes over the input data for multicopy reports that exceed the size of the print file Refer to your printing system online Help for information on the available choices for handling print file saturation If a multivolume report requires multiple passes messages appear on the controller screen with instructions on which action must be performed next Users with multiple volume jobs and multiple laser printing systems may wish to print each volume on a separate system This requires that each volume be processed independently Refer to the VOLUME EOV parameter description later in this chapter for a discussion of this processing If a system rollover occurs while a multivolume report is being processed the controller screen as a portion of the recovery process displays a message that tells you to click Continue to space forward to the recovery point Using LCDS Print Description Lang
277. erence Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 1 Using logical processing Test expressions To define a logical processing command fully you must specify one or two fields in the record that will be tested In general a logical processing command has the following format parameter command keyword options command keyword TEST testexp The testexp parameter of a logical processing command defines a test that will be performed on either one or two specified fields and their associated contents The test result is a TRUE or FALSE value The fields in the current data record are compared with either of the following e One or more constants associated with the test using either an EQUAL EQ or a NOT EQUAL NE operator e The contents of the field in prior records using a NOT EQUAL NE operator The basic element used to describe a test for a logical function is the CRITERIA command Coding a test expression Criteria identifiers 3 2 criids Exceptions To activate testing you code the TEST parameter of any logical processing command that has one For information on constructing the TEST parameter refer to the command description Syntax section for the command you want to code In the TEST parameter you must include one or two criteria identifiers criids which you specify in the CRITERIA command These criid options are the identifiers of the CRITERIA commands that specify the location of
278. eric MICR Fundamentals Guide DocuSP Common Controller System Guide Getting Ready for the DocuSP Installation Getting Started Helpful Facts About Paper MICR User Guide Tape Formats Manual Useful Resources Using LCDS Print Description Language Introduction Table 2 DP 75 90 EPS and 75 MX documents Using the Ip Utilities for Solaris Using the lpr Utilities for DOS and Unix Using the Xerox Client Software for Solaris Using LCDS Print Description Language xxvii Introduction xxviii Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 PDL principles and procedures The Xerox LCDS Print Description Language PDL is a set of commands that you give to the printing system to define properties such as the appearance output destination and paper feed source for your LCDS print job You can use LCDS PDL to do all of the following in your print jobs Change and mix font types on a page to page line to line or character to character basis This allows you to customize printed output for specific needs for example emphasizing important headings by changing font styles and sizes Change text orientation and positioning on a page to page basis This allows you to print characters along the width or length of the page with equal ease The printing system can switch instantly at a page boundary between portrait tall and narrow and landscape wide page formats combining the two styles within a single report Print a number of
279. erred file are listed on the OPRINFO page with a brief indication of whether the file was newly created or replaced an existing file To prevent loss of data through trailing blank suppression procedures on the host spooler data records for LPS labeled files must be delimited by appending an extra non blank character at the end of each record The same non blank character must be used with all records processed during the file processing period Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs If the nonblank character that is appended at the end of the records is not consistently present throughout the file the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page with an error message indicating that processing for the file FILENAME is being aborted due to a data error The system then deletes the partial file that was created and proceeds to process the data as variable text data Refer to appendix D LPS tape label format for information on the structure of LPS labeled tape File readiness Files may be used by the LCDS processor as soon as they are written to the Icds folder on the system disk However the files become effective only when they are referenced by a DJDE For example a font or form file becomes effective at the next page boundary when a DJDE specifies the FORMAT or FORMS parameter to invoke the new font or form file If a file was downloaded earlier in the report and ha
280. ersion of the Xerox character code standard used to code Interpress strings character set Number of different characters used by a particular device including alphabetic numeric and special characters such as symbols client layer The software interface used by the controller to communicate with the printer allowing printing commands and fault and status information to be exchanged clocking A method of synchronizing the sending and receiving of data communications devices Clocking allows synchronous transmission at high speeds cluster A term that is used with LPS systems referring to a defined group of feeder trays usually containing the same size and type of stock Each cluster has a name consisting of one to six alphanumeric characters See also stock stockset Using LCDS Print Description Language Glossary 3 Glossary CME collate compiler concatenate consumable supplies coordinate copy sensitive cpi CPU database data rate DCE DDCMP debug decompose descender DFA DJDE dot dpi Glossary 4 copy modification entry Entry modifying the output printing characteristics of a report on a copy to copy basis To arrange or assemble into ordered sets Software that translates instructions written in high level language into machine language for execution by a system To connect or link in a series as when files are grouped together for faster processing See also job concatenation
281. es explaining the errors The Source Listing file name is the same as the JSL name except that it has a LST extension Resource Listing file Contains a list of the resources that are specified in the JSL such as font names and form names The Resource Listing file name is the same as the JSL name except that it has a RSC extension Logfile Contains all messages that were displayed on the screen during compiling This file is appended each time XJDC is invoked and it is placed in the following directory opt XRXnps XRXx jdc data The Log file name is XJDC LOG Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Correcting errors in a JSL If errors are encountered in a JSL while it is being compiled the following message appears in the Terminal window KKKKKKKKKK JSL CONTAINS ERROR S KKKKKKKKKK 5j Terminal Bi window Edit Options Help Xerox Job Copyright XTDO0O11I XTDO01 21 XTDOO17I XTDO0181 XID0021W XTDOO20I XTDOO25I XIDO0251I GKLS quantum custdoc amp cd opt XRXnps bin GKLS quantum custdoc amp xjdc opt XRXnps resources lcds BANNER JTSL Description Compiler M10 for Unix C 1998 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Reading Configuration File Enabled Options REPLACE NODISPLAY PRINT TRUNCATE NOLABEL COMPILE SINGLEBYTE YM10 PAPERSIZE USLETTER DATE US PAGINATE 60 OUTPATH opt XRXnps resources 1cds M10 Starting Compilation Of opt XRX
282. es from the top of the output page to the last print line on the page bottom of form The Bottom Of Form specification is independent of channel assignments BOF should be greater than or equal to the largest line number assigned to a channel The maximum value for BOF is 255 Default 66 VFU BOF Ifthe carriage control action specified by the PCC ASSIGN parameter point parameter for BOF is specified as OVR the default the to note processing spaces from Top of Form a number of lines equal to the difference between the location of the current line and the new BOF if it is different from the original BOF VFU TOF Specifies the Top Of Form line number Syntax ac VFU TOF value Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 109 Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 97 VFU TOF parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the number of lines from the top of the logical page to the first print line top of form The TOF specification is independent of channel assignments It should be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to the smallest line number assigned to a channel Default 1 VFU TOF Ifthe value that is specified in the TOF parameter is greater than parameter point 4 110 to note or equal to the BOF Bottom Of Form value the TOF value is set to 1 VFU command points to note e For all PCCTYPEs except ANSI and user defined PCC
283. es the vertical format unit VFU channel that the system uses to signal the end of a report When a skip determined by the PCC field within a logical record to the specified channel occurs the IBM OS Writer banner page is considered found Default Syntax Options Default Syntax 9 VOLUME OSHDP Specifies the number of header banner pages that will be generated by an IBM OS Writer VOLUME OSHDP value Table 2 74 VOLUME OSHDP parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the number of header pages that precede the report 0 VOLUME OSTLP Specifies the number of trailer banner pages that are generated by an IBM OS writer VOLUME OSTLP value Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 67 Specifying input parameters Options Table 2 75 VOLUME OSTLP parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the number of trailer pages that follow the report Default 0 VOLUME RMULT Specifies a multiplication factor that the record length uses to determine the true record length Syntax VOLUME RMULT value Options Table 2 76 VOLUME RMULT parameter options and definitions Option Definition value An integer from 1 to 15 that is used as a multiplication factor to determine the length of the record Default 1 VOLUME TCODE Specifies the set of type assignments to use for masked comparison
284. escriptions See also JSL job identifier In HIP a mode in which multiple print jobs are processed as reports in one print job See also concatenate Program called into storage to prepare each job or job step to be run Collective functions of job scheduling and command processing job source library Collection of uncompiled job descriptions See also JDE and JDL Required part of a command 1 In data storage a reference to a file saved on tape or disk a record indicating the file name or date created or other control information 2 In programming a name assigned to a particular instruction or portion of a program as a locational reference the computer translates the label into an address local area network Orientation of print lines or top of an illustration parallel to the long edge of the paper if the sheet is within the standard size range Sheets larger than standard have the reverse print orientation Static charge present on the photo conductor before contact with dry ink particles Using LCDS Print Description Language leading LED LEF legal size LF letter size library line tables literal log logical page Ipi LPS mask Using LCDS Print Description Language Glossary 1 Vertical distance between lines also called line space measured from a baseline of one line to the baseline of the next 2 Extra spacing between lines of type 3 In typography spacing between lines an
285. esident in the JSL directory Use xjdc commands to obtain a printout of the desired JDLs Refer to Compiling a JSL in the PDL principles and procedures chapter for information on managing JDLs LPS tape label format D 4 LCDS resources such as JDLs that reside on LPS formatted tapes may be downloaded to the printing system disk from a host mainframe computer by means of The format of the tapes that may contain these resources is shown in the following diagram In this diagram each rectangle represents a record that contains one or more bytes of data The table that follows it lists the pieces of information that are contained within each record Using LCDS Print Description Language Offline specifications 00 02 04 06 10 12 14 16 20 23 22 25 24 27 26 31 30 33 32 35 34 37 36 41 40 43 42 177 176 777 776 Figure D 2 LPS tape format diagram Using LCDS Print Description Language D 5 Offline specifications Table D 3 Content of tape records Byte range Information contained in record Additional information 00 02 File name If not used must be zero 04 File type RAD 50 06 File size in 512 byte blocks 10 First free byte 12 Date DOS format Not used 14 Record size in bytes 80 for text otherwise 512 16 Tape block size in bytes 20 Reserved for future use 22 32 ASCII file name 9 characters Currently only 6 ch
286. estricts certain operations or administrative functions Syntax ABNORMAL SECURITY YES NO Options Table 4 10 ABNORMAL SECURITY parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Restricts use of the following functions for the duration of the startup JDE or JDL Obtaining a sample print from the current job Skipping over output pages NO Specifies that no restrictions will be imposed Default NO ABNORMAL If SECURITY is invoked in a selected JDE such as one that SECURITY is requested via a JDE DJDE the Sample restrictions take parameter points effect when the page that is associated with the DJDE to note reaches the marker 4 8 The automatic recovery procedures on the printing system are based on the availability of valid checkpoint data independently saved by the LCDS decomposer As a result most recoveries are performed with no operator assistance In certain cases the system may detect that the checkpoint data is incorrect and operator assistance is requested that is the operator or user is requested to return to point of origin or last valid checkpoint The system produces a marker page which is set up during processing and inserts it into the print job at the point of crash It is printed after the output processor has printed data that was already processed by input before the crash occurred Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters A
287. et Cancel Heb Figure 2 Output tab on Queue Properties window with Override options selected NOTE The Initial Form selection that appears on some of the user interface windows functions differently from the other options that can override JDL commands Initial Form is overridden by DJDEs even if its Override option is selected 5 Click OK The Properties window closes and the properties for which you selected Override are implemented for the next job Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Specifying If you want to specify late binding overrides that will immediately overrides while a take effect on a job that is currently printing do the following job is printing Click Pause Printing on the Print Services window to halt printing 2 Follow the procedure for specifying late binding attributes described in the previous section Example The following example illustrates a situation in which you might want to use a late binding attribute on a job that is currently printing As a large job starts to print you notice that the printed sheets are going to the sample tray You know that the sample tray is not large enough to accommodate the entire job On the Queue Properties window you click the Output tab then select a stacker bin from the menu in the Output group box You click the Override check box then click OK at the bottom of the Output window
288. et occurs on only the first copy of the offset page If OUTPUT OFFSET FIRST or ALL was specified and the ROFFSET criteria is satisfied on the first page of a report the normal offset from the preceding report occurs If a testexp is satisfied in duplex mode the logical page on which the record occurs is the first logical page of a new sheet If this page falls on the back side of a two sided sheet the page is moved to the front of the next sheet creating a blank back side If segments are specified the ROFFSET command is ignored Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 41 Using logical processing ROFFSET command example In the following example a file has multiple reports without any delimiter records separating the reports Each page of the report has a page number as part of the heading Each report causes renumbering of the pages starting with PAGE 1 With the ROFFSET command coded below an offset occurs for all passes of the reports Therefore the first sheet of each report is offset relative to the previous sheet because each first sheet contains records with the Page 1 text Tl TABLE CONSTANT PAGE 1 Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT 105 8 EQ T1 ROFFSET TEST C1 PASSES ALL The following figure shows a sample job diagram showing ROFFSET command usage 1 2 EXESESESEXENESEXEXERESESERERES emet m SS SS m ay SSS SSS p m rn 4 Figure 3 5 Diagram of a sample ROFFSET command
289. et next to the bottom and so on with the last sheet of the set on top to be fed first If the report is larger than the N to 1 threshold it prints in 1 to N order and the reverse collated stock is then inappropriate Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 65 Specifying print format parameters Syntax Options When this occurs the system displays a message stating that page ordering has been reversed and cycles down e NTO1 NO FACEUP NO and DUPLEX NO In this sequence the NTO1 and FACEUP parameters specify the NO option so other potentially affected parameters such as DUPLEX are not overridden The DUPLEX parameter therefore maintains either the YES or NO option If hierarchical overrides occur the system issues warning messages in the xjdc listing when the JSL is compiled then forces parameters that are lower in the hierarchical structure to their workable values OUTPUT NUMBER Invokes page numbering on the printed report and specifies starting number and location of the numbers on the page OUTPUT NUMBER pnum Inum cnum findex inkref NO Table 4 65 OUTPUT NUMBER parameter options and definitions Option Definition pnum page number An integer specifying the number with which page numbering starts The beginning page number may be nonpositive The number is incremented at page transitions but is not printed until it becomes positive The maximum page number that can be
290. eter of the VOLUME command in cases where itis not appropriate for a particular HOST type Refer to the Offline specifications appendix for format information e Ifan online job JDE is called out in an offline JDL that changes the system default values the job may print incorrectly If this happens separate and run online and offline jobs independently of each other The following defaults are automatically selected when VOLUME HOST IBMONL is specified RECORD LENGTH 150 LINE POCTYPE IBM3211 DATA 0 150 e Double byte printing The following host types can be used for online printing 123ONL DBSONL Emulates the IBM 4245 host type FUJONL Emulates the functionality of the Fujitsu F6715 and F672X printers FXEONL HITONL Emulates the functionality of the Hitachi H817X printer UTYONL Emulates the IBM 4245 host type The following host types can be used for offline printing BMDBS Emulates the IBMOS IBMDOS and MVS ESA host types in the label block and record structures BMUTY Same as IBMDBS FUJITSU Emulates the functionality of Fujitsu F6715 and F672x printers HITACHI Emulates the functionality of Hitachi 817x printer Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 61 Specifying input parameters Syntax Options e Ifthe host application program uses ANSI carriage control commands the host operating system converts each command to a
291. extraneous data at end of record Y N N STRUCTURE Input record structure Y N N RECORD ADJUST Specifies an adjustment value that is added to or subtracted from the contents of the record length field to determine the true record length Syntax RECORD ADJUST value 2 36 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Options Table 2 38 RECORD ADJUST parameter options and definitions Option Definition value A constant integer that is added to or subtracted from the value in the length field of every record The range of a value is 127 to 127 and must be no greater than the record length The first character may be plus or minus Default 0 RECORD CONSTANT Specifies a constant string used to signal the end of a record This record delimiter constant string signals the end of the record but it is not included in the print line Syntax RECORD CONSTANT sc Options Table 2 39 RECORD CONSTANT parameter options and definitions Option Definition SC String constant Specifies a string hexadecimal octal or alpha constant as described in the chapter Creating a job source library JSL The length of the constant may be from 1 to 4 bytes Default No default RECORD FORMAT Specifies the format of the record length field Syntax RECORD FORMAT type Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 37 Specifying input parameters Options Table 2 40
292. f a value is specified all inputs are coded to that value Default Codetype EBCDIC CODE DEFAULT The DEFAULT parameter must be coded before any ASSIGN parameter points parameter for the assignment exceptions to become active A to note DEFAULT parameter following any defined ASSIGN parameters causes those ASSIGN parameters to be ignored Multiple user defined character code translation tables are allowed but only one may be without a command identifier The corresponding CODE and LCODE parameters of the VOLUME command are used to reference each user created code table by a command identifier The USER option of the CODE and LCODE parameters of the VOLUME command references a user defined code translation table in which no command identifier is coded CODE DEFAULT Following are two examples illustrating the use of the CODE parameter DEFAULT parameter examples Example 1 Assume that your input data is recorded in EBCDIC On output however codes 5A 5B and 5C characters respectively are assigned to the character blank X 20 The command to modify the EBCDIC base table is as follows CODE DEFAULT EBCDIC ASSIGN X 5A X 20 ASSIGN X 5B X 20 ASSIGN X 5C X 20 Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 21 Specifying input parameters Example 2 Syntax Options In this example consecutive input codes such as X 5B and X 5C need not be sp
293. f character type codes to Y Y N use for criteria testing in Value mode The following sections describe the syntax of the VOLUME command parameters and explain the parameter options Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 55 Specifying input parameters Syntax Options VOLUME BMULT Specifies a multiplication factor that you can use to determine the true block length VOLUME BMULT value Table 2 57 VOLUME BMULT parameter options and definitions Option Definition value An integer from 1 to 15 that you extract from the tape label and apply as a multiplication factor to the block length to determine the true block length Default Syntax Options 1 VOLUME CODE Specifies which code translation table the system uses to interpret the input data VOLUME CODE Keyword id NONE Table 2 58 VOLUME CODE parameter options and definitions Option Definition keyword Specifies a specific standard system defined code translation table The available options are ASCII BCD EBCDIC H2BCD H6BCD IBMBCD NONE PEBCDIC USER Refers to the single unlabeled CODE command defined within the JDL Specifies an identifier label that you used in a previously defined CODE command The id label is required when multiple CODE commands are contained within the JDL NONE Specifies that data will not be translated by input processing
294. faults 4 On each tab window select the Override check box for each queue attribute that you want to override all PDL commands and DJDEs NOTE If Override is not selected for an option on the window that option has no effect on the job Instead the parameter default in the JDL and JDE is used If no JDL is specified the system uses the default for the command itself The following figure shows the Output tab on a queue Properties window on which the Override check boxes for the Location Order and Delivery have been selected Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 43 PDL principles and procedures CJ Properties Properties Stock Output image Shift Alignment PostScriptPDF TIFF PCL ASCI LCDS Output Settings Collation Slip Sheets Location Uncollated Disable sik eps Y Collated Enable vi Override CO Override Paper Stock Order Finishing C Override N 1 Descending x None Available x Mixed Stock Size Job vj Override _j Override Optimize Throughput 7 Throughput Width Delivery Sides Imaged ceo NE Face Down x 1 Sided x A 8 0 17 0 vj Override _j Override O Override Units Layout 34 Rotation E 2 mm p Up OF v a inches Setup i Override vj Override 4 Previous Queue v Next Queue 1 44 ok Apply Res
295. form applies This defaults to the first or next copy If the copies parameter is not specified the last or only specified form applies to all copies beginning with the init copy number If the form is not the last one that is specified copies defaults to 1 If neither init nor copies is specified the form applies to all copies of all data pages of the report copies Specifies the number of copies to which the form applies NONE Means that no form is added to the associated report page of variable data 5 38 FORM S DJDE point to note Because there is ambiguity between the abbreviated forms of the FORMAT and the FORM S DUDEs if either is abbreviated to the first three letters DJDE processing presumes FORMAT Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs GDATA DJDE Type Syntax Options Specifies the starting point of the graphic data from the beginning of the user portion of a data record Record oriented GDATA offset termination Table 5 28 GDATA DJDE options and definitions Option Definition offset The starting point within the record of the graphic data that will be downloaded termination The terminating byte of the record The options are DEFAULT f online a single terminating byte exists If offline no terminating byte exists n The number of terminating bytes that exist GRAPHIC DJDE Type Syn
296. format parameters VFU command example Following is an example of how to use the VFU command In the following example top of form is assigned to line number 5 and bottom of form is assigned to line number 55 Channels 1 2 and 12 have been assigned line numbers V1 VFU ASSIGN 1 5 ASSIGN 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 ASSIGN 12 55 TOF 5 BOF 55 Assume the printing system is printing a report and the current line number is 11 e Ifa Skip To Channel 1 And Print parameter is issued a page transition occurs Printing begins on line 5 assigned to channel 1 which is the top of form on the new page e Ifa Skip to Channel 2 And Print parameter is issued when the current line number is 11 the next line to be printed is line 15 of the current page Lines 10 15 20 and so forth are also assigned to channel 2 but because the current line number is 11 the next consecutive line number assigned to channel 2 greater than 11 is line 15 e Ifa Skip To Channel 12 And Print parameter is issued the next line to be printed is line 55 of the current page Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 111 Specifying print format parameters 4 112 Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries unlike the PDL commands described in the Input Processing Print Format and Logical Processing sections are not coded in JSLs They are coded in th
297. g the report The MODIFY DJDE can also be used to dynamically associate a catalogued CME file with report processing NOTE CMEs must be catalogued as separate disk files if they are referenced by a MODIFY DJDE CME command parameters The following table summarizes the CME command parameters Table 4 14 Summary of the CME command parameters modification begins on a page Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE CME CONSTANT Specifies the copy modification character string Y Y N that will be printed CME FONT Selects the fonts for printing input or CME data CME INK Specifies the ink for printing the variable data that is affected by the CME CME LINE Specifies the range of lines on which copy Y Y N modification occurs CME POSITION Specifies the character position at which copy Y Y N The following sections describe the syntax of the CME command parameters and explain their options Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters CME CONSTANT Specifies a character string to print Syntax ac CME CONSTANT sc Options Table 4 15 CME CONSTANT parameter options and definitions Option Definition SC string constant Represents the character string to be printed The width of the copy modification rectangle is determined by the number of characters specified by sc More than one string constant is allowed Default No
298. ge Using logical processing Masked Performing masked comparisons using either a nonstandard comparisons character set or a standard set for which the default type using nondefault assignments are not suitable requires coding the following type assignments TCODE command This command is used either to modify a set of standard default type assignments or to define a completely new set shown in processing sequence 3 in the following figure e TCODE parameter of the VOLUME command This parameter is used to specify the set of assignments defined by the TCODE command as the one used for masked comparison The MASK and CONSTANT parameters of one or more occurrences of the TABLE command The use of these parameters is the same as for comparisons using unmodified defaults explained in the previous section CONSTANT offset length al From logical Ola tabi processing CANER CHANGE offset NE CHANGE of set length NE LAST command LINENUM init LINENUM int coun From logical CONSTANT offset length NE rocessing 2 fabid FQ eee CRITERIA LINENUM init count MASK ignore char charspec1 charspec2 charspec7 liae DEFAULT res VOLUME TCODE 1 tcodeid gt TCODE TASSIGN 9 TRESET sequence Purpose String comparisons with no mask String comparisons with mask 9 Optional user defined set of type assignments for mask comparisons Figure 3 1 Commands that specify string compa
299. ge 4 53 Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT FEED parameter points to note Syntax Options e FEED stockreference must refer to a stock assigned to a stockname by the STOCKSET command that has been specified for the report The MAIN stock is the default for system generated pages and is used if no SYSPAGE stock is specified e The DP EPS software comes with MAIN AUX and AUTO stocks defined Ifthe OUTPUT FEED command and the RAUX command specify two different stock names RAUX has higher priority The stockname option bypasses the stock reference feature but it still requires that the stock name be specified in the current STOCKSET command FEED stockreference is the recommended usage OUTPUT FORMAT Specifies a page descriptor entry PDE to be used in formatting the printed output such as location of starting print line for each logical page on the physical page font usage and orientation OUTPUT FORMAT pdeid NOTE To ensure readability enter the entire parameter FORMAT Do not abbreviate to FOR Table 4 54 OUTPUT FORMAT parameter options and definitions Option Definition pdeid page descriptor entry identifier References a page descriptor entry that was either defined previously in the JDL or catalogued as a separate file in the Icds resources folder on disk Refer to Coding a JSL in the PDL principles and procedures chapter for information on cre
300. ge offsetting An example of logical processing tests and criteria is provided in this command set I1 TABLE CONSTANT PAGE 1 T2 TABLE CONSTANT INPUT RECORDS T3 TABLE CONSTANT JOB Cl TABLE CONSTANT 122 6 EQ T1 LINENUM 1 10 C2 TABLE CONSTANT 14 13 EQ T2 C3 TABLE CONSTANT 14 3 EQ T3 These commands are often placed at the system level because they require identifiers However depending on how many of the jobs they apply to within the JSL they could be coded at any of the other levels Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 23 PDL principles and procedures Specifying formats PDEs Using copy modification entries Defining character code translation tables 1 24 There are many standard formats or print description entries PDEs available for your JSL These formats are listed in the PDE command section of the Specifying print format parameters chapter PDEs like VFUs require identification for example PDE1 PDE BEGIN 0 18IN 0 66IN FONT L0112B L01BOA PMODE LANDSCAPE PDE2 PDE BEGIN 1 03 51 BEGIN 6 30 51 FONTS P1012A PMODE PORTRAI H e Copy modification entries CMEs allow you to change certain parts of static data in report output and to change fonts within variable data Below are some sample CMEs CME1 CME LINE 9 POS 1 FONT 1
301. gh 9 e Ifthe string that is specified in the CONSTANT parameter were to include a the corresponding data character from the input stream would be considered equal without any comparison being made because it is an ignore type mask character Assume the TABLE command in example 2 is changed as follows T2 TABLE MASK CONSTANT When the first two character positions of the CONSTANT parameter are checked for a mask character as specified in the MASK parameter none is found Exact character matches between the input data string characters and the CONSTANT parameter characters in this case A7 are required for those two positions Therefore in this example only data strings that begin with A7 can possibly pass the entire test Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing Example 4 The TABLE command below sets up the character to type associations shown in the following table 22 TABLE MASKS TA beh UE CONSTANT DATE ID Table 3 6 Character to type associations Mask Mask Character position character type Meaning 0 i None Make no comparison 1 1 Any numeric 0 through 9 2 2 Any alphabetic A through Z a through z A logical test using this TABLE command examines a field of an input data record to determine if the following conditions are met The word DATE is present The is in the right place The date itse
302. ghlight color laser printing systems 4850 LPS 4890 LPS and DP92 LPS If you use color JSLs to print jobs on monochrome systems the jobs print in black and shades of gray The shades of gray that appear on the printed output depend on the inks that are specified in the JSL for the colored areas JSL command levels There are many PDL commands available for your job source libraries many ways of organizing them and virtually infinite combinations you can use to create applications with PDL There are however a few programming rules that you must follow when creating a JSL If the JSL is not structured according to these rules the system may not recognize or obey the commands you enter Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Refer to Coding a JSL in this chapter for the procedure for creating a Job Source Library PDL commands are organized within a JSL in groupings called command levels e JDL or system level commands Catalog level commands e Job or JDE level commands You may code commands within these levels following the JDL command which identifies the start of the system level The system level must have at least the SYSTEM or JDL command The catalog level is not required and there must be at least one job specified in the JOB level Some JSLs define only one print job but it is more common to find JSLs that define multiple jobs The following table outlines the comman
303. gle file or a single spooled host file identified by the banner pages In processing stacked reports the system checks each record for the logical end of report specification as defined by the RSTACK TEST parameter When you use RSTACK for report separation the end of the report occurs as soon as the test criteria are satisfied However when BANNER is coded you specify the number of consecutive banner pages that must satisfy the test criteria before end of report occurs Report separation based on banner page detection is performed with the BANNER command When you use RSTACK for report separation the end of the report occurs as soon as the test expression is satisfied However when BANNER is coded you specify the number of consecutive banner pages that must satisfy the test criteria before the end of the report occurs and report separation occurs on a page boundary RSTACK delimiter modes There are two modes of stacked reports delimiter and nondelimiter e n delimiter mode the record satisfying the TEST criteria is not part of the data for the report that follows the delimiter but simply serves to separate or delimit one report from another n nondelimiter mode reports are stacked one after the other without any special records separating them The two modes are specified by the DELIMITER parameter of the RSTACK command Delimiter mode If DELIMITER YES is coded delimiter mode you may actually separate ea
304. gth field Syntax BLOCK OFFSET value Options Table 2 11 BLOCK OFFSET parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the number of bytes that the block length field is offset from the first byte of the block The value is an integer in the range 0 to LENGTH LTHFLD 1 Default 0 BLOCK POSTAMBLE Specifies the length in bytes of the extraneous data at the end of each tape block measured from the end of the block backwards to the end of the last logical record Syntax BLOCK POSTAMBLE ength Options Table 2 12 BLOCK POSTAMBLE parameter options and definitions Option Definition length An integer in the range of 0 to the block length that specifies the number of bytes that follow the last logical record to the end of each tape block Default 0 2 16 Using LCDS Print Description Language BLOCK POSTAMBLE parameter points to note Syntax Options Specifying input parameters e If the block delimiter string constant is specified the block postamble is ignored e The POSTAMBLE parameter may be overridden if RECORD STRUCTURE is changed through tape label processing BLOCK PREAMBLE Specifies the length of the operating system portion of the block that is the byte offset from the first byte of a tape block to the first byte of the first logical record BLOCK PREAMBLE ength Table 2 13 BLOCK PREAMBLE parameter options and definiti
305. guage 4 51 Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 50 OUTPUT DESTINATION parameter options and definitions Option Definition BIN Specifies that the currently selected bin is used TRAY Sends output to the sample tray Transparencies should always be sent to this tray NOTE Use caution when selecting the TRAY option because of the limited capacity of the sample tray 100 sheets EXPORT Specifies that sheets be sent to the bypass transport to be fed into a finishing device The EXPORT option takes effect only if The user interface Output window has System Specified selected in the Output Location field and The Finishing field displays the name of a finishing device Default BIN OUTPUT DUPLEX Specifies whether printing is to occur in duplex print on both sides of a sheet or simplex print on a single side Syntax OUTPUT DUPLEX YES NO Options Table 4 51 OUTPUT DUPLEX parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Specifies two sided duplex printing NO Specifies single sided simplex printing Default NO OUTPUT DUPLEX parameter point to note Syntax 4 52 Transparencies cannot print in duplex OUTPUT FACEUP Specifies that printed pages are delivered face up to the output destination OUTPUT FACEUP YES NO Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Default OUTPUT FACEUP parameter point Specifying print f
306. h ee a RE Vah xvii Operation safety U S decet EVE REPE E MES TIRES RS xviii Operation safety Europe 002 eee xix Warning MARKINGS ws us ud usc dre Settee ye wert d gute we eee bast xix Electrical supply 4 G ned Geka mtu eee not E dots xix Ventilation 54 T S EEE OS ka ke eka ae eae XX Operator accessible areas 0 ccc eee XX MAIMOTI NICE a scent drtracauss erg ura et acu aaa ird E E rd oe ta XXi Before cleaning your product 000 eee eee xxi Ce mark Europe Only 5o n ca eee ee hain eee S hei ee Bee hx XXi POR further information sss viator dope Bait e n pa tb ttn E a xxii Introduction coco v EISIEPIGwueRSEuwESC ETE NK ESSERE xxiii Contents APR PR SB saath dh cit tye oS SNS Raw he Cou aaa eE Boke dak xxiii Conventions 2 exco e Les wae ti te v Bae E hie cantata E te Gh xxiv Related publications 2 22 25 prr sacs Due reuse RE Ws XXV DocuPrint 100 115 135 155 180 EPS documentation XXV DocuPrint 75 90 EPS documentation xxvi 1 PDL principles and procedures 1 1 Enabling PDL features and functions 00000 eee 1 2 PDL command structure and components lllssus 1 3 Commandes v3 8 a inkor tue E Denier RE e Bet des 1 3 Components of a command llslsllllslsllss 1 3 Command Syntax vos irse rr ence EE RERUM ads 1 12 Syntax rules 2 ee 1 12 Command syntax conventions 1 14 Sample PDL
307. h font is to be selected is byte 133 relative to O Example2 1n the following command PCC 0 can be omitted because it is the default The record PREAMBLE O LINE PCCTYPE NONE DATA 2 60 VFU V1 FONTINDEX 1 The following figure illustrates the command shown in example 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 37 Specifying print format parameters Data g1 AJBIC ylz TR rint records Pje la Jpixivizi E eme byte PCC byte W eu n e e eN Js overprinting Font 2 A D X Y Z O i d Aec yv D X Y Z Spina O inted A B c D X yz Gong MERGE Figure 4 2 Sample data record structure Example3 LINE PCCTYPE NONE DATA 1 57 VFU V1 MESSAGE command The MESSAGE command permits you to inform the operator of special conditions by displaying user defined text on the screen All MESSAGE command parameters must be specified in a single command If multiple message commands are specified the parameters in the final command are applied e The DP EPS systems do not support the bar code option Bar code commands that are encountered by the controller are ignored and no syntax errors are noted No messages or operator information pages are generated 4 38 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters MESSAGE command parameters The following table summarizes the MESSAGE command parameters Table 4 39 Summary of MESSAGE command parame
308. h mode in which it prints up to 77 pages per minute For very large papers such as 11 by 17 inches or A3 paper is fed short edge first so the 11 inch edge leads through the printer Using pitch mode and the TMODE parameter effectively Specifying the pitch mode also called the throughput mode with the OUTPUT TMODE parameter allows you to control the default pitch mode which provides the following benefits Matching system throughput with finishing device restrictions If the finishing device attached to the printer cannot accept output at rated speed the printer inserts gaps in the paper path to ensure that pages do not arrive at the device too rapidly For example if printing is done at 180 ppm printing effectively slows to 68 ppm This happens even if the finishing device actually could have accepted pages at up to 120 ppm However if you change the mode of this job from 7 pitch to 6 pitch mode the job runs about 116 ppm Eliminating process adjustment cycles during jobs that cross pitch boundaries Each time a job crosses a pitch boundary the system performs a print quality adjustment If this is done frequently within a job the adjustments may take a substantial amount of the overall print time Lowering the pitch mode so that the entire job runs in the same mode may enable you to significantly increase performance Estimating the time needed to run your print jobs for scheduling purposes To bet
309. h octal character pair is converted internally to an 8 bit octal character by prefixing two binary zeros Thus the arithmetic value of a multiple character octal constant may be difficult to determine because each digit in the constant has been altered An octal constant must be preceded immediately by the characters letter O apostrophe O and immediately followed by the apostrophe character RECORD CONSTANT 0 07070707 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Table 1 2 Types of string constants Continued Constant Definition Example H2 and H6 H2 and H6 constants generate H2000 BCD and H6000 BCD codes respectively Use of H2 and H6 is identical to use of EandA prefixes described in the previous sections of this table Since H2000 and H6000 BCD are defined as 6 bit codes no specification greater than X 3F generates a legal character If anything from X 40 to X FF is coded an error message appears and the bad character is replaced with a blank String constants may be replaced by an optional repeat count A repeat count must be enclosed in parentheses and must be in the range of 1 to 255 BLOCK CONSTANT Repeat count examples T1 TABLE CONSTANT 3 is equivalent to T1 TABLE CONSTANT o T1 TABLE CONSTANT 3 0 27 T2 TABLE CONSTANT 4 X C1 H2 37271317 BLOCK CONSTANT H6 37373
310. h the IRESULT DJDE If more than one IRESULT is specified on a page the last instance takes precedence Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 61 Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT LOGO Allows you to specify a logo for imaging on all pages of a report unless it is canceled by a CANCEL DJDE Up to 128 logos can be specified on a page Syntax OUTPUT LOGO name vpos units hpos units INKS inkindex inkindex Options Table 4 62 OUTPUT LOGO parameter options and definitions Option Definition name Name of the logo file vpos vertical position A value constant that specifies as an offset the vertical position of the top edge of the logo relative to the 0 0 position on the current physical page the position that would be specified by a PDE BEGIN parameter value of 0 0 hpos horizontal position A value constant that specifies as an offset the horizontal position of the left edge of the logo relative to the 0 0 position on the current physical page units The unit of measurement for the vertical and horizontal positions offset value Options are e DOTS e XDOTS 600 dpi dots e CM centimeters N inches The default unit is IN INKS Indicates that the ink that follows will override the inks that are defined in the logo inkindex Overrides the corresponding inks that are specified in the ink list of the logo NOTE For this option to be valid the logo that
311. hangeably Unit of measurement equal to 0 0139 inch Points are always used to express type size and leading There are 12 points toa pica and about 72 points to every inch See also pica Using LCDS Print Description Language Glossary 1 1 Glossary portrait page orientation ppm PQA PROM proportional font proportional spacing protocol purge PWBA QIC queue RAM raster data rasterization record recovery remote access report resolution Glossary 12 Orientation of print lines or the top of an illustration parallel to the short edge of the paper if the sheet is within the standard size range Sheets larger than standard have the reverse print orientation pages per minute print quality adjustment programmable read only memory Font containing characters that vary in width See also fixed font Text in which each alphanumeric character is given a weighted amount of space Such output has print like appearance Proportional spacing allows more space for wide characters and less space for narrow characters Formal set of conventions governing the format of data and the control of information exchange between two communication devices To delete data from a system printed wiring board assembly quarter inch cartridge List of documents waiting to be processed random access memory Storage that allows data such as documents to be stored and retrieved directly by address location without reading
312. hanged through a JDE DJDE 5 6 To process a DJDE the system must process data up to the recognition and interpretation of the DJDE itself This sequence requires that the basic description of the input source must be correct before the application of the DJDE Therefore you must not change the description of the input source with DJDEs either by accident or by intent The system also does not allow certain basic parameters to be changed through the selected JDE the JDE specified by the JDE DJDE NOTE CODE changes to data may occur and take effect on the page boundary following the DJDE record If a translation code change is involved in a selected JDE the parameter portion of any subsequent DJDE must be in the new code The prefix used by the IDEN must however retain the original hexadecimal value Thus if the CODE changes from EBCDIC to ASCII the prefix must remain in EBCDIC even though the parameter portion changes to ASCII The parameters that cannot be changed through a JDE that is specified in the JDE DJDE are listed in the following table Table 5 1 Parameters that are not changeable by a JDE DJDE Command Parameters BANNER All parameters BLOCK All parameters IDEN All parameters except OPRINFO OUTPUT OFFSET RECORD All parameters except LENGTH VOLUME HOST Using LCDS Print Description Language Parameters that can be changed through a JDE DJDE Using Dynamic Job
313. hannel number to a page line Y Y Y number or set of line numbers VFU BOF Bottom Of Form Y Y Y Indicates the number of lines from the top of an output page to the last print line on the page i e defines the last line on which printing appears VFU TOF Top Of Form Y Y Y Indicates the number of lines from the top as defined by the PDE BEGIN values of an output page to the first print line on the page in other words defines the first line on which printing appears Syntax 4 108 The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explain the parameter options VFU ASSIGN Specifies assignments of channel numbers to output lines ac VFU ASSIGN channo lineno channo lineno linenos Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 95 VFU ASSIGN parameter options and definitions Option Definition channo channel number The number of the channel being assigned It is an integer in the range 0 to 15 lineno line number The number of the output print line that you are assigning to a particular channel It is an integer in the range TOF to BOF Default No default VFU BOF Specifies the Bottom Of Form line number Syntax ac VFU BOF value Options Table 4 96 VFU BOF parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the number of lin
314. hat transparencies will not be used in the job NO DP 100 115 135 155 180 EPS only Transparencies cannot be handled by the high capacity feeder stackers Due to this restriction transparency jobs must be fed from the processor feeder trays trays 1 and 2 and delivered to the sample tray The DP 75 90 EPS can feed transparencies from any tray f TRANS is specified in a job these parameters automatically go into effect OUTPUT DUPLEX NO ACCT USER TRAY OUTPUT BFORM NONE RPAGE SIDE NUFRONT OUTPUT UNITS Defines the size in dots of the unit of measure that will be used to position a graphic that is referenced by the OUTPUT IMAGE parameter or an IMAGE ALTER or GRAPHIC DJDE OUTPUT UNITS size Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 87 Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 80 OUTPUT UNITS parameter options and definitions Option Definition size An integer value constant that defines the number of dots in a user defined unit UN When used to compute the position of a graphic the result is rounded to the nearest dot Default Syntax Options No default OUTPUT XSHIFT Specifies whether or not the image of the form and data ona page is to be shifted downward or upward thus changing the x coordinate of the logical page origin and if so by what values XSHIFT is used to shift the image of the data downward or upward as
315. he DJDE record Depending on the time of a page transition the TOF DJDE may not take effect on the next record In other words even though a TOF DJDE is processed a page transition may have occurred before the DJDE value could take effect Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 71 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs 5 72 TRANS DJDE For example if the initial TOF and BOF values are 2 for every job a page transition occurs every time a data record is processed because the TOF and BOF have the same value If a TOF DJDE specifying a value of 1 is processed and the page transition has already occurred the TOF DJDE value is too late and does not take effect until the next page transition The value option is defined the same as in the VFU command described in the Specifying print format parameters chapter If the value specified in the TOF DJDE is greater than or equal to the BOF Bottom Of Form value the TOF value is set to 1 Specifies whether or not transparencies are used in the print job Type Page oriented Syntax TRANS YES NO Options Table 5 62 TRANS DJDE options and definitions Option Definition YES Specifies that transparencies are used in the print job NO Specifies that transparencies are not used in the print job TRANS DJDE points to note The TRANS DUDE is used to force parameters when transparencies are used and to minimize paper jams If T
316. he Include a File window enter one of the following directory paths and press lt Return gt opt XRXnps resources lcds or var spool XRXnps resources lcds NOTE The file and folder names are case sensitive Be sure to enter the directory path exactly as it is shown above with regard to uppercase and lowercase letters Remember to include the slashes at the beginning and end c Alist of files appears in the Files field below the text box in which you entered the path to the folder Scroll through the file list until you locate the file called DFAULT JSL This is the default JSL You can also use ONLINE JSL if you are creating the JSL for an online job 1 52 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures d Click the file name DFAULT JSL then click OK The default JSL is displayed in the Text Editor window 3 Using the default JSL as a base enter any changes additional commands or parameters and deletions that you need to make in order to construct your new JSL NOTE You should consider carefully the ID name that you enter in the JDL or SYSTEM command the first line of the JSL because this identifier determines the name of the JDL file when your new JSL is compiled The JDL name must be one to six characters in length not including the extension following the dot 4 When you have completed entering all the desired commands and parameters select Save As from the File menu on
317. he first line in a report is determined by the first font in the PDE provided the FONTINDEX parameter has not been specified When FONTINDEX is specified the height of the first line of a report is determined by the height of the font selected by the font index value in that first line If there is no font index value in the record and FONTINDEX is specified the spacing for the first line of the report is determined by the first font in the PDE Positioning of the first line on subsequent pages The position of the first line and the spacing of subsequent lines on the pages following page 1 is determined a different font from the previous page depending on the printing system DP EPS Each time a new font list is downloaded for a page font 0 is used to position the first line of that page Other LPS When a page transition occurs the line positioning and spacing is determined by different fonts depending on the conditions When the FONTINDEX or CME parameters are specified the line spacing of subsequent pages is determined by the index of the last font on the previous page into the current PDL font list The height of the last font used determines the initial base line of that first print line e Ifthe index of the last font used on the previous page is greater than the number of fonts on the current page the first font on the current page is used to determine spacing and positioning Print line data When you are cha
318. he length in bytes of the extraneous data at the end of each tape record measured from the end of the record backwards to the end of the last logical record Syntax RECORD POSTAMBLE ength Options Table 2 45 RECORD POSTAMBLE parameter options and definitions Option Definition length An integer in the range of 0 to the record length that specifies the number of bytes that follow the last logical record to the end of each tape record Default 0 RECORD PREAMBLE Specifies the length of the operating system portion of the record that is the byte offset from the first byte of a tape record to the first byte of the first logical record Syntax RECORD PREAMBLE ength Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Specifying input parameters Table 2 46 RECORD PREAMBLE parameter options and definitions Option Definition length An integer in the range of 0 to the record length that specifies the number of bytes from the first byte of the tape record to the first byte of the first logical record Default Syntax Options 0 RECORD STRUCTURE Specifies the general record structure of the input data RECORD STRUCTURE structure type Table 2 47 RECORD STRUCTURE parameter options and definitions Option Definition structure type Type of structure of the record May be any of the following FB fixed length blocked F fixed length V
319. heir options Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters IDEN command parameters Table 2 22 Summary of IDEN command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE IDEN DJPCC Specifies processing of carriage control for DJDE Y Y N records IDEN OFFSET Specifies the starting position of the prefix string IDEN OPRINFO Specifies whether the DJDE record is printed and delivered to the stacker IDEN PREFIX Specifies a character string that appears in the Y Y N DJDE record identification part IDEN SKIP Specifies the starting position of the first DJDE Y Y N command IDEN DJPCC DJDE Printer Carriage Control Defines the processing of carriage control for DJDE records found in the data stream Syntax IDEN DJPCC DEFAULT PROCESS IGNORE Options Table 2 23 IDEN DJPCC options and definitions Option Definition DEFAULT Specifies that for online printing the channel skip portion of the carriage control will be applied whereas the print and space portions will not Refer to the PCC ASSIGN parameter description for further information on carriage control For offline printing this option specifies that all PCCs in the DJDE records will be ignored PROCESS Specifies that carriage control information for all DJDE records will be valid for both online and offline printing IGNORE Causes all carriage control info
320. hen Change Mode CRITERIA commands are evaluated a string from the current line is compared with a string saved from the corresponding part of a previous line Refer to String comparisons in this chapter for information on use of strings in logical processing commands Ifthe comparison is not equal the string from the current line becomes the saved comparison string for subsequent lines and the criteria is considered true f two records are overprinted on the same line but with different data in the field defined by the CRITERIA command the string from the last overprint record becomes the saved comparison string and the CHANGE CRITERIA is satisfied Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 15 Using logical processing CRITERIA CHANGE parameter syntax example Syntax 3 16 Ifthe LINENUM parameter is used lines within the specified range are processed normally and lines outside the range are not evaluated Thus Change mode comparison strings are not saved from lines outside of a LINENUM range Refer to the CRITERIA LINENUM parameter description in this chapter for information on using this parameter of the CRITERIA command No print records carriage control specifies no printing but only skipping or spacing are evaluated for logical processing A Change mode CRITERIA command can be coded as follows criid CRITERIA CHANGE offset length NE LAST LINENUM init count CRITERIA CONSTANT
321. heses are used to enclose multiple components of a right part as shown in the following example In the example below the VFU command has three parameters ASSIGN TOF top of form and BOF bottom of form VFU1 VEU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 55 END In this example the ASSIGN parameter option has two components Multiple components of an option must be coded in the order shown in the command description syntax diagram Keywords Keywords are terms that direct the system to perform specific activities Keywords always consist of the same characters and do not vary Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Example ABNORMAL ERROR CONTINUE OTEXT WAIT ACCT USER BOTH Variable references In creating your JSLs you will often include variable references which may be either file names of resources stored on the system disk forms CMEs PDEs stocksets and so on or they may be identifiers for commands that were coded previously in the JSL Example OUTPUT FORM FORM1 MODIFY CME12 NOTE In some cases such as in the MODIFY command shown in the example above the variable CME12 could be either a file name or an identifier for a CME coded earlier in the JSL In other cases such as in the FORM command the variable FORM1 can only be a file name e Value constants Value constants have arithmetic values Value constants should be expressed as deci
322. iain EOS 4 6 ABNORMAL REP Lu zenavba tes sua iade foeda Rete 4 7 ABNORMAL SECURITY Rr eR Rh 4 8 ACG Eecommand v orate wanes c cod petu ces A VII 4 9 ACCT command parameters lslllsuu 4 9 BOOIUDEPT tub tocar ts teeny Y Is EE EE E 4 9 BOGT USER diuidi mac qwe I anat lerne a a A 4 10 ACCT command points to note 4 10 ACCT command example 00 000 4 10 CME command catre Most runs ok bar Reit eee 4 11 CME command parameters 2200000 4 12 CME CONSTANT a 00 02 Erud nd ats rr a RR 4 13 ONE FONT diui a bsp tales d cba ure tie e ate 5 4 13 GMEJBNIS risate ula ater dang BORA cd Mat ate miele te 4 14 OMEIBIBIE ossis dte qe hake at teeta arise Geena esi 4 15 CME POSITION 3 nipote tants dedic tea E RS 4 16 CME command points to note 4 16 CME command examples s 4 18 IDFFCOMmMands 1a eanan E e pL ere b obi ex 4 19 IDR command parameters liliis 4 20 IDBEIGATALOGL iren ages ene qi Ae D eb e M mena sea 4 20 DRIKUS T 25 9h wt caren BET oe d oi a PE o ie de 4 21 IDR PALETTE 533 ps ere ete 4 22 LINE Gotnifialitls sucus nor moe Sets 4 22 LINE command parameters 200 0055 4 22 LINE BASELINE 5225 9 chere Pan Erogo ek eo es 4 23 LINE BLANKTYP E uera eg dtr be EE NIE 4 24 Using LCDS Print Description Language ix Table of contents LINE DATA 45 Gasser duis ei eR ET ERG VS 4 25 IINE FOB 30 5 uc eror d 6d e wake CE UST N
323. ibe the syntax of the BANNER command parameters and explain their options BANNER HCOUNT Specifies the maximum number of consecutive header banner pages that will be recognized at Start of Report Syntax BANNER HCOUNT value Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 23 Using logical processing Options Table 3 14 BANNER HCOUNT parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Maximum number of consecutive header pages that will be recognized at the start of the report Default 0 BANNER HCOUNT parameter point 3 24 to note Syntax Options The DP EPS systems do not recognize header banner pages if an HCOUNT value of 0 is specified BANNER HJOBNO Specifies that for each report a subfield of the first record that satisfies the banner selection criteria is to be displayed as a customer job on the user interface Job Manager window BANNER HJOBNO offset length NONE Table 3 15 BANNER HJOBNO parameter options and definitions Option Definition offset Amount of space specified in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user portion of the record to the subfield within the record length The number of bytes in the subfield 0 to 16 NONE Specifies that no HOST job number is to be selected Default Syntax NONE BANNER HRPTNA Specifies that for each report a subfield of the first record that satisfies the banner se
324. ified as OVR the default processing spaces from TOF a number of lines equal to the difference between the location of the current line and the new BOF Refer to PCC command in the Specifying input parameters chapter for information regarding alternate carriage control options e The value is defined in the same manner as the BOF parameter of the VFU command C text DJDE Allows you to include comment text in the DJDE record Type Record oriented Syntax C text 5 20 Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 13 C text DJDE options and definitions Option Definition text The actual text of the comment C text DJDE points to note e When you are coding the C text DJDE the C must be followed by a space not by an equal sign e Any text following the keyword up to a semicolon unless the semicolon is enclosed in parentheses or the End Of Record is treated as commentary e Onthe DP 2000 Series EPS commas are treated as delimiters and not as ordinary text e Ifthe system does not encounter an END parameter at the end of a C DJDE record a syntax error is declared CANCEL DJDE Cancels effective on the current page the hold automatic reimaging specified by the H parameter of an IMAGE or GRAPHIC DJDE Type Record oriented graphic Syntax CANCEL name names ALL Options Table 5 14 CANCEL DJ
325. in a separate category because they are specified in the data stream instead of a JSL Descriptions of the commands are listed according to command category within the following chapters e Specifying input parameters e Using logical processing Specifying print format parameters e DJDE descriptions For a summary of all commands refer to e PDL command and DJDE summary appendix A e PDL command quick reference appendix B Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures The Job Source Library JSL The PDL commands that you issue to the printing system must be entered together in a file called a job source library JSL The JSL file is then compiled to convert it to an object file called a job descriptor library JDL which the system can read The printing system then responds to the commands contained in the JDL file and prints the job the way you want it to appear You create a JSL by entering PDL commands at either of the following e Your host computer using a host based editing facility Your printing system controller using the UNIX Text Editor You can store your JDL files for different jobs on the controller internal disk from which the system retrieves the JDL specified for the job You can also store JDLs and JSLs on diskette cartridge tape or open reel tape and import them to the disk when you are ready to use them In order to create a JSL
326. in a set for example either has a type type 1 type 2 type 3 and so forth or it does not If a character has no type it is referred to as untyped It is possible for any character to be untyped to have one type or to have multiple types for example to be type 2 and type 3 For every standard character set there is a set of standard default type assignments which for most applications is sufficient without modification These assignments are defined as follows The numeric characters 0 through 9 are type 1 characters The uppercase and lowercase alphabetic characters A through Z and a through z are type 2 characters Use of these default type assignments can be invoked by the VOLUME TCODE command The defining of types that is the associating of type numbers with any group of characters in a character set is described in the TCODE command section of the Specifying input parameters chapter Performing masked comparisons using unmodified standard default type assignments requires coding the following TCODE parameter of the VOLUME command Allows you to select a set of standard default type assignments MASK and CONSTANT parameters of one or more occurrences of the TABLE command Together these parameters define exactly how the comparisons for that TABLE command are made using the set of type assignments specified by the TCODE parameter of the VOLUME command Using LCDS Print Description Langua
327. ine Offline DJDE LINE BASELINE Specifies the method of calculation for the Y N N baseline position of the character that is being printed LINE BLANKTYPE Specifies whether or not the shift in and shift Y N N out codes are printed as blank spaces LINE DATA Defines the user portion of the input record LINE FCB Specifies whether to suppress or process the forms control buffer that is transmitted from the host 4 22 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters Table 4 24 Summary of LINE command parameters Continued Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE LINE FDATA Specifies starting and ending points of the file Y Y N data within a record LINE FONTINDEX Specifies that a field within the user portion of Y Y Y the record defines the index to a specific font to be used for that line LINE GDATA Specifies starting and ending points of graphic N Y N data within a record LINE INKINDEX Specifies a field within a data record that Y Y Y contains a number that represents the ink index in the current ILIST LINE LPI Specifies the line spacing values for each line LINE MARGIN Defines the size of the left margin on a physical page LINE OVERPRINT Specifies the manner in which overprint lines Y Y Y are handled LINE PCC Specifies the location of the printer carriage N Y N control field LINE PCCTYPE Specifies a set of printer
328. ine the following Will you display operator information such as messages on the controller screen Will you select paper trays e What will the page layout be For example a large form may require an entire page but if smaller formats are usable you may want to print two or even four logical pages on each physical page e Will you use dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs to change the application on a page or report basis Refer to the Using dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs chapter for an explanation of DJDEs and their coding process Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 33 PDL principles and procedures System page Physical page Interactions between JSLs catalogs and jobs Before starting to develop the JSL for your application consider the interactions similarities and differences between various JSLs catalogs and jobs Remember although a printing system can have only one JOB or JDE in effect at a time you can still create JSLs with multiple JOBs or JDEs and switch between the JDEs by using DJDEs in the data stream e What characteristics are used globally if any for all of the applications at your site For example do all jobs use the same host format paper size page orientation block or record length test criteria DJDEs error responses accounting requirements fonts or forms e What names will you call the JSL and catalogs or individual jobs within the JSL Use names that
329. ine from magnetic open reel and cartridge tapes The controller supports submission of the following data streams e PostScript e PCL e ASCII converted to PostScript by the controller e TIFF converted to PostScript by the controller e LCDS PDF converted to PostScript by the controller PostScript PCL and LCDS each has its own decomposer on the controller and the controller supports page description commands for each page description language Print Description Language is a type of page description language which is used only with the LCDS data stream Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 1 Specifying input parameters Input processing functions The following functions are part of input processing on the DP EPS Input processing online Specifying DJDE processing online 2 2 For online printing the LCDS data is transmitted from a host computer either directly or through a protocol converter The DP EPS receive print data either over a channel through bus and tag cables or through the Socket Gateway or lpr using TCP IP protocol The LCDS data stream emulates the IBM 3211 or 4245 line printer format All commands coded for the 3211 may be coded for the 4245 In online 3211 mode the data stream emulates an IBM 3211 line printer format with or without embedded DJDEs Basic input processing functions are augmented by the following functions for online 3211 or 4245 mode operations Handling all interac
330. ing but an END parameter specified The null DJDE does not modify any of the existing job setup parameters Application of DJDEs The specific parameters included in a DJDE packet are the only ones modified when the DJDE is applied The only exceptions are the JDE DJDE and JDL DJDE which cause all processing parameters contained in the JDE to be updated except for those listed in the Restrictions on job parameter modification section of this chapter The modified parameter remains in effect until that parameter is encountered in a later DJDE packet or until the end of the report is reached When the next report starts it begins with all of the parameters that are specified in the original JDE and JDL invoked by specifications on the user interface windows Many DJDEs have parameters that specify the same things as JDL command parameters If one of these parameters is not specified in a DJDE but is specified in the current JDE or JDL the JDE or JDL value remains in effect Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 3 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs The following figure shows the usage of a single record DJDE and the IDEN command RITES T 100P I jE S 2 3 TO Fy 7 END y a MM a Operating system IDEN IDEN DJDE DJDE DJDE portion of the OFFSET PREFIX option option terminator record if any lt IDEN SKIP gt 4 Siart of the user portion of the record IDEN PREFIX RTEST
331. ing separate stacks for each recipient No other special processing occurs as a result of the ROFFSET test being satisfied for instance the report is not terminated and multiple copies are not produced at the offset juncture ROFFSET forces the logical page on which the criteria are satisfied to be the first logical page on a new sheet The page on which the offset occurs can be determined by the following criteria e Ifthe record that satisfies the ROFFSET test is printed on a page of the output that page is on the offset sheet fthe record that satisfies the ROFFSET test is not printed on a page of the output that is it is deleted by RDELETE the ROFFSET function is performed for the next printable record If the next printable record causes a transition to the next page that next page is offset Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 39 Using logical processing ROFFSET can also force an offset on either all copies of the report or only the first copy In conjunction with job offset control OFFSET parameter of the OUTPUT command you can exert extensive control over the offsetting function to build tailored job controlled stacks of output in your printer stacker tray ROFFSET command parameters The following table summarizes the ROFFSET command parameters Table 3 29 Summary of ROFFSET command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE ROFFSE
332. ing the constant If the specified constant is present and equal EQ the CRITERIA command is true if the constant is present and not equal NE the command is false In Change mode that is when the CRITERIA CHANGE parameter has been specified you must specify the length and location of a control field in each record When the content of the control field of one record differs from the content of the control field of the previous record the CRITERIA command is true In Value mode that is when the CRITERIA VALUE parameter has been specified you compare two numerical values testing if they are equal EQ or not equal NE if one value is greater than GT or less than LT the other value or if one value is greater than or equal to GE or less than or equal to LE the other value If the test on the two values is satisfied the CRITERIA command is true if not the command is false Using the CRITERIA command To complete the description of the entire test for a logical function the TEST parameter of a logical processing command must specify either one or two CRITERIA commands If only one test is to be performed to determine the value of a particular logical processing function the form of the TEST parameter is as follows TEST criid The criid is the identifier for the particular CRITERIA command Parentheses in this format are optional If two CRITERIA commands are needed to determine the true or false value for
333. int Description Language Specifying print format parameters However if the OSTK command is specified the system allows a tolerance of n inches where n is the width of the tab specified in the OSTK command when validity checks are being performed on BEGIN values and graphic positioning In addition the FEED tab stock DJDE must precede any printable text data that is placed on the tab When running tab stock jobs dedicate one tray for tab Stock Avoid using tab stock with two sided printing When you are feeding stock that contains tabs turn off duplex printing When feeding from tab stock be sure to convert the DJDEs back to the following specifications after printing the tabs by using the following parameters OUTPUT FEED regular stock DUPLEX NO or DUPLEX YES Specifying a tab as a form To define a form that is to be used as a tab in a form callout it is recommended that you code your applications with the following specifications The JSL must specify PAPERSIZE USLETTER or 8 5 11 or A4 Your form must specify that the paper size is 9 by 11 inches or 8 5 by 11 inches or A4 with 1 2 inch 13 mm tab One tray must be dedicated for tabs The JSL must specify which stock name reference contains the tab stock JDE and JDL DJDEs must be coded to define the following for the tab stock PAPERSIZE 9 11 or 8 5 by 11 or A4 with 1 2 inch 13 mm tab FEED tab stock DUPLEX YES or DUPLEX NO
334. ion Language PDL principles and procedures Portrait orientation The following figure shows portrait orientation dimensions for a document using FMT6 the standard portrait format for impact printer output 7 33 22 dots x 100 char Approx 13 6 char inch Approx i ow 7 22 dots 9 pt char Margin Ghar TN ei pos pos 9 86 37 dots x 80 lines Approx 8 1 lines inch Line pos 66 Figure 1 4 Page layout for FMT6 Impact printer format 8 1 lines per inch Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 37 PDL principles and procedures Landscape The following figure shows landscape orientation dimensions for orientation a document using FMT1 the standard landscape format for impact printer output 9 68 22 dots x 132 char lt ___ 66 Approx 13 6 char inch Margin 073 Char 22 DOTS Char Approx pos pos 9 pt char 1 s cell 18 Margin E 123 Line 37 dots pos E 1 8 14 37 dots x 66 lines Approx 8 1 lines inch Line 4 C 66 Figure 1 5 Page layout for FMT1 Equivalent impact printer format 8 1 lines per inch Fonts A fontis a character set that has a unique type style type size and orientation Both fixed pitch and proportionally spaced fonts are available for use on your printing system Each font character occupies an area called a character cell All character cells in a fixed pitch font are the same width Character cells in a proportional font vary in width
335. ion by coding an OUTPUT STOCKS BILLS command in the JDE Through successive FEED DJDEs the stock set directs feeding the cover body and summary late notice and disconnect pages from the stock referenced by COVER BODY SUMMARY LATE and DISCON respectively Alternatively the FEED DJDE record could refer directly to stocks by name such as FEED F1302 Note that the use of stock references is preferred over stock names because stock references provide flexibility Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 107 Specifying print format parameters VFU command ac identifier The VFU command assigns output line numbers to printer carriage control channels These Line to Channel assignments perform the same function as the printer carriage control tape on a conventional line printer The VFU command also assigns line numbers to the top of the form TOF parameter and the bottom of the form BOF parameter TOF and BOF are used for prejob page alignment and for page overflow processing You must specify an identifier of the type ac at least one alpha character required when defining the VFU table and reference it in the VFU parameter of the LINE command The VFU command must precede the referencing LINE command VFU command parameters The following table summarizes the VFU command parameters Table 4 94 Summary of VFU command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE VFU ASSIGN Assigns a VFU c
336. ion on front sides BACK Specifies page inversion on back sides Using LCDS Print Description Language Table 4 60 Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT INVERT parameter options and definitions Continued Option Definition BOTH Specifies page inversion on front and back sides NONE Turns page inversion off Default NONE OUTPUT IRESULT Specifies what the result will be when objects that are imaged with different inks overlap Syntax OUTPUT IRESULT BLACK COLOR Options Table 4 61 OUTPUT IRESULT parameter options and definitions Option Definition BLACK Specifies that when two objects that are imaged with different inks overlap and black and colored pixels coincide the resulting pixel is black COLOR Specifies that when two objects that are imaged with different inks overlap and black and colored pixels coincide the resulting pixel is colored Default The ink priority that was chosen at installation OUTPUT IRESULT For monochrome printers such as the DP EPS the COLOR parameter points and BLACK parameters produce identical results black to note The color that results from overlapping objects may be only black or a color for an entire page For example a page cannot have red text printed over a black background and also black text printed over a red background The IRESULT can be specified on a page basis wit
337. ion to compile JSLs xerographic mode persistence xerographic mode switching Xerox Printer Access Facility Xerox Print Management Facility VMS Version Xerox Pen Plotter Interface Xerox Publishing System Vertical axis on a forms grid Using LCDS Print Description Language Symbols sign changing case 1 8 Numerics 2 sided printing see duplex printing 3211 IBM emulation 2 2 4245 IBM emulation 2 2 A abbreviations in command syntax 1 12 ABNORMAL command 4 2 4 8 ACCTFEED parameter 4 2 CODE parameter 4 3 ERROR parameter 4 3 6 3 IMISMATCH parameter 4 5 ISUBSTITUTE parameter 4 6 OTEXT parameter 4 6 REP parameter 4 7 SECURITY parameter 4 8 ac identifier 1 5 2 19 2 49 accounting error sheet 4 2 printing sheet 4 9 specifying department 5 24 accounting page with RSTACK command 3 55 ACCT command 1 25 4 9 4 10 DEPT parameter 4 9 USER parameter 4 10 ACCTFEED parameter ABNORMAL command 4 2 ACCTINFO parameter RSTACK command 3 55 ADJUST parameter BLOCK command 2 13 RECORD command 2 36 ADVTAPE parameter PCC command 2 31 ALTER DJDE 5 14 applying DJDEs 5 3 ASCII in string constants 1 9 Index ASSIGN DJDE 5 16 ASSIGN parameter CODE command 2 20 KCODE command 2 29 PCC command 2 31 STOCKSET command 4 104 VFU command 4 108 AUX tray feeding cover sheets from 4 49 specifying 3 33 B BANNER command 2 3 3 22 3 28 HCOUNT parameter 3 23 3 27 HJOBNO
338. is referenced must be in color format Default No default 4 62 Using LCDS Print Description Language OUTPUT LOGO parameter points to note Syntax Options Specifying print format parameters The number of logos that are allowed on a page varies depending on the structure of the logo and the amount of available dynamic memory space If there is not enough dynamic memory available for the number of logos specified for a given page an error message is generated Existing LGO logo files and restricted RES format LGO files are printed in black by highlight color printers unless inkrefs are specified in the INKS parameter If an inkref in the list is omitted you must use commas to maintain the relative positioning of the remaining ink references If more than two inkrefs are specified the additional inkrefs are ignored e If any of the inks that will be substituted were specified in the logo definition with a NOSUBSTITUTION parameter the system processes the ink requests according to what was specified in the ABNORMAL ISUBSTITUTE parameter OUTPUT MODIFY Specifies CMEs that will be associated with report copies OUTPUT MODIFY cmeid init copies NONE Table 4 63 OUTPUT MODIFY parameter options and definitions Option Definition cmeid copy modification entry identifier The identifier or file name of a CME init initial copy Specifies the initial copy to which the associated
339. is stockset file STOCKSETNAME STK must have been created previously via compilation of a JSL and must currently be stored in the Icds resource folder Syntax OUTPUT STOCKS stocksetname Options Table 4 75 OUTPUT STOCKS parameter options and definitions Option Definition stocksetname Specifies the stockset to be used for the job Default No default 4 80 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT STOCKS Ifthe stocksetname does not reference a STOCKSET parameter points command coded earlier in the same JDL the system to note assumes that the stockset exists as a STK file in the Icds folder which is read at print time In this case XJDC inserts a message in the listing file when the JSL is compiled indicating that a STK file will be used at print time Whenever a new stockset is chosen at the start of a report or through a JDE and JDL switch invoked by a DJDE the system checks each stock to verify that the stock exists and can be made active This verification provides an automatic method of changing stocks in the system as required by the data stream OUTPUT SYSPPR Specifies the paper size for printing pages generated by the system such as error sheets Syntax OUTPUT SYSPPR USLEGAL A3 A4 B4 USLETTER x y j Options Table 4 76 OUTPUT SYSPPR parameter options and definitions Option Definition USLEGA
340. itor window 2 In the Text Editor window code the JDL name starting at the left edge of the window workspace 3 Code the system or JDL level ID commands with their identifiers Recommended Before beginning your system level commands code a comment line stating that the following entries are system level commands For each command at the beginning of the line enter the identifier followed by a colon and the command keyword Tab or space over until the cursor is approximately 20 character spaces from the left edge of the Text Editor workspace then enter the first parameter keyword For each subsequent parameter of the system level command tab or space over about 20 character spaces to enter the parameter aligning it under the previous parameter Code the VFU vertical format unit first Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures 4 Code the rest of your system level commands those not requiring identifiers to specify your input processing commands Refer to the Specifying input parameters chapter for information on coding these commands Recommended For each of these commands tab or space over about 10 character spaces to enter the command keyword Then tab or space over until the cursor is about 20 spaces from the left edge of your Text Editor workspace to begin entering the parameter keywords Text editor UNTITLED o lt Tid DFAULT VFUT ASSIGN
341. job define the placement of data on the page identify system responses to error conditions and other functions related to the printed output you use the PDL print format commands These commands are described in the following sections Print format command descriptions The following table lists these print format commands and summarizes their functions Details of the function syntax and usage of the parameters available for each command are provided in its command description section Table 4 1 Summary of print format commands Command Function ABNORMAL Specifies operations security and page offset on jam recovery ACCT Defines user and system accounting requirements CME Allows certain parts of report output to be replaced on copies with predefined static data or to specify font changes within variable data IDR Defines inks default ink catalogs and palettes LINE Controls margin overprinting carriage control and so forth MESSAGE Sends message to operator during input or output processing OUTPUT Controls printing mode forms paper size and type offsetting and output destination PDE Defines page format page orientation fonts ROUTE Sends message and form for a routing page STOCKSET Defines a set of stocks used in a report VFU Defines vertical format control Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters ABNORMAL command
342. l RTEXT pages ROUTE RFORM formid NONE Table 4 88 ROUTE RFORM parameter options and definitions Option Definition formid form identifier Name of the form that will be used with all RTEXT pages This identifier references a previously created form file formid FRM NONE Specifies that no form will be printed on RTEXT pages Default ROUTE RFORM parameter points to note Syntax 4 100 NONE The RFORM parameter is not allowed ina ROUTE command that is a catalogued file but it may be specified in the ROUTE command in a JSL invoking the catalogued RTEXT file It also may be specified in the RFORM DJDE e f RTEXT data is not specified the system ignores the RFORM command However you can specify RTEXT as one blank character or space in order to print an RFORM on the routing page without any accompanying text ROUTE RTEXT Specifies text that will be printed on a separate page preceding a report or report copy ac ROUTE RTEXT NONE sc sc passnum ALL line col fontindex rtextid Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 89 ROUTE RTEXT parameter options and definitions Option Definition SC string constant Specifies the message to be printed a string of 1 to 132 characters It is printed with the first font specified in the FONTS parameter of the
343. lection criteria is to be displayed as the report name on the user interface Job Manager window For jobs specifying HCOUNT 0 meaning no headers are present only trailers the report name is associated with the report that precedes the trailer banner page BANNER HRPTNA offset length NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Using logical processing Table 3 16 BANNER HRPTNA parameter options and definitions Option Definition offset Amount of space specified in bytes relative to zero from the start of the user portion of the record to the subfield within the record length The number of bytes in the subfield 1 to 16 NONE Specifies that no report name is to be selected Default Syntax Option NONE BANNER TCOUNT Specifies the total number of consecutive trailer banner pages that must be detected to recognize the end of the report BANNER TCOUNT value Table 3 17 BANNER TCOUNT parameter option and definition Option Definition value Specifies the total number of consecutive trailer pages that must be detected to recognize the end of the report Default Syntax 0 BANNER TEST Defines the test expression for detection of a banner page for either Change Mode or Constant Mode criteria BANNER TEST testexp Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 25 Using logical processing Options Table 3 18 BANNER
344. lectively to delete specialized blocks for example control blocks and unsupported labels that are on the data tape but should not be printed BSELECT and BDELETE TEST parameter For offline jobs this parameter defines test expression for selecting blocks for printing or for deleting blocks from printing Syntax BSELECT TEST test exp BDELETE TEST test exp 3 28 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing Options Table 3 21 TEST parameter options and definitions Option Definition lestexp test expression Defines a test expression for a block that will be selected for printing BSELECT or deleted BDELETE Refer to Coding a test expression earlier in this chapter for the format and syntax of a testexp Default No default BSELECT and BDELETE commands points to note Note the following when using the BSELECT and BDELETE commands e tis important to note that block selection or block deletion is performed before the extraction of the records from the block If a block is deleted from or not selected for printing none of the records contained within that block are processed or are available for any other logical processing functions e If a block does not match the same format as the normal blocks it can be deleted and thus not cause a processing error For example a control block in a fixed blocked file may cause a processing error unless it is first deleted
345. les and procedures Points to note for colored forms Light tints with isolated pixels of color that print on the Xerox 4850 4890 or DP92C LPS may not be visible on the DP EPS Colored text printed over a solid black or gray background or black text printed over solid colored or shaded backgrounds may not be visible when printed on the DP EPS Be especially careful in using this format because it does not generate displayed or printed messages 600 dots per inch dpi tints and shades printed on DP EPS are finer and more uniform than 300 dpi tints and shades printed on the 4850 4890 or DP92C HighLight Color LPS Other Xerox monochrome LPS jobs You can create JSLs for the DP EPS on all of the following Xerox families of monochrome laser printing systems e 4050 4090 and 4650 LPS e 8700 8790 9700 and 9790 LPS 4135 4635 DP96 and DP180 LPS You can then compile these JSLs on your DP EPS system for printing 1 80 Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 Specifying input parameters Input data is processed and temporarily written to disk for subsequent printing under control of user selected PDL commands The input processor decodes and formats input data online from a host attached channel interface or a remote communication and offline from magnetic tape via the Tape Client Input data streams The DP EPS systems receive data online over a channel or through Ethernet using TCP IP They also print offl
346. lf is numeric type 1 The string ID is present e The first three characters after ID are alphabetic type 2 CRITERIA command The CRITERIA command specifies that a test for a particular logical function will be performed on a specific field in the record This command requires an identifier which is specified with the TEST parameter in any of the logical processing commands Specific TEST parameters are described in the individual logical processing command sections CRITERIA command modes There are three formats or modes for CRITERIA commands Constant mode Change mode and Value mode You select the mode by specifying either the CHANGE parameter the CONSTANT parameter or the VALUE parameter of the CRITERIA command in your JSL NOTE A command may specify only one mode However CRITERIA TABLES may specify either Change mode Constant mode or both functions there are no restrictions on their usage or combination in tables Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 9 Using logical processing Constant mode Change mode Value mode Specifying one 3 10 CRITERIA command Specifying two CRITERIA commands In Constant mode that is when the CRITERIA CONSTANT parameter has been specified you must specify the location length and contents of a fixed field within a record Each record is examined at the specified location to determine if the constant is present the identifier tabid defines the table contain
347. lightly different positions from previous pages online interface Basic host or LPS resident controlling program that governs the operations of a computer such as job entry input output and data management The operating system is always running when the computer is active Unlike other types of programs it does not run to an end point and stop The operating system of a Xerox LPS is referred to as the operating system software OSS 1 In reference to image area orientation describes whether the printed lines are parallel to the long edge of the paper or the short edge of the paper 2 Choice of printing portrait vertically or landscape horizontally In reference to image area this is the upper left corner of a sheet operating system Using LCDS Print Description Language output overprinting overprint ratio page page orientation parameter pass through job patch PCC PDL pitch pixel point Glossary 1 Material produced by a peripheral device of a computer such as a printout or a magnetic tape 2 Result of completed operations Printing more than one character at the same position Maximum number of variable data and form characters that may be intersected by a single scan line 1 In computer programming a block of instruction data or both that can be located in main or auxiliary storage 2 In word processing a defined section of a document Direction in which data is printed
348. mal numbers They may also be expressed as hexadecimal values octal values or character values but these expressions are not recommended Decimal numbers may be signed and may have fractional digits Example PDE BEGIN 1 1 37 RECORD LENGTH 132 OUTPUT MAGE 1 30 CM 0 85 IN To express value constants as hex octal or characters you use string constants to define one or two bytes of data String constants String constants are used to specify a sequence of characters The length of string constants is important Ways to express string constants String constants may be expressed as any of the following e Hexadecimal e ASCII Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 7 PDL principles and procedures 1 8 e EBCDIC e Octal e Kanji Using the character case toggle Within a text string the character may be used as a case toggle In other words when a text string is encountered it is assumed that characters are inserted into the print line as they appear in the text string usually in uppercase If the system encounters a it interprets the characters as lowercase mode All letters after the are considered lowercase until another is encountered which toggles back to uppercase The sequence indicates that the actual character should be inserted and should not be treated as a toggle for lowercase mode Using a repeat count String constants may be pre
349. mand or parameter applies ALL means that the command is applicable to all laser printing systems operating with version 3 software or higher Online and Offline columns Specify the input data stream modes of operation for the printing system A Y for a particular parameter means the parameter is available for that processing mode An N means the parameter is not available for that mode DJDE orientation column Indicates whether a command or parameter has an equivalent DJDE and if so specifies whether the DJDE is page or record oriented Summary table of PDL commands and DJDEs Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs DJDE Off On orien Command Parameters Default Printing system line line tation ABNORMAL ACCTFEED OPR DP EPS N Y CODE IGNORE DP EPS N Y ERROR STOP All Y Y IMISMATCH STOP 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y LPS DP EPS prints black ISUBSTITUTE ANY 4850 4890 DP92C Y Y LPS DP EPS prints black OTEXT NOWAIT All Y Y SECURITY NO All Y Y ACCT DEPT JDLNAME All Y Y Page USER BIN All Y Y A 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command and DJDE summary Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs Continued DJDE Off On orien Command Parameters Default Printing system line line tation ALTER DJDE
350. mands are described Record length The default record length for online systems is 150 bytes However you may choose larger record lengths with the following restrictions Ifthe data record transmitted from the host exceeds the value that is specified in the RECORD LENGTH parameter of the initial JDL the record is truncated to the length that was specified in the initial JDL and no warning is provided This action is consistent with IBM 3211 or 4245 printers The online dump JDL specifies a record length of 150 bytes If you use a longer record length modify the JSL to dump the data accurately To select a record length longer than 150 bytes you must specify the new value for the RECORD LENGTH command You must also modify the LINE DATA to print the extended character or record length Using the One PDL command that must be specified for normal online VOLUME HOST processing is VOLUME HOST IBMONL The HOST parameter command for ofthe VOLUME command performs two functions online printing Allows the printer to accept data from the online host Allows PDL to use a different set of defaults for the RECORD and LINE commands Refer to the VOLUME HOST parameter description for additional information Online recovery After a system failure data acquired from the host and stored on system disk is imaged upon system restart Only data that was being received at the time of the power failure is lost and must be retransmitted
351. matching criteria to be the first logical page of a new physical sheet e Page numbering occurs on each logical page rather than each physical page Commands that specify line numbers such as CRITERIA VFU CME and NUMBER refer to the line on the current logical page ranging from TOF to BOF Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters e RTEXT is imaged on a separate physical sheet The line and column specifications for positioning the text refer to the first logical page specified in the PDE e RAUX criteria that is found on any logical page on the physical page causes that sheet to be fed from the tray containing the stock identified as the AUX stock e Accounting statistics are accumulated on the basis of physical pages e If any logical page overflows the physical page before BOF is encountered the next line moves to the first logical page of the next side and all subsequent logical pages are repositioned based on BEGIN values With the exception of DEPT and SHIFT all page oriented DJDEs take effect at a logical page boundary When the following DJDEs are applied the current page position moves to the first logical page on the front side of a new physical sheet BFORM COPIES DUPLEX JDE JDL OTEXT RTEXT e The following DJDEs cause the current page position to go to the first logical page on the next physical side of the sheet FORMAT
352. me print line character heights of all fonts used in the print line are compared to find the largest font in the line The line spacing value defined for that font or specified as an override for it is used to determine the position of the next print line e An xdot is 1 600 unit of measurement A form specifying xdots can be created edited and compiled on any LPS with version 3 or higher software However the 600 spi form does not print on DP 2000 Series EPS systems which accept only 300 spi jobs Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Because there is ambiguity between the abbreviated forms of the FONTINDEX and the FONTS DJDEs if either is abbreviated to the first three letters DJDE processing presumes FONTINDEX e fthere are more than 128 fonts in a DJDE packet a syntax error occurs and the FONTS DJDE is ignored e If any font in the font list is missing a syntax error occurs and the FONTS DJDE is ignored FORMAT DJDE Specifies an entirely new page descriptor entry PDE to be used for formatting control It takes effect on the next page boundary Type Page oriented Syntax FORMAT PDEid Options Table 5 26 FORMAT DJDE options and definitions Option Definition PDEid page descriptor entry identifier Name of the new PDE being invoked by this DJDE This PDE is a separate file in the Icds resources folder on the system disk FORM
353. meters MESSAGE ITEXT parameter points to note Syntax Options If EBCDIC or hexadecimal strings or hex defined bytes using P in a character string are used in a MESSAGE command they are interpreted as standard EBCDIC and are translated to extended ASCII e You can use the sign as a case toggle to switch between upper and lowercase when entering the messages e ITEXT messages for more copies than one are ignored No error message is displayed MESSAGE OTEXT Output text Specifies a text message to be output to the operator during job printing MESSAGE OTEXT sc passnum END WAIT NONE Table 4 41 MESSAGE OTEXT parameter options and definitions Option Definition NONE Specifies that no text message is sent to the operator during job printing SC string constant Specifies a text message of up to 80 characters Refer to MESSAGE OTEXT points to note below passnum pass number Specifies the pass copy ply to which the text applies Multiple messages one per passnum may be specified in a JSL The message is sent to the operator before the beginning of printing the specified report ply If no pass number is specified the text is sent once at the beginning of printing the first copy of the report WAIT Specifies that after the text is displayed printing is suspended until the operator has initiated a Continue request END Specifies that th
354. mmand override sequence It is much easier to specify generic or global characteristics at the system level for example than to specify the same specifications repeatedly for each job or catalog Remember that the specifications that you make in your JSL can be changed easily By including the IDEN command you can allow DJDEs to override PDL commands on a page or record basis Refer to Using the IDEN command to enable DJDEs in chapter 5 for further information Also certain selections entered at the user interface can alter the print job in such areas as the number of copies to be printed and paper feed specifications e Itis sometimes helpful to sketch the page layout including page orientation logos fonts and the point of origin for printing on the page Coding a JSL If you want to create a JSL using specifications other than command defaults you have many PDL commands available to you and many ways of organizing them NOTE Not all of these steps are necessary for every JSL you create Your application determines what parts can be omitted Before you start Before you start to code your JSL be sure you have done the following Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 49 PDL principles and procedures 1 50 Identify the source media and data format Design the layout of your print job Build forms for the job if necessary Identify logical processing requirements 0O A OO N gt Determine
355. mode Supplies such as paper and dry ink that are depleted used up during the course of normal printer operation Point on the x and y axis that determines a grid position Term used to indicate jobs in which multiple copies of a report will contain different data as with paychecks and banking statements characters per inch Designates the number of characters per inch for a particular typeface See also pitch central processing unit Interprets and executes instructions performs all operations and calculations and controls input and output units and auxiliary attachments Information to meet specific processing and retrieval needs Generally applies to integrated file of data arranged for access by many subsystems In data communications the rate at which a channel carries data measured in bits per second bps data communications equipment Digital Data Communication Message Protocol To detect and correct errors in a program To break down into component parts such as when Interpress breaks down a Font Interchange Standard FIS master to compile font information Portion of alphabetic character that extends below the baseline See also ascender x height Document Feeding and Finishing Architecture Dynamic Job Descriptor Entry Command within an input data stream used to modify the printing environment dynamically Unit of measurement representing a fraction of an inch for example 300 dots per inch dpi
356. modification for more information on COVER specified in a selected JDE OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS Specifies a set of forms to be printed on report pages in a repeating sequence OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS NONE formid formid INKS inkref inkrefs formids INKS inkref inkref Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 49 Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 48 OUTPUT CYCLEFORMS parameter options and definitions Option Definition NONE Specifies that no form will be added to the associated report page of variable data formid Specifies a 1 to 6 character form file name may be numeric alpha or alphanumeric which exists on the system disk INKS Specifies that the inks that follow will be used for the forms inkref Identifies the inks that override the corresponding inks that are specified in the ink list of the form If a form does not contain an ink list the form is printed in black Default NONE OUTPUT If multiple CYCLEFORMS are specified in the same CYCLEFORMS OUTPUT command a single list consisting of all these parameter points specified forms is created The forms are listed in the order to note the names are encountered The number of form identifiers is limited only by the number of forms retained on the disk e CYCLEFORMS and FORMS Both may be used within a report however only the parameter that was specified most recently is in effect at
357. mples 4 89 RIDE command vs eio De oa te oct b em Ee ka i 4 91 Standard PDES 45 atio aaa dmn doa reor 4 91 PDE command parameters llssus 4 93 POE BEGIN 3 2 peeeVemetet t ate epee teases 4 93 POE FONTS 3s tiers v nie ea oe Rares 4 96 PDEPMODE 15 5 9 SR ak St et See eh ae nat 4 97 PDE command points to note 4 98 PDE command examples 4 98 ROUTE COMM ANG us ose ott re as es cranes hoe 4 99 ROUTE command parameters 4 99 ROUTE REFORM x cued erbe c Ae ex 4 100 ROUTE RTEXT aueia a a6 a Roa t erro ERR o s dogs 4 100 ROUTE command example 55 4 103 STOGKSET command 2 5 LX dcr E TRAFPP ENS 4 103 STOCKSET command parameters 4 104 STOCK SE ASSIGN s rtt eee es ia 4 104 STOGKSET INIFEED 2 rere Res obs 4 105 STOGKSET SYSPAGE 4 wales h he bod wh RS 4 105 STOCKSET command example 4 107 VEL GOIbrTabiel a ax ae oes sree ee Bee Neq Leer 4 108 VFU command parameters Lus 4 108 VEUASSIGN dues a eoo d e inthe ed ce ent e ed 4 108 VEUBOF estate dove duties EON CARS RANDE REA AHORA 4 109 VEU TOF sd oC rscantod iiU AR e peso ed Redit d RAT 4 109 VFU command points to note 4 110 VFU command example 4 111 5 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs 5 1 Using the IDEN command to enable DJDEs 5 1
358. n GE Indicates the operation greater than or equal tabid table identifier The identifier of a table specified in the TABLE command containing the numeric value to which the test field is compared Default CRITERIA VALUE parameter points to note No default e A test criteria specifying the EQ operator may return a true result even though the character strings being compared are not identically equal For example 0000 is equal to 0 0 0 0 00 and so forth Anumeric character string is compared with a constant character string only if the numeric string is properly constructed The system observes the following rules when evaluating a numeric character string A properly constituted numeric character string should consist of a single sequence of numeric characters which may be interspersed only with characters from a rigidly defined set of separator characters that are allowed in the format of a decimal number Improperly constructed numeric character strings would include such strings as 1 2 3 957N4218 and 00 123 All numeric character strings are evaluated as decimal numbers with a decimal point separating the integer portion of the number from the fractional portion of the number Due to international variations in decimal number formats the characters that are interpreted as the decimal point and the characters that are interpreted as the th
359. n the user interface window If SYSPAGE stock is not specified the MAIN stock definition is used SYSPPR defines the paper size to use for the system page Therefore if MAIN contains a mix of USLETTER and USLEGAL the system searches for the appropriate feeder tray that contains the required paper size If SYSPPR is not defined the printer uses the paper size of the current job NOTE SYSPPR defines a paper size whereas SYSPAGE defines a stock name reference Both parameters must agree in order to prevent errors similar to the way the FEED and PAPERSIZE parameters interact Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT TMODE Specifies a maximum paper width in order to improve throughput efficiency when mixed paper sizes are used Refer to Paper sizing and print speed in your printer operator guide for an explanation of the relationship between paper widths and throughput speed Syntax OUTPUT TMODE width width widthunit Options Table 4 77 OUTPUT TMODE parameter options and definitions Option Definition wiath The process direction measurement that will be used to determine the pitch mode For normal long edge feeding this is normally a measure of the short edge of the widest paper being used in the report For short edge feeding SEF this measures the long edge of the sheets Acceptable values range from the system minimum to the system maximum us
360. n to the DocuPrint 100 115 135 155 180 EPS Table 1 DP 100 115 135 155 180 EPS documents DocuPrint 100 115 135 155 180 EPS Customer Information Quick Reference Card DocuPrint 100 115 135 155 180 EPS Font Reference Manual DocuPrint 100 115 135 155 180 EPS Installation Planning Guide DocuPrint 100 115 135 155 180 EPS Operator Guide DocuPrint 100 115 135 155 180 EPS Operator Quick Reference Card DocuPrint 100 115 135 155 180 EPS User Job Submission Quick Reference Card DocuPrint EPS Tape Client Job Submission Guide Using LCDS Print Description Language XXV Introduction Table 1 DP 100 115 135 155 180 EPS documents Continued DocuPrint EPS Using LCDS Print Description Language DocuSP Common Controller System Guide Getting Ready for the DocuSP Installation Getting Started Generic MICR Fundamentals Guide Helpful Facts About Paper MICR User Guide NPS IPS Extensions Operations Guide Tape Formats Manual Using the Ip Utilities for Solaris Using the lpr Utilities for DOS and Unix Using the Xerox Client Software for Solaris DocuPrint 75 90 EPS documentation xxvi The following Xerox documents pertain to the DP 75 90 EPS and the DP 75 MX Table 2 DP 75 90 EPS and 75 MX documents DocuPrint 75 90 EPS Installation Planning Guide DocuPrint 75 90 EPS Operator Guide DocuPrint 75 90 EPS Operator Quick Reference Card DocuPrint EPS Tape Client Job Submission Guide DocuPrint EPS Using LCDS Print Description Language Gen
361. name All Y Y Record vpos All Y Y Record hpos All Y Y Record n d All Y Y Record INKS All Y Y Record inkref All Y Y Record BANNER HCOUNT 0 All N Y HJOBNO NONE All N Y HRPTNA NONE All Y Y TCOUNT 0 All N Y TEST All N N TYPE BANNER All N Y BARCODE BSEQ RESET 4635 LPS Y Y Page BSIDE ODD 4635 LPS Y Y Page BSKIP SKIP 4635 LPS Y Y Page BATCH DJDE START All Y Y Record END All Y Y Record BDELETE TEST All Y N BLOCK ADJUST 0 All Y N CONSTANT All Y N FORMAT BIN All Y N LENGTH 1330 All Y N LMULT 1 All Y N LTHFLD 0 All Y N OFFSET 0 All Y N POSTAMBLE 0 All Y N PREAMBLE 0 All Y N ZERO NO All Y N BSELECT TEST All Y N Using LCDS Print Description Language A 3 PDL command and DJDE summary Table A 2 PDL commands and DJDEs Continued DJDE Off On orien Command Parameters Default Printing system line line tation C text DJDE text All Y Y Record CANCEL DJDE ALL All Y Y Record name All Y Y Record ac CATALOG mE mE All Y Y ac CME CONSTANT All Y Y FONTS All Y Y INK 4850 4890 92C Y Y LPS DP EPS prints black LINE All Y Y POSITION All Y Y ac CODE ASSIGN EN All Y Y DEFAULT EBCDIC All Y Y SPACECODE X 20 ASCII DP EPS N Y X 40 non ASCII ac CRITERIA CHAN
362. nd itte tetra eot ees 2 22 DBCODE command parameters 2 23 DBOODE ASSIGN s atra Ea ped cde eod o et ts 2 23 DBOODEDEFAULT 554 5 e GERE E E REO 2 24 DBCODE command point to note 2 24 DEB CO malltly eoo x oar eu b ostii eS Dort 2 24 IDEN command parameters sss 2 25 IDERHDUPGG ed tme on P NIRE 2 25 IDEN OEESET duode n px Ros nico ott aT eoa Ec 2 26 IDEN OPRINFO eiusd ker orne Bou EX me RE Pew 2 26 IDEN PREFIX 3 355 04 Des qe E tated kPa eh DR 2 27 IBERKSISIPU us Se areas Viris ode e thn dee o Eee n voe Za 2 27 IDEN command example slllssssesss 2 28 KCODE command sssesee eee 2 28 KCODE command parameters 2 28 KGODE ASSIGN 43 esa aIv cer o ERECTA 2 29 KCODE DEFAULT s basis vie dee eo ee ae DS ats 2 29 KCODE command point to note 2 30 PCC command eret Sr Lacs dne hope duh bs ar nato E dut 2 30 PCC command parameters 2000 005 2 30 Using LCDS Print Description Language V Table of contents vi POC ADV TAPE ss fa Secs ids eiie tes eee E Ra edd 2 31 PGC ASSIGN SiL rss s d de wile oe RA LER 2 31 POC DEFAULT ru hare te lo otha a bee eto e 2 33 PCC INITIALS 25r ot eer oslo w To teins 2 34 PEG MASI cresta eek aoe eee NA a E ama Rae eS 2 35 PCC command points to note 2 35 PCC command example Lss 2 35 RECORD COMMARNG ln sors desde aiuto save erate
363. nd vertical format control DIOCESSING CMM ORE 2 5 Example of an online JSL llsulsus 2 6 Input processing offline s coetum eR vane Der EXE 2 8 iv Using LCDS Print Description Language Table of contents Host computer tape formats 2 Wises ca a re ee See dert es 2 8 Tape code CLE 2 9 Packed data formats 6 ose aS anaa 2 9 Record formats tau ciues ow ae Ore Ne d DE E Pa 2 9 Record structure saaana aaeoa 2 10 Multivolume processing 000 eee eee eee 2 10 Input processing command descriptions 2 0000 2 11 BLOCK COMMANG uses kei RE PCS ead e 2 12 BLOCK command parameters 055 2 12 BEOCK ADJUST e heu dicitis ols gare Rr ncs Ae RE 2 13 BLOCK GONSTAN Ts 215 2003 o ea a eren oa ox et 2 13 BLOCK FORMAT 3552 no naine obw So Pe osea 2 14 BEOGI LENGTH coetanei TR Aedes 2 14 BROCE etre RA at Parse by REA 2 15 BLOCK LTHFED 9 2 edic EORR Ads 8 d ER DRESS 2 15 BLOGK OFFSET ca 25d cte doe ir IQQ ah Bede 2 16 BLOCK POSTAMBLE sS eub Rete 2 16 BLOCK PREAMBLE 51235 1 rea RE RAT 2 17 BOOK ZERO i p dg rn tor da tee iE RS e 2 17 BLOCK command points to note 2 18 Block command example 000 005 2 18 GODE c mmand sete ara reser db qu mue ad eds et 2 19 CODE command parameters 2 19 CODE ASSIGN cc eiren spn d ba e CO e ett so 2 20 CODE DEFAULT jie esq is trea ORE EA 2 20 CODE SPAGEGCODE 13 tov arbor Son rOP Races 2 22 DBCODE comma
364. ned For example POWER CATALOG In this command POWER is the catalog level identifier to be used in the INCLUDE parameter of a JOB command To reference the catalog named POWER in a job the job level command would be JOB1 JDE NCLUDE POWER Job or JDE level commands A JSL contains one or more elements called jobs or Job Descriptor Entries A JDE along with its system level commands describes the options that apply to one printing task A JDE contains one input format one set of processing instructions and one set of output instructions The identifier for each JDE job is a user defined name that you invoke to run the job PDL commands that are coded within the job command level override the system commands For each job values not specified in any of the command sets are taken from the PDL defaults Refer to the PDL command and DJDE summary table in appendix A for a list of all command defaults PDL commands coded at a catalog command level can be incorporated as shown in the command syntax below CATNAME is a 1 to 6 character alphanumeric identifier of a previously defined catalog name Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Examples of JOB Following are some examples of job commands commands JOB2 JDE JOB3 JDE INCLUDE CAT2 JOB4 JDE LINE VFU VFU2 OUTPUT FORMS AY2F A JOB or JDE command remains in effe
365. ned positioning unit must be previously defined by the OUTPUT UNITS command in the current JDE or JDL The default positioning unit is IN HOLD Specifies that the logo that is invoked by the DJDE will be held and imaged without further callouts and at the same position on all subsequent pages until itis canceled by a CANCEL DJDE A logo that is specified in a DJDE appears only on the current page unless the H option is specified NOTE If any character other than H or any additional character is detected in the fourth parameter position of this command the system declares a syntax error HERE Specifies that the upper left corner of the logo will be positioned at or relative to the top of the next printed line and the current left margin HADJ HORIZONTAL ADJUSTMENT Specifies that an adjustment will be made to the horizontal position of the left edge of the logo relative to the position defined by the HERE option VADJ VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT Specifies that an adjustment will be made to the vertical position of the left edge of the logo relative to the position defined by the HERE option Specifies a positive or negative positioning of the tvalue When following HADJ shifts the logo to the right and shifts it to the left When following VADJ shifts the logo downward on the page and shifts it upward tvalue Specifies the amount of the adjustment signaled by the HADJ or VADJ parame
366. nes for processing among various remote terminals and the central processing unit CPU In data processing systems the amount of data that can be processed transmitted printed and so on per a specified unit of time text line display list top of form tracks per inch test pattern job In data communications the last portion of a message that signals the end Method of data processing in which files are updated and results are generated immediately after data entry Cut off before completion as when data transfer from a host to a printer is cut off before all data has been transmitted Application that prints two logical pages on one side of a physical page Using LCDS Print Description Language typeface type size type style TXC UCS UCSB Ul UNIX Text Editor utility program validation value constants variable text VM virtual page vpos VS WAN weight x axis x dot x height XCSC XDGI Using LCDS Print Description Language Glossary 1 All type of a single design 2 Set of characters with design features that make them similar to one another Height of a typeface measured from the bottom of its descenders to the top of its ascenders expressed in points Italic condensed bold and other variations of typeface that form a type family total xerographic convergence Universal Character Set Printer feature that permits the use of a variety of character Universal Character
367. ng 1 58 catalog level commands 1 26 categories of commands 1 16 CE mark xxi change mode CRITERIA command 3 10 3 15 CHANGE parameter CRITERIA command 3 14 3 16 changing parameters restrictions 5 6 channel assignments 4 108 character code assignments 3 12 3 13 character code translation 1 24 character code translation tables defining 2 19 2 22 double byte 2 22 2 28 2 30 2 63 for tape label 2 64 for tapes 2 9 character types 3 12 CME command 4 11 4 18 CONSTANT parameter 4 13 FONT parameter 4 13 INK parameter 4 14 LINE parameter 4 15 POSITION parameter 4 16 CMEs 1 24 catalogued 4 11 commands to create 4 11 4 18 short form 4 11 specifying 4 63 5 54 CODE command 1 24 2 19 2 22 ASSIGN parameter 2 20 DEFAULT parameter 2 20 2 22 SPACECODE parameter 2 22 CODE parameter ABNORMAL command 4 3 CODE parameter VOLUME command 2 56 coding a DJDE 5 2 5 3 coding a JSL 1 49 1 60 full procedure 1 55 1 60 short procedure 1 50 1 54 coding order logical processing 3 1 COLLATE DJDE 5 22 COLLATE parameter OUTPUT command 4 48 color highlight commands 1 78 IDR 4 19 4 22 on monochrome systems 1 18 DJDEs 5 42 5 43 5 45 5 47 5 60 5 73 forms 1 79 parameters 4 5 4 6 4 14 4 20 4 22 4 29 4 57 4 58 4 61 printing jobs created in 1 78 1 80 comma 1 14 as placeholder 1 13 commands catalog level 1 26 categories 1 16 components 1 3 1 10 constant definition 3 1
368. ng equipment vendor documentation for information on what function should be specified for your finisher OUTPUT SF2FUNCTION NO YES Table 4 71 OUTPUT SF2FUNCTION parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Instructs the finisher to initiate the user defined SF2 Finishing Function on the current sheet NO Specifies that Finishing Function SF2 will not be implemented on the current sheet Default Syntax 4 76 NO OUTPUT SHIFT Shifts the image of the data for three hole paper binding finishing and edgemarking Specifies that the entire content of the page will be shifted and the amount and direction of the shift Image shift is the shifting of the image data system page relative to the physical page This shifting is vertical for landscape pages and horizontal for portrait OUTPUT SHIFT YES NO v4 vg Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Specifying print format parameters Table 4 72 OUTPUT SHIFT parameter options and definitions Option Definition v value 1 An integer value in dots for the amount of shift on the simplex page or the odd front side of the duplex page Each dot is 1 300 of an inch The range for v is 75 to 75 V2 value 2 A value in dots for the amount of shift on the even back side of a duplex page The range for vo is 75 to 75 YES Specifies that a shift occurs A standard
369. ng a word indicate the word is the name of a key on the controller keyboard Key names start with a capital letter Example Press lt Enter gt Using LCDS Print Description Language Introduction Square brackets Placed around words or phrases that are names of buttons that you click or menu options that you select on a screen and names of fields and text boxes on screens Example In the Folders field select resources Bold type Used for emphasis It is also used for keywords that introduce items in a list Entering Within procedures the two step process of keying in text and pressing Enter Example Enter y in the box Fixed pitch font Used to indicate text that you enter in a text field on a window such as examples of PDL commands It also indicates text that the system displays on the screen such as messages Example LINE DATA 1 132 FONTINDEX 133 Italics Indicate variables types of items that vary from one command to another or the position of a specified argument in the command syntax Example IDEN SKIP value Italics are also used for document titles and library names for example Using LCDS Print Description Language Related publications Using LCDS Print Description Language is part of the Xerox DocuPrint 100 115 135 155 180 75 90 and 75 MX publication sets DocuPrint 100 115 135 155 180 EPS documentation Following are related Xerox documents that pertai
370. ng or binding Type Page oriented Syntax SHIFT YES NO v4 v2 Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 67 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Options Table 5 57 SHIFT DJDE options and definitions Option Definition V4 value 1 An integer value in dots for the amount of shift on the simplex page or the odd front side of the duplex page Each dot is 1 300 of an inch The range for v is 75 to 75 Vo value 2 A value in dots for the amount of shift on the even back side of a duplex page The range for vo is 75 to 75 YES Specifies that a shift occurs A standard size shift occurs if YES is specified v4275 and Vo 75 NO Specifies that no shift occurs v420 and vo 0 SHIFT DJDE points to note The SHIFT DJDE takes effect at the next physical page boundary e The resolution for both v4 and vo is 1 300 of an inch for all printers e If the origin of a print line falls off the page the printing system prints as much of the line as possible Graphics and logos are not allowed to start off the page If they are positioned at a point that is off the page an error message is displayed SIDE DJDE Specifies repositioning of the next logical page so that it is the first logical page on the given side of a physical sheet Type Page oriented Syntax SIDE sideopt offsetopt sideopt offsetopt 5 68 Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Using Dyn
371. nging the font index or a print data offset pdo to a value greater than the default value 150 the RECORD LENGTH command must also be changed accordingly Otherwise the record is truncated to the length that was specified in the initial JDL Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters LINE command examples Here are some examples of use of the LINE command Example 1 The LINE command below defines the characteristics of the following record structure shown in the following figure LINE DATA 1 132 PCC 0 NOTRAN PCCTYPE IBM1403 FONTINDEX 133 1403 Record PCC Font length field Print data index m Data record structure on tape c 1 3 E 1 byte 1 byte 132 bytes 1 byte Start of user portion of record Figure 4 1 Diagram of a sample print data offset pdo parameter The print data offset pdo option of the DATA parameter the number of bytes between the start of the user portion of the record and the first character of the record to be printed is 1 byte In the sample shown in the above figure the print length parameter the number of characters in the longest print line in the record is defined as 132 bytes The carriage control is defined as IBM1403 and the position of the carriage control character is the first byte within the user portion of the record The position of the font index an index value into a font list that indicates whic
372. ning print line for each logical page and the fonts to be used ac identifier You must specify an identifier of the type ac must have one alpha character when defining the PDE and reference it with the FORMAT parameter of the OUTPUT command The PDE command must precede the OUTPUT command in the JSL Standard PDEs The following table describes a set of standard PDEs which are provided with the operating system software OSS You may use one of these standard formats to format your job or you may create your own PDEs and compile them using the xjdc command Refer to Compiling a JSL in the PDL principles and procedures chapter Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 91 Specifying print format parameters Table 4 82 Standard print formats PDEs lines char No of No of per per Approx Page size and BEGIN Default PDE id lines columns inch inch point size orientation values font id FMT 1 66 132 8 1 13 6 9 11 by 8 5 18 66 LO112B FMT2 66 150 8 1 15 9 11 by 8 5 18 50 L0212A FMT3 88 132 10 7 13 6 7 11 by 8 5 14 66 L0312A FMT4 88 150 10 7 15 7 11 by 8 5 14 50 L0412A FMT5 49 100 6 10 12 11 by 8 5 17 50 L0512A FMT6 80 100 8 1 13 6 9 8 5 by 11 57 58 P0612A FMT7 60 90 6 12 12 8 5 by 11 50 50 PO7TYA FMT8 60 75 6 10 12 8 5 by 11 50 50 P0812A FMT9 80 200 10 0 200 7 11 by 8 5 25 25
373. nly RSTACK record The ACCTINFO field is captured from the first record of the report even if that record does not satisfy the RSTACK test Thus the ACCTINFO data is captured even for a report boundary that was not detected by an RSTACK test Status display You can display a subfield of the first record in a report when you display job status on the user interface screen You select this command by coding the HRPTNA or HJOBNO parameter Note that HJOBNO is not an RSTACK parameter and must be coded in the BANNER command 3 54 Using LCDS Print Description Language Table 3 39 Summary of RSTACK command parameters RSTACK command parameters Using logical processing The following table summarizes the parameters of the RSTACK command Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE RSTACK ACCTINFO Prints a subfield of the first record on the Y Y N accounting page RSTACK DELIMITER Specifies whether RSTACK records are treated Y Y N as special delimiter records or as the first data record of the next report RSTACK HRPTNA Displays a subfield of the first record as REPORT Y Y N NAME on the controller screen as part of the status display RSTACK PRINT Prints delimiters RSTACK TEST Test expression for end of report condition RSTACK ACCTINFO Specifies that a subfield of the first record will be printed on the accounting page at the end of the report
374. nps resources lcds BANNER JSL Replacing opt XRXnps resources lcds VMTO CME2 CME LPSCVM10 xoxo oe k ok ok oe oe k TSL Contains Error s oko oe xe eoe Creating Listing File opt XRXnps resources lcds VMT10 BANNER LST Compilation Completed Creating Resource List File opt XREnps resources lcds VM10 BANNER RS C GKLS quantum custdocx ff Figure 1 20 Terminal window displaying compiling messages for a JSL with errors The system does not create a JDL file in the Icds folder but it does create a LST file which shows where the errors are 1 Open and inspect the LST file to locate the errors that prevented the JSL from compiling To open a LST file a Open a UNIX Text Editor window Refer to Full JSL coding procedure earlier in this chapter for instructions b From the File menu on the Text Editor window select Open to display the Text Editor Open a File window Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 69 PDL principles and procedures 1 70 m Text Editor Open a File m Enter path or folder name opt XRXnps resources lcds H Filter Files MXCMT7 FRM MxXCMA3 FRM Folders MxXCMA4 FRM aT MxXCMB4 FRM data Enter file name MYTOB ISE OK Update Cancel Help C d e MYJOBJDL MYJOB LST MYJOB RSC OLDUMP JDL Figure 1 21 Text Editor Open a File window In the Folders field double click the name of each of the folders that compri
375. nput parameters 2 24 Syntax Options DBCODE DEFAULT Specifies a base code from which you can make double byte character code assignment exceptions The base code is specified by a codetype the exceptions are specified in the ASSIGN parameter ac DBCODE DEFAULT codetype Table 2 21 DBCODE DEFAULT parameter options and definitions Option Definition codetype Keyword for one the following double byte codes e IBM Specifies the IBM Nihongo character set Kanji double byte sets JEF Specifies the Fujitsu JEF Kanji double byte character set JIS KEIS Specifies the Hitachi KEIS Kanji double byte character set Default No default DBCODE command point to note The KCODE command can be used in the same manner as DBCODE DBCODE is the preferred usage IDEN command Invokes dynamic job descriptor entry DJDE processing The IDEN command coded in the JSL notifies the system that DJDE records may be part of the input data stream IDEN also describes the characteristics or search criteria for locating and identifying DJDE records The DJDE record s are interspersed among the data records in the input data stream Each DJDE record contains an identification field which matches the search criteria specified in the active job and a series of parameters that describe the actual JDL changes to be applied to the job The following sections describe the syntax of the IDEN command parameters and explain t
376. ns Option Definition NO Indicates that no unpacking operation will be performed YES Indicates that the labels are packed If YES is specified the UNPACK parameters specify the required unpacking method for both the labels and the input data If the data in a report is packed the labels may be either packed or unpacked Default NO VOLUME MAXLAB Specifies the longest physical block that will be treated as a label when an undefined label is specified LABEL UNDEF Syntax VOLUME MAXLAB value Options Table 2 70 MAXLAB parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies in bytes the maximum length of the longest physical block The value can range from 2 to 4096 bytes The specified value must be greater than the MINLAB value and must not exceed the BLOCK LENGTH Default 81 VOLUME MAXLAB Any data block whose length is between MINLAB and MAXLAB parameter point inclusive is treated as a label to note VOLUME MINLAB Specifies the smallest physical block that will be treated as a label when an undefined label is specified LABEL UNDEF Syntax VOLUME MINLAB value Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 65 Specifying input parameters Options Table 2 71 VOLUME MINLAB parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies in bytes the maximum length of the smallest physical block The value can range from 1 t
377. ns Table 2 63 VOLUME EXPAGE parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES If a character is not included in the font file the error is flagged on the summary page NO No unprintable character reporting is done Default Syntax Options 2 60 YES VOLUME HOST Specifies the computer or host operating system that generated the input data file VOLUME HOST host type Table 2 64 VOLUME HOST parameter options and definitions Option Definition host type Type of host operating system that is generating the input file The following host types may be specified for online printing e 1230NL e DBSONL FUJONL e FXEONL HITONL BMONL e OLDUMP e UTYONL The following host types may be specified for offline printing e ANSI DUMP tape dump only format e FUJITSU e HITACHI IBMDOS BMOS UNDEF undefined UNIVAC SDF e Xerox Xerox ANSI standard labeled and unlabeled tapes Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Default Offline printing IBMOS Online printing No default VOLUME HOST For HOST DUMP two tape marks at the end of the tape are parameter points required to dump the data tape using DUMP JSL tonote Ifa selected HOST type is inconsistent with a selected LABEL type the PDL issues an error message and automatically substitutes a valid label Do not code the LABEL param
378. nt index byte which in turn specifies an index value into the font list of the current PDE The bitopt value may be 1 through 7 The default bitopt value is 4 NONE Specifies that there is no font index FONTINDEX DJDE points to note The FONTINDEX DJDE takes effect at the next logical page boundary e The FONTINDEX DJDE options are the same as for the LINE FONTINDEX commana Because there is ambiguity between the FONTINDEX and FONTS keywords if either is abbreviated to the first three letters the keyword defaults to FONTINDEX When multiple fonts of various sizes are used on a single page the line spacing of any particular line is determined by the largest font in use in the previous line The current line can also be adjusted downward by the difference in height between the first and the largest font in the current line The line spacing of the first line in a report is determined by the first font in the PDE provided the FONTINDEX JDL command or DJDE has not been specified Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs When FONTINDEX is specified the line spacing of the first line of a report is determined by the font indicated by the font index value in the first line of the report If there is no font index value in the record and FONTINDEX is specified the line spacing for the first line of the report is determined by the first font in the PDE When the FON
379. nt line on the Y Y Y page PDE FONTS Specifies the fonts to be used to print CME and Y Y Y variable data PDE PMODE Specifies whether the job will print with landscape or Y Y Y portrait orientation Defining multiple logical pages on a physical page Syntax The following sections describe the syntax of the PDE command parameters and explain the parameter options PDE BEGIN Specifies the location of the starting print line of a logical page It may be in inches IN or centimeters CM Logical pages are user defined page images each bordered by Top Of Form Bottom Of Form and left and right margins To define multiple logical pages on one physical page one side of a sheet you code a separate PDE BEGIN parameter for each logical page you want to define You may define up to 63 logical pages for one physical page You may define them in any order and place them on the physical page in the sequence that the BEGIN parameters appear in the PDE command The first BEGIN specified whatever its physical position on the page is logical page one ac PDE BEGIN vpos unit hpos unit Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 93 Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 84 PDE BEGIN parameter options and definitions Option Definition vpos vertical position Specifies the vertical position of the first character of the first print line of the logical page rel
380. nt tables such as those found in JDLs e If you want to use 11 by 17 inch A4 or any size paper that requires short edge feed be aware that the system does not scale or rotate form logo and image files The graphic file must be created in the desired orientation ASEFMAP DJDE that is in the data stream is processed whether or not the JDL contains short edge feed commands SEFMAP DJDE examples Following are examples of how the SEFMAP DJDE works Example 1 SEFMAP fontl font7 font5 font6 UPD Before the SEFMAP DJDE shown above was encountered the contents of the memory font mapping table were fontl font2 font3 font4 After the SEFMAP DUDE is processed the contents of the memory font mapping table are fontl font7 font3 font4 font5 font6 Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 65 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs 5 66 Example 2 SEFMAP fontl font7 font5 font6 REP Before the above SEF DJDE was processed the contents of the memory font mapping table were fontl font2 font3 font4 After this SEFMAP DJDE is processed the contents of the memory font mapping table are fontl font7 font5 font6 SF1FUNCTION DJDE Specifies to the third party finisher whether or not it should perform the user defined SF1 operation on the current sheet The SF1FUNCTION DJDE invokes the C6 signal of the electronic interface between the printing system and a third p
381. nter Unit of measurement representing a fraction of an inch for example 300 spots per inch spi May also be referred to as a picture element pixel or dot Information usually found on preprinted forms or overlays Glossary 13 Glossary stock stockset string synchronous sysgen syntax system controller tape density task teleprocessing throughput TL DL TOF tpi TPJ trailer transaction processing truncated two up Glossary 14 User defined name in the JSL that specifies a certain type of paper for printing a job See also cluster Collection of stocks to be used on a print job See also stock cluster Connected sequence of alphanumeric characters treated as one unit of data by a program Efficient encoding of data suitable for high speed block oriented data transmission by using equal time elements system generation Rules governing the structure of expressions in a programming language Part of the LPS that provides interfacing capability data handling formatting buffering and operator control for the system Also referred to as the ESS Number of characters that can be stored on magnetic media such as how close together data can be recorded The Xerox LPS may use either 1600 bpi or 6250 bpi density magnetic media 1 Any major job performed by a computer 2 One of several programs being executed by a system Sending and receiving data through telecommunication li
382. nterface queue management windows Quantity The highest priority override is the Quantity copy count specification that can be set on the Queue Manager or the Online Manager window This parameter must be set before the job is decomposed Late binding attributes Other specifications are known as late binding attributes or post scheduling properties of the queue because they are implemented after the job has been sent to a queue and scheduled for printing The procedure for setting late binding attributes is described in the next section Setting late In order for late binding attributes to take effect in the jobs you binding attributes are printing you must do the following for the queue that will be used 1 On the Print Services window click the Queue Manager icon The queue list is displayed Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 41 PDL principles and procedures DocuSP for DocuPrint 2000 Series 180 EPS System Administrator System Printer Setup Printer Needs Attention RIP Idle Sb System Error Printing Job Manager Yes 50 Yes f Queue Manage Queue v Priority Sire ples sees Release i cj 150 Yes Yes Affe Reprint Manager itg Queue Manager Ts Printer Manager TT Administration 2Queueslisted New Queue Figure 1 Print Services window with Queue Manager selected 2 On the queue list double click the name of the queue to which your job will
383. nting the report and waits for the operator to resume printing with or without changing inks or cancel the job Default ABNORMAL IMISMATCH parameter point to note STOP If a report does not contain an ink list in the JDE printing may start before the system is aware of the primary colors that are needed For example page 100 of a report that was designated black only may specify the green primary when the ink loaded in the printer is red This would create an IMISMATCH condition Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 5 Specifying print format parameters ABNORMAL ISUBSTITUTE Specifies whether or not the operator of a highlight color printer may initiate ink substitution NOTE ISUBSTITUTE is a highlight color parameter that is recognized by printers such as the Xerox 4850 and 4890 It may be included in JSLs that are created on the DP EPS for highlight color printing If the system encounters this parameter when printing it is ignored Syntax ABNORMAL ISUBSTITUTE ANY NONE Options Table 4 7 ABNORMAL ISUBSTITUTE parameter options and definitions Option Definition ANY Specifies that the operator may initiate ink substitution NONE Prohibits operator initiated ink substitution The operator may either print the report without performing an ink substitution or abort the report Default ANY ABNORMAL OTEXT Syntax 4 6 Output text Specifies that the system will display
384. o 4095 bytes The specified value must be less than the MAXLAB value and must not exceed the BLOCK LENGTH Default Syntax Options 80 VOLUME OPTIMIZE Enhances the performance of the data stream NOTE This parameter is supported only partially by the DP EPS The parameter options table below reflects only the options that are supported VOLUME OPTIMIZE NCCHECK NONE Table 2 72 VOLUME OPTIMIZE parameter options and definitions Option Definition NCCHECK NCCHECK Disables channel 9 and channel 12 detection When this option is selected the host is not notified by the printing system each time channel 9 or 12 is recognized Any skips to channel 9 or 12 are allowed as for any other channel NOTE This option is supported on the DP EPS only for Fuji Xerox markets All other DP systems process it as NONE NONE No optimization actions are taken VOLUME OPTIMIZE parameter Point to note 2 66 The NCCHECK option is supported for DP EPS only for Fuji Xerox markets It is processed in other markets as if NONE were specified Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Syntax Options VOLUME OSCHN Specifies the channel that the system uses to signal the end of a report that is generated by an IBM OS writer VOLUME OSCHN value Table 2 73 VOLUME OSCHN parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifi
385. o pick a sheet from the AUX stock the specified RAUX criterion appears on either the front or back side of a page on a page pair basis before the first side is printed This command can also be used in combination with the OUTPUT FEED command and the FEED DJDE The following section describes the syntax of the RAUX command parameter and explains its options Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 33 Using logical processing 3 34 Syntax Options RAUX TEST parameter Specifies the test expression for selection of paper from the auxiliary tray RAUX TEST testexp Table 3 26 RAUX TEST parameter options and definitions Option Definition testexp test expression Describes the criteria that when detected by the system will cause a page to be fed from the tray identified for the AUX stock Refer to Coding a test expression earlier in this chapter for the format and syntax of a testexp Default No default RAUX command points to note e Ifa record that is intended to satisfy the criteria for RAUX is suspended by RSUSPEND that record is not checked for the RAUX criteria Record selection and deletion are performed before RAUX processing RAUX command example Following is an example of how to use the RAUX command T1 TABLE CONSTANT CUSTOMER COPY C1 CRITERIA CONSTANT 20 13 EQ T1 RAUX TEST C1 RECORD PREAMBLE 0 Using LCDS Print Descri
386. obs with no banner pages DFLT JOB Jobs with header pages only HDRP JOB BANNER TEST C1 HCOUNT 2 TCOUNT 0 Jobs with trailer pages only TRLP JOB BANNER TEST C2 HCOUNT 0 TCOUNT 3 Jobs with both header and trailer pages BOTH JOB NCLUDE catname BANNER TEST Cl OR C2 HCOUNT 2 TCOUNT 3 Other jobs EOJ JOB BANNER TEST C3 TCOUNT 1 JOB JOB POWER JOB BANNER TEST C5 HCOUNT 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 61 PDL principles and procedures Sample offline JSL The following figure shows an example of an offline JSL Note how comments are used to explain and identify parts of the JSL NOTE This JSL contains some highlight color commands These commands are processed by the DP EPS but all printing is in monochrome Table 1 11 Sample offline JSL JDLHLC JDL System ID VFUI1 VEU PDEI1 PDE PDE2 PDE IDRI1 IDR IDR2 IDR Tubs TABLE Ci CR TER A VOLUME BLOCK RECORD INE IDEN 1 62 level commands Tables and criteria System level commands ASSIGN 1 5 ASSIGN 2 10 ASSIGN 3 15 TOF 5 BOF 66 BEGIN 175DOTS 300XDOTS FONTS UN110E PR110E PR124B BEGIN 0 725IN 1 000IN FONTS L0512C L05SCA LOB5IT
387. ocks defining 1 27 defining a set 4 103 4 107 5 70 Using LCDS Print Description Language INDEX 9 INDEX for system pages 4 105 for system generated pages 4 81 mismatch response 4 77 specifying 4 53 DJDE 5 27 specifying size 4 73 STOCKS DJDE 5 70 STOCKS parameter OUTPUT command 4 80 stockset specifying 4 80 STOCKSET command 1 27 4 103 4 107 ASSIGN parameter 4 104 INIFEED parameter 4 105 SYSPAGE parameter 4 105 string comparisons 3 11 string constants 1 7 1 10 types 1 8 STRUCTURE parameter RECORD command 2 41 syntax command 1 12 1 14 conventions 1 14 SYSPAGE parameter STOCKSET command 4 105 SYSPPR parameter OUTPUT command 4 81 System level commands with identifiers 1 21 system page 1 34 T TABLE command 3 1 3 4 3 9 CONSTANT parameter 3 5 MASK parameter 3 6 example 3 7 3 8 tabs printing 4 69 4 7 1 specifying 4 68 tape formats 2 8 label 2 63 tape dump see offline dump TASSIGN parameter TCODE command 2 51 TCODE command 2 49 2 54 3 13 DEFAULT parameter 2 51 TASSIGN parameter 2 51 TRESET parameter 2 52 TCODE parameter VOLUME command 3 12 3 13 TCODE parameter VOLUME command 2 68 TCOUNT parameter BANNER command 3 25 3 27 test expression 3 2 3 4 TEST parameter BANNER command 3 25 BDELETE command 3 28 BSELECT command 3 28 CRITERIA command 3 10 interaction with RSTACK command 3 51 LMODIFY command 3 32 RDELETE command 3 35
388. of an IMG file that will not be purged ALL Specifies that all document interleaved files created by processing of this report are to be saved overriding an explicit or default specification in the OUTPUT command within the JDE SAVE DJDE point to note The SAVE DJDE must occur before or at the end of the report SEFMAP DJDE Type Syntax 5 64 On a page by page basis specifies a font mapping table for short edge feeding This overrides the SEF table that is defined in the SEFFNT SEFMAP parameter within the JSL Page oriented SEFMAP font fonts font font UPD REPY NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 54 SEFMAP DJDE options and definitions Option Definition font fonts Font pair where fonts is the SEF mapping for font font font Font pair where font is the SEF mapping for font UPD UPDATE Indicates that the specified font pairs change existing font mappings or appending new mappings to the current font mapping table REP REPLACE Indicates that the specified font pairs create a new mapping table to replace the current one NONE Disables short edge feeding SEF and font mapping stops a previous SEFFNT specification SEFMAP DJDE points to note e UPD and REP options affect only memory resident font mapping tables not disk reside
389. of how to use the ROUTE command ROUTE RTEXT USER1 1 33 64 RTEXT USER2 2 33 64 The text USER1 and USER2 will print in the center of a page preceding the respective copies of a two copy report The page is 132 columns by 66 lines STOCKSET command The STOCKSET command defines a set of stocks to be used in a report Stocksets are also the means of associating stock references with stock names For the DP EPS a stockname or stockreference functions the same as a cluster does on other Xerox laser printing systems Stock names and associated trays are specified at the controller using the Stock Manager windows An identifier of the type ac at least one alpha character is specified to name the stock set This identifier is used referenced by the OUTPUT STOCKS parameter in JSLs to select that group of stocks Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 103 Specifying print format parameters STOCKSET command parameters The following table summarizes the STOCKSET command parameters Table 4 90 Summary of STOCKSET command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE STOCKSET ASSIGN Lists stock names and associates them with Y Y N stock references STOCKSET INIFEED Specifies which stock to use in the absence of Y Y N any designation in the OUTPUT FEED parameter STOCKSET SYSPAGE Specifies the stock on which system Y Y N generated pages will print STOCKSET ASSIGN
390. omitted a comma must be used in its place in order to maintain the relative positions of the remaining ink references If more ink references are specified than the number of inks in the ink list the extra inkrefs in the DJDE are ignored BFORM DJDE points to note e Multiple BFORM DJDEs may be specified to place different BFORMS on different copies Multiple instances of the BFORM DJDE right part syntax shown in the Syntax section for this DJDE may be provided enclosed in parentheses and separated by commas For example BFORM bform1 bform2 bform3 or BFORM bform1 1 2 bform2 3 1 The following syntax specifies that no back form will be added to any copy BFORM bform1 NONE bform3 Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 19 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs BOF DJDE Specifies the Bottom Of Form BOF line number It takes effect at the next record following an END DJDE Type Record oriented Syntax BOF value Options Table 5 12 BOF DJDE options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the number of lines from the top of the output page to the last print line on the page Bottom Of Form BOF DJDE points to note f Bottom Of Form BOF is altered by DJDE to a line number smaller than the current line from which the DJDE was processed Input forces an immediate page transition e Ifthe carriage control action to perform at BOF is spec
391. ommand Syntax Default ac PDE ac PDE BEGIN vpos hpos 18 IN 66 IN ac PDE FONTS f Lf L f 1 L 6 S2 L 4 s4 L0112B pi XDOTS DOTS fo s2 pi XDOTS DOTS ac PDE PMODE LANDSCAPE PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE RAUX RAUX TEST testexp RDELETE RDELETE TEST testexp _ RECORD RECORD ADJUST value 0 RECORD CONSTANT sc RECORD FORMAT type BIN RECORD LENGTH value offline 133 online 150 RECORD LMULT value 1 RECORD LTHFLD size 0 RECORD OFFSET value 0 RECORD POSTAMBLE ength 0 RECORD PREAMBLE ength 0 RECORD STRUCTURE structure type FB RFEED RFEED TEST testexp stockdef no default for stockdef ROFFSET ROFFSET PASSES FIRST ALL ALL ROFFSET TEST testexp ac ROUTE ac ROUTE RFORM form id NONE NONE ac ROUTE RTEXT sc sc passnum ALL line col NONE fontindex rtextid NONE RPAGE RPAGE SIDE sideopt offsetopt NUFRONT NOFFSET RPAGE TEST testexp RPAGE WHEN BOTTOM NOW TOP TOP RRESUME RRESUME BEGIN CURRENT NEXT NEXT RRESUME TEST testexp RSELECT RSELECT TEST testexp B 8 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command quick reference Table B 2 PDL command quick reference table Continued Command Syntax Default RSTACK RSTACK ACCTINFO offset length RSTACK DELIMITER YES NO NO RSTACK HRPTNA offset length
392. ommand example ACCT USER BOTH DEPT MARKETING The command example above specifies that after each report is printed an accounting page is delivered to both the output bin and sample tray Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters CME command Copy modification entries CMEs allow certain parts of the printed data in a report to be replaced with predefined static data and or specify the changing of fonts within the variable data The copy modification function is also referred to as spot carbon CMEs define a rectangular space on the printed page within which printed data is replaced with a substitution string or a changed font More than one CME may be applied to a job CMEs may be coded as part of the JDL or created as separate files so that they may be referenced by one or more JDLs This latter feature is described more fully in the Catalogued CMEs section later in this chapter You must specify an ac type identifier requiring at least one alphabetical character when defining the CME and reference it with the MODIFY parameter of the OUTPUT command NOTE The CME must precede the OUTPUT command Short form CME You can minimize coding length by giving CME specifications in specifications the short form In short form you need to give only the first character of a keyword you can omit equal signs and you need not insert commas except where necessary to avoid ambiguity
393. ommodates the different presentations of numbers used in different countries thereby ensuring accurate comparisons of numeric values Syntax VOLUME VCODE translation type keyword Options Table 2 79 VOLUME VCODE parameter options and definitions Option Definition translation type Specifies a standard code translation set The following options are available e ASCII e BCD e EBCDIC e H2BCD H6BCD e IBMCD e PEBCDIC Coding any one of the keywords gives a set of character to type assignments keyword Specifies a standard character Type code table The options for this parameter are shown in the following table Keyword options The following Character Type code options table defines a character Type code for each of the characters in a character code translation set Table 2 80 Character Type code options Type Thousands separator Decimal point VCODEO comma period VCODE1 period comma VCODE2 comma space apostrophe period VCODE3 period space apostrophe comma VCODE4 space period VCODE5 space comma VCODEE period space dollar sign VCODE7 comma space apostrophe period 2 70 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters There are eight unique character Type codes in a character code translation set as defined in the following Unique character Type codes table Table 2 81 Unique char
394. on Language 5 27 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Options Table 5 22 GDATA DJDE options and definitions Option Definition offset The starting point within the record of the file data that will be downloaded termination The terminating byte of the record The options are e DEFAULT f online a single terminating byte exists If offline no terminating byte exists qr The number of terminating bytes that exist FILE DJDE Enables you to load files to the system disks while a print job is in progress The print job may be invoked solely for the purpose of downloading permanent files Although intended primarily for use with online systems this DJDE is not restricted to online use Type Record oriented Syntax FILE filename filetype f s lll Options Table 5 23 FILE DJDE options and definitions Option Definition filename A 1 to 6 character name used to identify the downloading file In this option lowercase characters a through z are converted to uppercase before use filetype A 3 character file extension identifier indicating the type of file being downloaded In this option lowercase characters a through z are converted to uppercase before use f File input format parameter The only parameter that is supported for the DP 2000 Series EPS is as follows L LPS labeled tape format The default file input format is L
395. on the DJDE sentinel record of a page interleaved graphic immediately following the current page such as GRAPHIC name Lowercase characters a through z are converted to uppercase The name parameter may be omitted in Batch mode however the comma before vpos must be coded because it is a positional parameter vpos vertical position Specifies the vertical position of the top edge of the graphic as a downward offset relative to 0 0 on the current physical page This is the position that would be specified by a PDE BEGIN of 0 0 and a PDE PMODE value PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE that is currently in effect Specified as a decimal number with up to three digits to the right of the decimal point and may be followed by a space and the units indicator NOTE The default value for the vpos parameter is 0 5 44 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 34 IMAGE DJDE options and definitions Continued Option Definition hpos horizontal position Specifies the horizontal position of the left edge of the graphic as a rightward offset relative to 0 0 on the current physical page Specified as a decimal number with up to three digits to the right of the decimal point and may be followed by a space and the units indicator NOTE The default value for the hpos parameter is 0 units Specifies the unit of measure for the vertical and horizontal positions of
396. onnect device is the power cord Remove the plug from the electrical outlet Slots and openings in the enclosure of the product are provided for ventilation Do not block or cover the ventilation vents as this could result in the product overheating This product should not be placed in a built in installation unless proper ventilation is provided please contact your Xerox representative for advice Never push objects of any kind into the ventilation vents of the product Operator accessible areas XX This product has been designed to restrict operator access to safe areas only Operator access to hazardous areas is restricted with covers or guards which would require a tool to remove Never remove these covers or guards Using LCDS Print Description Language Laser safety Maintenance Any operator product maintenance procedures will be described in the user documentation supplied with the product Do not carry out any maintenance on the product which is not described in the customer documentation Before cleaning your product Before cleaning this product unplug the product from the electrical outlet Always use materials specifically designated for this product the use of other materials may result in poor performance and may create a hazardous situation Do not use aerosol cleaners they may be flammable under certain circumstances CE mark Europe only January 1 1995 Council Directive 73 23 EEC amend
397. ons Option Definition length An integer in the range of 0 to the block length that specifies the number of bytes from the first byte of the tape block to the first byte of the first logical record Default Syntax Options 0 BLOCK ZERO Specifies the End of block indicator BLOCK ZERO INO YES Table 2 14 BLOCK ZERO parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Specifies that the end of a tape block is indicated by a value of 0 in the record length field before applying the record length adjustment Data that follows the record is ignored through the end of the block NO Indicates that the end of a tape block is not indicated by a value of 0 in the record length field Default NO Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 17 Specifying input parameters BLOCK command points to note Note the following when using the BLOCK command The values for LTHFLD OFFSET FORMAT and PREAMBLE may be overridden if RECORD STRUCTURE is changed as the result of ANSI or IBM OS Standard label processing The length of the block delimiter constant should not be coded as the BLOCK POSTAMBLE Both lengths are subtracted from the end of the block e The search for the block delimiter constant starts after the block preamble and proceeds forward to the first appearance of the constant Using online JDEs in offline JDLs An offline JDL statement se
398. ormat parameters Table 4 52 OUTPUT FACEUP parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Specifies that the printed sheets are delivered to the stacker face up NO Specifies that the printed sheets are delivered to the stacker face down NO Specify FACEUP YES when printing on label stock Delivering label sheets face up prevents delamination when the sheets are to note stacked Refer to the OUTPUT NTO1 parameter description later in this chapter for related information OUTPUT FEED Controls the initial stock on which pages are printed Syntax OUTPUT FEED OPR MAIN AUX stockname stockreference Options Table 4 53 OUTPUT FEED parameter options and definitions Option Definition MAIN Feeds from the tray for which the stock identified as MAIN was specified Provides compatibility with existing applications AUX Feeds from the tray for which the stock identified as AUX was specified Provides compatibility with existing applications OPR FEED OPR is equivalent to FEED MAIN Provides compatibility with existing applications stockname Specifies the name of the stock from whose assigned tray or trays the next sheet will feed for printing This name must be in single quotes stockreference Specifies the descriptive term that has been associated with the name of the stock being used for the job Default OPR Using LCDS Print Description Langua
399. ortion See also descender x height American Standard Code for Information Interchange Standard 7 bit code that represents alphanumeric information Each alphanumeric character and several nonprinting characters are assigned a binary number covering 128 possible characters It is used for information interchange among data processing systems data communication systems and associated equipment Transmission in data communications controlled by start and stop elements at the beginning and end of each character Thus time intervals between transmitted characters may be unequal in length Captures the sheet delivery information for every page in an audited report certain details about each sheet the planned and actual report control totals and waste management Menu that contains options not displayed in a window The symbol for an auxiliary menu is a box containing three horizontal lines Paper size measuring 250 by 353 mm Glossary 1 Glossary background job batch processing BCD binary binary digit bit bit bit map blocking block length Glossary 2 BOF BOT bpi Low priority job usually batched that is executed automatically as system resources become available Allows for repetitive operations to be performed sequentially on batched data without much involvement of the computer operator binary coded decimal Numbering system based on 2 that uses only the symbols 0 and 1 Binary is used
400. oted General term encompassing the flow of data into and out of a system Device by which two systems connect and communicate with each other Series of logical rules implemented in the printer to convert a 300 spi input video stream to a 600 spi output video stream Interpolation is functionally analogous to bit doubling 2x scaling except the logical rules result in superior output Xerox standard that defines digital representation of lines for printing Interpress documents can be printed on any sufficiently powerful printer equipped with Interpress print software Program used to convert FIS fonts to LPS fonts Glossary 7 Glossary Interpress master I O IOM IOT IPD IPFONTS IPL IPM ips JCB JCL JDE JDL JID job concatenation mode job control job management JSL keyword label LAN landscape page orientation latent image Glossary 8 File written according to the Interpress standard input output image output module input output terminal also referred to as printer Interpress decomposer Interpress fonts initial program load For the optional open reel tape drive the internal initialization sequence whereby certain functions are loaded into random access memory RAM Interpress mapping inches per second job control block job control language job descriptor entry Collection of job descriptions See also JSL job descriptor library Collection of compiled job d
401. ou must make the following key decisions based on your site specific needs and the design of the application e npu t data e Output specifications e Type of application to create Special features Interactions between JSLs catalogs and jobs e Stock size Page orientation Font types Hints and tips Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 31 PDL principles and procedures Input data Before starting to develop the JSL for your application you should know the following information about the input data The input source such as The host that supports the 3211 or 4245 host interface Open reel or cartridge tape which are offline devices System disk Combination of two or more of these sources Computer on which the data was created Block and record lengths and structure Code in which the data is encoded such as ASCII and EBCDIC How printer carriage control PCC information should be processed For tapes the label format used Output specifications Before starting to develop the JSL for your application you must know the following about the printed output Will you modify an existing JSL or create a new one Will the orientation be landscape horizontal or portrait vertical Refer to Page orientation later in this chapter for an explanation of these terms Will you use more than one type or color of stock in the print job What fonts will be used Will yo
402. ources 1cdsf oe EFOR1 FRM EFORA4 FRM FER SYS FLS10A FSL ig en a PF ak EESEIESE FLSETDIESE Flori rok EDSELZESE MYIOH ISL Figure 1 16 Text Editor Save As window 13 In the Enter path or folder name text field enter one of the following paths to the Icds folder opt XRXnps resources lcds or var spool XRXnps resources lcds The Icds folder where the DFAULT JSL and all other system LCDS resource files are stored is the recommended folder for storing your JSLs You have write access to this folder which means you can add files and create new folders within it 14 Enter the name of your new JSL in the Enter file name text field at the bottom of the Text Editor Save As window Following are some rules for JSL names Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 59 PDL principles and procedures CAUTION Be sure to give anew name to the JSL file you have created Otherwise your new JSL may overwrite the default JSL in the Icds folder Overwriting can occur if you access the default JSL by selecting Open from the File menu on the Text Editor window instead of Include The name must end with the JSL file extension The name must be one to six characters in length not including the JSL extension 15 Click OK Your new JSL is stored on the system disk You can now close the Text Editor window 16 Compile the JSL to create a JDL file Refer to Compiling a JSL later in
403. ous data link control short edge feed The movement of paper through the printer in the direction of the paper width the shorter side of a sheet of paper For the DocuPrint 180 DocuPrint 180MX LPS short edge feed allows larger sizes of paper up to 11 by 17 inches 279 by 432 mm to be printed In numeric sequence usually in ascending order As applied to a file organization describes files in which records are written one after another and cannot be randomly accessed For example the first 99 records in a sequential file access file have to be read before the 100th record is accessible In setting a separation boundary through the Bin Full Criteria task set refers to multiple copies of the same report Printing on one side of the page See also duplex printing system network architecture To rearrange data records according to a particular item field which they all contain using a predetermined ordering scheme Terminal node at which data enters a network For example a computer transmitting data through telecommunication lines to several other computers or receiving terminals Language high level or low level used by a programmer A source language must be converted by a compiler to machine language for the instructions to be executed spots per inch Process of releasing data from main memory and storing it temporarily until a peripheral device is ready to accept it for example storing text before sending it to a pri
404. ousands separator are taken from the VCODE table that is specified in the VOLUME command The VCODE command is used to specify the character translation code and or the character type code and must be specified if the VCODE command defaults are not applicable Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 19 Using logical processing 3 20 Non numeric characters such as currency symbols positive and negative number designators and alphabetic text may only precede follow or enclose the numeric character string Valid character strings would include the following if the appropriate VCODE table is specified 1 500 00 71 500 00 DM and kr 1 500 00 A numeric character string is evaluated as a negative number if a minus sign either precedes or follows the string or if the string is enclosed in a single set of parentheses Because of the simplified procedure used to determine negative numbers the following occurrences make the string invalid More than one opening parenthesis preceding the string More than one closing parenthesis following the string More than one minus sign Leading zeros in the integer part and trailing zeros in the fractional part of a numeric character string do not affect the value of the string The decimal point character separates the integer part of a number from the fractional part If a decimal point is not present there is an implied decimal point at the end of
405. output and the print data continues on the next front page f COPIES 0 is specified for a page that page is not printed f numberis set to zero this copy count remains in effect until a new copy count or End Of Report is encountered DJDEs encountered while number is set to zero are processed normally The number of copies specified in the DJDE overrides the number of copies in the OUTPUT command DATA DJDE Specifies the location and length of printable data within an input record Type Record oriented Syntax DATA pao length Options Table 5 17 DATA DJDE options and definitions Option Definition pdo Print data offset Number of bytes between the start of the user portion of the record and the first character of the record to be printed length Specifies the maximum length of printable data within each logical record DATA DJDE point to note The DATA DJDE takes effect at the next record following an END DJDE Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 23 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs DEPT DJDE Defines the name under which accounting statistics will be accumulated for this report Type Page oriented Syntax DEPT sc Options Table 5 18 DEPT DJDE options and definitions Option Definition SC string constant Represents a department code or name under which accounting information is maintained May be up to 31 characters DEPT DJDE
406. p 7 of this procedure e Recommended Itis a good idea to use the same name for the JSL that you specified in the JDL or SYSTEM command at the beginning of the JSL coding If the two names are the same the JSL file name can be easily determined from the JDL file name in the future Click OK Your new JSL is stored on the system disk You can now close the Text Editor window Compile the JSL to create a JDL file Refer to Compiling a JSL in this chapter for the procedure Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Full JSL coding procedure If you do not want to use an existing JSL as a pattern and you prefer to build the entire JSL yourself follow these steps 1 Open a Text Editor window by following these steps a On the controller screen right click in the background to display the Workspace menu b From the Workspace menu select Programs The Programs pull down menu opens beside the Workspace menu Programs File Manager s Style Manager Al Text Editor Mailer Calendar _JOW Clock il Audio Control ip Audio lImage Viewer Snapshot Figure 1 13 Workspace and Programs menus c From the Programs menu select Text Editor A Text Editor window opens Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 55 PDL principles and procedures 1 56 Text editor UNTITLED a File Edit Format Options Figure 1 14 Text Ed
407. pability spacing Specifies an optional override line spacing value defined by either the print lines per inch LPI or the dots per print line DOTS or XDOTS to be associated with the font Maximum value for s is 30 LPI minimum value is 10 dots There is no default LPI value for s unit A unit of measure for the override line spacing to be associated with a font The unit can be one of the following LPI lines per inch DOTS dots per print line at 300 dpi XDOTS dots per print line at 600 dpi The default unit is LPI Default PDE FONTS parameter points to note 4 96 No default e f different fonts are used on the same print line character heights of all fonts used in the print line are compared to find the largest font in the line The line spacing value that was defined or specified as an override for that font is used to determine the position of the next print line Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters The maximum number of fonts that may be used in printing a given page or a given job varies depending on a number of factors The number of fonts specified in the FONTS parameter must be at least equal to the largest number of fonts required to print any page within the job When the system is unable to receive an allocation of dynamic memory the job aborts Particularly for input the limitations of dynamically allocated memory impose addition
408. parameter 3 35 RSTACK command 2 3 3 53 3 60 ACCTINFO parameter 3 55 delimiter mode 3 53 DELIMITER parameter 3 56 HRPTNA parameter 3 56 nondelimiter mode 3 54 PRINT parameter 3 57 TEST parameter 3 58 RSUSPEND command 3 49 3 52 BEGIN parameter 3 49 interaction with RSTACK command 3 51 TEST parameter 3 50 RTEXT DJDE 5 62 RTEXT parameter ROUTE command 4 100 S safety laser xvii operation Europe xix xxi US xviii sample JSL 1 30 1 31 1 46 1 48 offline 1 62 online 1 60 2 6 sample PDL commands 1 15 sample tray specifying 4 51 SAVE DJDE 5 64 saving a new JSL 1 53 1 58 SECURITY parameter ABNORMAL command 4 8 SEF see short edge feed SEFFNT command 2 44 2 49 MAP parameter 2 46 SEFMAP parameter 2 45 SEFMAP DJDE 5 64 SEFMAP parameter SEFFNT command 2 45 SELECT parameter LMODIFY command 3 32 semicolon 1 12 Separating reports 2 3 SF1FUNCTION DJDE 5 66 SF1FUNCTION parameter OUTPUT command 4 75 SF2FUNCTION DJDE 5 67 SF2FUNCTION parameter OUTPUT command 4 76 SHIFT DJDE 5 67 SHIFT parameter OUTPUT command 4 76 shifting the page image 4 76 5 67 5 73 short edge feed 2 44 2 49 short edge feed font mapping 5 64 SIDE DJDE 5 68 SIDE parameter RPAGE command 3 43 SIZING parameter OUTPUT command 4 77 SKIP parameter IDEN command 2 27 SPACECODE PARAMETER CODE command 2 22 STAPLE parameter OUTPUT command 4 79 stitching specifying 4 79 st
409. pears inside the square brackets then it is provided only if the component is provided Example If you want to specify an operator message OTEXT and the WAIT parameter but wish to use the default value for passnum enter OTEXT load blue paper WAIT The passnum component is not supplied in the example and its default value is used instead Singular or plural You may use either the singular or plural form of the FONT FORM and GRAPHIC parameters The S in FONTS FORMS and GRAPHICS is optional Separation of parameters Use commas and blanks to separate parameters within a command Example BANNER TEST C1 HCOUNT 1 TCOUNT 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 13 PDL principles and procedures NOTE Commas and blanks cannot be used interchangeably Many commands require commas to separate the parameters and blanks are not valid delimiters The syntax diagram in each command and parameter description shows which delimiters to use Uppercase text Use UPPERCASE letters when coding PDL commands Comments however need not be in uppercase Command The following LINE command example contains three example parameters The right part of the VFU parameter is a reference to an identifier VFU1 The right part of the DATA parameter has two components that are value constants and OVERPRINT uses keyword constants Table 1 3 LINE VFU VFU1 DATA 1 10 OVERPRINT PRINT DISP
410. pecified An example of a CME with these characteristics is shown below CME LINE Cl Od POS 40 FONT 2 POS 80 Syntax Option FONT 3 LINE POS 40 FONT 1 LINE 31 50 FONT 3 POS 80 11 20 POS 80 POS 1 FONT 1 POS 1 FONT 2 FONT 2 FONT 3 POS 40 Whether a font switch is applied to a CME string constant depends upon the order in which FONT and CONSTANT are specified in the CME If FONT is specified before CONSTANT the font switch applies to the string constant If FONT is specified after CONSTANT the font switch occurs at the line position immediately after the string constant CME INK Specifies the highlight color ink that will be used to print variable data that is affected by the CME or CME constant data ac CME INK inkindex Table 4 17 CME INK parameter option and definition Option Definition inkindex An integer value that represents the ink name that will be used to print variable data that is affected by the CME The value must be from 1 to n where nis the number of inks in the current ink list defined by the ILIST parameter of the IDR command or by the ILIST DJDE Default 4 14 0 Using LCDS Print Description Language CME INK parameter points to note Syntax Options Specifying print format parameters e If O is specified or defaulted for the INK parameter the ink for the variable data and the CME text reverts
411. pically apply to all jobs within a JSL These commands include e VFU commands TABLE commands CRITERIA commands e PDE commands e CME commands e CODE commands e VOLUME commands e RECORD commands e BLOCK commands NOTE Make sure that the first command line of the JSL is the JDL identifier command The system level ID commands then follow For example XSML JDL VFU1 VEU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 66 XSML is the name of the complete JDL The VFU command is at the system level and has the identifier VFU1 1 22 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Specifying VFUs The VFU vertical format unit command specifies the vertical tabbing for the print job There can be more than one VFU identified Each VFU command requires an identifier All VFUs are typically specified at the beginning of the system level for example System level commands VFU1 VEU ASSIGN 1 11 ASSIGN 12 66 TOF 11 BOF 66 VFU2 VFU ASSIGN 1 11 77 ASSIGN 12 66 132 TOF 11 BOF 132 VFU3 VFU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 132 Adding logical Logical processing commands are invoked when the system processing locates satisfactory test criteria These test criteria are set up for specifications record fields and if met allow special processing to take place for such things as banner pages record selection or deletion page selection from auxiliary paper trays and pa
412. ply only to the TABLE command in which the definition occurs As in unmasked comparisons it is possible to specify multiple strings in the CONSTANT parameter To define a character specification use the form char or char char char Mask characters should be defined using the same string type as in the string specified in the CONSTANT parameter Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing TABLE command points to note e n an unmasked comparison using only the CONSTANT parameter of the TABLE command characters in the string constant that correspond positionally to those in the input data string are tested for absolute equality one character at a time namasked comparison using the MASK parameter before the comparison is done for each character position the character in that position in the string constant is compared against the mask characters that are specified by the user If a match is found the corresponding data character is ignored or is tested only for the type indicated by the mask character TABLE command examples Following are some examples of the TABLE command Example1 In the sample TABLE commands below the identifiers T1 T2 and T3 are each referenced by a CRITERIA command T1 TABLE CONSTANT T2 TABLE CONSTANT JOB EXEC T3 TABLE CONSTANT 120 Example2 The following example illustrates the use of the MASK parameter to determine whethe
413. print correctly You should separate and run online and offline jobs JDEs independently of each other RECORD command example The RECORD command for the sample input record illustrated below would be coded as follows RECORD LENGTH 133 OFFSET 2 LTHFLD 2 PREAMBLE 4 ADJUST 4 FORMAT BIN The following figure shows sample values for RECORD command parameters RECORD pcc LENGTH PRINT DATA ojo pog xer xF1 RECORDI OFFSET RECORD lt _ gt LTHFLD pcc OFFSET RECORD DATA 4 gt 14 DATA len th 991 PREAMBLE gt ofset P g Figure 2 2 Sample RECORD command The following figure shows record format types 2 42 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Record Fixed Length Record Format C Data t One byte optional vertical format control character Block Block Block p Fixed Unblocked BP Record 1 Ga 3P Record 2 Ga BP Record 3 Length Records p p Records Block Block Blocked BP Recordi Record2 Record3 Gap BP Record Record2 Record3 All records within a file are of the same leng
414. print line of a logical page Type Page oriented Syntax BEGIN vpos units hpos units Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 17 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Options Table 5 10 BEGIN DJDE options and definitions Option Definition vpos Specifies the vertical position of the first character of the first print line on the logical page hpos Specifies the horizontal position of the first character of the first print line on the logical page units Unit measure for the horizontal and vertical positions It may be specified in inches IN centimeters CM or DOTS The default is IN BEGIN DJDE points to note All specifications for vpos and hpos are rounded to the nearest dot 1 300 of an inch for positioning of the logical page Specifications must be a decimal number with no more than three digits to the right of the decimal point for example 0 563 IN or 2 35 CM e In specifying the location of the beginning of a print line on the logical page you measure while viewing the page in the orientation landscape or portrait in which it will be printed e You may have more than one logical page per physical page Use multiple BEGIN DJDEs to define multiple logical pages BFORM DJDE Specifies that a form will be printed on the back side of a page must have DUPLEX YES It takes effect at the next front to back side page transition encountered BFORM DJDEs are the s
415. printed is 2 147 483 647 Inum line number An integer specifying the number of the line on which the page number is placed cnum column number An integer specifying the ending column number for the page numbering sequence findex font index An index into the list of fonts specified in the currently active FONTS parameter of the PDE command or of a recent DJDE The index is an integer starting with 1 for the first font If a font index is not specified the first font in the list is used 4 66 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters Table 4 65 OUTPUT NUMBER parameter options and definitions Continued Option Definition inkref ink reference Specifies the reference number for the ink with which the page number will be printed NO Specifies that no page numbering is to be performed Default OUTPUT NUMBER parameter points to note OUTPUT NUMBER parameter example Syntax Options Default NO The page number character string is placed on the page at the specified line number based on the line spacing of the specified font If override line spacing is specified for the font it does not affect where the page number character string is to be printed e f both BFORM and NUMBER are specified BFORM pages are numbered OUTPUT NUMBER 1 1 40 1 OUTPUT OFFSET Specifies offsetting of output in
416. processed not ignored even when detected after an RSUSPEND record and before the corresponding RRESUME record Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 51 Using logical processing RSUSPEND and RRESUME example Following is an example of the RSUSPEND and RRESUME CONSTANT J CONSTANT EOJ CONSTANT E CONSTANT 1 6 CONSTANT 1 4 CONSTANT 1 6 commands T1 TABLE T2 TABLE T3 TABLE Cl CRITERIA C2 CRITERIA C3 CRITERIA RSUSPEND RRESUME TEST C1 OR C2 BEGIN CURRENT IEST C3 OR C2 OB EXEC XEC EQ T1 EQ T2 EQ T3 BEGIN NEXT The printing of the input data records in the following sample data is suspended records from JOB to EXEC by the preceding RSUSPEND command Printing is resumed after the EXEC data record by the RRESUME command that follows it JOB FOR001AO0 OPTION CATAL ASSIGN SYSRLB 3340 TEMP INCLUI DE IMPCBBM EXEC FCOBOL 3 52 Records that will not be printed Data that will be printed Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing RSTACK command The stacked reports feature enables you to define a series of reports in a single file This is accomplished by specifying the end of the report in the coded logical processing commands The printer stacks reports in a file if more than one report is included in a sin
417. ption Language Using logical processing 13 characters length XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXCUSTOMER COPY 20 character positions offset Figure 3 3 Data record showing offset specified in RAUX command The data record when processed as part of the input data stream causes the page it is a part of to be printed on a sheet of paper fed from the auxiliary tray The Xs are depicted in the above example only to illustrate the specified offset of 20 character positions RDELETE and RSELECT commands Records that are interspersed throughout one report or file may be either deleted or selected for printing by the RDELETE and RSELECT commands respectively These commands can also be used to selectively delete specialized records for example control records and offset records that are on the data tape but are not printed If the tests for both RSELECT and RDELETE are satisfied the records are deleted The following section describes the syntax of the RDELETE and RSELECT command parameters and explains their options RSELECT and RDELETE TEST parameter Defines the test expression for selection RSELECT or deletion RDELETE of records for printing Syntax RDELETE TEST testexp RSELECT TEST testexp Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 35 Using logical processing Options Table 3 27 RDELETE and RSELECT TEST parameter options and definitions Option Definition testexp For RSELECT Specifies the
418. put print line being assigned to a particular channel It is an integer in the range TOF to BOF ASSIGN DJDE points to note e ASSIGN DJDEs take effect at the next record following an END DJDE DJDEs affect only those channels for which assignments have been specified Other channels remain the same e tis possible to have multiple ASSIGN parameters within a DJDE The ASSIGN parameters are the same as for the VFU command ASSIGN parameter described under PDL Reference BATCH DJDE Permits normal processing of online banner pages for Batch mode jobs by delimiting the Batch mode graphic data Type Record oriented graphic 5 16 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Syntax BATCH START END Options Table 5 9 BATCH DJDE options and definitions Option Definition START Marks the beginning of online Batch mode data END Marks the end of online Batch mode data BATCH DJDE points to note The BATCH DJDE is supported for online Batch mode jobs only This DJDE must be used precisely to mark the beginning and ending of online Batch mode data The first graphic or IMAGE DJDE must be preceded immediately by a BATCH START DJDE The last graphic must be followed immediately by a BATCH END DJDE The BATCH DJDE when specified must be the only DJDE in the packet BEGIN DJDE Specifies the location of the starting
419. r a particular field in a data record contains one of several different six character serial number formats Possible formats are xx999x x999x9 and 99x999 In this example x represents any alphabetic character and 9 represents any numeric character If the input code type is EBCDIC the VOLUME command includes TCODE EBCDIC The TABLE command to find the format x999x9 within the input data stream would look like r g o0 0 Oo Y Q 2 525 T1 TABLE MASK CONSTANT Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 7 Using logical processing The characters used in the MASK parameter occupy numbered positions beginning with 0 and separated by commas These position numbers in the MASK parameter are used as type numbers Therefore the associations of mask characters to type that are listed in the following table are made for the above TABLE command Table 3 5 Mask associations of character to type for the TABLE command Character Type Meaning None Make no comparison 1 Per standard default any numeric 0 through 9 2 Per standard default any alphabetic A through Z a through z Example 3 3 8 The data string characters that correspond positionally to those occupied by in the CONSTANT parameter are tested for type 2 in the example alphabetic A through Z or a through z Characters that correspond positionally with a are tested for type 7 numeric 0 throu
420. r of the pass copy ply to which the text applies Multiple sc messages one per passnum may be specified in a JSL The message is output to the operator immediately before the next page on the specified report ply starts printing If no pass number is specified the text is output only once when the page begins to print WAIT Suspends printing after the message is output until the operator has responded by selecting or pressing a Continue button END Displays the message text after the last copy of the report is printed 5 58 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs OTEXT DJDE point to note The DJDE parameters are the same as for the MESSAGE OTEXT command OVERPRINT DJDE Specifies how overprint lines are handled Overprint lines are print lines whose carriage control specifies printing with no line spacing because the last printed line Type Record oriented Syntax OVERPRINT overopt disp Options Table 5 48 OVERPRINT DJDE options and definitions Option Definition overopt overprint option This option has the following choices e PRINT Specifies that all overprint lines are printed as they would be on an impact printer that is the second line is printed over the top of the first with no regard to the previous data including character spacing which may vary between the two lines of data e IGNORE All overprint lines are ignore
421. r output Example If the page satisfies the RAUX criteria and AUX is specified as a stockname in the ordered stock statement the system recognizes this as a tab stock Having recognized it the system then adds n scan lines width of the tab to the paper size in the slow scan direction for portrait tabs or in the fast scan direction for landscape tabs Orientation The P and L portrait and landscape parameters of the OSTK statement allow you to specify either orientation The only one that is supported by the DP EPS is portrait P is the default condition If you select landscape L and you load the tab stock with the tab at the right edge of a landscape oriented page this combination does not run due to jams induced by skew Example Job 1 starts with Tab 1 located in the upper right corner of a portrait page and Job 2 must start with Tab 5 located in the lower right corner of the portrait page The number of tabs Job 1 will use is 2 In order to run the job in succession you must code the JSL with MOD 5 and POS 1 for Job 1 and MOD 5 and POS 5 for Job 2 The system does keep track of the last tab position in tray 2 at the end of Job 1 Upon starting Job 2 the printer purges Tab 3 and Tab 4 because Job 2 starts with POS 5 and Job1 used Tab 1 and Tab 2 At the time the system makes validity checks for BEGIN values and graphic positioning the system cannot determine if the current physical page is tab stock Using LCDS Pr
422. r positioning Y Y N graphics OUTPUT XSHIFT Shifts the image upward or downward on the Y Y Y page OUTPUT BFORM Prints a form on the back side of a duplex data sheet In association with the duplex printing mode DUPLEX YES a page containing only a form no variable data can be printed with this page may be printed on the back side of a data sheet This feature can be used to print static data on the back of each sheet in a report without the use of DJDEs or the repetitive processing of that static data for the back sides of successive sheets OUTPUT BFORM NONE formid init copies INKS inkref inkrefs Table 4 43 BFORM parameter options and definitions Option Definition formid Specifies the name of the back form a one to six character form file name may be numeric alpha or alphanumeric which exists on the system disk init initial copy Specifies the first copy set on which the BFORM will be placed copies Specifies the numbers of copy sets that will contain the BFORM NONE Specifies that no form is to be added to the associated report page of variable data 4 44 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters Table 4 43 BFORM parameter options and definitions Continued Option Definition inkref Ink reference Identifies the inks that override the corresponding inks that are specified in the ink
423. railer pages ET Cl TABLE CRITERIA BANNER Using LCDS Print Description Language CONSTANT 120 CONSTANT 0 120 EQ T1 LINENUM 66 1 TEST C1 HCOUNT 1 TCOUNT 2 HJOBNO 121 6 3 27 Using logical processing Example 2 Ifa job stream has two trailer pages with the character string DATE mm dd yy appearing on line 10 or 11 and beginning in print position 20 the BANNER criteria could be coded as follows T2 TABLE CONSTANT DATE MASK C2 CRITERIA CONSTANT 19 13 EQ T2 LINENUM 10 2 BANNER TEST C2 HCOUNT 0 TCOUNT 2 The MASK parameter specifies a masking character The CONSTANT parameter specifies both the constant data being compared and the character positions in which variable data is not being compared In this example positions 1 through 5 DATE as well as positions 8 and 11 the s of the specified character string contain fixed data Positions 6 7 9 10 12 13 14 and 15 which are identified by the mask character contain variable data and are not compared Header page count has been set to zero because no headers are present in the job stream that is none are being tested for BSELECT and BDELETE commands Blocks that are interspersed within one offline report or file may be either selected for or deleted from printing by use of the BDELETE and BSELECT commands These commands can also be used se
424. rameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE VOLUME KANJI Specifies double byte character printing mode Y N N and allows printing of data streams of intermixed single byte and double byte characters VOLUME KCODE Specifies the double byte character code Y N N translation table that the system will use to interpret the input data VOLUME LABEL Specifies the type of label on the input tape VOLUME LCODE Specifies the code translation table that will be used in interpreting the tape label VOLUME LPACK Specifies whether undefined labels are N Y N packed or unpacked VOLUME MAXLAB Specifies longest physical block that may be N Y N treated as a label if the label is undefined VOLUME MINLAB Specifies the shortest physical block that may N Y N be treated as a label if the label is undefined VOLUME OPTIMIZE Specifies throughput performance Y N N enhancement VOLUME OSCHN Specifies the channel that the system sill use N Y N to signal the end of a report VOLUME OSHDP Specifies the number of header banner pages N Y N that precede the report VOLUME OSTLP Specifies the number of trailer banner pages N Y N that follow the report VOLUME RMULT Specifies a multiplication factor used to N Y N determine the true record length VOLUME TCODE Specifies a set of type assignments that will Y Y N be used for masked comparisons VOLUME UNPACK Specifies unpacking method of the input data N Y N when unpacking is required VOLUME VCODE Specifies a table o
425. rameters BLOCK command Table 2 4 Summary of BLOCK command parameters The BLOCK command defines block length characteristics and recording modes for offline data sources BLOCK command parameters The following table summarizes the BLOCK command parameters Parameter Specifies Offline Online DJDE BLOCK ADJUST Specifies the adjustment value that is addedtoor Y N N subtracted from the content of the block length field BLOCK CONSTANT Specifies that the block delimiter constant and all Y N N subsequent data are ignored until the end of the block BLOCK FORMAT Specifies the length field recording mode BLOCK LENGTH Specifies the maximum block size BLOCK LMULT Specifies a multiplication factor to determine N block length BLOCK LTHFLD Specifies the length of field that contains the Y N N block length specification BLOCK OFFSET Specifies the location of the block length field BLOCK POSTAMBLE Specifies the length of extraneous data at the end of the block BLOCK PREAMBLE Specifies the length of the operating system Y N N portion of block BLOCK ZERO Specifies that the criterion test for the end of the Y N N block is 0 The following sections describe the syntax of the BLOCK command parameters and explain their options 2 12 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters BLOCK ADJUST Specifies a block adjustment value that is a
426. re graphics imaged on a physical page are included in the data file immediately following the textual data for that page These graphics if referenced are processed in Block mode If not referenced a page interleaved graphic is skipped The rules for page interleaved graphics are as follows The graphics must occur immediately following the last text to appear on the physical page e The four rules for document interleaved graphics apply to this format also Refer to Document Interleaved format earlier in this chapter In this format a report contains only graphics that will be imaged one per page and an optional IMAGE DJDE preceding each graphic These graphics are processed as Block mode graphics The four rules for document interleaved graphics apply to this format also Refer to Document Interleaved format earlier in this chapter NOTE Block or record delimiters are not permitted Using LCDS Print Description Language 6 5 Using PDL commands for graphics Except for the graphics themselves the input stream may contain only optional IMAGE DJDE records When the system encounters an IMAGE DUDE record that DJDE defines the scaling and positioning parameters for subsequent graphics Impact of graphics on system performance Incorporating graphics in a job can have an impact on system performance at different points in the printing process The effect varies according to the mode of graphics transfer e Random
427. re parallel to the long edge PMODE DJDE point to note If PMODE is changed through a DJDE the BEGIN DJDE should be respecified even if the same horizontal and vertical positions were specified in the previous BEGIN DJDE RFORM DJDE Specifies a form to be printed with all RTEXT pages It takes effect on the next RTEXT page The options are the same as for the ROUTE RFORM command Type Page oriented Syntax RFORM formid INKS inkref inkref gt NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 61 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs 5 62 Options Table 5 51 RFORM DJDE options and definitions Option Definition formid form identifier Name of the form to be printed with all RTEXT pages References a previously created form file FILENAME FRM NONE Specifies that no form will be printed with RTEXT pages INKS Specifies that the inks that follow will be used for the forms inkref Identifies the inks that override the corresponding inks that are specified in the ink list of the form If a form does not contain an ink list the form is printed in black RFORM DJDE points to note The RFORM parameter is not allowed in a ROUTE command that is being defined as a catalogued file However you may specify it in the ROUTE command in the JSL invoking the catalogued RTEXT file or you can specify it via the RFORM DJDE Refer to the ROUTE RTEXT parameter desc
428. ream dump contains the following information for each block that is dumped e Block number e Block length The decimal number of the starting byte in each printed line of data The data printed in hexadecimal The data printed using the translation code table that is defined in the VOLUME CODE command Compatibility with other Xerox laser printing systems that use PDL 1 76 Your DP EPS is able to process print jobs that use JSLs with some commands for functions that the system does not support For example the system processes Xerox 4850 4890 and DP92 HighLight Color LPS print jobs that contain ink references it disregards color commands and prints the job in black The DP EPS also print all 4050 4090 4650 DP96 DP180 and 4635 LPS applications successfully The functions of the various Xerox laser printing systems are listed in the following compatibility table Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Table 1 14 Software version compatibility V4 0 amp DocuSP 3 7 JDL V3 5 V3 8 5 0 VM10 DP EPS source 4050 4050 V3 9 4850 DP180 DP 75 MX file down 4090 V3 6 V3 7 4090 9790 4890 V3A LPS DP 100 115 loaded to 4650 4135 4850 4650 8790 DP92C 4635 DP180 MX 135 155 180 MX Compiled 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 in V3 5 Compiled 2 1 2 3 5 2 3 5 1 1 9 in V3 6 Compiled 2 4 1 4 2 1 4 4 4 9 in V
429. recompiled to be accessed with a DJDE To catalog RTEXT parameters you must include an identifier of the type ac at least one alpha character in the ROUTE command This identifier is used to reference the RTEXT file by means of the ROUTE RTEXT rtextid parameter If the catalogued RTEXT is defined within a JSL it is automatically applied to that JDL The RTEXT file is catalogued if the ROUTE command has an identifier even if the ROUTE command is inside the portion of the JSL that defines a JDL This is different from other catalogued file creation such as PDEs or CMEs An example of catalogued RTEXT usage is shown below ROUTEF1 ROUTE RTEXT USER1 1 33 64 RTEXT BLDG1 1 34 64 RTEXT USER2 2 33 64 RTEXT BLDG2 2 34 64 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters After the above commands are compiled by PDL a TST file is created In the example above the file would be named ROUTE1 TST You can then access this file by name with the ROUTE command RTEXT rtextid from a JDL or with a DJDE For this example the RTEXT parameter would be coded as follows RTEXT ROUTEI You must specify RFORM if it is needed along with the reference to the RTEXT file RFORM is never catalogued with RTEXT This allows you to select different RFORMs in different JDEs with the same RTEXT information ROUTE command example Following is an example
430. red for the hexadecimal representation of a character results in one byte Two successive characters 1 are necessary to represent one actual character when printing The two character sequence results in one byte DEN PREF a equivalent to DEN PREF X A ABC 44EF X X 414243444546 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Table 1 2 Types of string constants Continued Constant Definition Example EBCDIC EBCDIC constants are used for value and string constants They must be preceded by the characters E apostrophe E and followed by an apostrophe character The EBCDIC string type allows hexadecimal representation of characters to be embedded in a character string This is done by preceding the hexadecimal representation of the character with an character Each character represented in EBCDIC results in one byte Each three character sequence representing a character hexadecimally results in one byte NOTE If no character type is specified EBCDIC is the default IDEN PREFIX DJDE TABLE CONSTANT ABCDE DEN PREFIX E ABC CAEFG equivalent to the hexadecimal DEN PREFIX X C1C2C3CAC5C6C7 o Octal Octal constants should be used only as string constants because of the control program conversion process Each octal character results in three bits Eac
431. red ink Default The first ink that is referenced in the IDR ILIST parameter in OUTPUT IDFAULT parameter example Syntax Options effect at the start of the page If no IDR is specified the default ink is BLACK OUTPUT IDFAULT RED OUTPUT IDR Specifies the ink descriptor that will be used for the job Refer to IDR command earlier in this chapter for information on what is defined in an IDR OUTPUT IDR idrname Table 4 58 OUTPUT IDR parameter options and definitions Option Definition idrname ink descriptor reference name The name of the IDR previously defined by an IDR command in the JSL that will be used for the job Default OUTPUT IDR parameter example 4 58 DFIDR IDR OUTPUT IDR DRI Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT IMAGE This parameter is for Batch mode processing only and specifies the initial graphic imaging parameters to be used OUTPUT IMAGE vpos units hpos units n d INKS inkref inkrefs Table 4 59 OUTPUT IMAGE parameter options and definitions Option Definition vpos vertical position Specifies the vertical position of the top edge of the graphic as a downward offset relative to 0 0 on the current physical page the position that would be specified by a PDE BEGIN
432. remely large Copy sensitive CMEs are not supported when COLLATE NO is specified in the OUTPUT command Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 17 Specifying print format parameters CME command examples This section shows two examples of uses of the CME command POS 12 Example 1 CME parameters specified in standard form CME12 CME LINE 47 POS 1 FONT 5 CONSTANT 5 LINE 48 POSIT FONT 1 LINE 49 POS 10 CONSTANT ABCD CME parameters specified in short form CME12 CME L47 P1 F5 5 L48 P1 F1 L49 P10 C ABCD or CME12 CME L47P1F5 5 L48P1F1L49P10C ABCD Example 2 The following is an example of copy sensitive CMEs CME1 CME LINE 3 POS 59 CONSTANT FIRST QUARTER CME2 CME LINE 37 3 POS 81 CONSTANT 6 CME3 CME LINE 1 60 POS 5 FONT 2 FONT 1 OUTPUT COPIES 3 MODIFY CME1 1 1 MODIFY CME2 2 1 MOD 4 18 IFY CME3 3 1 For the first copy of the report line 3 is modified by the text FIRST QUARTER For the second copy the character is inserted in lines 37 38 and 39 for 6 character positions starting in column 81 For copy 3 fonts are changed for lines 1 to 60 at character positions 5 and 12 These fonts must be defined in the FONTS parameter of the PDE command Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters IDR command Allows you to define default ink catalog
433. reviously encountered the graphic specified in the GRAPHIC DJDE is document interleaved and is copied to a IMG type disk file If textual data has been encountered previously the graphic is page interleaved and the previous print record should have caused a page transition If not the occurrence of this DJDE forces an immediate page termination and the next print record encountered is processed relative to TOF Top of Form on the next physical page An interleaved graphic that immediately follows a header banner page is treated as document interleaved The header banner page must be defined by a BANNER command Skip carriage control commands on a graphics sentinel DJDE are ignored Graphic file replacement and deletion If an image file with the specified name already exists in the Icds resources directory it is superseded by the new one However it is not replaced immediately If a new file will be retained beyond the scope of the current report processing as indicated by the OUTPUT PURGE parameter or the SAVE DJDE the new file is stored in and replaces existing files in the Icds resource folder when processing of the report is complete NOTE The Icds folder can be accessed from either of the following Unix directory paths var spool X RXnps resources Icds or opt X RXnps resources Icds Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 41 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs e If inks are used
434. rformed on the tested field When two criteria identifiers are present a test expression that contains OR such as the RSELECT TEST command in the following example the test is satisfied if either one of the two identifiers in this case C1 or C2 is present I1 TABLE CONSTANT Page 001 Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT 100 8 EQ T1 C2 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 3 NE LAST RSELECT IEST C1 OR C2 Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 3 Using logical processing Logical processing commands that have TEST parameters The logical processing commands with TEST parameters are listed below Each individual command should be specified only once per job descriptor entry If any one command is specified more than once the last occurrence is used without notification of any error BANNER RAUX RDELETE RFEED ROFFSET RPAGE RRESUME RSELECT RSTACK RSUSPEND Commands that define criteria and constants 3 4 The following table summarizes the commands that define constants that can be specified in logical processing commands Table 3 1 Summary of commands that define logical criteria and constants Command Function TABLE Builds a table of constants against which input data fields are checked to determine if a logical processing function will be performed CRITERIA Specifies criteria for testing data records against constants or values TABLE command The TABLE command builds a ta
435. ription in the Specifying print format parameters chapter for further details Forms may be created using forms creation software on a workstation or by compiling a file of forms source commands called an FSL with the FDL compiler on another type of LPS For colored forms If an inkref that is on the ink list is omitted from the command commas must be used to maintain the relative positioning of the remaining ink references If more than two inkrefs are specified the system ignores the additional inkrefs RTEXT DJDE Specifies text to be printed on a separate page preceding a report It takes effect on the next page boundary The parameters for the RTEXT DJDE are the same as for the ROUTE RTEXT command Type Page oriented Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Syntax RTEXT NONE sc sc passnum ALL line col fontindex rtextid Options Table 5 52 RTEXT DJDE options and definitions Option Definition SC string constant Specifies the message to be printed a string of 1 to 132 characters It is printed with the first font specified in the FONTS parameter of the PDE command Refer to the fontindex option in this table passnum pass number An integer specifying the single copy pass to which the text applies If there are two or more RTEXT parameters in a ROUTE command passnum must be in increasing numeric order
436. risons Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 13 Using logical processing CRITERIA command parameters A CRITERIA command may contain only one specification of one of these parameters CONSTANT CHANGE or VALUE In addition it may optionally contain the LINENUM parameter Thus one or two parameters must be provided in the CRITERIA command The following table summarizes the CRITERIA command parameters and gives their uses and functions Table 3 7 Summary of CRITERIA command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE CRITERIA CHANGE Specifies the Change mode criteria for a Y Y N logical processing function that is the length and location of a control field in each record to which the content of the preceding record is compared CRITERIA CONSTANT Specifies the Constant mode criteria for a Y Y N logical function that is the location and length of a fixed field within a record that will be searched for a constant also specified by this parameter CRITERIA LINENUM Specifies the range of numbers of consecutive Y Y N lines on which records will be tested for the specified criteria CRITERIA VALUE Specifies a magnitude comparison between Y Y N numeric character strings 3 14 Syntax CRITERIA CHANGE Defines test specifications for a logical processing function with Change mode criteria Specifies the length and location of a control field in each recor
437. rkstation with forms creation software such as Elixir on another laser printing system using Xerox Forms Description Language FDL or on a mainframe computer You can transfer these form files from tape CD or diskette to the controller disk by using the Import process for further information click the online Help button on your system controller and refer to Importing resources You can also download forms from a host computer by using File Transfer Protocol FTP or the FILE DJDE The example below shows how to specify forms on different copies Form FORM12 appears on copies 1 and 2 FORMS will print on copy 3 and FORMA on copies 4 through 10 OUTPUT FORMS FORM12 1 2 FORMS FORM3 FORMS FORM4 COPIES 10 OUTPUT GRAPHICS Specifies how graphics will be processed in a job OUTPUT GRAPHICS NO YES MOVE BATCH NO YES MOVE NOSUB Table 4 56 OUTPUT GRAPHICS parameter options and definitions Option Definition NO Indicates that there are no graphics in this job YES Indicates there are graphics in the job and they are processed in Batch mode BATCH Means that the input stream contains no text but only graphics that are to be imaged one per page Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters Table 4 56 OUTPUT GRAPHICS parameter options and definitions Continued Option Definition Unused options The following
438. rmation to be ignored for both online and offline printing Default DEFAULT Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 25 Specifying input parameters Syntax Options IDEN OFFSET Specifies the number of bytes beginning at 0 from the beginning of the user portion of the record to the beginning of the prefix string constant of the DJDE record The number may be negative IDEN OFFSET value Table 2 24 IDEN OFFSET parameter option and definition Option Definition value Specifies the number of bytes beginning at 0 from the beginning of the user portion of the record to the beginning of the prefix string constant of the DJDE record It may be a negative number Default Syntax Options Default IDEN OPRINFO parameter point to note 2 26 0 IDEN OPRINFO Specifies whether or not the DJDE record is printed and delivered to the stacker IDEN OPRINFO YES NO Table 2 25 IDEN OPRINFO options and definitions Option Definition YES Specifies that the DJDE record prints and is delivered to the stacker NO Specifies that the DJDE record does not print NO When OPRINFO YES is selected the length of the DJDE record that prints on the sheet is whatever amount fits on the width of the paper Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters IDEN PREFIX Defines the character string that must appear in the identific
439. rocessed This sequence allows the input task to ignore the BEGIN value when checking for tab stocks The XJDC compiler ensures the minimum value for mod is 1 and the maximum is 255 decimal It also ensures the value of pos is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to mod Printing on tabs Following are some considerations for printing on tabs Use the OSTK option before trying to run a tab job The printer prints on tabs in both simplex and duplex modes Imaging area When the printer is printing on 9 inch 229 mm stock or 8 5 inch 216 mm stock with half inch 13 mm tabs the full imaging area of 9 inches 229 mm is enabled It is limited however by the amount of image shift that is enabled Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 69 Specifying print format parameters 4 70 Tab widths When running a tab stock job you must not include the width of the tab when specifying the PAPERSIZE command However you must include the width of the tab when specifying the stock size on the controller user interface windows or on the printer control console Switching to tab stock during a job The stockname form of a stock specification must be used in the following instances a FEED DJDE RAUX RFEED or COVER commands or a selection from the user interface stock windows Recognizing tab stock The system processes tabs by referring to the current stockname at the time that the page is formatted fo
440. rocessing of the host transmitted forms control buffer FCB PROCESS Accepts FCB processing The VFU parameter defines the vertical positioning control table if the FCB is ignored For online systems only Default PROCESS Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 25 Specifying print format parameters LINE FCB parameter points 4 26 to note Syntax Options e If you specify FCB PROCESS an FCB load causes positioning to TOF If the system is already at TOF page eject does not occur However if the line number before the FCB load is greater than TOF a page eject occurs e If you specify FCB PROCESS and an FCB is sent from the host the later FCB overrides the previous FCB or VFU Its length replaces the previous BOF Furthermore its contents and length are saved on the disk e f no Bottom Of Form is specified in the JDE the length of the last FCB sent from the host is retrieved from the disk and becomes BOF Note that Top of FORM TOF is not affected by the FCB e Non U S markets only The print position indexing PPI byte of the FCB is suppressed LINE FDATA Specifies the starting point of the file data from the beginning of the user portion of a data record This command can be used to skip past information such as a PCC byte that is not actually part of the file data LINE FDATA offset termination Table 4 29 LINE FDATA parameter options and definitions
441. rt Specifies default disposition of document interleaved graphics at the end OUTPUT UNITS Specifies units of measure for positioning graphics For a explanation of the OUTPUT command parameters refer to the OUTPUT command description in the Specifying print format parameters chapter Table 6 2 DJDE definitions for graphics Option Definition ALTER DJDE Specifies new imaging parameters for graphics previously referenced using HOLD statement BATCH DJDE Marks beginning and end of online Batch mode graphic data CANCEL DJDE Terminates option of the GRAPHIC DJDE GRAPHIC DJDE Precedes interleaved graphic in data stream IMAGE DJDE Specifies name scaling and positioning of a graphic printed SAVE DJDE Identifies document interleaved graphics not to be deleted or purged Using LCDS Print Description Language Using PDL commands for graphics Graphics DJDEs are record oriented because they take effect immediately For example ALTER CANCEL and IMAGE may appear anywhere on the page and are applied to the page on which they occur Page oriented DJDEs to be applied to the next page must not precede Batch mode or page interleaved graphics to be applied to the current page Refer to the Using dynamic job descriptor entries DJDEs chapter for more information Input for graphics 6 2 Named graphics like other resource files may be imported to
442. rt the job or to continue printing and have the error added to the log Graphic processing modes Random or Move mode Block mode A graphic is handled by the software in one of the following four modes e Random mode Move mode Block mode Batch mode You select the mode depending upon how the graphic is made available for report processing as well as your performance requirements and disk resources In Random mode also called Move mode a graphic is obtained from a named disk file The file must already exist at the start of report processing or must be read from the input data stream before the first record of the report text is processed In the latter case each graphic is written to the disk as a permanent image file In Random mode the output software reads the various graphics for a page from their individual files In Block mode a graphic is obtained from the input data stream immediately following the textual data to be imaged on the same page Separate graphic disk files are not created A given page of a report that includes Block mode graphics may also include either Random or Move mode graphics Using LCDS Print Description Language 6 3 Using PDL commands for graphics Batch mode In Batch mode the input stream contains graphics that will be imaged one per page with either default or specified imaging options Batch mode graphics are processed the same as Block mode graphics In Batch mode only one
443. rtical spacing between subsequent lines Type Record oriented Syntax LPI inespacing units DEFAULT linespacing units lineno Options Table 5 42 LPI DJDE options and definitions Option Definition linespacing lines per inch Specifies the line spacing value May be measured in units Unit of measure for the amount of vertical line space The options are LPI lines per inch DOTS XDOTS 600 dpi The default unit is LPI Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 42 LPI DJDE options and definitions Continued Option Definition lineno line number Specifies the line number or numbers over which the line spacing will be applied The options are n Number of the line to which the specified inespacing will be applied n Number of the line from which the specified inespacing will be applied through BOF bottom of form n m The specified inespacing will be applied from line n through line m MAP DJDE Type Syntax Options LPI DJDE point to note If LARGE ST was specified for the LINE BASELINE parameter the LPI DJDE is ignored References a font mapping file F LENAME LIB previously created using a compiled SEFFNT command Page oriented MAP FILENAME Table 5 43 MAP DJDE options and definitions Option Definition FILENAME Name of the font mapping file to be used MARGIN
444. rtment code or name of up to 31 characters under which accounting information is maintained Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 9 Specifying print format parameters Default ACCT DEPT parameter point 4 10 to note Syntax Options Default Built from the JDL name by adding JDL to the name The department name sc is printed on the accounting sheet and is entered into the accounting log for the report ACCT USER Specifies the delivery destination of the one page accounting summary for each report This page is always printed in the same mode duplex or simplex as the report ACCT USER BIN TRAY BOTH NONE Table 4 13 ACCT USER parameter options and definitions Option Definition BIN Directs an accounting page to the output bin TRAY Directs an accounting page to the sample tray BOTH Directs an accounting page to the output bin and the sample tray NONE Specifies that no accounting page is delivered BIN ACCT command points to note fthe report completion code on the accounting page is other than Completed an accounting page is delivered to the tray even if USER NONE is coded This is done to notify you of a possible report integrity problem e Accounting information is accumulated at processing time not during printing If the report does not complete successfully use the Customer Accounting feature to obtain printing status ACCT c
445. rts Command identifier if required NOTE DJDEs do not have identifiers Command keyword One or more command parameters e Parameter options Comments if appropriate Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 3 PDL principles and procedures These components are shown in the following figure V FUOO5 VFU ASSIGN 15 TOF 5 BOF 66 3 Figure 1 1 Diagram of PDL command components Command statement Identifier Command keyword Parameter keyword ok ON o Parameter option 6 Additional parameter keywords and options In the example above the identifier parameter keyword and parameter options are part of the VFU command which is represented by the required command keyword VFU All of these components may be collectively referred to as a command statement The following table shows examples of the typical components of a PDL command statement Table 1 1 Set of typical PDL commands Command Command keyword Parameter Parameter identifier required keywords options VFU1 VFU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 55 CME4 CME LINE 1 60 POSITION 5 FONT 2 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Command Some PDL commands require identifiers to precede their identifier command keywords By coding an identifier before a command you associate the identifier with the command This allows the command to be referenced by its id
446. s Syntax VOLUME TCODE tcode Type label 2 68 Using LCDS Print Description Language Options Specifying input parameters Table 2 77 VOLUME TCODE parameter options and definitions Option Definition tcode Type Specifies one of the following standard character sets for which type assignments are defined by default e ASCII e BCD e EBCDIC e H2BCD H6BCD e IBMCD e PEBCDIC By coding any one of the keywords you are furnished with a set of character to type assignments label Specifies an identified label of a TCODE parameter that defines a set of type assignments Default Syntax Options EBCDIC VOLUME UNPACK Specifies the unpacking method of the input data when unpacking is required VOLUME UNPACK NONE T4X3 T4X3H2 UNIVAC Table 2 78 VOLUME UNPACK parameter options and definitions Option Definition NONE Does not perform the unpacking operation T4X3 or T4X3H2 Specifies unpacking routines in which 6 bit characters are extracted and restored as 8 bit bytes UNIVAC Specifies an unpacking routine used for UNIVAC tapes although you can specify any of these routines independent of the HOST type Default NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 69 Specifying input parameters VOLUME VCODE Specifies a table of character type codes to use with the CRITERIA command VALUE parameter This parameter acc
447. s palettes and inks ac identifier You must specify an ac identifier when defining an IDR This identifier is referenced by the OUTPUT IDR parameter or the IDR DJDE If a JSL contains an IDR command but does not specify an IDR name the following message appears when the JSL is compiled DR FILE WILL BE USED DURING PRINTING The IDR command may be coded as part of the JSL or created as separate files that may be referenced by JDLs or DJDEs A separate file is created by the XJDC compiler when the commands that define the IDR are coded outside the JSL The IDR command identifier is used as the filename An IDR that is created as a separate disk file may be used as if it were part of the JDL that references it If a DJDE will call the IDR the IDR must be defined before the JDL command so that the IDR is saved on the system disk as a separate file NOTE The IDR command is a highlight color command that is recognized by printers such as the Xerox 4850 4890 and DP92C LPS It may be included in JSLs that are created on your monochrome system for highlight color printing If the system encounters this command when printing it is ignored IDR overrides The OUTPUT IDR parameter references an IDR command with appropriate parameters for each job These IDRs are used for the job unless they are overridden by other commands or command parameters For example the IDFAULT parameter of the OUTPUT command
448. s points to note Examples voras eo et dieto a rene a pado EAM DICH sued oeste rg ctor av Ae ee EA Exalnple Z ot ak cae ep ELRIDSERAEPDRORLICSSS LMODIFY command lleee en LMODIFY command parameters EMODIFY INK 2 6 uci duod tne ont re dde t ots be EMODIFY SELECT 3 eg rtr po tl tetto Seg e EMODBIEX TEST zii acarvin Sip Ao open ears e ana p anaes Points to note LMODIFY command RAUX command l l RAUX TEST parameter 200 05 RAUX command points to note RAUX command example lsuslue RDELETE and RSELECT commands RSELECT and RDELETE TEST parameter RDELETE and RSELECT commands point to note RDELETE command example usss RFEED command 200ee ee eee hh RFEED TEST parameter 20 RFEED command points to note ROFFSET command cene ROFFSET command parameters BOPFSET PASSES 4 ovp 1x edo an ew POS esee HOEFSET TEST 435 Eo eee teow e oth e ie ROFFSET command points to note ROFFSET command example 2 5 RPAGE command ses RPAGE command parameters RPAGE SIDE iu rd ee reds i dris SE au a RPAGE TEST bbw rian Weel cance dosage de APAGE WHEN 1 xe Sab ste rd EX A RPAGE command points to note RPA
449. s the prejob page alignment is with TOF in the expectation that the first carriage control parameter of the job will be Print and Space One Line or something similar e Page overflow occurs when spacing to the next line causes the BOF line number to be exceeded Page transition occurs and line spacing continues from the TOF line number Xerox carriage control is an exception to this processing Any channel operation encountered during printing for an unassigned channel causes a Print And Space 1 Line operation This operation occurs even though some vendor formats normally specify the default as a Space 1 Line And Print operation Multiple line numbers may be assigned to the same channel number This simulates the vertical tabbing feature of an impact line printer where a Skip to Channel parameter causes transition to the next punched hole in the specified channel of the paper tape This paper tape which controls the printer facilitates spacing a fixed number of lines down the print page There may be multiple punches in any vertical format channel on the impact printer tape e A Skip to Channel parameter sent to the printing system causes it to select the next line number in the PCC ASSIGN list for that channel larger than the current line number Page transition and alignment to the first line number in the list occur if no line number is larger than the current line Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print
450. s a shift of page image page content for binding purposes SF1FUNCTION Specifies sheet finisher function number 1 through the DFA channel C6 SF2FUNCTION Specifies sheet finisher function number 2 through the DFA channel C7 SIDE Specifies the repositioning of the next logical page to the first logical page position of the given side of a physical sheet of paper STOCKS Redefines the parameters of a STOCKSET command the types of stocks to use for the page TMODE Specifies process direction measurement for determining default pitch modes TRANS Specifies whether transparencies are used in the print job XSHIFT Allows shifting in the x direction for short edge binding Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Record oriented Record oriented DJDEs take effect immediately at the next DJDEs record following the last record of the packet set of DJDE records of which they are a part After an END parameter a compiled record oriented DJDE takes effect immediately NOTE The exception is the OVERPRINT DJDE which takes effect at the next logical page boundary if FONTINDEX has been invoked in a JDE or DJDE Record oriented DJDEs also may appear at report boundaries to change subsequent pages in a report or report copy Table 5 5 Record oriented DJDEs DJDE Function ASSIGN Assigns a VFU channel to one or more line numbers on the logical pag
451. s are printed on the OPRINFO pages OPRINFO pages close to where the errors occurred These messages indicate syntax errors and unsupported DJDEs and give the initial character position of the invalid text string or DJDE coding Missing END command or page boundary The following message is automatically printed on an OPRINFO page at the end of a report if the END parameter or a page boundary is not detected MISS NG ENI D COMMAN D OR M SS NG PAGE BOUN DARY The following conditions produce the message No END parameter is found in the DJDE No complete page boundary was found before the end of the report that is at the end of report there were some DJDEs that had not yet been applied Duplex processing When the system is printing duplex the text for OPRINFO pages of OPRINFO pages in printed only on the front side of the sheet Each OPRINFO page is processed as duplex page with a blank back The blank side is counted as a printed sheet by the system in its statistics for the duplex report In a job for which OPRINFO was specified if DJDEs are included at the page boundary of the front side of a duplex page the DJDE data skips the back side of the sheet and is printed on the front of the next sheet Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 5 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Restrictions on job parameter modification Parameters that cannot be c
452. s as part of the input data stream keep in mind the following guidelines e ADJDE record may contain more than one parameter Each parameter within a record must be separated from the next parameter by a comma The prefix in a DJDE record may appear after the DJDE parameter s as long as it is consistently located in all DJDE records Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs e DJDE records need not be consecutive because none of the parameters are applied until the system encounters END However it is recommended that DJDE records be consecutive especially when used with delimiter records A page oriented DJDE that is positioned before any print record on a page takes effect on the current page A page oriented DJDE that is positioned after the first print record on a page takes effect on the next page unless End Of Report is encountered DJDE packets that immediately follow a deferred page oriented DJDE are recognized and ignored DJDE packets that are separated by one or more data records from a deferred page oriented DJDE packet on the same page are applied For Delimiter Mode stacked report processing DJDE parameters may be placed within or after but not before the delimiter record packet fa DJDE is always created because of your coding procedures but there is no need to set any of the DJDE parameters for a particular report you can create a null DJDE with noth
453. s command Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Do not omit any slashes These symbols separate different directory levels of folders in the UNIX file system The slash at the beginning of the command is actually the identifier or name of the parent root directory of the file system Enter all command text in lowercase letters NOTE This rule does not apply to UNIX file and folder names that contain uppercase letters Be sure to enter any file or folder names exactly the way they appear in the directory For example if you enter the XRXnps folder name as xrxnps the system cannot find it Leave spaces only where the command syntax shows them do not add any spaces where they are not indicated e Italics indicate variables that you must specify For example when entering a command you would replace the word filename with the actual name of the file Follow these steps to compile a JSL 1 On the controller workspace open a Terminal window by following these steps a Right click in the controller workspace screen background to display the Workspace menu b From the Workspace menu select Tools The Tools menu is displayed next to the Workspace menu Workspace Menu Tools puel eius B Terminal Help a 7 Bl Terminal Console DocuSP ____ Ss performance Meter Boot IPS NPS i Bl workstation Info fej Open Floppy Restart Workspa
454. s in the input character set Usea hyphen to specify a range of contiguous characters where the contiguity is based on actual codes e Specify input codes in their untranslated form For example for input data encoded generally in ASCII use the ASCII string constant type or the hexadecimal equivalent For example for A use the ASCII A a or the hex equivalent X 61 Do not use a in this case e For input codes associated with EBCDIC characters be aware that the contiguity of the input codes is interrupted between the letters and J and between the letters R and S This break requires you to specify three separate ranges Usethe TASSIGN parameters to define additional character sets Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 49 Specifying input parameters The printing system accepts lowercase characters expressed literally or symbolically that is preceded by the pound sign 4 functioning as a switch case operator The following table gives some examples of how the TCODE command may be coded to specify the following types of character sets Table 2 51 Specifying various types of character sets Type Interpretation 1 Defines numeric characters 0 through 9 by default 2 Defines alphabetic characters A through Z and a through z by default 3 Defines uppercase alphabetic characters A through Z by TCODE command 4 Defines lowercase alphabetic characters a through z by TCODE comman
455. s since been replaced the new file is not used until it is reinvoked by an appropriate DJDE FONTINDEX DJDE Specifies a location in the input record of an index into the current font list The font found in the list at the position indicated by the index is used for printing Type Page oriented Syntax FONTINDEX offset offset initval bitopt NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 33 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs 5 34 Options Table 5 24 FONTINDEX DJDE options and definitions Option Definition offset Indicates the byte offset in the data record where the font index number is located Refer to the LINE OVERPRINT parameter description in the Specifying print format parameters chapter for a discussion of FONTINDEX usage with overprint lines and maximum number of fonts initval initial value Index number associated with the first font in the font list that is the number the font list starts with This value can be one of the following ONE specifies that an index value of 1 is associated with the first font in the font list e ZERO specifies that an index value of 0 is associated with the first font in the font list an index value of 1 is associated with the second font in the font list and so forth The default for the initial font index value is ONE bitopt bit option A numeral specifying the number of low order bits within the fo
456. s tod 2 36 Record command parameters usus 2 36 RECORD ADJUST 15 4 cates here hehe ieee ee RR d 2 36 RECORD CONSTANT xit hx tro eere Yu e 4 2 37 RECORD FORMAT 5353 3 na i us ea ep nee 2 37 RECORD LENGTH u e ao e le Odit a et 2 38 RECORD LMULT t whe ty hues eR RC eue es 2 39 RECORD TAPED se cae ber e AR o e e OR RENS 2 39 RECORD OFFSET ciated reple erc ipe e oa 2 40 RECORD POSTAMBLE 234 000 sak ntm hx 2 40 nEGORD PREAMBEE sor ett RE Ret da 2 40 RECORD STRUCTURE 4 riens E pns 2 41 RECORD command Points to note 2 41 RECORD command example 2 42 SEFFNT command s ueri qp oe tuer ted ud pA USE 2 44 SEFFNT command parameters 2 45 SEFENT SEFMAP 1er Db E EO E ente i 2 45 SEFFNTMAP res da E IDE RR PECORE RE E 2 46 SEFFNT command points to note 2 47 SEFFNT command examples 2 48 TCODE COMMANG s armen a ee E petet 2 49 TCODE command parameters 2 50 TGODE DEFAULT 44 55 25 9 5 0 4 9 C dived Bo Roe Sted 2 51 TCODE TASSIOPB ice cuckoo ace Sucesos 2 51 TEODETAESE ist ries sare aya dro ewes eres 2 52 TCODE command examples 005 2 53 VOLUME command euis ue ette a Eb Sat beak RR 2 54 VOLUME command parameters 2 54 VOLUME BMULE si dre extend RSS eror Ros 2 56 VOLUME CODE 4326566 eb DERE ROCUETR Ca eee 2 56 VOLUME DBCODE 4 veio pie os EC On 2 57 VOLUME DBCS 73 CE ERA RARI SHEER ER
457. scription Language PDL command quick reference Table B 2 PDL command quick reference table Continued Command Syntax Default ac DBCODE ac DBCODE ASSIGN input output acDBCODE DEFAULT JIS JEF KEIS IBM END DJDE END only EOF DJDE EOF un only EXPORT EXPORT SEPARATORS FIRST LAST D BOTH D NONE NONE EXPORT SNUMBER num cnum findex EXPORT SPLIT NOW min max OFF EXPORT SRECOVER PAGE SEGMENT ASK DEVICE PAGE EXPORT STIMING INTERVAL sec DELAY sec INTERVAL sec DELAY sec FILE DJDE FILE filename filetype f L s n only GRAPHIC GRAPHIC name vpos units hpos units H n d DJDE only IDEN IDEN OFFSET value 0 IDEN OPRINFO YES NO NO IDEN PREFIX sc IDEN SKIP value 1 ac IDR IDR ICATALOG ink catalogname DFAULT IDR ILIST inkname inkname inknamez IDR PALETTE palette name DFAULT JDE DJDE JDE JDEname only JDL DJDE JDL JDLNAME only ac JOB ac JOB INCLUDE catname catname KCODE KCODE ASSIGN input output KCODE DEFAULT JIS JEF KEIS IBM B 4 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL command quick reference Table B 2 PDL command quick reference table Continued
458. scription in the Specifying print format parameters chapter for an explanation of pitch mode Type Page oriented Syntax TMODE width widthunit 5 70 Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Options Table 5 60 TMODE DJDE options and definitions Option Definition width The process direction measurement that will be used to determine the pitch mode For normal long edge feeding this is usually a measure of the short edge of the widest paper being used in the report e For short edge feeding SEF this measures the long edge Width values can range from the 7 inch equivalent to the 17 inch equivalent widthunit Unit of measure for the width of the paper Can be IN inches CM centimeters DOTS or XDOTS 600 spi dots The default width unit is IN TOF DJDE Type Syntax Options Specifies the number of lines from the top of the logical page to the first print line Top Of Form Record oriented TOF value Table 5 61 TOF DJDE options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the Top Of Form line number This specification is independent of channel assignments It should be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to the smallest line number assigned to a channel The default is 1 TOF DJDE points to note The TOF DJDE is applied before processing of the first data record following t
459. se the path to the Icds folder in the order shown below opt XRXnps resources lcds In the Files field of the Open a File window click the name of the LST file for the JSL you attempted to compile or In the Files text field on the Open a File window enter the name of your LST file The name syntax is as follows JSLNAME LST Click OK on the Open a File window The LST file appears in the text window This file contains the following The JSL as you coded it but with the lines and columns numbered Below each line that contains errors a message that explains each error that is on the line e The lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt symbol at the end of each error message line Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Text editor BANNERIST iJ TBANNER JSL Compiled By XIDC VM10 For LPS VM10 At 11 15 45 On Nov 19 99 1 Release Date Nov 19 99 BANNER JDL JDL COMMANDS WITH IDENTIFIERS HA VFU1 XTDOOSSE ATDOOS2W VFU2UP ATD0O052W VFU3 XID0052W PDE1 AIDOO 1E PDE2 AID OB1E tle CME1 CME2 X7D0018I SCVMIO YFU ASSIGN 1 11 ASSIGN 12 55 TOF 11 BOF 66 Bad Character Detected Str V COL 1 4 PDL Skipping 44 4 YFU ASSIGN 1 011 77 ASSIGN 12 66 132 TOF 11 BOF 13 PDL Skipping lt lt lt 44 lt 4 lt lt YFU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 132 PDL Skipping 44 4 4 4 PDE
460. second In serial communication the instantaneous bit speed with which a device or channel transmits a character BSC binary synchronous communication 1 Communication using binary synchronous line discipline 2 Uniform procedure using a standardized set of control characters and control character sequences for synchronous transmission of binary coded data between stations buffer Compartment of memory in which this data is stored during transfer from one device to another This is useful for accumulating data into blocks before storage or processing and for adjusting differences of speed between devices or between a device and a communicating facility Bypass Transport Optional module that moves paper from the last stacker bin to a finishing device byte Fixed number of bits in data processing usually 8 operated upon as a unit A byte may represent a character a machine instruction or some other logical unit of information CDC control data communications channel 1 In data communications a path or line that enables two or more devices to communicate sometimes called a circuit facility or link 2 In computers a path for communication between the central processing unit CPU and input output units or between the CPU and peripheral devices character code Code representing alphanumeric information for example ASCIl character code Code associated with the universal identifier Xerox to indicate identifier the v
461. sing of host transmitted FCB input To suppress processing of FCB input specify FCB IGNORE in the LINE command The vertical format unit VFU in the JSL and the FCB sent from the host interact as follows e When you start a job the VFU table and its associated Bottom of Form BOF in the JDE become active e If no VFU is specified in the JDE the last FCB sent from the host becomes active e When a DJDE is used to change a channel assignment any previous assignments to the channel being changed are suspended until the end of report At the end of report DJDE changes are discarded and the last active FCB or VFU becomes active again When operating system software is reinstalled or upgraded the FCB saved on disk is reinitialized to the length of 66 lines with the following channel assignments Table 2 1 Default channel assignments made at installation Channel 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Line 4 16 22 28 34 40 46 52 58 64 66 Print position indexing non U S markets only The default corresponds to the STD2 default supplied by IBM e Ifa Print and Skip to Channel command is sent for an undefined channel the system executes a Print and Space 1 command The print position indexing PPI byte determines whether lines should be shifted horizontally If either the sixth bit or the seventh bit of the first byte in the loaded FCB is on the byte is a PPI byte and
462. so prefer to place all parameters for a command on the same line with the command keyword Table 1 5 Sample PDL commands Command Parameter Identifier keyword keywords Parameter options VFU1 VFU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 55 VFU2 VFU ASSIGN 1 4 59 TOF 4 BOF 127 T1 TABLE CONSTANT CLIPS C1 CRITERIA CONSTANT 14 5 EQ T1 LINENUM 6 3 T2 TABLE CONSTANT 15 C2 CRITERIA CONSTANT 0 1 NE T2 CME1 CME LINE 3 POS 59 CONSTANT FIRST QUARTER CME4 CME LINE 1 60 POSITION 5 FONT 2 PDE2 PDE PMODE PORTRAIT BEGIN 1 1 37 FONTS PO8TYA PO8SCA CODTAB CODE DEFAULT EBCDIC ASSIGN X 4A X B4 RECORD STRUCTURE FB LENGTH 132 LINE VFU VFU1 DATA 1 10 OVERPRINT PRINT DISP Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Table 1 5 Sample PDL commands Continued Command Parameter Identifier keyword keywords Parameter options ACCT USER BIN DEPT MEDCAR OUTPUT FORMS XER111 FORMAT PDE2 MODIFY CME4 ROUTE RTEXT ENGINEERING 2 56 109 RFORM XERCOV RDELETE TEST C1 AND C2 IDEN PREFIX DJDE SKIP 10 OFFSET 1 PDL command categories PDL commands are classified according to their functional categories input logical processing or output print formatting commands DJDEs are
463. ste e Sad 3 4 TABLE command parameters suu 3 5 TABLE CONSTANT sevice tees faut rar e RA Rs 3 5 TABLE MASK eur urrcisseo d as ard aa RR CEDE DIR ager 3 6 TABLE command points to note 3 7 TABLE command examples 3 7 CRITERIA command antro ierat e de Seats a ene Na RE 3 9 CRITERIA command modes 0000 3 9 Using the CRITERIA command 3 10 String comparisons iu ocer kd Sees ies ey 3 11 CRITERIA command parameters 3 14 CRITERIA CHANGE un Eee nar beh tt rae low 3 14 CRITERIA CONSTANT 7 ctc oce rtp aa se n 3 16 CRITERIA UINENUM 4 oe vy eua waka RUNS 3 17 CRITERIAVALUE aeir isci 3440 aided amp poe Ree 3 18 Logical processing command descriptions 3 22 BANNER command 266v estet E E eee E god 3 22 BANNER command parameters 3 23 BANNER HCOUNT aure ex FERE e Ae tet es 3 23 BANNER FUOBNO o e rtr ect ea ai eros dir a 4 3 24 BANNER HRPTNA 55 beni ma aai ea e ied 3 24 BANNER TCOUNT 45 25 6 m I ROLE REX 3 25 BANNER TEST 54 rete Eae Puri ett e 3 25 BANNER TYPE 2 Pea RE Ed B ftt d ER ORNA 3 26 BANNER command points to note 3 27 BANNER command examples 3 27 Using LCDS Print Description Language vii Table of contents viii BSELECT and BDELETE commands BSELECT and BDELETE TEST parameter BSELECT and BDELETE command
464. stems support subsets of the PDL commands that can be used on the DP EPS Xerox 4635 and 4635 MX Laser Printing Systems Xerox 4850 and 4890 HighLight Color Laser Printing Systems Xerox DocuPrint 92C HighLight Color Laser Printing System Xerox 4050 4090 and 4650 Laser Printing Systems Xerox 9790 and 8790 Laser Printing Systems Refer to appendix A PDL command and DJDE summary for information on which laser printer families support the different commands NOTE Forms Description Language FDL commands cannot be used on the DP EPS because these systems do not have forms compiling capability You can however create forms by using FDL on another laser printing system or by using a forms creation software package on a PC or other type of workstation Form files that are created externally can be transferred or imported to the system disk of your DP EPS and can be specified for jobs that are printed on the system Conventions This guide uses the following conventions Alerts Alerts include notes cautions and warnings Notes are hints that help you perform a task or understand the text Cautions alert you to an action that could damage hardware software or your print job Warnings alert you to conditions that may cause injury to people Alerts appear as follows Notes Printed in italics CAUTIONS Printed in red WARNINGS Printed in bold red Angle brackets Angle brackets surroundi
465. t Sc is a string composed of literal characters and masking characters as defined by the MASK parameter of the TABLE command All string constants must be of the same length in bytes The number of bytes for all constants in the table after conversion of any hexadecimal or octal constants is limited to 255 bytes Default No default Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 5 Using logical processing TABLE MASK Defines mask characters used within string constants specified by CONSTANT parameter Also indicates which characters denote special type testing and what that type is Syntax ac TABLE MASK ignorechar charspec charspeCcz Options Table 3 4 TABLE MASK parameter options and definitions Option Definition ignorechar Specifies a character that appears in positions that will not be compared within a string constant charspec character specification Specifies a character that appears in positions within a string constant where a test for type characters will be performed Default No default TABLE MASK parameter points to note 3 6 Any valid character in the data character set such as ASCII and EBCDIC may be used in the MASK parameter as a mask character Any character that is not explicitly tested for absolute equality by a TABLE command may be defined by the table MASK parameter as a mask character MASK parameter character definitions ap
466. t Tape STANDARD UNDEF Input tape label is not defined Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 63 Specifying input parameters VOLUME LCODE Specifies the code translation table that will be used in interpreting the tape label Syntax VOLUME LCODE keyword id NONE Options Table 2 68 VOLUME LCODE parameter options and definitions Option Definition keyword Specifies a specific standard system defined code translation table The available options are e ASCII e BCD e EBCDIC e H2BCD e H6BCD IBMBCD e PEBCDIC NONE USER Refers to the single unlabeled CODE command allowed within the JDE or JDL NOTE You must specify the variable identifier id to correspond to the identifier label that was assigned to the defining CODE command id Specifies a variable identifier that you use in the CODE command to refer to a specific user defined code translation table The identifier id is required when multiple CODE commands are contained within the JDL NONE Specifies that data will not be translated by input processing For example you select NONE for XPPI jobs that contain metacodes Default EBCDIC VOLUME LPACK Specifies whether undefined labels LABEL ZUNDEF are packed or unpacked Syntax VOLUME LPACK option 2 64 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Options Table 2 69 VOLUME LPACK parameter options and definitio
467. t of all the characters carriage control information channel status tape labels and other information in the data stream while a job is being transmitted and printed Starting and ending tape dump sessions To print a dump of an offline job you wish to troubleshoot follow these steps 1 Specify the DFLT JDE and the DUMP JDL on the Tape Client window at the controller The DUMP JDL which was loaded on your system at installation contains the VOLUME HOST DUMP and CODE EBCDIC commands as well as the DFLT JDE 2 Run the job you intend to troubleshoot 3 Terminate the dump session by clicking the End button on the Tape Client window Offline dump format and content Each command directs the printer to perform an operation or provides control information used during printing The dump format for each of these commands contains a HEADER and DATA segment e fatape read error occurs while the system is reading the tape for the dump and the system skips the block containing the error and continues reading the tape the error is indicated in the dump following the problem block e When the system encounters a tape mark while formatting for the dump the tape mark is indicated following the block number The dump of each block tape mark error status end of volume or end of data is separated by at least one blank print line Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 75 PDL principles and procedures The tape data st
468. t of multiple logical pages Header pages and online DJDEs Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs JDE e JDL e DUPLEX NO e FEED If you use multiple PDE BEGIN commands to define multiple logical pages on one physical page as described in the PDE command description in the Specifying print format parameters chapter consider the following With the exception of DEPT and SHIFT all page oriented DJDEs are applied at a logical page boundary e The following DJDEs cause the current page position to be set to the first logical page of the front side of a new physical sheet DUPLEX COPIES JDL JDE OTEXT RTEXT FEED e The following DJDEs cause the current page position to be set to the first logical page of the next physical side FORMS FORMAT BEGIN PMODE FONTS If an online job has header pages only no trailers DJDEs that are invoked within a report remain in effect for the first header page of the following report however they do not remain in effect beyond the end of that header page These conditions occur because the end of the first report is not detected until the first header page of the following report is received and processed Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 9 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Printer carriage Printer carriage control processing may differ if it is associated control and DJDEs with DJDEs Use of certain P
469. t specified the first ink in the ILIST is used Default No default Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 31 Using logical processing LMODIFY SELECT Specifies the part of the print line that will be printed in the specified ink Syntax LMODIFY SELECT LINE offset length Options Table 3 24 LMODIFY SELECT parameter options and definitions Option Definition LINE Prints the entire line using the specified ink offset Specifies in bytes relative to zero the amount of space from the beginning of the print line to the beginning of the portion of the line that will be printed in the specified ink length Specifies the length in bytes of the portion of the print line that will be printed in the specified ink Default No default LMODIFY TEST Specifies the test expression for selecting one or more text strings to be printed in color Syntax LMODIFY TEST criid criid1 OR criid2 criid1 AND criid2 Options Table 3 25 LMODIFY TEST parameter options and definitions Option Definition criid criterion identifier Specifies the identifier of a CRITERIA command that is being referenced in this TEST parameter AND Specifies that both of the two specified criteria must be met for the selected text to print in color OR Specifies that either of two specified criteria must be met for the selected text to print in color Default No default
470. t that modifies the system default values specifically in the BLOCK or RECORD commands may experience incorrect results if an online job JDE is running In other words if an online JDE is specified in an offline JDL that has changed the system default values of the BLOCK and RECORD command parameters the job may not print correctly You should separate and run online and offline jobs JDEs independently of each other CAUTION If a block delimiter constant is positioned and is part of a record or block the record or block is truncated As a result the data is not formatted as specified Block command example The BLOCK command for the example in the following figure would be coded as follows BLOCK LENGTH 351 OFFSET 2 ADJUST 0 LTHFLD 2 PREAMBLE 8 FORMAT BIN The following diagram shows sample values for BLOCK command parameters 2 18 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters 4 Maximum Block Length _ SENE BLOCK SELECTION RECORD 1 RECORD 2 RECORD 3 FIELD 133 bytes 81 bytes 129 bytes o o xonxsF 1 11 1 BLOCK OFFSET BLOCK LTHFLD BSELECT offset BSELECT length 4 BLOCK PREAMBLE 9 Figure 2 1 Sample BLOCK command diagram CODE command ac identifier
471. t with tabs Generally only the JDL name identifiers and the END command begin in the first column of the JSL Other commands are indented Table 1 9 Sample JSL SMPLST JDL V1 VFU ASSIGN 1 5 ASSIGN 2 10 ASSIGN 3 15 TOF 5 BOF 66 VOLUME HOST XEROX CODE EBCDIC LABEL NONE RECORD LENGTH 133 STRUCTURE FB LINE DATA 1 132 PCCTYPE XEROX PCC 0 NOTRAN VFU V1 Tl TABLE CONSTANT 132 C1 CRITERIA CONSTANT 2 132 EQ T1 LINENUM 1 5 CME1 CME LINE 9 POS 1 FONT 1 JOB1 JDE OUTPUT DUPLEX YES FORMS BARS MODIFY CME1 JOB2 JDE OUTPUT FORMS NONE DUPLEX NO COPIES 2 JOB3 JDE BANNER TEST C1 HCOUNT 1 TCOUNT 0 END 1 48 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures e After deciding on the command levels you will use make a test run of the job to see the output and to make any necessary adjustments Design forms to accommodate placement of data on the page NOTE It is best to start with the standard formats print description entries or PDEs that are predefined on the system Each of these formats FMT1 through FMT1 1 matches standard form layouts e Ifyou are not sure which specifications to select run a job using the system defaults then adjust the JSL to meet your requirements You can modify an existing JSL in the same manner Remember the co
472. tax Specifies that the DJDE is a graphic sentinel That is it immediately precedes and identifies a graphic in the report data stream NOTE This DJDE when specified must be the only DJDE in its packet Record oriented GRAPHIC name vpos units hpos units H n d INKS inkref inkrefs If no other DJDEs are specified the parentheses may be omitted Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 39 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Options Table 5 29 GRAPHIC DJDE options and definitions Option Definition name Identifies the graphic If document interleaved it becomes the file name with which the IMG file is written If page interleaved it is used to associate the graphic with other DJDE references vpos vertical position Specifies the amount of vertical spacing of the top edge of the graphic from 0 0 on the physical page hpos horizontal position Specifies the horizontal spacing of the left edge of the graphic from 0 0 on the current physical page units Unit of measure for the vertical and horizontal positions of the graphic The following may be used UN unit defined by the user e CM centimeters IN inches DOTS e XDOTS DOTS for 600 spi processing If UN is specified the user defined positioning unit must be previously defined by the OUTPUT UNITS command in the current JDE or JDL The default positioning unit is
473. tects the switch from one physical page to the next The normal page transition is caused by a skip from the bottom of a page to the top of the next generally channel 1 For example if channel 1 had been previously assigned at line 1 then a new JDE assigned channel 1 to line 10 the system would not automatically reposition to line 10 Solution Here are some ways to avoid this problem e You may add an ASSIGN DJDE to the DJDE packet to change the applicable channel such as channel 1 to the new line number Because the ASSIGN DUDE is a record oriented DJDE it is implemented on the next line and thus affects the next channel skip You may insert a record after the DJDE packet to cause the page transition and then allow a second skip to channel 1 to position to the correct line This technique causes a blank page to be printed if the new channel 1 is less than the old but is totally transparent if the new channel 1 assignment is greater further down the page than the old When certain DJDEs listed below are invoked between an odd numbered page front side and an even numbered page back side the following printing sequence occurs The odd numbered page is printed as usual but with a blank back side What would have been printed on the back side the even numbered page is printed on the front of the next sheet This occurs for the following DJDEs COPIES e OTEXT e RTEXT Using LCDS Print Description Language Effec
474. ter IDR command 4 20 IDEN command 1 72 2 2 2 24 2 28 DJPCC parameter 2 25 enabling DJDEs 5 1 5 2 OFFSET parameter 2 26 OPRINFO parameter 2 26 5 5 PREFIX parameter 2 27 5 2 SKIP parameter 2 27 identifier command ac type 1 5 dd type 1 5 criteria 3 2 identifier command 1 5 ac type 1 5 dd type 1 5 identifiers 1 21 IDFAULT DJDE 5 42 IDFAULT parameter OUTPUT command 4 57 IDR command 4 19 4 22 ICATALOG parameter 4 20 ILIST parameter 4 21 PALETTE parameter 4 22 IDR DJDE 5 43 IDR parameter OUTPUT command 4 58 ILIST DJDE 5 43 ILIST parameter IDR command 4 21 IMAGE DJDE 5 44 IMAGE parameter OUTPUT command 4 59 image shift DJDE 5 67 specifying 4 76 5 73 specifying vertical 4 88 IMISMATCH parameter ABNORMAL command 4 5 importing files 5 28 5 33 graphics 6 2 INIFEED parameter STOCKSET command 4 105 INITIAL parameter PCC command 2 34 ink default 4 19 INK parameter CME command 4 14 LMODIFY command 3 31 INKINDEX DJDE 5 45 INKINDEX parameter LINE command 4 29 input data streams 2 1 input parameters setting up 1 25 input parameters setting up 2 1 2 72 input processing command descriptions 2 11 2 72 INVERT DJDE 5 46 INVERT parameter OUTPUT command 4 60 inverting page image 4 60 IRESULT DJDE 5 47 IRESULT parameter OUTPUT command 4 61 ISUBSTITUTE parameter ABNORMAL command 4 6 ITEXT DJDE 5 48 ITEXT parameter MESSAGE command 4 39 J jam recovery 4
475. ter points to note OUTPUT IMAGE 4 60 parameter example Syntax Options Top left corner of the portrait or landscape oriented page scaled at 1 1 To put an image on a page use a form with the image or use the IMAGE DJDE If the UN option is used to define positioning the UNITS parameter must precede this command The IMAGE parameter must follow the GRAPHICS BATCH parameter as these two parameters are order dependent If two IMAGE parameters are listed consecutively in a JDL the system processes only the second one Existing IMG files are printed in the system default black ink unless ink references are specified in the INK parameter e If ink references are used If one inkref in the list is omitted commas must be used as place holders to maintain the relative positioning of the remaining ink references f more than two ink references are specified the additional ink references are ignored Following is an example of the OUTPUT GRAPHIC parameter OUTPUT GRAPHIC BATCH IMAGE 1 IN 2 CM OUTPUT INVERT Specifies that the content of a page will be inverted 180 degrees when it is printed on the physical page head to head or head to toe Inversion is also used for page orientation for finishing functions OUTPUT INVERT FRONT BACK BOTH NONE Table 4 60 OUTPUT INVERT parameter options and definitions Option Definition FRONT Specifies page invers
476. ter for a logo on the page May be specified in inches IN centimeters CM user defined units UN DOTS or XDOTS 600 spi dots The default unit is IN INKS Specifies that the ink references that follow will override the inks that were defined in the image file inkref ink reference Specifies the inks that override the corresponding inks specified in the ink list of the image file Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 51 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs 5 52 LOGO DJDE points to note Any logos specified in a selected JDE the JDE that was specified in the JDE DJDE replace those from the original JDE If none are specified in the selected JDE logos from the original JDE are canceled e Ifthe logo that is specified in the Initial JDE is not found the job aborts and an error message is displayed If a logo that is specified after the start of the job is not found the system response is determined by the specifications in the ABNORMAL ERROR parameter The HERE keyword must be included whenever the VADJ or HADJ options are coded Otherwise a syntax error occurs e If inks are used f one inkref in the list is omitted commas must be used as place holders to maintain the relative positioning of the remaining ink references f more than two ink references are specified the additional ink references are ignored LPI DJDE Specifies the values for the ve
477. ter understand the potential value of specifying pitch modes in your JSLs consider these hypothetical situations Problem Your finishing device folds and binds your printed output but accepts pages at a slower rate than the DP EPS produces pages Solution You may want to slow down the rate at which the printer sends sheets to the device Specify a different pitch mode Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 85 Specifying print format parameters 4 86 Example Assuming that your application calls for 8 5 by 11 inch paper you could use 5 pitch mode However by selecting 4 pitch which reduces the pages per minute on the DP180 EPS from 180 to 77 you make the printer speed more closely match your finishing device capabilities and you reduce the potential for paper jams Problem Your application uses four paper sizes ranging from 8 5 by 11 inches for the first few pages to 11 by 17 inches for the last several pages Each time your printer detects a different paper size it adjusts to accommodate it significantly reducing throughput time Solution By specifying a low enough pitch mode to accommodate all the paper sizes in your application in this case 3 pitch mode you make the entire job run at the maximum possible throughput speed because paper size adjustments are limited Keep in mind that you may select a lower pitch mode allowing a greater scan value for smaller size paper but you would not want to select a pitch
478. ters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE MESSAGE ITEXT Specifies that a message to the operator will be Y Y Y displayed during input processing MESSAGE OTEXT Specifies that a message to the operator will be Y Y Y displayed during printing The following sections describe the syntax of the command parameters and explain the parameter options MESSAGE ITEXT Input text Specifies a text message to be sent to the operator during input processing Syntax MESSAGE ITEXT sc passnum NONE WAIT Options Table 4 40 MESSAGE ITEXT parameter options and definitions Option Definition NONE Specifies that no text message is sent to the operator during input processing passnum pass number Specifies the pass copy ply to which the message text applies The message is sent to the operator just before processing of the indicated pass is begun If no pass number is specified the indicated message is sent at the beginning of the first pass SC string constant Specifies a text message string constant of up to 80 characters WAIT Specifies that after the text is displayed input is suspended until the operator has initiated a Continue request NOTE The DP EPS systems do not support the ITEXT WAIT parameter It is ignored and no error message is displayed Default NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 39 Specifying print format para
479. tes of data RFEED command The logical processing RFEED command allows you to change stock names on a page by page basis without using DJDEs The RFEED command allows you to specify paper fed from trays assigned to different stocks if certain record criteria are met RFEED an extension of the RAUX command lets you specify virtually any stock name or stock reference without being limited to the AUX stock The following section describes the syntax of the RFEED command parameter and explains its options RFEED TEST parameter Allows you to specify paper fed from trays assigned to different stocks if certain record criteria are met Syntax RFEED TEST testexp stock Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 37 Using logical processing Options Table 3 28 RFEED TEST parameter options and definitions Option Definition testexp References a criteria table to be used to test for conditions that will cause the stock defined by the stock parameter option to feed for the next page Refer to Coding a test expression earlier in this chapter for the format and syntax of a testexp stock Defines the stock whose assigned tray s will be used for the page either a stock name or a stock reference Default No default 3 38 RFEED command points to note e Satisfaction of the RFEED criteria causes the current page to feed from the tray assigned to the stock defined in the RFEED command e If
480. test criteria that if met will cause the record to be selected for printing For RDELETE Specifies the test criteria that if met will cause the record to be deleted from the printed output Refer to Coding a test expression earlier in this chapter for the format and syntax of a testexp Default 3 36 No default RDELETE and RSELECT commands point to note The RSELECT and RDELETE commands are supported on the DP EPS only for offline printing RDELETE command example The following commands illustrate the use of RDELETE to process interspersed reports on a record basis refer to the following figure I1 TABLE CONSTANT EFGH Cl CRITERIA CONSTANT 104 4 EQ T1 RDELETE TEST 2CI The above example shows that if the contents of a deletion control field located 104 bytes from the start of the user portion of the record are equal to the constant EFGH the record is not printed In the example illustrated in the following figure records 2 and 6 will not be printed Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing Figure 3 4 Illustration of RDELETE command usage Tape mark followed by interblock gap IBG Block 1 followed by interblock gap IBG Block 2 followed by interblock gap IBG Tape mark Record length field in preamble O c A OU N Printer carriage control PCC byte at start of user portion of record N Print line 8 103 by
481. th Fixed length blocks may be truncated but only at the end of a record Truncated blocks must be an even multiple of the record length plus the block preamble and postamble if any Record length includes all bytes i Length Variable Length Record Format Indicator C DATA l One byte optional vertical format control character l l FORMAT B Bj 0j O0 BIN i 2 bytes length in binary 1 tu 2 bytes zeroes Options for record length field format Variable Length FORMAT Records ATATATA peo 4 bytes length in decimal characters Block Block Block Uobocked BP Recordi Gap BP Record2 Gap BP Record3 Block Block MM Blocked Records BP Recordi Record2 Record3 Gap BP Record4 Record5 Record6 The block preamble may contain a block length field of the same format as the record length field Blocks may be truncated but only at the end of a record Record Undefined Length Record Format C Data t One byte optional vertical format control character Block Block Block R hy E Undefined Length Unblocked Records Records BP Record1 RD BP Record2 RD BP Record3 RD Blocked Records BP Recordi RD Record2 RD Record3 RD Figure 2 3 Record format types Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 43 Specifying input parameters SEFFNT command When you print a job on large sized paper such as 11 by 17 inch or A3 the paper must feed
482. the indicated JDL Record length for the job does not change when a JDL is switched by a JDL DUDE Specifies the name and location of logos that will be printed on a page or on all pages of a report Type Record oriented Syntax name vpos units hpos units H INKS inkref inkrefs name HERE VADJ tvalue units HADJ tvalue units H INKS inkref inkref2 Options Table 5 41 LOGO DJDE options and definitions Option Definition name Name of a logo that will be imaged vpos vertical position Specifies the vertical position of the top edge of the logo as a downward offset relative to 0 0 on the current physical page the position that would be specified by a PDE BEGIN of 0 0 and a PDE PMODE value PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE that is currently in effect hpos horizontal position Specifies the horizontal position of the left edge of the logo as a rightward offset relative to 0 0 on the current physical page Using LCDS Print Description Language Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Table 5 41 LOGO DJDE options and definitions Continued Option Definition units Specifies the unit of measure for the vertical and horizontal positions of the logo on the page Available units are e DOTS e CM centimeters N inches e UN user defined unit e XDOTS DOTS at 600 spi If UN is specified the user defi
483. the Text Editor window menu bar The Text Editor Save As window appears Figure 1 12 Save As window Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 53 PDL principles and procedures 1 54 5 In the Enter path or folder name text field enter one of the following paths to the Icds folder opt XRXnps resources lcds or var spool XRXnps resources lcds NOTE The file and folder names are case sensitive Be sure to enter the directory path exactly as it is shown above with regard to uppercase and lowercase letters Hemember to include the slashes at the beginning and end The Icds folder where the DFAULT JSL and all other system LCDS resource files are stored is the recommended folder for storing your JSLs You have write access to this folder which means you can add files and create new folders within it Enter the name of your new JSL in the Enter file name text field at the bottom of the Text Editor Save As window Following are some rules for JSL names The name must end with the JSL file extension The name must be one to six characters in length not including the JSL extension CAUTION Be sure to give a new name to the JSL file that you have created Otherwise your new JSL may overwrite the default JSL in the Icas folder Overwriting can occur if you access the default JSL by selecting Open from the File menu on the Text Editor window instead of Include Refer to ste
484. the appearance of printing on the edge of the paper Refer to the OUTPUT OSTK command description in the Specifying print format parameters chapter for more information on edgemarking NOTE Edgemarks must start within the system page although they may print mostly outside the page boundaries Elements thatdo Elements of a page that is text and graphics may begin at the not print edge of the physical page and may even extend off the page However if any part of a printed element begins off the system page then no part of the element is imaged e Ifa line of variable data begins off the system page no part of the line is printed Aruled line must originate inside the system page in order for the line to print e If aruled line begins off the system page no part of the line is printed Orientation There are two types of text orientation on a page Portrait Landscape The vertical and horizontal positions for each of these orientations are shown in the following figures Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 35 PDL principles and procedures pl 1 o 3 BCD Figure 1 2 Vertical and horizontal positions in portrait mode 1 Left margin horizontal position or hpos 2 Character cell 3 Top margin vertical position or vpos i a a BCDEF Figure 1 3 Horizontal and vertical positions in landscape mode 1 Left margin hpos 2 Character cell 3 Top margin vpos Using LCDS Print Descript
485. the host SEQ Incremental count in decimal of the host commands received during a dump session The maximum number is 999 999 LENGTH Length in decimal of the data transmitted DATE and TIME Date and time when the host command was received by the dump processor The time includes tics of seconds where one tic is approximately one millisecond Restrictions for online dumps 1 74 The DATA segment consists of the input data in hexadecimal transmitted from the host and printed in hexadecimal and ASCII The data is translated based on the value specified in the CODE command Online dumps have the following restrictions e DJDEs BANNER and other logical processing functions are not processed when the dump job is running Hardware errors are reported in the system error log but are not dumped due to host OLI or driver interface constraints Commands processed when input is stopped as when paper trays become empty are not dumped Print records that are longer than the RECORD LENGTH parameter value that is specified in the online dump OLDUMP JDL are truncated without warning If records longer than 150 bytes are to be sent the RECORD LENGTH parameter in the OLDUMP JDL should be modified to the longer length Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Offline dump The offline tape dump feature is a troubleshooting tool for tape jobs It allows you to generate a hardcopy printou
486. the input data stream specifies where the DJDEs commands are embedded in the data record and specifies how to identify the DJDE records Benefits of using DJDEs There are several reasons to use DJDEs to change job parameters The printing system does not need to stop between reports nor does it require operator intervention The operator starts a job on the printing system and typically returns to the system for minor operational activity only Forms may be changed on specific pages Many variations on VFU channel margin Top Of Form TOF and Bottom Of Form BOF assignments may be applied to reports as they are created instead of being stored in the printing system in JDL files This dynamic processing reduces the number of JDEs that need to be maintained e DJDEs can be used to satisfy unusual processing requirements more easily e Varying numbers of copies can be generated automatically with routing or distribution notification sent to the operator Print resources such as forms and fonts or nonprint data can be downloaded onto the system disk through the print data stream 1 72 Using LCDS Print Description Language Dumps PDL principles and procedures The dump feature is a troubleshooting tool for print jobs It allows you to generate a hardcopy of the command and data transmission between the host computer or the magnetic tape and the printing system while a job is being transmitted and printed Online
487. the lower five bits indicate the amount of shift For example if the first byte is 0 x 48 01001000 each line shifts seven 0x48 0x1f 1 character spaces to the right the sixth bit indicates that the shift is to the right Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 5 Specifying input parameters When the system is operating online in 3211 or 4245 emulation mode forms control buffers FCBs are received from the host to redefine channel to line number assignments and to set margins based on the print position indexing byte e Ifthe print position indexing PPI byte of the FCB is enabled it is not suppressed by FCB IGNORE If an FCB with a PPI byte is received indexing is invoked if an FCB without a PPI byte is received indexing is turned off even if FCB IGNORE CAUTION Use of the PPI byte to shift the starting print position may cause problems in recognition of both DJDEs and banner pages Onthe DP EPS the maximum record length is 12288 bytes This limit is not influenced by print position indexing However on other LPS systems you should not use PPI for print record lengths from 151 bytes to 214 bytes Example of an online JSL The following figure shows an example of an online JSL that contains several input processing commands This JSL would be used only for printing a job sent from a host over a channel or through a TCP IP gateway Table 2 2 Example of an online JSL Tis Cl T2 C2 ONLI
488. the stacker on a report basis OUTPUT OFFSET ALL FIRST NONE Table 4 66 OUTPUT OFFSET parameter options and definitions Option Definition ALL Results in an offset of each copy of each report FIRST Specifies that an offset is to occur only on the first copy of a report NONE Specifies that there will be no offsetting at any time ALL Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 67 Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT OFFSET parameter point 4 68 The OFFSET control of FIRST ALL or NONE may be modified by the ROFFSET command refer to the ROFFSET command tonote description in the Using logical processing chapter If OUTPUT OFFSET FIRST or ALL was specified and the ROFFSET criteria is satisfied on the first page of a report the normal offset from the preceding report occurs OUTPUT OSTK Specifies that ordered stocks are used for printing the job Syntax OUTPUT OSTK ostkspec ostkspec ostkspec where ostkspec is stockdef mod pos RES NORES TABS size DOTS IN CMj L P3 Options Table 4 67 OUTPUT OSTK parameter options and definitions Option Definition stockdef stock definition The identifier or name of the ordered stock to be used and for which feeder trays have been identified on the user interface Stock List No default mod modulus The number of sheets in the ordered stock For example 5 cut tabs would hav
489. therwise it is not processed String comparisons String comparisons for logical processing are specified using the CRITERIA and TABLE commands These comparisons test for one of the following conditions e Absolute equality Tested by either a Change mode CRITERIA command or by a Constant mode CRITERIA command which references a TABLE command that does not have a MASK parameter coded refer to processing sequence 1 in the figure titled Commands that specify string comparisons e Equality under a mask Tested when the referenced TABLE command has a MASK parameter coded refer to processing sequence 2 in the following figure Comparing strings for equality under a mask means that the user has specified for each character position of the input data string that the test performed is one of the following Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 11 Using logical processing Character types Masked comparisons using default type 3 12 assignments Compare the character in that position for absolute equality Ignore the character in that position consider the character whatever it is to compare as equal Compare the character in that position for type for example alphabetic numeric or some specially defined type An attribute called type may be associated with any character or characters in a character set The possible types are identified by the integers 1 through 7 Any single character
490. tifier of a table specified in the TABLE command that contains the constant to which the test field is compared Default CRITERIA CONSTANT parameter syntax example Syntax No default The following CRITERIA command syntax diagram describes a test for a subfield equal to a specific constant table criid CRITERIA CONSTANT offset length EQ tabid In the above syntax the CONSTANT parameter specifies that the content of a record is to be compared to the values that were specified in a TABLE command with identifier tabid Refer to TABLE command in this chapter for an explanation of the tabid parameter The subfield that will be compared is located the number of bytes indicated by the offset variable from the start of the user portion of the record The subfield has a length the number of bytes indicated in the ength variable When the subfield in the record matches a constant in the table the CRITERIA command is TRUE and the processing specified by the parameter is completed or acted upon CRITERIA LINENUM Specifies the range of consecutive line numbers for which the CRITERIA command is fully evaluated CRITERIA LINENUM init count Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 17 Using logical processing Options Table 3 10 CRITERIA LINENUM parameter options and definitions Option Definition init initial line An integer specifying the number on each logical page of the beginning line
491. tions with the online interface hardware Building translate tables based on the present contents of the current FOLD or UNFOLD command that is in effect Processing form control buffers FCBs that are received from the host to redefine channel to line number assignments Online printing is controlled through parameters from a user defined JDL file You can dynamically override these parameters by Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs The DJDEs that you specify are processed by the system as part of the input print data from the host The IDEN command enables the system to identify DJDEs as commands and not part of the input data Refer to the IDEN command description for information on the use and parameters of this command Nonprint files such as font files can be downloaded from the host using the FILE command refer to FILE DJDE in the DJDEs chapter of this guide Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying input parameters Report separation The two logical processing commands that can control report separation online are BANNER and RSTACK The BANNER command specifies the detection criteria for traditional spooler banner pages and their associated report boundaries The RSTACK command is used to detect other types of report boundary indicator records called RSTACK records NOTE After reports are processed they are managed and printed as jobs See also Using logical processing in which these com
492. u use a form If so you need to specify the form in your JSL If do not have an existing form that you can use you will need to create it and load it onto the system disk You may specify the first form for your job in the Queue Manager LCDS Setup Output or On line Job Manager windows on the controller when you are ready to print This form selection overrides any initial form specified in the JSL If you do not specify an Initial Form at the user interface the form defined in the JSL is used What paper sizes will be used Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures e Will copy modification entries CMEs be used Will the output be delivered face up N to 1 last page first and collated Will the data be printed on one side of the page simplex or on both sides duplex Will graphics be used What types of applications will be printed For example Forms Reports Letters Billing statements using variable data that is information that varies from customer to customer e What are the conventions at your site if any for naming forms JSLs files and jobs This information helps you plan your application the type of input data to specify the type of application to design and how to customize the application so that it meets its intended purpose rather than using system defaults Special features Before starting to develop the JSL for your application determ
493. uage Specifying input parameters As before volume 1 is the start of job and the volume specified by nis the volume that contains data for the last page that was written to the print file before the system rollover Input processing command descriptions The basic PDL commands to control input processing are CODE PCC RECORD SEFFNT TCODE and VOLUME which are defined here The Using logical processing section defines commands that specify logical functions that may be performed on either a record or page basis The input related PDL commands are summarized in the following table Table 2 3 Summary of PDL commands associated with input processing Command Function BLOCK command Describes input block characteristics CODE command Defines the input character code translation table DBCODE command Defines an input double byte character code translation table IDEN command Indicates that the report contains DJDEs KCODE command Defines an input double byte character code translation table PCC command Defines printer carriage control table RECORD command Specifies the input data record characteristics SEFFNT command Defines font mapping for short edge feed jobs TCODE command Defines masked comparison type assignments for translation VOLUME command Specifies input medium characteristics Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 11 Specifying input pa
494. ually specified at system installation widthunit Defines the unit of measurement for the default pitch mode Choices are IN CM DOTS e XDOTS IN inches is the default widthunit Default Based on the specified paper size expressed in inches OUTPUT TMODE Width values can range from 7 inches or 178 mm to 17 parameter points inches or 432 mm to note e In order to process 7 by 10 inch and B5 papers the printer must be configured with the 7 by 10 inch throughput kit a hardware option Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 83 Specifying print format parameters Pitch modes and throughput performance The printing system can operate in several different pitch modes 3 4 5 6 and 7 The following table shows the minimum and maximum boundary values for each pitch mode and the default paper sizes that can be specified with the TMODE parameter The table shows these default scan values in inches IN centimeters CM DOTS and XDOTS dots at 600 dpi along with their associated print speeds in pages per minute ppm Table 4 78 Pitch mode minimum and maximum boundary values and pages per minute printing speeds PITCH IN CM MM DOTS XDOTS PPM 3 15 31 x 17 00 38 9 to 43 18 389 to 431 8 4595 to 5100 9190 to 10200 77 4 12 12 x 15 31 30 810 38 9 308 to 389 3639 to 4594 7277 to 9189 103 5 10 19 x 12 12 25 910 30 8 259 to 308 3060 to 3638 6119to 7276 128 6
495. uct and supplies are manufactured tested and certified to strict safety regulations electromagnetic regulations and established environmental standards Any unauthorized alteration which may include the addition of new functions or connection of external devices may impact the product certification Please contact your Xerox representative for more information Warning markings All warning instructions marked on or supplied with the product should be followed This WARNING alerts users to areas of the product where there is the possibility of personal damage This WARNING alerts users to areas of the product where there are heated surfaces which should not be touched Electrical supply This product shall be operated from the type of electrical supply indicated on the data plate label of the product If you are not sure that your electrical supply meets the requirements please consult your local power company for advice Using LCDS Print Description Language xix Laser safety Ventilation D This product must be connected to a protective earth circuit WARNING WARNING This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin This plug fits only into an earthed electrical outlet This is a safety feature Always connect equipment to a properly grounded electrical outlet If in doubt have the outlet checked by a qualified electrician To disconnect all electrical power to the product the disc
496. ue exceeds the logical record size the first font in the font list is used e fthere is a change from a small font to a large font when LINE OVERPRINT MERGE has been specified the line is adjusted downward by the difference in height between the first and the largest fonts in the line This applies to DP EPS 4850 4890 LPS and DP92C LPS only e DP EPS only When a new FONTINDEX is specified for a print record the new line spacing value is always used regardless of whether the record actually contains printable data LINE GDATA Specifies the starting point of the graphic data from the beginning of the user portion of a data record This command can be used to skip past information such as a PCC byte that is not actually part of the image Syntax LINE GDATA offset termination 4 28 Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 31 LINE GDATA parameter options and definitions Option Definition offset The starting point of the graphic data termination The terminating byte of the record The options are e DEFAULT f online a single terminating byte exists If offline no terminating byte exists qr The number of terminating bytes that exist Default offset 0 termination DEFAULT LINE INKINDEX Specifies a field within a data record that contains a number that represents the ink index in the current ILIST Synta
497. umbers will be Y Y Y printed and if so defines their location and appearance OUTPUT OFFSET Specifies whether reports are offset in the Y Y N stacker OUTPUT OSTK Specifies the job will be printed on ordered Y Y N stock OUTPUT PAPERSIZE Specifies the size paper to be used for the job N OUTPUT PURGE Specifies the default disposition of document N interleaved graphics after printing OUTPUT SF1FUNCTION Specifies a function for sheet finisher function Y Y Y number 1 OUTPUT SF2FUNCTION Specifies a function for sheet finisher function Y Y Y number 2 OUTPUT SHIFT Shifts image on the y axis vertically on the Y Y Y page OUTPUT SIZING Controls matching the paper that is specified Y Y Y when the page is formatted with the paper sizes in the trays Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 43 Specifying print format parameters Table 4 42 Summary of OUTPUT command parameters Continued Syntax Options Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE OUTPUT STAPLE Places a wire stitch in copied sets of output Y Y N OUTPUT STOCKS Specifies a STOCKSET for use in the report Y Y Y OUTPUT SYSPPR Specifies the system page paper size for a Y Y N job OUTPUT TMODE Specifies a maximum paper width in order to Y Y Y improve throughput efficiency when mixed paper sizes are used OUTPUT TRANS Specifies that transparencies are used in the Y Y N job OUTPUT UNITS Specifies user selected units fo
498. ut parameters VOLUME KCODE Specifies which double byte character code translation table the system will use to interpret the input data Syntax VOLUME KCODE keyword id Options Table 2 66 VOLUME KCODE parameter options and definitions Option Definition keyword Specifies a specific standard system defined double byte code translation table The available options are IBM IBM Nihongo character set Kanji double byte character sets BMCHN IBM 5550 code translation table e JEF Fujitsu JEF Kanji double byte character set e KEIS Hitachi KEIS Kanji double byte character set e UCS2 ISO IEC 10646 UCS2 character set e USER Refers to the single unlabeled KCODE command defined within the JDL or JDE id Specifies an identifier label that was used in a previously defined KCODE command to refer to a specific user defined code translation table The id label is required when multiple KCODE commands are contained within the JDL Default No default VOLUME LABEL Specifies the type of label on the input tape Syntax VOLUME LABEL abel type Options Table 2 67 VOLUME LABEL parameter options and definitions Option Definition label type Specifies the type of label that the tape contains The following types may be specified e COBOL Honeywell 2000 COBOL tape with 120 byte labels NONE the input tape is unlabeled e ANSI XEROX ANSI SPR Honeywell 2000 System Prin
499. utput will be delivered to both the sample tray and the stacker tray TRAY Specifies that report delimiters will be printed and the output will be delivered to the sample tray NONE Specifies that report delimiters will not be printed Default NONE RSTACK PRINT If DELIMITER NO has been coded no page is printed parameter points Ifthe report is being printed in duplex mode report delimiters to note p g P p p are printed on at most one side of a two sided page Using LCDS Print Description Language 3 57 Using logical processing 3 58 Syntax Options RSTACK TEST Defines the test expression for the end of report conditions for either Change mode or Constant mode criteria RSTACK TEST testexp Table 3 44 TEST parameter options and definitions Option Definition testexp Defines test criteria that if satisfied signals the end of the report for either Change Mode or Constant Mode criteria Refer to Coding a test expression earlier in this chapter for the format and syntax of a testexp Default No default RSTACK command points to note Ifthe TEST expression on the RSTACK command consists solely of a Change Mode CRITERIA command DELIMITER NO must be coded e Ifa record that is an RSTACK delimiter satisfies the test expression it must neither be deleted from nor not selected for printing by the RSELECT or RDELETE logical processing If the re
500. valid 3211 or 4245 channel command before sending it to the printer for online printing The printing system online interface as well as the 3211 and 4245 rejects any commands other than those processed Therefore the only appropriate PCCTYPE for an online JSL file is IBM3211 which is the online default Because the carriage control command is sent before the data record rather than as part of it offsets to fields such as DJDE prefix and font index are typically one byte less for online than offline mode since the offline carriage control byte is part of the data record For the same reason the online LINE DATA parameter typically has a default offset of 0 rather than 1 VOLUME KANJI Specifies the double byte character printing mode Allows printing of data streams of intermixed single byte and double byte characters VOLUME KANJI YES NO Table 2 65 VOLUME KANJI parameter options and definitions Option Definition YES Allows printing of a data stream of intermixed single byte and double byte characters NO Allows printing of only single byte characters Default NO VOLUME KANJI parameter point 2 62 to note This parameter functions the same as the VOLUME DBCS parameter which is the preferred method of specifying double byte character printing mode The VOLUME KANJI parameter is supported only for compatibility purposes Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying inp
501. valuetype Options Table 4 34 LINE MARGIN parameter options and definitions Option Definition value Specifies the distance from the left edge of the logical page as indicated by the current BEGIN value in effect to the left margin Has the format nnn mm a positive decimal number of up to three digits with up to 2 digits to the right of the decimal point valuetype Unit of measure for the margin value Available unit options include IN inches CM centimeters e POS character positions NOTE When you run a CODE NONE job with DUPLEX YES and SHIFT YES you must specify MARGIN in inches Default 1 POS LINE MARGIN A value must be specified as an integer nnn if its valuetype is parameter point character positions POS to note LINE OVERPRINT Specifies how overprint lines are handled Overprint lines are print lines whose carriage control specifies printing with no line spacing after the last printed line Syntax LINE OVERPRINT overopt disp Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 31 Specifying print format parameters Options Table 4 35 LINE OVERPRINT parameter options and definitions Option Definition overopt overprint option This option has the following choices e PRINT Specifies that all overprint lines are printed as they would be on an impact printer that is the second line is printed over the top of the first with no regard to the
502. variable length VB variable length blocked U undefined length UB undefined length blocked Default FB RECORD command Points to note Note the following when using the RECORD command e LTHFLD OFFSET FORMAT and PREAMBLE parameters The values for these parameters may be overridden if STRUCTURE is changed as the result of ANSI or IBM OS Standard label processing CONSTANT and STRUCTURE parameters Using LCDS Print Description Language 2 41 Specifying input parameters CONSTANT may be enabled as the result of STRUCTURE being changed to U in label processing However no definition is assumed for the constant string The default must be zero or it must be defined in the job descriptor entry LINE DATA parameter and RECORD LENGTH parameter When the DATA parameter of the LINE command is changed to a value greater than the default value the LENGTH parameter of the RECORD command must also be changed accordingly Refer to the LINE command section of the chapter Specifying output parameters for additional information Using online JDEs in offline JDLs An offline JDL statement set that modifies the system default values specifically in the BLOCK or RECORD commands may experience incorrect results if an online job JDE is running In other words if an online JDE is specified in an offline JDL that has changed the system default values of the BLOCK and RECORD command parameters the job may not
503. will be meaningful to you and others who may use the application Paper sizes and page frames The printing system considers paper sizes in terms of page frames which are boundaries associated with a page as a unit of printing or imaging The system defines three page frames Physical page e System page Logical page In addition to paper size you must consider edgemarking and non imaged elements when you design the pages of your applications The system page is the maximum image area of the printer for the paper size The system page size varies depending on the size of the paper for your job The physical page is the size of the paper itself You may select any page dimensions within an 8 by 10 inch 203 by 254 mm minimum and a 14 33 by 17 inch 364 by 432 mm maximum If your system is configured with the small paper kit option your minimum page size is 7 by 10 inches or 178 by 254 mm Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures Logical page A logical page is a user defined page image that is bordered by Top of Form and Bottom of Form and left and right margin specifications Up to 63 logical pages can be defined on a physical page NOTE You are not able to specify right margins on logical pages The right margin size is determined by the left margin and the line length Edgemarking Edgemarking occurs when text or graphics are printed outside the physical sheet giving
504. wing is an example of multiple BEGINs Two logical pages are defined on one physical page 2UP PDE BEGIN 5 IN 5 IN BEGIN 6 5IN 5 IN PMODE PORTRAIT FONTS P1012B This is an example of a PDE that may be compiled separately from a JDL The compilation process creates a PDE object file which may be referenced from within a JDL or by a DJDE The name of the object file for this PDE is PDE99 PDE the same as its identifier in the source command shown below PDE99 PDE PMODE PORTRAIT BEGIN 10 0 FONTS PO7ITA P080AA END ROUTE command The ROUTE command allows you to print identifying information text and an optional form on a page preceding a report You may code this command within a JDL or in a disk file of ROUTE commands ROUTE command parameters The following table summarizes the ROUTE command parameters Table 4 87 Summary of ROUTE command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE ROUTE RFORM Specifies a form that will be printed with RTEXT Y Y Y pages ROUTE RTEXT Specifies the text that will be printed preceding a Y Y Y report copy The following sections describe the syntax of the ROUTE command parameters and explain the parameter options Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 99 Specifying print format parameters Syntax Options ROUTE RFORM Specifies a form to be printed with al
505. wnloaded when another DJDE record is encountered fa DJDE record is encountered and one or more card image records have been written in the file the file is truncated to an appropriate size and closed If OPRINFO YES a message is listed on an OPRINFO page indicating that a file has been created and giving the name of the new file fa DJDE record is encountered before any card image records have been filed the null file is deleted and the preceding DJDE packet is printed on an OPRINFO page with an error message indicating that the file F LENAME has no card image data 5 The printing system completes file processing NOTE Card image files that have the type extensions listed below are not supported on the DP 2000 Series EPS e CMD e MSC e PCH e TMP e TPF When the system encounters any of these types of files specified within a FILE DJDE it logs an invalid file type error which is handled according to the specification by the ABNORMAL ERROR parameter in the JDL LPS labeled file When LPS labeled files are transferred the following occurs processing 4 The system checks the FILE DJDE for valid parameters reads the LPS label record at the beginning of the file and responds to errors as follows Using LCDS Print Description Language 5 31 Using Dynamic Job Descriptor Entries DJDEs Delimited records for LPS labeled 5 32 files e Ifthe first record does not meet the requirements for a
506. ws the JSL command levels JDLSMP JDL System level commands coded here VFUI VEU ASSIGN 1 1 TOF 1 BOF 66 VEU9 VEU ASSIGN 1 9 TOF 9 BOF 66 VOLUME HOST IBMOS RECORD LENGTH 133 LINE VFU VFU9 DATA 1 132 OUTPUT FORMS CPPR1 DUPLEX NO COPIES 2 Catalog commands coded here if needed CATI CATALOG LINE VFU VFUI OUTPUT FORMS FORM2 Job level commands coded here JOBCPP JOB JOB2 JOB INCLUDE CAT1 JOB3 JOB INCLUDE CAT1 OUTPUT DUPLEX YES END 1 20 Using LCDS Print Description Language PDL principles and procedures JDL name Begin your JSL by deciding on a name for the compiled JDL and entering the JDL command on the first line of the JSL The JDLNAME is a 1 to 6 character alphanumeric identifier specifying the name of the JDL to be created Select a name that is related to the function of the JDL and identifies the type of jobs you are creating For example if your site has several input sources you might want to name the JDL for an online job JDLONL JDL The format for naming a JDL is JDLNAME JDL For example you might name a JDL containing short edge feed large paper size jobs JDLSEF JDL When a JSL is coded the word SYSTEM is sometimes used in place of JDL The meaning is exactly the same In the following example the JDL name SAMPL corresponds to the name of the JD
507. x LINE INKINDEX offset offset initval bitopt NONE Options Table 4 32 LINE INKINDEX parameter options and definitions Option Definition offset Indicates the byte offset in the data record where the ink index number is located initval initial value Specifies an index value that is associated with the first ink in the ink list Must be ONE or ZERO e ZERO specifies that the first ink on the ink list is considered ink 0 e ONE indicates that the first ink on the ink list is considered ink 1 The default initval is ONE bitopt bit option Specifies the number of bits that should be used in calculating the ink index The range is 1 through 7 The default bitopt value is 4 NONE Specifies that there is no ink index Default NONE Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 29 Specifying print format parameters LINE INKINDEX parameter points to note LINE INKINDEX 4 30 parameter example Syntax Options The DP EPS support only the offset option for the LINE INKINDEX parameter When the bitopt option is specified the initval must also be specified The printer permits an entire line or a portion of a line to be printed in highlight color You can specify highlight color for variable data on a form This is analogous to the output capability of font switching Variable data is printed using the ink that is specified in the INKINDEX byte If the INKINDEX byte is blank or does not e
508. x OUTPUT PAPERSIZE A3 A4 B4 B5 USLEGAL USLETTER x y Options Table 4 68 OUTPUT PAPERSIZE parameter options and definitions Option Definition A3 16 54 by 11 69 inches 297 by 420 mm A4 8 27 by 11 69 inches 287 by 270 mm B4 10 12 by 14 33 inches 257 by 364 mm B5 7 17 by 10 12 inches 178 by 254 mm with the 7 by 10 inch enablement kit USLEGAL 8 5 by 14 inches 216 by 356 mm USLETTER 8 5 by 11 inches 216 by 279 mm x y A user defined paper size that is a size that is not one of the standard sizes The x and y variables define the width and length of the nonstandard stock e g 7 10 for 7 by 10 inches Default System default size that was specified at installation OUTPUT When centimeters CM are used to specify paper size the PAPERSIZE maximum allowable value is 32 767 cm Gaon eee Paper size cannot be changed by a DJDE on a page basis However paper sizes can be changed on a report basis Using LCDS Print Description Language 4 73 Specifying print format parameters OUTPUT PAPERSIZE parameter example Syntax 4 74 PAPERSIZE B4 and PAPERSIZE 10 12 14 33 produce identical results because they indicate long edge feed as opposed to short edge feed format Refer to the SEFFNT command description in the Specifying input parameters chapter for detailed information on short and long edge feed To print on B5 and 7 by 10 inch paper sizes the printer requires the 7 by 10 inch enablement
509. xist in the variable data record the variable data is printed using the default ink LINE DATA 1 132 FONTINDEX 133 NKINDEX 143 LINE LPI Specifies the line spacing values for each line LINE LPI inespacing LPI DOTS XDOTS inespacing LPI DOTS XDOTS ineno Table 4 33 LINE LPI parameter options and definitions Option Definition linespacing Specifies the line spacing value May be measured in LPI lines per inch DOTS XDOTS 600 dpi The default unit is LPI lineno line number Specifies the line number or numbers over which the line spacing will be applied The options are n Number of the line to which the specified linespacing will be applied n Number of the line from which the specified inespacing will be applied through BOF bottom of form n m The specified inespacing will be applied from line n through line m Using LCDS Print Description Language Specifying print format parameters Default No default LINE LPI Ifthe LARGE ST is specified for the LINE BASELINE parameter points parameter the LPI parameter is ignored to note The line spacing value is not based on the maximum LPI font of the line Instead it is based on the value that is specified in the command LINE LPI LINESPACING LINE MARGIN Specifies the left printing margin within each logical page Syntax LINE MARGIN value value
510. xpression to detect and count the header or trailer pages that are used to separate reports Banner pages are header or trailer pages that separate printed reports from each other in the stacker Header pages are found at the start of a report trailer pages are found at the end of it Using LCDS Print Description Language Using logical processing The system recognizes the end of a report when enough banner pages have been printed to satisfy the end of report test criteria BANNER command parameters The following table summarizes the BANNER command parameters Table 3 13 Summary of BANNER command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE BANNER HCOUNT Specifies the total number of consecutive Y N N header pages that are recognized at Start of Report BANNER HJOBNO Specifies which subfield of the first record to Y N N satisfy banner selection criteria will be displayed as a customer job number BANNER HRPTNA Specifies which subfield of the first record to Y Y N satisfy banner selection criteria will be displayed as a report name BANNER TCOUNT Specifies the total number of consecutive Y N N trailer banner pages that are needed for detection of the end of the report BANNER TEST Specifies the test expression for banner page Y N N detection BANNER TYPE Specifies that banner pages will be treated as Y N N data pages The following sections descr
511. y Using LCDS Print Description Language 1 67 PDL principles and procedures 1 68 If the JSL compiles correctly with no errors the JDL object file is created from the JSL and a message is displayed in the Terminal window indicating that the compilation was successful The system places the newly created JDL file along with the LST and RSC files that are created at the same time in the Icds resources folder where your JSL is located 4 If the JSL does not compile correctly correct any errors in the JSL and recompile it Files produced by the compilation procedure When XJDC compiles a JSL it produces the following files Object file JDL The JDL which contains all the information from the JSL but in a format the system can read If the JSL was compiled successfully the object file or Job Descriptor Library file is created The JDL file name is the identifier that is specified by the JDL command that starts the JSL It has a JDL extension NOTE If you compile one of the other file types other than a JSL that are supported by the XJDC compiler the file extension could be CME IDH LIB PDE STK or TST Its file name is the name that is specified by the first command in the file that is the CME IDR LIB PDE STK or TST command e JSL Source Listing file Shows the JSL as you coded it but with the lines and columns numbered Also indicates the location of any errors along with messag
512. y be referenced by one or more JDLs or by DJDEs PDEs are invoked by the OUTPUT FORMAT parameter or by the FORMAT DJDE A PDE must have been previously compiled for a DJDE to access it e You can create a PDE as a separate disk file and use it as if it were part of the JDL that references it To do this create a JSL file containing only PDE commands and use the xjdc command to compile it Refer to Compiling a JSL in the PDL principles and procedures chapter for information on using xjdc to compile files For each PDE command xjdc creates a file with the PDE extension in the Icds folder on the system disk The PDE command identifier becomes the PDE file name When the system encounters a reference to a PDE in a JDL it searches the Icds resources folder for the PDE that was specified If it finds it the system loads the PDE into memory for use in processing the report PDE command examples Two PDEs are defined and are referenced in separate JDEs PDE1 specifies a landscape page and two landscape fonts PDE2 defines a portrait page and two portrait fonts with override line spacing PDE PMODE LANDSCAPE BEGIN 861 7 FONTS L0112B L01BOB PDE PMODE PORTRAIT BEGIN 1 3 37 FONTS PO8TYA 6 8 P080AA 6 8 JDE OUTPUT FORMAT PDE1 JDE OUTPUT FORMAT PDE2 Using LCDS Print Description Language Example 2 Example 3 Specifying print format parameters The follo
513. y logical functions that will be performed on a record or a set of records During job processing the system tests the value of a specified test expression and directs the flow of processing based on the result of the test In order to specify a logical processing function you must define constants character strings or values for which the system will look in the job data records and the criteria such as equal greater than and so forth that will be used to compare the record to the specified constant Types of commands for logical processing Two types of commands are used to specify logical processing e Constant definition commands Two commands CRITERIA and TABLE define the constants or conditions in the job for which the system will test during job processing Logical processing commands These commands specify which criteria the system will test for and the action the system will perform when it encounters one of these criteria Coding order of When you are creating a JSL that uses logical processing you command types code the component commands in the following order 1 Code the TABLE command first to define your constants if any are needed These must precede the CRITERIA CONSTANT command that references them 2 Code the CRITERIA commands next These commands must come after the tables they reference 3 Code the logical processing commands after you have coded the CRITERIA commands that they ref
514. yte character translation using the KCODE command then reference this command using the VOLUME KCODE parameter As an alternative you can use the USER option of the VOLUME KCODE parameter to reference the KC ODE command for which no identifier was provided A command identifier of the type ac is optional for the first KCODE command within a JDE Thereafter each additional KCODE command must include the identifier The ac identifier consists of 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters A through Z and 0 through 9 One of the characters must be alphabetic KCODE command parameters The following table summarizes the KCODE command parameters Table 2 28 Summary of KCODE command parameters Parameter Specifies Online Offline DJDE KCODE ASSIGN Defines user double byte code assignments Y N N KCODE DEFAULT Specifies a base code from which double byte Y N N character code assignment exceptions can be made 2 28 The following sections describe the syntax of the KC ODE command parameters and explain the parameter options Using LCDS Print Description Language Syntax Options Specifying input parameters KCODE ASSIGN Defines double byte character code assignment exceptions or an entire user character translation table ac KCODE ASSIGN input output input output outputs Table 2 29 KCODE ASSIGN parameter options and definitions Option Definition input

Xerox 701P21091 All in One Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents